Guide to One-Line Diagram Element Editors in ETAP

AC Elements Editor Overview
This chapter addresses editors for all AC elements in the One-Line Diagram. Except for the element IDs, bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the
editors are considered engineering properties, which are subject to Base and Revision Data. The following table lists all the AC elements in ETAP that are included on
the AC toolbar.
One-Line Diagram Element Editors

Each element available on the One-Line Diagram Toolbar has a customized editor.
Pointers Manual Connection Pointer Auto Connection
Bus Node
Bus Duct Busway
Transformer, Two Winding Transformer, Three Winding
Buses and Branches Transformer, Open-Delta Voltage Regulator
Transformer, Zig-Zag Transformer, Scott-T
Cable Transmission Line
Reactor, Current Limiting Impedance
Power Grid (Utility System) Generator, Synchronous
Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) PV Array
Induction Machine Motor, Synchronous
Lumped Load Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Sources and Loads Static Load Capacitor
Panel System Harmonic Filter
Remote Connector Phase Adapter
Grounding/Earthing Adapter MG Set (Rotary UPS)
Static Var Compensator HVDC Transmission Link
Composites Composite Motor (AC & DC) Composite Network (AC & DC)
Fuse Contactor
High Voltage Circuit Breaker (HVCB) Low Voltage Circuit Breaker (LVCB)
Protective Devices Recloser Ground Switch
Overload Heater In-line Overload Relay
Single Throw Switch Double Throw Switch
Instrumentation Toolbar Ground Grid Systems

Settings and Reports
Display Options Schedule Report Manager
Element Editor Overview

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Instrumentation Elements
Underground Raceway System Elements
Bus Editor Overview

You can enter the properties associated with AC buses (nodes) of the electrical distribution system in this Data Editor.
The ETAP Bus Editor allows you to model different types of buses in an electrical system. The data entered in the Bus Editor is used when running all types of system
studies.
Note: Specifying bus generation or loading is not done from the Bus Editor. Generators, motors, and static loads are elements and can be connected to any desired bus.
ETAP can display all loads, generators, and utilities that are directly connected to the bus from the Bus Editor. Protective devices are ignored when ETAP determines
connections to buses.
A bus is defined as a point (node) where one or more branches are connected. A branch could be a cable, transformer, etc. The minimum amount of data required to
define a bus is the bus nominal kV which can be entered in the Info page of the Bus Editor. Once entered, this value is defined as a unique bus in the system model,
which can be connected to other buses/nodes by placing branches between them.
Buses have two types of graphical presentation, i.e., Bus or Node. You can change a bus to a node or vice versa at any time. This option gives you the flexibility to
display the annotation of buses and nodes differently.
The Bus Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Bus Editor

You use the Info page to specify the bus ID, Service and State, Nominal kV, Initial/Operating Voltage (Magnitude and Angle), Diversity Factors (Maximum and
Minimum), FDR Tag, and Equipment Name and Description.
Info
ID
This is a unique ID name having up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as
the number of transformers increase. The default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager.
Recommendations for assigning buses are as follows:
 Every piece of major equipment, such as switchgear, switchrack, and motor control centers (MCCs).
 On the primary side of transformers when the primary line/cable feeder is more than:
250 feet for high voltage cables

100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
 Utility and generator terminals whne the cable is more than:
250 feet for high voltage cables

100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
 Induction and synchronous motors do not need buses assigned at their terminals since motors can include equipment cables.
Nominal kV
Enter the nominal voltage of the bus in kilovolts (kV). This input is a required entry, which is used by ETAP to convert the final bus voltages to the actual values for
graphical display and output reports, i.e., bus nominal kV is used as the base kV for the reported percent voltages.
Note: The nominal voltage and actual base voltage of a bus can be different values. Actual base voltages of buses are calculated internally by ETAP, starting from a
swing bus. The rest of the base values are calculated using the transformer turn ratios. A swing bus is defined as a bus that has a power grid and/or generator (in swing
mode) connected to it.
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a bus can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an
Out of Service element can be edited like an In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies. When the continuity
check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a deenergized element is
grey.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
State
State is used to describe the service status of an element. Certain states have flexible service status like As-Built, New, Future, Moved and Modified can be both In or
Out of Service. Certain states have fixed service status like Removed, Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Other are out of service states.
Bus Voltage
Initial% V
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage as a percentage of the bus nominal kV. This value is used as the initial bus voltage for load flow studies including motor starting,
harmonics, and transient stability studies. For unregulated buses which do not have any utility or generator connected to them, the operating voltage is calculated during
load flow analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value. For regulated buses, which have a utility or generator (in swing or voltage control mode)
connected to them, this value is not used. Voltage magnitude defaults to 100%.
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value will reflect the operating voltage of the bus after you run a load
flow study.
For ANSI short-circuit studies, this value is used as the prefault bus voltage if you select the Vmag X Nominal kV option from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor,
Standard page.
Initial kV
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in kV. The %V is calculated if the Nominal kV has already been entered. This value is used the same as %V, as explained above.
Angle
Enter the phase angle of the bus voltage in degrees. For non-swing buses (buses which do not have any utility or generator in swing mode connected to them), voltage
angles are calculated during load flow analysis using the values entered here as a first guess. This value is ignored for swing type buses. The voltage Angle default is
0.0.
Operating Voltage %V / kV / Angle

After you run load flow studies, the operating voltage magnitude in %, kV and phase angle of the bus are displayed here.
Connection
The phase connection for the bus can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase 2W, or 1 Phase 3W. The default connection is 3 Phase. You can change the default
connection from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the bus to any device. Once the bus is connected to a device, the phase connection selections will be grayed
out. To change the connection type, you need to disconnect the bus from all devices.
3 Phase
Select to define the bus as a three-phase bus. Three-phase and single-phase loads can be connected to this bus. Single-phase branches must be connected through a
phase adapter before connecting to a three-phase bus.
1 Phase 2W
Select this to define the bus as single-phase two-wire bus; 2W indicates Hot-Hot or Hot-Neutral wires, as per the North American definitions. Only single-phase devices
can be connected to this bus.
1 Phase 3W
Select this to define the bus as single-phase three-wire bus; 3W indicates Hot-Neutral-Hot for center tapped connections. Only single-phase devices can be connected to
this bus.
Load Diversity Factor

Minimum & Maximum
The minimum and maximum diversity factors (loading limits) of each individual bus can be specified as a percentage of the bus loading. These values are used when
the Minimum or Maximum Loading option is selected from the Study Case Editor for load flow, motor starting, harmonic analysis, transient stability, and optimal
power flow studies. When the Minimum or Maximum Loading option is used for a study, all motors and static loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied by
their diversity factors.
Equipment
Tag #
This allows the user to enter the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
This allows the user to enter the equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
This allows the user to enter the equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
Click to lock / unlock the editor properties of the current element. When the editor properties are locked, all engineering data is displayed as read-only except condition
information. The user can change condition information (service & state) even though the element properties are locked.
Classification
Zone
Enter the zone where the bus is located or click the counter arrows to change the values.
Area
Enter the area where the bus is located or click the counter arrows to change the values.
Region
Enter the region where the bus is located, or click the counter arrows to change the values.
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Phase V Page - Bus Editor

Initial Voltage
Line-to-Neutral %V
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in a percentage of Phase A to ground, B to ground or C to ground kV.
Note: The kV is calculated if the Nominal kV in the Bus Info page has already been entered.
This value is used as the initial bus voltage for unbalanced load flow study. For unregulated buses which do not have any utility or generator connected to them, the
operating voltage is calculated during load flow analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value.
For regulated buses, which have a utility or generator (in swing or voltage control mode) the internal voltage per phase is calculated and used to maintain the voltages at
that level.
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value will reflect the operating voltage of the bus after you
run a load flow study.
Line-to-Neutral kV
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in kV. Notice that the %V is calculated if the Nominal kV in the info page has already being entered. This value is used same as
%V, as explained above.
Line-to-Neutral Angle
Enter the phase angle of the bus voltage in degrees. For non-swing buses (buses which do not have any utility or generator in swing mode connected to them), voltage
angles are calculated during unbalanced load flow analysis by using the values entered here as a first guess; unless, the angle difference between the calculated value
based on phase-shift is larger than the specified MaxIniAngDiff, in which case the program would use the calculated value.
The MaxIniAngDiff is defaulted to 10. To modify this default, consult the ETAPS.INI Section.
Line-to-Line %V, kV, Angle

These values are the calculated line-to-line (Phase A to B, B to C, and C to A) voltages based on the defined Line-to-Neutral voltage magnitudes and angle.
Operating Voltage (Line-to-Neutral and Line-to-Line)

After you run unbalanced load flow studies, the operating voltage magnitude in %, kV, and angle line-to-neutral and line-to-line of the bus are displayed here.
Voltage Unbalance:
%LVUR
Line Voltage Unbalance Rate. This is the maximum voltage deviation from the average line voltage in percent.
%PVUR
Phase Voltage Unbalance Rate. This is the maximum voltage deviation from the average phase voltage in percent.
%VUF
Voltage Unbalance Factor. This is a negative sequence to positive sequence voltage ratio in percent.
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Load Page - Bus Editor

The Load page is used to display the total Constant kVA, Constant Z, Constant I, and Generic loads directly connected to a bus for each loading category. The displayed
kW and kvar (or MW and Mvar) indicate the algebraic sum of the operating load of all loads that are either directly connected to the bus or connected through
composite networks, composite motors, or power panels. These values are obtained from the actual loads connected to the bus.
Click the individual rows to view the total per phase load directly connected to the bus. ETAP updates the fields at the bottom of the editor MW, Mvar, %PF, Amp
(according to the loading category per phases A, B, C) and provides a total.
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Motor/Gen Page - Bus Editor

The Motor/Generator Page displays each individual induction motor, synchronous motor, and generator that is directly connected to the bus you are editing. The motors
displayed on this page can be located inside a composite motor that is directly connected to the bus.
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Bus Editor

Refer to Chapter Arc Flash Analysis section Rating Page for more information related to arc flash calculations.
The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e. open air, switchgear, MCC, etc). It also contains typical data for approach boundaries and equipment
gap between conductors based on IEEE 1584 2002. The user also may enter custom data according to equipment manufacturer specifications.
Standard
ANSI
Select this option if the bus is rated under ANSI Standards. By selecting this option, the bus bracing will change to ANSI Standard fields.
IEC
Select this option if the bus is rated under IEC Standards. By selecting this option, the bus bracing will change to IEC Standard fields.
Note: There is no IEC Arc Flash Standard, selecting IEC will change the short-circuit parameters for bracing to peak currents, but the arc flash results are unaffected by
this option. This option only applies for short-circuit 60909-0 2001 device evaluation and not for AF at this point.
Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment that are supported for Arc Flash Analysis and Short-Circuit. The available equipment types are as
follows:
 Other
 MCC
 Switchgear
 Switchboard
 Switchrack
 Panelboard
 Cable Bus
 Open Air
Note: For arc flash related information and parameters please refer to section Rating Page.
Continuous
Enter the continuous current rating of the selected bus in amps. If this value is exceeded during load flow calculations and the overload settings are set in the Load Flow
Study Case, then ETAP will generate an alert.
Bracing
Symmetrical, Asymmetrical, Peak
When a symmetrical value for low voltage buses is entered, ETAP calculates the asymmetrical value based on the type of bus and NEMA & UL test power factors.
These are just preferred rating factors based on common standards and practices. If the actual asymmetrical value is available from the manufacturer, those numbers
need to be entered and utilized.
For low voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents with the symmetrical and
asymmetrical bus bracing entered in this page.
For medium voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated asymmetrical and peak fault currents with the asymmetrical and peak (Crest)
bus bracing entered in this page.
Under IEC fault analysis, ETAP compares the calculated peak fault currents with the peak bus bracing entered in this field.
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Arc Flash Page - Bus Editor

Refer to Chapter Arc Flash Analysis for detailed information.
The Bus Arc Flash page contains two main sections. The calculated and the user-defined groups allow to view and to define key results and parameters respectively.
There is a link to the new arc-flash calculator on this page. The calculator is a powerful analysis tool that allows you to perform a quick analysis. This page also contains
options to help engineers visualize arc flash reference values in the time-current characteristic plots.
This tab includes fields marked as “Calculated” which are updated by the global arc flash calculation to this page (read-only display fields). Those marked as User-
Defined can be manually entered, except for the fault clearing time (FCT) and source PD arcing current when you have selected a source PD.
Note: The Quick incident energy calculator which sits right on the User-defined page only works with the IEEE 1584-2002 and Lee methods. Click on the “Calculator”
button to open the full arc-flash calculator.
Calculated
This section displays the results of the global arc flash calculation. The Bus Editor Arc Flash page uses the update values to determine the incident energy.
Method
The method display field shows the calculation method chosen for the global arc flash calculation for this particular bus. This field may show the ArcFault methods,
IEEE 1584-2002, IEEE 1584-2018 or the Theoretical Lee Method. These are the only methods supported by the global arc flash calculation.
Bus Fault Current

This field shows the total bus bolted (3-Phase/1-Phase) fault current in kA which is calculated by the Short-Circuit Program {1/2 cycle, 1.5 to 4 cycle (ANSI), Decay
method or initial symmetrical current (I”k for IEC)}. This field may be updated from the global arc flash calculation if the option “Update Fault Currents” is selected
from the Arc Flash page of the AF Study Case.
Bus Arcing Current(Ia)

This field shows the total bus arcing current calculated based on the 3-phase short-circuit current (1/2 Cycle Symmetrical RMS, 1.5 to 4 cycle, Decay or initial
symmetrical (I”k for IEC)). This field may be updated by the global arc flash calculation if the option “Update Fault Currents” is selected from the Arc Flash page of the
AF Study Case.
Source PD
This is the ID of the source protective device determined by the global arc flash calculation to be the device which clears the fault at the bus (last operating device to de-
energize the fault). If there are multiple source branches with protective devices, ETAP will select the one that takes the longer to trip (clear the fault).
The ID of the source PD is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the update options are selected in the Arc Flash page of the Arc Flash Study Case. Once updated, this
value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a successful global
arc flash calculation.
Source PD Arcing Current

The fault current shown in this field is the actual arcing current in kA passing through the source PD that clears the fault. Please note that the current shown here is
expressed using the base kV of the location of the protective device. This means that the current shown here could be the arcing current passing through the protective
device on the primary side of the feeder transformer.
This current value is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the option “Update Fault Currents” is selected in the Arc Flash page of the AF Study Case. Please note that this
value is not calculated inside the editor, but passed by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a successful global arc flash calculation.
Please also note that this value will not be updated if you are using the fault current decay method since the current is changing over time.
Fault Clearing Time (FCT)

The arc duration is defined in ETAP as the Fault Clearing Time (FCT). This is the calculated time in seconds, which is needed by the protective device to completely
open and clear the arc fault (extinguish the arc). The FCT value is calculated by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into this field. The global arc flash
calculation will update this value if the option “Update FCT to Bus AF Page” is checked in the “Clearing Time” page of the AF Study Case Editor.
Note: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by the global arc flash calculation.
Grounding (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

The Calculated system grounding for arc flash calculations is defined as grounded or ungrounded according to IEEE 1584-2002. Grounded systems are those that have
solidly grounded connections. Ungrounded systems are those that are open (Delta, Wye-open) and those that are high and low resistance grounded.
This Calculated System grounding is determined by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into this field if the option “Update Grounding to Bus AF Page” is
selected in the “Parameters” page of the AF Study Case.
Note 1: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by the global arc flash calculation.
Note 2: As different protective devices operate, the system grounding configuration may change (i.e. if a source which is solidly grounded trips and the remaining
sources are open or resistance grounded). ETAP assumes that the grounding configuration remains constant during the fault duration. If it is possible that the system
grounding configuration will change during the fault, then assume that the system is ungrounded. This will yield more conservative results.
Note 3: This field has no effect on the IEEE 1584-2018 method.
Incident Energy
This is the calculated incident energy based on the system calculated parameters. The units for the incident energy are cal/cm2. This display only field shows the
incident energy calculated using either the empirically derived IEEE 1584 2002/2018 model, the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage and current), or the
ArcFault methods. This value used to not be updated if the fault current decay method was used in previous versions of ETAP; however, it is now always updated if
determined by the global arc flash calculation.
The incident energy is sorted or grouped based on the selected PPE Level selection. The Arc Flash Boundary (ft.) is also determined based on this value. This field is
empty if the calculation does not have enough parameters or the user has no authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002/2018 Standards.
Arc Flash Boundary

The Arc Flash Boundary is the distance from the arc source at which the onset of a second-degree burn could occur. This value is determined based on second-degree
burn criteria of 1.2 cal/cm2. This is determined from the incident energy and fault clearing time. The unit of this field is in feet. This value is empty unless the incident
energy is calculated.
PPE Level
The PPE Level is determined based on the system calculated incident energy for the bus. This sorting system is based on the incident energy value. Note that this
levels system is meant for an engineer to quickly sort results based on the range of incident energy. It is recommended that the engineer use generic names for this levels
to avoid any confusion with the “Categories” described by NFPA 70E.
Working Distance
The working distance display field from the calculated section of the Bus Arc Flash page displays the distance value used by the global arc flash calculation to
determine the incident energy. This parameter is updated by the global arc flash calculation.
User-Defined
The user-defined section of the Bus Arc Flash page allows the user to define parameters to perform an Arc Flash Analysis. Some of the user-defined parameters may
also be used for the global arc flash calculation.
Bus Fault Current

This is the total bolted fault current value in kA, which may be known beforehand. The program will calculate the user-defined bus arcing current based on this value
using the settings of the bus editor (local input parameters from the rating page).
Bus Arcing Current

This field displays the total bus arcing current calculated based on the user-defined Bus Fault Current in kA. This is a useful field since it shows the arcing current based
on the available bolted 3-phase fault current.
Source PD
This drop-down list allows you to select a protective device which can be used to determine the fault clearing time (FCT) for a fault at this bus. The drop-down list
contains all the overcurrent relays, in-line relays, re-closers, differential relays (not applicable), directional relays fuses, and low voltage circuit breakers in the system.
The global arc flash calculation may use this protective device as the source PD to determine the FCT if the option “Except if PD is Selected in Bus Editor” is selected
from the Clearing Time page of the Arc Flash Study Case, otherwise, it will be ignored when you run the global arc flash calculation.
In ETAP, a relay must be interlocked with a breaker, contactor or switch. If you select a relay from this list then the program will find the current passing through the
current transformer connected to the relay and then proceed to find the breaker from the interlock list that can actually clear the fault (breaker connected to a source path
to the faulted bus). If you select a fuse or a low voltage breaker with its own trip device, the program will consider it to be the source PD to be used to determine the
FCT.
If the Arc Flash Program uses a PD from this drop-down list, it will use it to calculate the FCT based on the actual arcing current passing through it. The arcing current
is shown immediately below this drop-down list as a display only field. The FCT can be found from the reports only (i.e., Analysis section or the Summary Reports).
Note: If no protective device is selected from this drop list (blank option selected), then the user-defined fault clearing time field becomes editable and you can define
your own value. In previous versions of ETAP (i.e., 5.0.0 to 5.0.3 running the user-defined source PD calculation would overwrite this value. This is no longer true in
version 5.5 since the only way to observe the source PD FCT is through the Crystal Reports).
For IEEE 1584-2018 method starting from ETAP 19.0, The user-defined PD selected from the Bus enclosure (if exists) is used to determine the final FCT and it
supersedes the selection made from the bus editor
Source PD Arcing Current

This display only field shows the arcing current (in kA) passing through the protective device selected in the User-Defined Source PD drop-down list. This value can be
updated if the update Buses “Fault Currents” option has been selected in the Arc Flash page of the Arc Flash Study Case Editor. If the global Arc Flash Program fails to
determine the FCT or the arcing current through this PD, this field will not be updated.
Fault Clearing Time

This field is the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time in seconds. This value can be defined by the user as the Fault Clearing Time to be used in the determination of the
incident energy for the faulted bus.
The global arc flash calculation will use the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time only if the Fixed FCT checkbox is selected or if the User-Defined FCT option has been
selected from the Study Case Arc Flash page. This field will be hidden if a User-Defined Source PD has been selected from the drop-down list right above this field.
The default value for this field is 0.1 seconds.
Please note that the minimum time delay for overcurrent relays operating in their instantaneous region is one cycle. This means that if the arcing current is above the
instantaneous pickup of the relay and it has no specified time delay, then ETAP Arc Flash will add at least one cycle as the operating (trip) time of the relay. The trip
time is then added to the operating time of the circuit breaker interlocked to the overcurrent relay.
Please note that the minimum operating time for a fuse is 0.01 seconds for a case where the arcing current is above the total clearing time at the bottom of the curve
(based on IEEE 1584 2002 section 4.6).
Please note that the fault clearing time for circuit breakers with integral trip units will be determine solely based on the manufacturer provided time current characteristic
curve since these curves include both the tripping and clearing time.
Fixed FCT
If this checkbox is selected, then the global arc flash calculation uses the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time (FCT) value to determine the incident energy of this bus.
The calculation would be the same as that of the situation when the Study Case has the option “User-Defined FCT” selected. However in this case, the program does
not automatically try to find the FCT from the TCCs for this bus, but it automatically searches for the FCT of other buses which do not have this checkbox selected.
Using the Fixed FCT feature does not imply that the program will use this set time to evaluate the incident energy of “Source Protective Devices” connected directly to
the faulted bus. The program will still try to find the worst-case incident energy for faults on the line side of source PDs by searching upstream protective devices.
If this checkbox is selected, the fields “Source PD ID drop List” and “Source PD Arcing Current” will be hidden since they are not applicable. The program will
indicate that it used the Fixed FCT on the reports by showing a flag next to the bus FCT field.
Grounding (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

This drop-down list allows you to define the type of grounding to be used at this bus. The default value for this drop-down list is grounded. From the Arc Flash page of
the Arc Flash Study Case, you have the option to use this selection for the global arc flash calculation.
Incident Energy (does not work for IEEE 1584-2018)

This is the incident energy based on the User-Defined parameters. The units for the incident energy are cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy
calculated using either the empirically derived IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage).
This incident energy value is used to determine the User-Defined Hazard/Risk Category and the User-Defined Arc Flash Boundary (ft.). This field is empty if the
calculation does not have enough parameters or the user has no authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002 Standards.
Arc Flash Boundary (does not work for IEEE 1584-2018)

The Arc Flash Boundary is the distance from the arc source at which the onset of a second-degree burn could occur. This value is determined based on second-degree
burn criteria of 1.2 cal/cm2. This is determined from the User-Defined Incident Energy and Fault Clearing Time. The unit of this field is in feet.
PPE Level (does not work for IEEE 1584-2018)

This sorting system follows the selection from the arc flash global calculation updated value in the “calculated” section. Similar to the PPE Level of the calculated
section, this tool is only a featured used by engineers to sort incident energy results using different incident energy range.
Working Distance
Enter the distance from the possible arc point to the person in inches. This distance is defined as the distance between the arc point and the persons face and torso. This
value has a range of 1 to 999.99 in. This is the distance value used to determine the incident energy. The default value is dependent on the voltage level of the device
and the equipment type selected in the rating page of the bus editor. When a new bus is added to the one line diagram, the default equipment type is “Other” and the
default working distance is set to 18. Once the equipment type is changed, the default value will change according to the typical values used which are based on IEEE
1584-2002 Table D.7.4. or Table 10 of section 6.7 of IEEE 1584-2018. Open the Arc Flash Analysis Data table to view the working distance values used for the voltage
ratings and equipment types (see next image).
Note: The Arc Flash Analysis Data table is located in the Project menu under Settings – Arc Flash. Refer to Chapter Menu Bars Section One-Line Diagram Menu Bars
for more details.
Alerts
This section provides an input field which can be used as a measure of the allowable incident energy at this location.
Allowable Energy
In the Allowable Energy field, you can define the incident energy for alert purposes. The units are in cal/cm2. This value is compared automatically by the global arc
flash calculation to the calculated incident energy. If the calculated value exceeds the available PPE protection, the module generates an alert.
TCC Plot Energy

This section allows you to generate incident energy curves and plot the arcing current in a TCC (Star view).
Ib / Ia
This toggle radio box allows the use of bolted fault current or arcing current as the base for the incident energy curve displayed on the TCC plot.
Calculated
The system calculated radio box determines what data is to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label and what energy is to be displayed on the TCC plot. If this option is
selected all the corresponding calculated values will be used to create the label.
User-Defined (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

The user-defined radio box allows you to use the user-defined data to generate labels or to show the user-defined incident energy curve on the TCC. If this option is
selected all the corresponding user-defined values will be used to create the label.
Template
This drop-down list is no longer available in ETAP. Labels can only be generated from the report manager and the arc flash result analyzer.
Print
The print button is no longer available in ETAP. Labels can only be printed from the report manager and the arc flash result analyzer.
TCC Plot-Calculated or User-Defined Energy (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

This checkbox allows you to display the system calculated or user-defined incident energy curve as it varies over time and fault current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If
you select this checkbox, the corresponding curve will appear on the Star View that contains the same bus.
The curve that appears on the Star View is a function of the incident energy and the parameters that vary are the time and current. If the incident energy value is kept
constant, then any combination of FCT and bolted fault current that falls below this curve yields an incident energy value that is lower.
TCC Plot-Allowable Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the Allowable Incident Energy Curve as it varies over time and fault current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this
checkbox, the corresponding curve will appear on the Star View that contains the same bus.
TCC Plot-All Energy Categories

This checkbox allows displaying the incident energy categories or levels in the ETAP Star View TCC. The curves displayed correspond to the levels described for
NFPA 70E 2009. The image below displays the incident energy lines.
Note: The TCC plot selections described above are hidden when running the ArcFault methods.
TCC Plot Arcing Current

This section allows the display of the arcing current on the ETAP STAR TCCs.
Calculated/UD Source PD
This checkbox determines if the arcing current is displayed in a TCC. This current can come from the calculated Source PD Arcing Current or from the user-defined
source protective device field.
User-Defined
This checkbox determines if the user-defined arcing current value will be displayed in a TCC. The user-defined arcing current must be manually entered.
Calculated/User-Defined kV
This toggle radio box determines which base kV (reference kV) will be used to display the arcing current value. The value can be calculated or it can be user-defined.
The following image shows the arcing current values displayed in a STAR TCC.
The arcing current can be used as reference for coordination of the TCC curves. When the fault current decay method is used the source protective device arcing current
is not displayed. This is due to the multiple values determined over the fault duration. The display of the fault current with the decay method will be available in a future
release of the program.
Quick Incident Energy Calculator and Bus Arc Flash Page Logic
This section describes logic which applies mainly to ETAP 18.1.1 and prior versions. The quick incident energy calculator from the arc flash tab has been superseded
with a far more powerful calculator in ETAP 19.0.0 which contains all the methods including the new IEEE 1584-2018 method. This section is intended to describe the
behavior for versions prior to ETAP 19.0.0.
Method Used
For buses in the range of 0.208 kV to 15.0 kV, the empirically derived IEEE Std. 1584 Method is used. For buses with kV greater than 15, the theoretically derived Lee
Method is used. ETAP automatically determines which method is being used according to the bus nominal voltage (Bus Info page).
Range of Operation
These calculations follow the methodology described in IEEE 1584-2002. The same limitations of this method apply to the quick incident energy calculator.
1. If any of the following: the Bus Nominal kV, Bolted Fault Current or Fault Clearing Time are set to zero the calculation is not triggered, and there are no
displayed results. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
2. If the bus nominal kV is less than 0.208 kV, this message is displayed: “Lee Method is used outside empirical method range”. This applies to the globally
calculated results or “calculated” section. The method section will display the chosen method. For user-defined calculations, the method is not displayed however
this section follows the same method range and limits as those used by the global calculation.
3. If the bolted fault current is outside the range of 0.7 kA to 106 kA and the bus nominal kV is between 0.208 and 15 kV the following message is displayed: “Lee
Method”.
4. If the user-defined source PD is selected, then there are no results updated into the calculated section. The only item which may be updated is the arcing current
variation flag (for systems rated less than 1.0 kV) if applicable.
If the IEEE 1584-2002 Arc Flash Method is not licensed, the calculation is disabled, and you will need to contact Operation Technology, Inc. to get authorization to run
this program.
The following table shows the parameters required to run an arc flash calculation in the Bus Arc Flash page.
Table 11: Required Parameters for Bus Arc Flash Calculation

Info Page Rating Page Arc Flash Page
Bus Nominal KV Equipment Type Total 3-Phase Fault Current
Gap Between Conductors Fault Clearing Time(FCT)
X-Factor System Grounding
Working Distance
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Protection Page - Bus Editor

The Protection page is used to display various curves associated with bus operation and protection when the bus is included in a Star View.
Bus Ampacity / Loading

Plot Bus Continuous Ampacity
Check to display the bus continuous amp rating in the Star View containing the bus. The bus continuous rating is defined in the Rating page of the bus editor.
Reference kV
Calculated kV
This kV value is automatically updated with the calculated base kV when you Run/Update Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination mode with
the bus faulted. This is a display only field.
Connected Transformer Inrush Current

When energizing a bus, the presence of any downstream transformers will cause the bus to experience a large inrush current. Using the following options, the inrush
current experienced by the bus can be calculated or user-defined, and the results can be viewed in a Star View.
Plot Transformer Inrush Current

Check to display the calculated or user-defined downstream transformer inrush current curve in the Star View containing the bus.
Calculated Transformer Inrush Current

When selected and the Update button is pressed, ETAP looks into downstream (load side) connections to selected bus for total transformer inrush current calculation
and for each connection walks from the bus to find the first transformer (All down-stream loads are ignored in the transformer inrush calculation). This procedure may
involve moving down for multiple bus levels away and looking into radial connections to each bus to find the first transformer and consider its inrush current in
calculation. Therefore the inrush current of all the first transformers which are connected in parallel will be considered in calculation and the other transformers
connected in series with first transformer will be ignored.
The Bus Total Transformer Inrush Current is calculated based on vector summation of inrush current for each phase at each time step and the largest of them is used and
displayed in Protection page of Bus Editor. As such, if some of these parallel transformers are single-phase then the equivalent inrush current at the bus is calculated
based on individual transformer phase connection for each time-current point on each phase and the largest of 3 phases will be used and displayed.
Note: Only downstream transformers are considered in this calculation. If no downstream transformers are found, then the table will be blank.
Note: The inrush curve table cannot be edited with this option selected, and only calculated values are displayed in the Star View.
Update
Click this button to run the inrush current calculation and update the curve table with the values calculated.
User-Defined Transformer Inrush Current

When selected, the inrush curve table will become editable, and user-defined values can be entered. When plotting the bus in a Star View, the user-defined cumulative
inrush curve is displayed for that bus.
Inrush Curve Table

The cumulative inrush curve is displayed / specified in this table. The table may contain calculated or user-defined values depending upon the selection above.
Insert
Insert new points above the row selected.
Add
Insert new points to the bottom of the list.
Delete
Click on a number and delete the selected row.
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Harmonic Page - Bus Editor
The Harmonic page is used to specify the harmonic limit information on a bus.
Harmonic Limit
Category
Select the appropriate designation from the drop-down list. The available choices are General, Special, Designated, PCC, and Other. This list specifies the bus
harmonic limit category per IEEE Standard. When Point of Common Coupling (PCC) category is selected then ETAP automatically updates the VTHD and VIHD
limits based on bus nominal kV at PCC. These values are obtained from IEEE 519-1992 Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems
(page 85).
Global Compliance Rules (Study Case)

When this option is selected, the voltage harmonic distortion alerts are based on the rulebook selection in the alert page of the harmonic analysis study case.
Local Compliance Rules

When this option is selected, the generated voltage harmonic distortion alerts are based on the local compliance rulebook selection. Please note that, in order to generate
alerts based on local compliance rules, the option “Except if Local Rules Selected in Bus editor” should be checked in the alert page of the harmonic analysis study
case.
IEEE 519-1992 (VTHD/Max VIHD)
VTHD Limit
Choose a value from the dropdown list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus voltage Total Harmonic Distortion limit. The specified value will
be compared with the calculated VTHD from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the output report.
VIHD Limit
Choose a value from the dropdown list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus voltage Individual Harmonic Distortion. The specified value will
be compared with the calculated VIHD from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the output report.
Short-Circuit Current
Calculated
The three phase rms short circuit current is calculated using the start short circuit module. The current value is used in evaluating current distortion limit alerts.
User-Defined
This option allows you to enter three phase rms short circuit current for limit evaluation.
Bus
Info Page
Phase V Page
Load Page
Motor/Gen Page
Rating Page
Arc Flash Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
Reliability Parameters
λA
This parameter is defined as the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that causes the
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component. Therefore, this setting can cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from
service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are recluse. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. Note,
however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can be restored to service only after repair or
replacement.
µ
The Mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR
(µ = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
The Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA (MTTF = 1.0/λA).
FOR
Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/λA).
MTTR
This is the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
MR
This is the Momentary Failure Rate in percent of Active Failure. The default value is 80%. This rate is only associated to the momentary index calculation. When active
failure occurs on the element, the MR percent of the element’s active failure will be considered as momentary and the failed element will be restored in a short time.
The Momentary Rate is not applicable to passive failure.
Replacement
Available
Check this box to enable rP.
rP
This is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is the time in hours for switching to an alternative supply after the device failure.
Library
Library Button
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick Editor for reliability data.
Source
This displays the Source Name of the library data selected.
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected.
Class
This displays the class of the library data selected.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Remarks Page
The Remarks Page is common to all element editors.
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. The names of the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option
in the Project menu in the Menu bar.
UD Field 1 (Eq. Ref.)

This is a number field with the default name Eq. Ref. You can change the name of this field and enter the equipment reference number or any other number here, using
up to five digits.
UD Field 2 (Last Maint.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can change the name of this field and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12
alphanumeric characters.
UD Field 3 (Next Maint.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Next Maint. You can change the name of this field and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to
12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field 4 (Tests Req.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Tests Req. You can change the name of this field and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12
UD Field A5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field A5. You can change the name of this field and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or
specifications for this element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturer’s name for this element here, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element here, using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Comments Page
The Comments Page is common to all element editors.
Enter any additional data or comments regarding the condition, maintenance, tests, or studies associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb and the default
size is 4kb. To increase the size of this field, you need to change the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut,
copy, and paste information.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Bus Duct Editor Overview
Bus Duct is used for the effective and efficient supply of electricity in mostly industrial locations. Copper or aluminum is used for the conductor of the bus duct that can
be insulated and enclosed for protection against mechanical damage and dust accumulation. Bus duct system is a popular way of distributing power to switchgears from
generators and to connected loads.
You can enter the properties associated with AC Bus Duct of the electrical distribution system in this Data Editor.
The ETAP Bus Duct Editor allows you to model different types of bus ducts in an electrical system. The data entered in the Bus Editor is used when running all types
of system studies.
A Bus Duct is defined as an element that connects two other devices without the need to insert additional nodes. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus
duct is the bus duct ID which can be entered in the Info page of the bus duct editor. Once entered, this value is defined as a unique bus duct in the system model, which
can be connected to other buses/nodes directly or automatically inserted between nodes similar to protective devices.
The Bus Duct Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Bus Duct Editor

You use the Info page to specify the bus duct ID, Service & State, FDR Tag, Data Type and Equipment Name and Description.
Info
ID
A unique ID name having up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Bus Duct. The assigned IDs consist of the default Bus
Duct ID (BD) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of bus ducts increase. The default bus duct ID (BD) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From
Element ID of the connected device. The connected element for the bus duct can be a bus / node, branch, load or source. Note that Bus duct cannot be connected
directly between two buses. Include a switching device or branch in series with the bus duct in order to connect a bus duct between two buses.
To
Element ID of the connected device. The connected element for the bus duct can be a bus / node, branch, load or source.
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a bus duct can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of
an Out of Service element can be edited like an In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies. When the continuity
grey.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can set a bus duct to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
State
Out of Service. Certain states have fixed service status like Removed, Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Others are out of service states.
Connection
The phase connection for the bus can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase 2W, or 1 Phase 3W. The default connection and only connection allowed currently is 3
Phase. You can change the default connection from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the bus to any device. Once the bus is connected to a device, the phase connection selections will be grayed-
3 Phase
1 Phase
Select this to define the bus as single-phase bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected to this bus.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as: Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the
data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names, navigate to the
Project Menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Lock / Unlock
Bus Duct
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Bus Duct Editor

The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e. isolated phase, segregated phase, etc).
Standard
ANSI
Select this option if the bus is rated under ANSI Standards.
IEC
Select this option if the bus is rated under IEC Standards.
Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment types as follows. These options are for information / one-line display purposes only and currently
not used in any calculations.
 Isolated Phase Typically HV Applications
 Non-Segregated Phase Typically HV Applications
 Segregated Phase Typically HV Applications
 Feeder
Typically LV Applications
 Plug-In
 Lighting
 Trolley
General
 Other
The Type option also allows the user to select different types of material for the bus duct as follows. These options are for information / one-line display purposes only
and currently not used in any calculations.
 CU - Copper
 AL - Aluminum
Bus Duct
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
This is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that causes the
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from service.
After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be
noted, however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to service only after
repair or replacement.
λP
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause
the operation of protection breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component will
restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
µ
This is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR
(µ = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA and λP
(MTTF = 1.0/(λA+λP)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA and λP
(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(λA+λP)).
MTTR
MR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
Bus Duct
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Busway Editor Overview

Busway is used for the effective and efficient supply of electricity in mostly industrial locations. Copper or aluminum is used for the conductor of the Busway that can
be insulated and enclosed for protection against mechanical damage and dust accumulation. Busway system is a popular way of distributing power to switchgears from
generators and to connected loads.
You can enter the properties associated with AC Busway of the electrical distribution system in this Data Editor. Unlike bus ducts in ETAP, busways allow input of
impedance data for use in system study calculations.
The Busway Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Busway

You use the Info page to specify the busway ID, Service & State, FDR Tag, Data Type, Equipment Name, Description, Number of busways per phase, and length.
Info
ID
A unique ID name having up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Busway. The assigned IDs consist of the default Busway
ID (BusWay) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of busways increase. The default busway ID (BusWay) can be changed from
the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From
Element ID of the connected bus or node. Only buses or nodes in the current diagram with the same phase type will be available for selection.
To
Element ID of the connected bus or node. Only buses or nodes in the current diagram with the same phase type will be available for selection.
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a busway can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of
grey.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can set a busway to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
State
Connection
The phase connection for the bus can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase 2W, or 1 Phase 3W. The default connection and only connection allowed currently is 3
Phase. You can change the default connection from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the bus to any device. Once the bus is connected to a device, the phase connection selections will be grayed-
3 Phase
1 Phase
Select this to define the bus as single-phase bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected to this bus.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as: Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the
data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names, navigate to the
Project Menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Lock / Unlock
Length
Length
Enter the length of the busway and select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Note: Every busway in the system can have a different unit.
Tolerance
Enter the percent of tolerance in busway length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to consider +/- % tolerance in line length, effectively
increasing or decreasing the impedance based on the type of study being performed.
# Busway / Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase.
Busway
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page
The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e. isolated phase, segregated phase, etc)
Standard
ANSI
Select this option if the busway is rated under ANSI Standards.
IEC
Select this option if the busway is rated under IEC Standards.
Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment types as follows. These options are for information / one-line display purposes only and currently
not used in any calculations.
The Type option also allows the user to select different types of material for the bus duct as follows. These options are for information / one-line display purposes only
and currently not used in any calculations.
· CU – Copper
· AL – Aluminum
Continuous Amp
Select from drop down list or enter the continuous current rating for the Busway in amperes.
Bracing
Symmetrical, Asymmetrical, Peak
When a symmetrical value for low voltage buses is entered, ETAP calculates the asymmetrical value based on the type of bus and NEMA & UL test power factors.
These are just preferred rating factors based on common standards and practices. If the actual asymmetrical value is available from the manufacturer, those numbers
need to be entered and utilized.
For low voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents with the symmetrical and
asymmetrical bus bracing entered in this page.
For medium voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated asymmetrical and peak fault currents with the asymmetrical and peak (Crest)
bus bracing entered in this page.
Under IEC fault analysis, ETAP compares the calculated peak fault currents with the peak bus bracing entered in this field.
Typical Impedance
This button is enabled when rated kV <=1. Typical data for kV > 1 is not available. Given the continuous amp rating, pressing this button will populate the impedance
fields with typical data based on IEEE Redbook, Siemens, LSC, and EATON.
Impedance (per conductor)

Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R and R0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence resistances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified base MVA or in ohms. The zero sequence resistance is used only
for unbalanced fault current calculations. Note: When these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected buses as the base; however, this
voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally.
ETAP uses the transformer turn ratios for determining the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics, motor starting, and transient stability analyses.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X and X0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence reactances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for
unbalanced fault current calculations. Note: When these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected buses as the base, however, this voltage
value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally. ETAP uses
the transformer turns ratios to determine the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics, motor starting, and transient stability analyses.
Note that ETAP automatically doubles the Impedance R & X values for single phase calculations to represent both the forward and return conductors.
Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptance (Y and Y0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence charging (capacitive) susceptances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified base MVA. The zero sequence reactance
is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations. If Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the charging susceptance connected to
neutral at the end of the circuit. If Y=0, the circuit element is treated as a simple impedance. These susceptances must be entered at the system operating frequency,
which is specified for this data file.
Busway
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
lA
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from
service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It
should be noted, however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to service only
after repair or replacement.
lP
m
This is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on lA and lP
(MTTF = 1.0/(lA+lP)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, lA and lP
(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(lA+lP)).
MTTR
MR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
Busway
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
2-Winding Transformer Editor Overview

The properties associated with 2-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered in 2-Winding Transformer Editor.
In addition to information regarding the use of fixed taps and load tap changers (LTC), this editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Prim/Sec Fixed Tap
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - 2 Winding Transformer Editor

Within the Info page, specify the 2-winding transformer ID, whether the transformer is in or out of service, primary and secondary buses, the connection, FDR tag,
name, and manufacturer’s data.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID having up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Prim. and Sec.

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 2-winding transformer are designated as primary and secondary buses. If the primary or secondary terminal of a transformer is not
connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram
will be updated to show the new connection, after you click OK.
For 3-phase transformers, only 3-phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For 1-phase transformers, only 1-phase buses will be displayed. For the Prim.
field, only 1-phase 2W will be displayed. For the Sec. field, if the transformer has Secondary Center Tap selected in the Connection group, then only 1-phase 3W will
be displayed in the drop-down list. Otherwise, only 1-phase 2W will be displayed.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, that is, you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in
another composite network.
If a transformer is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last
existing protective device to the new bus (as shown in the figure below, where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4).
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the primary and secondary bus IDs.
Single-phase transformers can also be connected to phase adapters. If the transformer is connected to a phase adapter, then the phase adapter ID will show in the Prim.
or Sec. field.
Condition
Service
The operating condition can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an Out of
Service element can be edited like an In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies. When the continuity check is
activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a deenergized element is grey.
Revision Data.
State
Connection
The phase connections for a 2-winding transformer are defined by selecting 3-Phase or 1–Phase, with or without Secondary Center Tap. The default connection is 3-
Phase and can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the 2-winding transformer to any bus or phase adapter. Once the transformer is connected, the phase
connection selections will become unavailable. You need to disconnect the transformer to change the connector type.
When the 3-Phase is selected, the (3) 1-Phase check box will become available. The (3) 1-Phase check box can be checked or unchecked whether this transformer is
connected to any bus or not.
3 Phase
Select this to define the transformer as three-phase. This transformer can only be connected to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Select this to define the transformer as single-phase. This transformer can only be connected to single-phase buses and phase adapter. In the adjacent field, it will
display the input connection type. The primary side of the Transformer is always 1 Phase 2 Wire.
Secondary Center Tap

Check this box to define the Secondary side of the transformer as single-phase 3 wire. By checking this field, the transformer secondary winding will be grounded at
the center. Only 1 Phase 3 Wire buses can be connected to the secondary winding. Select construction type to be shell or core of the secondary center tap transformer in
the dropdown list.
(3) 1-Phase
Check this box to define the transformer as made by 3 single-phase transformers. By checking this field, the Per XFMR buttons on the transformer editor rating and
impedance pages will become available for individual entering the properties of the 3 single-phase transformers.
Standard
You can select either ANSI or IEC. The class selections will change based on the standard selected.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Enter the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
2-Winding Transformer
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - 2-Winding Transformer Editor

On the Rating page, specify the 2-winding transformer rating, cooling, installation, and alert data.
Rating
Prim & Sec kV
Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the 2-winding transformer in kilovolts.
For the (3) 1-phase transformer, the two fields of the equivalent 3-phase transformer voltage ratings are display only. The primary and secondary voltage ratings are the
average voltages across the terminals of the three single-phase transformers. If the three single-phase transformers are connected in Delta, the equivalent 3-phase
voltage rating is the average of the three single-phase transformers’ voltage ratings. If the three single-phase transformers are connected in Wye, the equivalent 3-phase
voltage rating is 1.732 times the average of the three single-phase transformers’ voltage ratings.
Note: When a transformer is connected to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal to the bus nominal kV. ETAP uses the voltage at the lowest-
numbered swing system as the base voltage and calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. ETAP will display an error message when it detects
inconsistent voltage bases in parallel or looped systems during system analysis.
If there are parallel transformers in a system that has different voltage ratios, change the voltage ratio of one of the transformers to make their voltage ratios equal. At
the same time, a fictitious tap setting is required, using the new voltage ratio to correct its turn ratio. A logical choice would be the transformer winding with the less
common kV rating in the system.
Note: Circulating currents are expected in this condition.
As an example, consider the two parallel transformers in the following diagram. To model the transformers in ETAP, set the tap of the second transformer in such a way
that the resulting turn ratio is equal to the other transformer. If one transformer is rated 13.8-4.16 kV and the second transformer is rated 13.2-4.16 kV, then both
transformer data should be entered as 13.8-4.16 kV (same turn ratios). To correct for the second transformer turn ratio, specify a tap setting which is equal to the actual
kV rating divided by the new kV rating as shown below.
% Tap = [ ( 13.2/13.8 ) - 1.0] * 100 = -4.35 %
This transformer should be modeled with a negative tap setting of 4.35% on the primary side.
Remember that a positive tap setting tends to lower the operating voltage of the secondary bus, while a negative tap raises it. In this case, the transformer turns ratio
modeled in ETAP is larger than the actual turn ratio, without the introduced tap setting. Because the secondary bus would operate at a voltage, use a negative tap to raise
the voltage at the secondary bus. Use this rule to determine whether the tap correction should be positive or negative.
Note: if this transformer has an actual tap setting of 2.5%, this value should be added to the off-nominal tap of -4.35%, i.e., -4.35% + 2.5% = -1.85%.
FLA
This displays the primary winding and secondary winding full load amperes corresponding to the smallest and the largest power ratings.
Bus kVnom
This displays the bus nominal kV of the connected primary and secondary terminals.
Power Rating
Rated MVA
Based on the type/class of the transformer, up to three MVA fields may be available. The corresponding class/temperature rise will be displayed below each rating field.
Where available, Class1 MVA ≤ Class2 MVA ≤ Class3 MVA.
1. When Per Standard is selected, only Class1 MVA field is editable. Class2 and Class3 (where available) are calculated from Class1 MVA based on American
National Standard C57.12.10 and are display only. This option also applies to (3) 1-Phase and other special 2-winding transformer.
2. When User-Defined is selected, in addition to Class1 MVA, the user can specify Class2 and Class3 ratings (where available). No calculation is enforced for user-
defined option. This option also applies to (3) 1-Phase and other special 2-winding transformer.
Per Transformer
This button is only available when the 2-winding transformer connection is set to (3) 1-phase type. Select this button to enter the individual single-phase
transformer ratings and impedances.
Fan/Pump
The required cooling equipment for the corresponding power rating. The field is checked to specify the availability of the equipment.
Derated MVA
This displays the derated MVA for each class/temperature rise.
%Derating
These fields display the percentage of power derating for each class/temperature rise due to the unavailability of the cooling equipment, installation altitude and ambient
temperature. They are calculated by the formula of "(1 - Derated MVA / Rated MVA) * 100" for the corresponding power rating.
Z Base
This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance and depends on the standard selection.
ANSI: Base MVA = Class1 MVA. IEC: Base MVA = the largest available class MVA.
Alert - Max
This value, if non-zero, is used to calculate the overload percentage of the transformer. If the maximum MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the
branch will be flagged on the overload summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero and this branch will not be
included in the overload summary report.
1. When Derated MVA is selected, the maximum MVA capability will be set to the largest derated value.
2. When User-Defined is selected, the user can specify the maximum MVA capability.
This value is also used as a base for the transformer flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
Installation
This is used to specify the base altitude and base temperature of the transformer.
Type/Class
Based on the standard selected, the fields below will provide different selection options. The tables below show those options:
Type
Select the transformer type from the Type list box. The following transformer types are available for both ANSI and IEC Standards:
Liquid-Fill – Previous C57.12 standard versions up to 1993

Liquid-Fill C57.12 – Versions from 2000 to current C57.12 standard
Dry
Select the transformer type from the Type list box. The following transformer types are available for IEC Standard:
Liquid-Fill
Dry
Sub Type
Select the transformer type from the Type list box. The following transformer types are available for ANSI Standard:
Standard Type Subtype Standard Type Subtype

Mineral Oil Mineral Oil
Synthetic Liquid
Flammable Liquid
<=300
Liquid Less-Flammable Liquid
Synthetic Liquid >300
Fill Liquid Fill
Non-Flammable Non-Flammable
Liquid Synthetic Liquid
ANSI IEC
Other Other
Ventilated Sealed
Non-Ventilated Non-Enclosed
Sealed Enclosed
Dry Dry
Other Totally Enclosed
Vent-Dry
Other
Class
Select the transformer class from the list box. The following transformer classes are available:
ANSI, Liquid Fill transformers for all subtypes:

OA OA/FA OA/FOA/FOA Other
OW OA/FA/FA FOA
OW/A OA/FA/FOA FOW
ANSI, Liquid Fill - C57.12 transformers:
Subtype Class Subtype Class Subtype Class

ONAN KNAN LNAN
ONWF/ONAN KNWF/KNAN LNWF/LNAN
ONAN/ONAF KNAN/KNAF LNAN/LNAF
Mineral ONAN/ONAF/ONAF KNAN/KNAF/KNAF LNAN/LNAF/LNAF
Oil ONAN/ONAF/OFAF KNAN/KNAF/KFAF Non- LNAN/LNAF/LFAF
Synthetic
Synthetic Flammable
ONAN/ODAF/ODAF Liquid KNAN/KDAF/KDAF LNAN/LDAF/LDAF
Liquid Synthetic
OFAF >300 KFAF LFAF
<=300 Liquid
Other OFWF KFWF LFWF
ODWF KDWF LDWF
ODAF KDAF LDAF
ONWF KNWF LNWF
ANSI, Dry transformers:

AA Non- ANV ANV
AFA Ventilated Other AA
AFA
Ventilated Other
AA/FA GA AA/FA
Sealed
Other Other GA
Other
IEC, Liquid Fill:

ONAN KNAN LNAN
ONWN KNWN LNWN
ONWN/ONAN KNWN/KNAN LNWN/LNAN
ONAN/OFAF/OFAF Synthetic KNAN/KFAF/KFAF LNAN/LFAF/LFAF
Synthetic Flammable
Liquid
Liquid OFAF KFAF Synthetic LFAF
>300
<=300 OFWF KFWF Liquid LFWF
Other ODWF KDWF LDWF
ONAN/OFAN/OFAF KNAN/KFAN/KFAF LNAN/LFAN/LFAF
OFAN KFAN LFAN
OFAN/OFAF KFAN/KFAF LFAN/LFAF
ONWF KNWF LNWF
IEC, Dry for all subtypes of transformers
AN GN GNAN GNAN
AF GF GNAF AN/AF*
ANAN GNAF ANAF Other
* AN/AF corresponds to two stages of cooling, whereas ANAF has only one cooling stage with Fan always checked.
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature (in degrees C) from the list box. The following transformer operating temperatures are available:
Standard Type Class Temp. Rise

Liquid Fill
All Classes 65
C57.12
55/65
Liquid Fill All Classes
65
80
ANSI
80/100
80/115
Dry All Classes
80/150
100
115/150
Liquid Fill All Classes 65
AN 60
AF 75
ANAN 80
GN 100
GNAF 125
GNAN/GNAF 150
ANAF 150
IEC GNAN 150
Dry 80
80/100
100
AN/AF 100/125
125
135
150
Other 150
MFR
Enter the 2-winding transformer manufacturer’s name.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Page - 2-Winding Transformer

Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances
These are the positive and zero sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the transformer MVA and kV ratings as the base values. These values
are subject to manufacturer tolerance limits and tap position.
For the (3) 1-phase transformer, the positive and zero sequence impedances are identical and calculated from the phase-by-phase admittance matrix of the (3) 1-phase
transformer.
ETAP models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances. ETAP takes the voltage of the swing bus (a bus with a connected swing
machine) as the base voltage. It then calculates the system base voltages using the transformer turn ratio. If the transformer turn ratio matches the ratio of the base kVs
of the buses between which it is connected, but the actual numbers are not the same (e.g., the primary bus base kV is 13.8 and the secondary bus is 4.349 kV, while the
transformer kV ratings are 13.2-4.16 kV), ETAP adjusts the nameplate impedance to a new base with the following formula:
Zt, new = Zt, rated * (Transformer Rated kV/Bus Base kV)2
In some cases, when you have parallel transformers with different voltage ratings, introduce a fictitious tap setting so that the calculated base voltage at the load side of
the transformers will be the same value (refer to 2-Winding Transformer kV rating).
X/R and R/X Ratios

Enter the transformer X/R or R/X ratio. These values are used in ETAP to calculate the transformer winding resistances and reactances from given percent impedances.
%X and %R
These values are calculated from the given percent impedances using X/R and R/X ratios. These values can also be used to calculate the percent impedance as well as
resistance and reactance ratios.
Typical Z and X/R and Typical X/R

Click the appropriate button to obtain the typical 2-winding transformer impedance together with X/R ratio, or X/R ratio only. The typical impedance and X/R ratio data
for ANSI 2-winding transformers are based on two sources: American National Standard C57.12.10 and Industrial Power System Handbook by Beeman.
The Industrial Power System Handbook by Beeman (page 96) specifies typical data for transformers that has rating not larger than 500 kVA and primary voltage not
higher than 12.47 kV.
Typical Impedance for Transformer Less Than or Equal to 500 kVA:
Group 1* +
Rating Group 2
%Z X/R %Z X/R
kVA ≤ 5 2.3 0.88 2.8 0.77
5< kVA ≤ 25 2.3 1.13 2.3 1.00
25< kVA ≤ 50 2.6 1.69 2.4 1.54
50< kVA ≤ 100 2.6 1.92 3.7 2.92
100< kVA ≤ 167 4.0 3.45 3.7 3.60
167< kVA ≤ 500 4.8 4.70 5.2 5.10
* Group 1: Transformers with high voltage windings of less than or equal to 8.32 kV
+ Group 2: Transformers with high voltages of greater than 8.32 kV and less than or equal to 12.47 kV
American National Standard C57.12.10 specifies impedance values for transformers larger than 500 kVA.
Typical Impedance for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Low Voltage Side Low Voltage Side ≥ 2.4 kV

High Voltage Side
< 2.4 kV Without LTC With LTC
kV ≤ 13.8 5.75** 5.5**
13.8 < kV ≤ 23 6.75 6.5 7.0
23 < kV ≤ 34.5 7.25 7.0 7.5
34.5 < kV ≤ 46 7.75 7.5 8.0
46 < kV ≤ 69 8.0 8.5
69 < kV ≤ 115 8.5 9.0
115 < kV ≤ 138 9.0 9.5
138 < kV ≤ 161 9.5 10.0
161 < kV ≤ (230) 10.0 10.5
** Self-cooled transformers with greater than 5000 kVA values are the same as those for 23 kV high voltage.
Typical X/R Ratios for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Rating X/R Rating X/R

MVA ≤ 1 5.790 8 < MVA ≤ 10 15.50
1 < MVA ≤ 2 7.098 10 < MVA ≤ 20 18.60
2 < MVA ≤ 3 10.67 20 < MVA ≤ 30 23.70
3 < MVA ≤ 4 11.41 30 < MVA ≤ 40 27.30
4 < MVA ≤ 5 12.14 40 < MVA ≤ 50 29.50
5 < MVA ≤ 6 12.85 50 < MVA ≤ 100 34.10
6 < MVA ≤ 7 13.55 100 < MVA ≤ 200 42.00
7 < MVA ≤ 8 14.23 200 < MVA ≤ 1000 50.00
The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for IEC 2-winding transformers are based on IEC 60076-5 1994 and Areva Ch.5 “Equivalent Circuits and Parameters of
Power System Plant” listed in the table below:
Rating %Z X/R
MVA ≤ 0.63 4 1.5
0.63 < MVA ≤ 1.25 5 3.5
1.25 < MVA ≤ 3.15 6.25 6
3.15 < MVA ≤ 6.3 7.15 8.5
6.3 < MVA ≤ 12.5 8.35 13
12.5 < MVA ≤ 25 10 20
25 < MVA ≤ 200 12.5 45
200 < MVA 12.5 45
Z Variation
Use this field to enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then the final 2-winding transformer impedance
will be calculated based on the nominal tap impedance values (entered for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary and secondary
winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at –5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate
the final transformer impedance.
% Variation @ -5% Tap
Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at –5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust
the transformer impedance due to either the primary and secondary winding tap changes.
Zt at –5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ –5% Tap)/100
% Variation @ +5% Tap

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position; in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust
Zt at +5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ +5% Tap)/100
%Z
These fields are used to display the %Z at -5% Tap and +5% Tap calculated by % Variation @ -5% Tap and % Variation @ +5% Tap correspondingly. These fields are
editable and can also be used to calculate % Variation @ -5% Tap and % Variation @ +5% Tap by the same formula that is used to calculate %Z based on %
Variations.
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value in this field. This value should be zero for an existing transformer with a known
impedance value. For a new transformer with a designated impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer. The value of
the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the positive or negative value, which will result in a conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative Positive
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Transient Stability X
Harmonics X
Optimal Power Flow X
For instance, if 7.5% tolerance is specified, ETAP will use +7.5% tolerance for load flow, motor starting, dynamic stability, and harmonic calculations, while using -
7.5% for short-circuit calculations.
No Load Test Data

Enter the transformer impedance no load test data for positive sequence and zero sequence. If there is a buried delta winding, the test data of the zero sequence will be
substituted by the test data of the zero sequence impedance between the windings. Please refer to Chapter 20.4 Calculation method - Modeling of Transformers section
to see how the transformer is modeled for no load test data.
%FLA
Positive/zero sequence no load current in percentage of Full Load Ampere of the transformer.
kW
Positive/zero sequence no load power loss in kW.
%G
Positive/zero sequence shunt conductance in percentage.
%B
Positive/zero sequence shunt susceptance in percentage.
Buried Delta Winding

Enter buried delta winding data in the page.
kV
Buried delta winding rated voltage in kV.
MVA
Buried delta winding rating in MVA or KVA.
Max. MVA
Buried delta winding maximum rating in MVA.
Z(ohms) - P
Zero-sequence impedance from the primary winding to the buried delta winding.
Z(ohms) - S
Zero-sequence impedance from the secondary winding to the buried delta winding.
Z(ohms) - PS
Zero-sequence impedance from the primary winding to the secondary and the buried delta windings.
%Z
Zero-sequence impedance in percentage based on the MVA base and the rated voltage of the first winding.
X/R
Zero-sequence impedance from X over R ratio.
MVA Base
Zero-sequence impedance MVA base.
Single Phase Rating Page

Individual single-phase transformer ratings and impedances can be entered in this page. When this page is available, the voltages and power ratings in the rating page
and impedances in the impedance page of the equivalent 3-phase transformer are display only and calculated from the 3 single-phase transformer parameters.
Rated MVA
The power ratings of the equivalent 3-phase transformer are the smallest MVA among the 3 single-phase transformer multiplied by 3 for each class. The 1st and 2nd
stage power ratings are display only or editable based on the selected option of Per Standard or User-Defined in the 3-phase transformer rating page.
FLA
This displays the primary winding and secondary winding full load amperes corresponding to the smallest and the largest power ratings for each single-phase
transformer.
kV
Enter primary and secondary line-to-neutral voltage ratings of each single-phase transformer in kilovolts.
Impedance
Enter the positive sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the transformer MVA and kV ratings as the base values. Click the appropriate button
to obtain the typical single phase 2-winding transformer impedance together with X/R ratio, or X/R ratio only.
The impedance and X/R ratio of the equivalent 3-phase transformer are calculated from the 3 single-phase transformer impedances and X/R ratios.
%FLA
No load current in percentage of Full Load Ampere of the transformer.
kW
No load power loss in kW.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Tap Page
Within the Tap page, specify the transformer tap data for both fixed taps and LTC taps. Transformer winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.
Fixed Tap
% Tap and kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage in these fields, while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button for kV tap selection and enter the transformer
tap setting in kV.
Note: in either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
You can click the up/down arrows next to the fields. By clicking on the arrows, you will be stepping to the available tap settings based on the entries on the
Prim…/Sec… Fixed Tap Range Editors. You can access the editor by clicking on the Prim…/Sec… buttons on the left of the fields.
ETAP allows modeling of an off-load tap (fixed tap) changer on either side or both sides of transformers. Standard off-load tap changer transformers typically have
±5.0% settings available, with two steps above and two steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, -2.5, 0, 2.5, or
5.0.
The transformer is treated as a simple circuit impedance for transformers without voltage taps or where the tap is set at nominal value (n = 0). ETAP uses the following
Pi circuit representation to model transformer tap settings:
where:
Yt = 1/Zt Transformer admittance in per unit
N = 1 + n/100 Turn ratio in per unit
n = 100 ( N - 1 ) Tap setting in percent
Positive (+) tap setting on the primary side (P) decreases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
Negative (-) tap setting on the primary side (P), increases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
As this model indicates, placing +10% tap setting (n=+10%, or N=1.1) at the primary side is not equivalent to -10% tap at the secondary side. ETAP will correctly
model a transformer with a tap setting, as long as the tap setting is indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap changer). To increase the
voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value.
Prim…/Sec… Buttons
Click these buttons to access the Primary or Secondary Fixed Tap Range Editors and set the maximum and minimum tap positions as well as the tap step for the
transformer fixed taps.
Per Unit Turn Ratio

Display the transformer turn ratio in per unit, using the fixed tap setting.
Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 - %Tap/100
The secondary parameters in this section are not applicable for secondary center tap transformers.
LTC/Voltage Regulator
You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on both transformer windings. However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on both
windings of the transformers. The parameters in this section are not applicable for secondary center tap transformers.
AVR Prim.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the primary winding, i.e., if selected, LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is
in manual mode.
AVR Sec.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the secondary winding, i.e., if selected, LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it
is in manual mode.
LTC Button
When the associated check box is selected, the LTC button is enabled. Click this button to enter LTC data.
Manual or Operating Tap

Here you can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC automatic mode by clicking on the up or down arrows.
The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies providing the option for Update Transformer LTCs is selected in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Note: The tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in automatic mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is
used as the initial value.
Real Time Scanned

When in On-Line monitoring mode, Real-Time will display the Scanned Tap Position value for this transformer in this field.
Power Station
Unit Transformer for Generator
Check this box to define this transformer as a unit transformer. A drop-down field is displayed to assign this transformer to a generator. This check box is only
applicable to 3-phase transformers.
In addition, the Tap Optimization button is displayed.
Tap Optimization…
Clicking the Tap Optimization button will display the Transformer Tap Optimization Editor. In this editor, you can calculate the optimal tap position. See Transformer
Optimization Chapter for more details.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Primary/Secondary Fixed Tap Page

Clicking on the Prim…/Sec… button in the Fixed Tap group brings up the Fixed Tap Range dialog box to enter parameters.
Tap Settings
% Tap/kV
Enter the transformer tap settings below in percent, while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button for kV tap selection and enter the settings in kV. Note that
in either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min.
Enter the minimum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Max.
Enter the maximum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Step
Displays the step size in percent or kV based on the %Tap/kV.
# of Taps
Enter the number of Taps or click the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the number of taps of the transformer. Based on this entry and the Maximum and Minimum
tap settings, the program calculates the step size and displays it on the Step field.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Transformer Load Tap Changer

Transformer load tap changers (LTC) can be accessed through the editors of either the 2-winding or 3-winding transformers. To activate an LTC for any transformer
winding, click the box on the left side of the LTC button. Then click the LTC button to access its editor and enter the LTC data.
Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Select the bus ID of an existing bus for which the LTC will be regulating or controlling the voltage. The default bus is the secondary bus. Note: the load flow routine
may not be able to regulate the voltages of the buses that are not affected by the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may reach its limit before the desired voltage is
reached for the controlled bus. Possible examples of this are when the regulated bus is not downstream of the transformer, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in
between the two components. When this occurs, the LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated bus.
Voltage Control
Voltage
Enter the desired voltage of the regulated bus in percent of the bus nominal voltage, i.e., the regulated bus voltage. In the load flow type analysis; ETAP will adjust the
LTC setting until the average voltage of the regulated bus is within the upper or lower bands of the desired voltage.
Upper Band
Enter the upper band value above the desired voltage.
Lower Band
Enter the lower band value below the desired voltage.
The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram, when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band
(green area), the LTC will not move; if the voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or less than (Desired Voltage – Lower Band),
the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus voltage close to its desired value.
In order for the LTC to work properly, ETAP forces the sum of the upper and lower bands to be larger than or equal to the LTC step.
Tap
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer load tap changer (LTC) tap setting as a percentage while the button is set on % Tap; or click the Tap button for kV Tap selection and enter the
transformer LTC tap setting in kV. In either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min
Enter the lower limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter –10.0 for a ±10% range (-15 for 15% range).
If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value of the lower range of the LTC setting.
Max
Enter the upper limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 10.0 for a ±10% range (15 for 15% range). If
the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value of the upper range of the LTC setting.
Step
Enter the LTC step size in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 0.625 for a ±10% range with 33 steps (sixteen steps on each side plus the
nominal setting). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the step size of the LTC in kV.
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. Tap, and Step.
# of Taps
This value is automatically calculated and displayed according to the following formula:
# of Taps = 1 + ( %Max Tap - %Min Tap)/(%Step)

You can adjust this value to change Step:
%Step = (%Max Tap – %Min Tap)/(# of Taps – 1)
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds. This is the time duration from the moment when the regulated bus voltage goes outside and stays outside the voltage control
band to the time when the LTC triggers the first step change.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds. This is the time duration that the LTC takes to complete a step change.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Grounding Page - 2-Winding Transformer Editor
Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify the phase shift associated with the transformer and displays the grounding connection in vector group or winding connection on
the one-line diagram.
Font
Display the connection using ETAP Font or IEC vector string. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Winding Connection
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Vector Group
Symbols
Display grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line element can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the standard.
For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded
The benefit in using symbols is that you can place ground CTs to connect protective devices such as relays.
Vector Group
Select this option to display the transformer connection in IEC vector strings, such as YNyn3, Dd0, Yd1, Dyn1, etc. In the vector group designation, the upper case
portion describes the winding connection and grounding type of the high voltage side while the lower case portion describes the winding connection and grounding type
of the low voltage side. The number represents the angle shift, in clock position, of the high voltage side leading the load voltage side. Therefore, 1 and 3 indicate angle
shifts of 30 and 90 degrees respectively. For example, Dyn1 means that the high voltage side is Delta connection and the low voltage side is Y connection with solid
ground, and the voltage angle on the high voltage side leads that on the low side by 30 degree.
Winding Connection
Select this option to display the transformer connection as DY, DD, YD or YY.
Angle
The phase shift angle can be selected or specified in the field. The phase shift angle determines the high voltage angle with respect to the low voltage angle. For
example, a value of -30 indicates that the high voltage leads the low voltage by -30 degrees or, equivalently, the low voltage leads the high voltage by 30 degrees.
Grounding Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:
Type Description
Open Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded)
Solid Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path
Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path
Reactor A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path
Xfmr-Reactor A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the secondary of the transformer.
Xfmr-Resistor A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the secondary of the transformer.
Resistor \ Reactor Grounding Ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded generators, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohm)
Ohm
Resistor or Reactor impedance in ohms.
Transformer-Resistor \ Transformer Reactor Grounding Ratings:
V ln
kV1
Transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms)
Prim Ohms
Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
kV2
Transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
Secondary current in amps. This calculated based on the primary amps and the transformer turn ratio.
Sec Ohms
Resistor / Reactor impedance in ohms. This is calculated based on the grounding transformer turn ratio and secondary current. If sec. Ohms are entered first, then the
primary amps and ohms will be calculated automatically.
Transformer kVA
Grounding transformer kVA rating.
Earthing Type
Select a system earthing type. The available earthing types are listed based on the system grounding type. Note that this field is applicable only for low voltage side.
Distributed Neutral
Check this box if neutral is distributed for the IT earthing type.
Resistance to Ground/Earth
Enter the resistance between the chassis and ground in Ohms.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing

Refer to Chapter Transformer MVA Sizing for information on this page for the 2-winding Transformer.
The 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing calculation sizes the transformer rated MVA, 1st and 2nd stage MVA (when applicable), %Z, and X/R based on the
transformer loading, installation, insulation level, and short-circuit duties. Load variation factors can also be included in the sizing calculation. This section describes
how to access the Transformer MVA Sizing calculation, sizing options, required input data, and available results.
To access the Transformer MVA Sizing module, double-click on the transformer icon in the one-line diagram to access the Transformer editor. Next, select the Sizing
page.
You may access the Transformer editor from the System Manager as well.
On the Sizing page, you can select or enter the transformer loading data, transformer installation, and transformer insulation data to run the sizing calculation, select the
recommended sizing results and update the transformer ratings based on the calculated size.
Transformer Loading
The Transformer Loading group allows you to find the operating load or the connected load to this transformer and then use either load for sizing purposes. Also, you
can manually enter a loading for the transformer.
MVA
Enter the loading seen by the transformer. The loading MVA can be entered manually or updated automatically by clicking on the Operating or Connected Load
buttons. This value is used as the transformer load MVA in the sizing calculations.
Operating MVA, MW and Mvar

If you run Load Flow Analysis and select the option to update Operating Load & Voltage from the Load Flow Study Case Editor, the transformer operating MVA, MW
and Mvar will be updated and displayed in these fields and the Operating button will be enabled.
The operating MVA is the maximum value of the MVA calculated on the From or To side of the two-winding transformer.
Load Flow Study Case Info Page
Two Winding Transformer Sizing Page
Clicking on the Operating button will update the MVA field and at the same time run the calculations.
Connected MVA, MW and Mvar

If the loading on a transformer is due to a radial system, the connected loading can then be automatically computed, displayed in these fields, and the Connected button
will be available for selection. If a non-radial or looped configuration is encountered, a message displaying “Loop configuration detected. No Calculations!” will appear.
Click on the Connected button to update the load MVA field and run the calculations.
Spare Loads
You can use this option while calculating the total connected load downstream to a transformer to include all spare loads to determine the final connected load to the
transformer. A spare load is defined as having a configuration status set to spare in the respective element editor.
Configuration Status Demand Factor
Load Variation
This section defines load variation factors that affect MVA sizing calculation.
Growth Factor
The growth factor is an allowance for future growth. This percent value indicates how much future load increase should be expected for the given transformer. The
growth factor is used for calculating the required Rated MVA of the transformer. If you select the option Use GF for Max. MVA, then the growth factor is used for
calculating the maximum MVA size.
Load Factor
The load factor is defined as the ratio of the average load to the peak load over a designated period of time. You may calculate the Load Factor as a percentage from the
following relation:
where
i Interval of time when the load is non-zero

kWi Load at interval i
Ti Number of hours of interval i
kWp Peak load
Tt Ton + Toff
Ton Total hours when the load is on
Toff Total hours when the load is off
If the transformer carries load at every interval, then the relationship may be simplified to:
The Load Factor is equal to 100% if the transformer carries the required load continuously all the time.
Installation
This section defines the transformer installation conditions that affect MVA sizing calculations.
Altitude
Enter the altitude of the transformer installation in feet or meter. ETAP adjusts the calculated Required MVA ratings based on the altitude value.
ETAP uses the following derating factors, per Standards C57.92-1981 and C57.96-1986, for every 330 ft. (100 m) above 3300 ft. (1000 m), for transformers installed at
an altitude greater than 3300 ft. (1000 m).
Types of Cooling Derating Factor (%)

Liquid-immersed air-cooled
Liquid-immersed water-cooled 0.4
Liquid-immersed forced-air-cooled 0.0
Liquid-immersed forced-liquid-cooled 0.5
With liquid-to-air cooler 0.5
Liquid-immersed forced-liquid-cooled
With water-to-air cooler 0.0
0.3
Dry type, Self-Cooled (AA) 0.5
Dry type, Forced-Air-Cooled (AA/FA and AFA)
For IEC Rated Transformers, naturally cooled transformers, the limit of average winding temperature rise is reduced by 1k for every 400 m above 1000m. For forced
cooled transformers, the reduction shall be 1k for every 250 m.
Ambient Temp.
Enter the Ambient temperature of the transformer location in degree Celsius. ETAP adjusts the Required MVA ratings based on the ambient temperature value.
Impedance
This data section defines the transformer Basic Impulse Level (BIL) and primary and secondary short-circuit duties that affect calculations of the transformer
impedance.
BIL Limit
Enter the Basic Impulse Level of the transformer. ETAP utilizes this value for determining the transformer minimum impedance according to ANSI/IEC standards.
Limit Short-Circuit kA
If you select this option, ETAP will use the Short Circuit current contribution, the BIL value and the transformer type to determine the impedance of the transformer.
@ Prim.
Enter the primary winding short-circuit current requirement in kA. ETAP will use this value to calculate the transformer impedance. This value indicates the short
circuit current contribution for the transfer from secondary to primary.
@ Sec.
Enter the secondary winding short-circuit current requirement in kA. This value indicates the short circuit current contribution for the transfer from primary to
secondary.
ETAP will determine either the primary or secondary Short Circuit current contribution if either value is known based on the rated voltage ratio.
Options
This section defines additional options used for Transformer MVA Sizing calculation.
Use GF for Max. MVA

If you select this option, ETAP will use the Growth Factor to adjust the required maximum MVA value calculated by the program.
Result
This data section displays all the results from the Transformer MVA Sizing calculation.
Larger Size
The calculated Rated MVA, 1st stage MVA (where applicable), 2nd stage MVA (where applicable), %Z and X/R will be displayed in these fields for the One Size
Larger Transformer. ETAP first will calculate the Required MVA ratings, %Z and X/R. Then, based on the ANSI or IEC Standard Tables, ETAP will select a standard
larger size from the required values.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Larger Size values by pressing on the Larger Size button.
Required Size
ETAP calculates the required Rated MVA, 1st stage MVA (where applicable), 2nd stage MVA (where applicable), %Z and X/R. And then, the calculated values are
displayed in these fields.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Required Size values by pressing on the Required Size button.
Smaller Size
Calculated Rated MVA, 1st stage MVA (where applicable), 2nd stage MVA (where applicable), %Z and X/R will be displayed in these fields for the One Size Smaller
Transformer. ETAP first will calculate the Required MVA ratings, %Z and X/R. Then, based on the ANSI or IEC Standard Tables, ETAP will select a standard smaller
size from the required values.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Smaller Size values by pressing on the Smaller Size button.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Protection Page - 2-Winding Transformer Editor

This page contains options for plotting the transformer damage curve on an active Star View. Even though transformers are the simplest and most reliable devices in an
electrical system, transformer failures can occur due to any number of internal or external conditions that make the device incapable of performing its proper function.
Some of the common failures are:
 Winding failure
 Terminal and no-load tap changer failure
 Bushing failure
 Load tap changer failure
 Insulation breakdown
Appropriate transformer protection should be used with the following objectives:
 Protect the system in case of a transformer failure

 Protect the transformer from system disturbances
Overcurrent protective devices such as fuses and relays have well defined operating characteristics. The characteristic curves for such devices should be coordinated
with transformer through-fault withstand capability curves or transformer damage curves.
Short-Circuit
Calculated
Three phase short-circuit fault current (kA) is calculated / updated based on the through-fault current as seen by the transformer for a fault placed on the primary and/or
secondary side of the transformer. System impedance is calculated based on 3-phase fault current. The 3-phase fault current is updated automatically when Run / Update
Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked on the Star (PD Coordination) toolbar in Star Mode.
The primary / secondary fault kA is calculated based on prefault voltage of the faulted bus to the rated primary/ seconday kV of the transformer, respectively.
Fault on Prim.
When Run / Update short-circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar for a fault placed on the primary side of the transformer, the primary through-fault current
(kA) is calculated and updated.
Fault on Sec.
When the Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked on the Star (PD Coordination) toolbar for a fault placed on the secondary side of the transformer,
the primary through-fault current (kA) is calculated and updated.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on fault placed on primary or secondary side.
Zs (Fault on Prim.)
Calculates system impedance from short-circuit update. This is the system impedance in percent on the secondary side of the transformer as seen by the fault on the
primary side.
Zs (Fault on Sec.)
Calculates system impedance from short-circuit update. This is the system impedance in percent on the primary side of the transformer as seen by the fault on the
secondary side.
Xs/Rs (Fault on Prim.)

Calculates system X/R ratio. This is the system X/R ratio on the secondary side of the transformer based on a fault on the primary side of the transformer.
Xs/Rs (Fault on Sec.)

Calculates system X/R ratio. This is the system X/R ratio on the primary side of the transformer based on a fault on the secondary side of the transformer.
Zs+Zt (Fault on Prim.)

Equivalent percent impedance (system + transformer rated) as seen from the primary side of the transformer. The Zs+Zt calculation contains the affect of transformer
taps as well as impedance tolerance. Zs is the difference between total impedance (Zs+Zt) and Zt (rated transformer impedance). Hence Zs may include the affect of
transformer tap and tolerance and may not represent true system impedance.
Zs+Zt (Fault on Sec.)

Equivalent percent impedance (system + transformer rated) as seen from the secondary side of the transformer. The Zs+Zt calculation contains the affect of transformer
taps as well as impedance tolerance. Zs is the difference between total impedance (Zs+Zt) and Zt (rated transformer impedance). Hence Zs may include the affect of
transformer tap and tolerance and may not represent true system impedance.
Xs+t/Rs+t (Fault on Prim.)

Equivalent X/R (system + transformer rated) as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
Xs+t/Rs+t (Fault on Sec.)

Equivalent X/R (system + transformer rated) as seen from the secondary side of the transformer.
User-Defined
If it is not possible to run short-circuit to update fault current for every transformer, user-defined values for short-circuit current, impedance, and X/R may be used.
Note: Zs+Zt and Xs+t/Rs+t are displayed only for the user-defined option.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on the fault placed on the primary or secondary side depending on the selection in
Plot Options.
Location
Unsupervised
Select this option if the transformer is located in an area where no qualified persons monitor and service the transformer installation. See the National Electric Code for
further details.
Supervised
Select this option if the transformer is located in an area where only qualified persons monitor and service the transformer installation. See the National Electric Code
for further details.
FLA Display
The available option(s) in this section displays the minimum or maximum stage of transformer FLA of Star View TCC when selected transformer on Rating page has
more than one power rating. By default, the minimum FLA is selected for ANSI standard transformer and maximum FLA for IEC standard.
Fault Frequency
Fault frequency determines the shape of the transformer damage curve depending upon the application of the transformer in an electrical system.
Note: the fault frequency option is not available (is grayed out) if the IEC transformer standard is selected.
Frequent
For applications in which faults occur frequently, the through-fault curve represents the fact that the transformer is subjected to both thermal and mechanical damage.
An example of this is transformers with secondary side overhead lines.
Infrequent
For applications in which faults occur infrequently, the through-fault curve represents the fact that the transformer is subjected primarily to thermal damage. An
example of this is transformers with secondary side conductors enclosed in a conduit.
Both
Both of Frequent and Infrequent fault damage curve is displayed in Star View TCC when this option is selected. Selection of this option also affects the evaluation of
source and load side protective devices in Auto-Evaluation program meaning the frequent damage curve is used for protection by load side protective device(s) and
infrequent damage curve is used for protection by source side device.
Based on IEEE C57.109-1985 standard, the cumulative mechanical damage curve caused by frequent faults is not applicable to category I of liquid immersed
transformers. Therefore same curve represents both thermal and mechanical damage.
On the contrary, the cumulative mechanical damage curve is applicable to category IV transformers for both frequent and infrequent faults.
Other transformer categories (II and III) have cumulative mechanical damage curve only for frequent faults.
The plot of cumulative mechanical damage curve for liquid immersed transformers is displayed in Star View (TCC) per below table:
Liquid Immersed Transformer

Mechanical Damage Curve for Frequent/Infrequent Faults
ANSI/IEEE C57.109-1985 Standard
Transformer Min kVA Cumulative Mechanical Damage Curve Plot
Category Single Phase 3-Phase Frequent Faults Infrequent Faults

I 5-500 15-500 No No
II 501-1667 501-5000 Yes No
III 1668-10 000 5001-30 000 Yes No
IV above 10 000 above 30 000 Yes Yes
For category I frequent and infrequent fault curve is always same as For category IV frequent and infrequent fault curve is always same as
infrequent fault curve: Frequent fault curve:
The plot of Mechanical damage curve for dry type transformers is displayed as per following table.
Dry Type Transformer

Mechanical Damage Curve for Frequent/Infrequent Faults
ANSI/IEEE C57.12.59-2001 Standard
Transformer Min kVA Cumulative Mechanical Damage Curve Plot
Category Single Phase 3-Phase Frequent Faults Infrequent Faults Notes

I 5-500 15-500 No No
II 501-1667 501-5000 Yes No
III 1668-10 000 5001-30 000 Yes No 1
IV above 10 000 above 30 000 Yes No 1, 2
Notes:
1. Mechanical Damage Curve is available in ETAP similar to category II but not included in ANSI/IEEE C57.12.59-2001 standard. Category III and IV of dry type
transformers are not commonly manufactured and infrequent/frequent damage curve depends on manufacturer’s recommendation.
2. Category IV of dry type transformers are available in ETAP but not recognized in ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01-1998 standard.
For category I frequent and infrequent fault curves will be always same as
infrequent fault curve:
Short-Circuit Update
Pin (Disable Short-Circuit Update)
Select this option to disable the auto update of the short-circuit current from 3-phase Short-Circuit Analysis. When this option is selected and Run / Update Short-circuit
Clipping kA button is clicked, Fault on Prim. And Fault on Sec. values remains unchanged or pinned.
Curve Shift
Apply Curve Shift
Select to apply 3-phase transformer damage curve shift. The curve shift is applied as a multiplier to the current (horizontal axis) components of the entire transformer
damage curve. The applied curve shift factor is displayed on the Preferences tab of the Devices page in Star View Plot Options. The shift factor is dependent upon:
 Transformer Connection specified on the Info page of the Transformer Editor.

 Winding connections specified on the Grounding page of the Transformer Editor.
 Source and Protection, and Fault side selections on the Preferences tab of the Devices page in the Star View Plot Options.
The table below describes this relationship:
Winding Connections
Transformer Connection Source and Protection on Fault on Factor
Shell, Core 3-Limb, Core 4-Limb, Delta Delta 0.87
Core 5-Limb, (3) 1-Phase Delta Wye Solid Grounded 0.58
Core, 3 Limb Wye Open Wye Solid Grounded 0.67
Source: IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS. VOL. IA-22, NO.4, JULY/ AUGUST 1986
Magnetizing Inrush
Inrush Curve Type
Select the type of inrush curve to display: Points, Curve – Piecewise, or Curve – Equation.
Multiplier
Select current multiplier to plot the transformer inrush point on the Star View. Typical multiple values are 6, 8, 10 and 12. These are multiples of FLA of the
transformer. The FLA of the transformer is selected based on the Device - Adjustment setting in the Star Plot options. For example, if the FLA of the transformer is
1804 Amps based on the secondary winding and magnetizing inrush multiplier is 8, then the magnetizing current would be 8 times 1804 or 14.4 kA based on the
secondary side.
Duration/Time Constant
When the inrush curve type is Point or Curve – Piecewise, the inrush duration is entered here in cycles. When the inrush curve type is Curve – Equation, the time
constant is entered here in cycles.
Damage/Inrush Curve
Display on TCC Plot
Click to display the transformer damage/inrush curve on the Star View. Transformer damage curves are always shown on Star Views by default.
If ANSI is selected as the standard (on the Info page) of the transformer, then the damage curve is based on the ANSI C57.109 standard.
If IEC is selected as the standard (on the Info page) of the transformer, then the damage curve is based on the IEC 76-5 standard.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Harmonic Page - 2 Winding Transformer Editor

Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a harmonic library needs to be defined here.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Harmonic editor.
Pick a manufacturer name and a model name from the Library Quick Pick - Harmonic editor (typically a current source harmonic type).
Type
Displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
Displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
Displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic library.
Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in the time domain.
Print (Wave Form)

Prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
Prints the harmonic spectrum.
K-Factor
The transformer K-Factor defines the additional thermal capacity of the transformer to tolerate the heating effects of harmonic currents.
FLA
Prim.
Transformer full load amps as seen from the primary side.
Sec.
Transformer full load amps as seen from the secondary side.
I Total (%)
Transformer full load current in percent of rated FLA, including additional capacity for harmonic current.
I Total
Prim.
Transformer full load amps including additional capacity for harmonic currents as seen from the primary side.
Sec.
Transformer full load amps including additional capacity for harmonic currents as seen from the secondary side.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
- Load Tap Changer
Grounding Page
Sizing Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from service.
After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be
λP
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year. The passive failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of
protection breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.
Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers. Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure
rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining
healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
MTTR
µ
This is the Mean Repair Rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR (µ = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA and λP (MTTF = 1.0/(λA+λP)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA and λP (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(λA+λP)).
MR
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Open Delta Transformer Editor Overview

Refer to Transformer, 2-Winding for the Open Delta transformer editor guide. The Open Delta transformer editor and properties are derived from those of the 2-winding
transformer.
This editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Open Delta Transformer Editor

Within the Info page, specify the Open Delta transformer ID, whether the transformer is in or out of service, primary and secondary buses, the connection, FDR tag,
name, and manufacturer’s data.
Info
ID
Prim. and Sec.

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an Open Delta transformer are designated as primary and secondary buses. If the primary or secondary terminal of a transformer is
not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line
diagram will be updated to show the new connection, after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, that is, you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in
existing protective device to the new bus (as shown in the figure below, where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4).
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the primary and secondary bus IDs.
The Wye side of the Open Delta transformer can also be connected to phase adapters. If the transformer is connected to a phase adapter, then the phase adapter ID will
show in the Prim. or Sec. field.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Revision Data
The current revision name will be displayed.
Connection
In the connection section, the connected phases at Open Delta transformer Wye side can be selected from the drop down list. For example, the Wye side is specified to
be connected to the A and B phase when the phase type AB is selected.
Both sides of the Open Delta transformer are allowed to be connected to a 3-phase bus. The Wye side of the Open Delta transformer will not energize the 3-phase bus.
The 3-phase bus can be energized by other 3-phase sources.
When the Wye side of the Open Delta transformer is connected to an isolated bus, the Open Delta transformer will energize the bus and the phase type of the Open
Delta transformer will be propagated to the bus as a single phase bus.
Standard
You can select either ANSI or IEC. The class selections will change based on the standard selected.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Open Delta Transformer

Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Open Delta Transformer Editor

On the Rating page, specify the Open Delta transformer voltage and power ratings, type/class, operating cooling, installation, and alert data.
Voltage Rating
Prim and Sec kV
For the Open Delta transformer, these two fields are the equivalent transformer voltage ratings and are display only. The primary and secondary voltage ratings are the
average voltages across the terminals of the two single-phase transformers from the Wye connected side.
For the single-phase transformers connected in Delta, the equivalent voltage rating is the average of the single-phase transformers’ voltage ratings. For the single-phase
transformers connected in Wye, the equivalent voltage rating is 1.732 times the average of the single-phase transformers’ voltage ratings.
FLA
This displays the primary winding and secondary winding full load amperes corresponding to the smallest and the largest power ratings.
Bus kVnom
This displays the bus nominal kV of the connected primary and secondary terminals.
Power Rating
Rated MVA
Based on the type/class of the transformer, up to three MVA fields may be available. The corresponding class/temperature rise will be displayed below each rating field.
Where available, Class1 MVA ≤ Class2 MVA ≤ Class3 MVA.
1. When Per Standard is selected, only Class1 MVA field is editable. Class2 and Class3 (where available) are calculated from Class1 MVA based on American
National Standard C57.12.10 and are display only.
2. When User-Defined is selected, in addition to Class1 MVA, the user can specify Class2 and Class3 ratings (where available). No calculation is enforced for user-
defined option.
Per Transformer
Select this button to enter the individual single-phase transformer ratings and impedances.
Fan/Pump
The required cooling equipment for the corresponding power rating. The field is checked to specify the availability of the equipment.
Derated MVA
This displays the derated MVA for each class/temperature rise.
%Derating
These fields display the percentage of power derating for each class/temperature rise due to the unavailability of the cooling equipment, installation altitude and ambient
temperature. They are calculated by the formula of "(1 - Derated MVA / Rated MVA) * 100" for the corresponding power rating.
Z Base
This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance and depends on the standard selection.
ANSI: Base MVA = Class1 MVA. IEC: Base MVA = the largest available class MVA.
Alert - Max
This value, if non-zero, is used to calculate the overload percentage of the transformer. If the maximum MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the
branch will be flagged on the overload summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero and this branch will not be
included in the overload summary report.
1. When Derated MVA is selected, the maximum MVA capability will be set to the largest derated value.
2. When User-Defined is selected, the user can specify the maximum MVA capability.
Installation
This is used to specify the base altitude and base temperature of the transformer.
Type/Class
Based on the standard selected, the fields below will provide different selection options. The tables below show those options:
Type
Select the transformer type from the Type list box. The following transformer types are available for both ANSI and IEC Standards:
Liquid-Fill
Dry
Liquid-Fill (C57.12) – ANSI only
Sub Type
Select the transformer sub type from the Sub Type list box. The following table shows the subtypes available based on the standard and type of transformer:
Standard Type Subtype Standard Type Subtype

Mineral Oil Mineral Oil
Flammable Liquid Synthetic Liquid <=300
Liquid Less-Flammable Liquid Liquid Synthetic Liquid >300
Fill Fill Non-Flammable
Non-Flammable Liquid
Synthetic Liquid
Other Other
ANSI IEC
Ventilated Sealed
Non-Ventilated Non-Enclosed
Sealed Enclosed
Dry Dry
Other Totally Enclosed
Vent-Dry
Other
Class
ANSI, Liquid Fill transformers for all subtypes:

OA OA/FA OA/FOA/FOA Other
OW OA/FA/FA FOA
OW/A OA/FA/FOA FOW
ANSI, Dry transformers:

AA Non- ANV ANV
AFA Ventilated Other AA
AFA
Ventilated Other
AA/FA GA AA/FA
Sealed
Other Other GA
Other
IEC, Liquid Fill:

ONAN KNAN LNAN
ONWN KNWN LNWN
ONWN/ONAN KNWN/KNAN LNWN/LNAN
ONAN/OFAF/OFAF Synthetic KNAN/KFAF/KFAF LNAN/LFAF/LFAF
Synthetic Flammable
Liquid
Liquid OFAF KFAF Synthetic LFAF
>300
<=300 OFWF KFWF Liquid LFWF
Other ODWF KDWF LDWF
ONAN/OFAN/OFAF KNAN/KFAN/KFAF LNAN/LFAN/LFAF
OFAN KFAN LFAN
OFAN/OFAF KFAN/KFAF LFAN/LFAF
ONWF KNWF LNWF
IEC, Dry for all subtypes of transformers:
AN GN GNAN GNAN
AF GF GNAF AN/AF*
ANAN GNAF ANAF Other
* AN/AF corresponds to two stages of cooling, whereas ANAF has only one cooling stage with Fan always checked.
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature (in degrees C) from the list box. The following transformer operating temperatures are available:

55/65
Liquid Fill
65
80
80/100
ANSI All Classes
80/115
Dry
80/150
100
115/150

Liquid Fill All Classes 65
AN 60
AF 75
ANAN 80
GN 100
GNAF 125
GNAN/GNAF 150
ANAF 150
IEC GNAN 150
Dry 80
80/100
100
AN/AF 100/125
125
135
150
Other 150
MFR
Enter the 2-winding transformer manufacturer’s name.

Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Page - Open Delta Transformer

On the Impedance page, specify the Open Delta transformer impedance, variation, and tolerance data.
Positive Sequence Impedance

These are the positive sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the transformer MVA and kV ratings as the base values. These values are subject
to manufacturer tolerance limits and tap position.
For the Open Delta transformer, the positive and zero sequence impedances are identical and calculated from the phase-by-phase admittance matrix of the single-phase
transformers.
X/R and R/X Ratios

The equivalent X/R and R/X ratios are calculated from the single-phase impedances and displayed.
%X and %R
The equivalent %X and %R are calculated from the single-phase impedances and displayed.
Z Variation
Use this field to enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then the final Open Delta transformer
impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap impedance values (entered for Positive Sequence Impedance, %Z fields), transformer primary and
secondary winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at –5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation
is used to calculate the final transformer impedance.

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at –5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position; in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust
%Z
Variations.
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value in this field. This value should be zero for an existing transformer with a known
impedance value. For a new transformer with a designated impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer. The value of
the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the positive or negative value, which will result in a conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative Positive
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Harmonics X

Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Single Phase Rating Page - Open Delta Transformer Editor

The single phase transformer ratings and impedances can be entered by clicking the Per Transformer button on the open delta transformer editor rating or impedance
page.
Rated MVA
The single phase transformer T1 is the bank connected to the phase A at the Wye connected side. The single phase transformer T2 is the bank connected to the phase B
at the Wye connected side. The single phase transformer T3 is the bank connected to the phase C at the Wye connected side. One of the 3 single-phase transformers will
be hidden for the open delta transformer.
The equivalent power ratings of the Open Delta transformer are 2 times of the smaller power ratings between the two available single phase transformers. Note that the
equivalent power ratings are not the required de-rated power ratings for operating. The factor of 0.87 may be taken for a 3-phase load at the Delta connected side to
avoid the overloading of the transformer.
The Class 2 and Class 3 power ratings (when they are available) are calculated and displayed only when the Per Standard button is selected in the Open Delta
transformer editor rating page. The User-Defined option must be selected in the Open Delta transformer editor rating page in order for them to be editable.
Note: the equivalent power ratings and impedances of the Open Delta transformer are not used in the calculations. The phase-by-phase model is used for the Open Delta
transformer instead.
FLA
This displays the primary winding and secondary winding full load amperes corresponding to the smallest and the largest power ratings for each single-phase
transformer.
kV
Enter primary and secondary line-to-neutral voltage ratings of each single-phase transformer in kilovolts.
Impedance
Enter the positive sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the transformer MVA and kV ratings as the base values. Click the appropriate button
to obtain the typical single-phase transformer impedance together with X/R ratio, or X/R ratio only.
The impedance and X/R ratio of the equivalent Open Delta transformer are calculated from the 2 single-phase transformer impedances and X/R ratios.
Typical Z and X/R and Typical X/R

Click the appropriate button to obtain the typical single-phase transformer impedance together with X/R ratio, or X/R ratio only. The typical impedance and X/R ratio
data for ANSI 2-winding transformers are based on two sources: American National Standard C57.12.10 and Industrial Power System Handbook by Beeman.
Typical Impedance for Transformer Less Than or equal to 500 kVA:
Group 1* +
Rating Group 2
%Z X/R %Z X/R
kVA ≤ 5 2.3 0.88 2.8 0.77
5< kVA ≤ 25 2.3 1.13 2.3 1.00
25< kVA ≤ 50 2.6 1.69 2.4 1.54
50< kVA ≤ 100 2.6 1.92 3.7 2.92
100< kVA ≤ 167 4.0 3.45 3.7 3.60
167< kVA ≤ 500 4.8 4.70 5.2 5.10
* Group 1: Transformers with high voltage windings of less than or equal to 8.32 kV
+ Group 2: Transformers with high voltages of greater than 8.32 kV and less than or equal to 12.47 kV
Typical Impedance for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Low Voltage Side Low Voltage Side ≥ 2.4 kV

High Voltage Side
< 2.4 kV Without LTC With LTC
kV ≤ 13.8 5.75** 5.5**
13.8 < kV ≤ 23 6.75 6.5 7.0
23 < kV ≤ 34.5 7.25 7.0 7.5
34.5 < kV ≤ 46 7.75 7.5 8.0
46 < kV ≤ 69 8.0 8.5
69 < kV ≤ 115 8.5 9.0
115 < kV ≤ 138 9.0 9.5
138 < kV ≤ 161 9.5 10.0
161 < kV ≤ (230) 10.0 10.5
** Self-cooled transformers with greater than 5000 kVA values are the same as those for 23 kV high voltage.
Typical X/R Ratios for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Rating X/R Rating X/R

MVA ≤ 1 5.790 8 < MVA ≤ 10 15.50
1 < MVA ≤ 2 7.098 10 < MVA ≤ 20 18.60
2 < MVA ≤ 3 10.67 20 < MVA ≤ 30 23.70
3 < MVA ≤ 4 11.41 30 < MVA ≤ 40 27.30
4 < MVA ≤ 5 12.14 40 < MVA ≤ 50 29.50
5 < MVA ≤ 6 12.85 50 < MVA ≤ 100 34.10
6 < MVA ≤ 7 13.55 100 < MVA ≤ 200 42.00
7 < MVA ≤ 8 14.23 200 < MVA ≤ 1000 50.00
The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for IEC 2-winding transformers are based on IEC 60076-5 1994 and Areva Ch.5 “Equivalent Circuits and Parameters of
Power System Plants” listed in the table below:
Rating %Z X/R
MVA ≤ 0.63 4 1.5
0.63 < MVA ≤ 1.25 5 3.5
1.25 < MVA ≤ 3.15 6.25 6
3.15 < MVA ≤ 6.3 7.15 8.5
6.3 < MVA ≤ 12.5 8.35 13
12.5 < MVA ≤ 25 10 20
25 < MVA ≤ 200 12.5 45
200 < MVA 12.5 45

Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Grounding Page - Open Delta Transformer Editor

Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify the phase shift associated with the transformer and displays the grounding connection in vector group or winding connection on
the one-line diagram.
Font
Display the connection using ETAP Font or IEC vector string. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Winding Connection
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded for Vector Group
Symbols
Display grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line element can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the standard.
For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded
The benefit in using symbols is that you can place ground CTs to connect protective devices such as relays.
Vector Group
Select this option to display the transformer connection in IEC vector strings.
Winding Connection
Select this option to display the transformer connection.
Angle
Phase shift angle has to be either 30 or -30 degrees for the Open Delta transformer. The phase shift angle is determined by the connection of the Open Delta
transformer. For example, when the Wye connected side is connected to the high voltage system, then the connections which are high voltage, lead the low voltage by
+/-30 degrees are illustrated in the following diagrams.
Grounding Type
Open Delta transformer has to be Wye connected at one side and Delta connected at the other side. The Delta connected terminal has to be connected to a 3-phase bus,
while the Wye connected terminal can be connected to a 3-phase bus or a 2-phase bus.
When the Wye connected terminal is connected to a 3-phase bus, the 3-phase bus must have a neutral return. When the Wye connected terminal is connected to a 2-
phase bus, the 2-phase bus shall have the same phase type as the Open Delta transformer. For example, an Open Delta transformer of the phase type AB, which is
specified from the Open Delta transformer editor Info page, must be connected to a 2-phase bus of the phase type AB. If not, the Open Delta transformer will be de-
energized.
When the Open Delta transformer is connected to a bus, either primary or secondary side, the buttons for the grounding type will be disabled. When the Open Delta
transformer is not connected to a bus at both sides, the grounding type buttons will be enabled.
Earthing Type
Select a system earthing type. The available earthing types are listed based on the system grounding type. Note that this field is applicable only for low voltage side.
Distributed Neutral
Check this box if neutral is distributed for the IT earthing type.
Enter the resistance between the chassis and ground in Ohms.

Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
3-Winding Transformer Editor Overview

The properties associated with 3-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
In addition to information regarding the use of load tap changers (LTC), the 3-Winding Transformer Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - 3-Winding Transformer Editor

Within the Info Page, specify the 3-winding transformer ID, In/Out of Service, Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Buses, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and
Manufacturer’s data.
Info
ID
Entering a unique ID having up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of transformers increase. The default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Primary, Secondary & Tertiary

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 3-winding transformer are designated as Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary buses. If the primary, secondary, or tertiary terminal of
a transformer is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The
one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in
existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where T2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Connection
Displays the transformer phase connection type and core type. Currently 3-Winding Transformers are 3 Phase only.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Enter the equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Lock / Unlock
Type/Class
MFR
Enter the 3-winding transformer manufacturer name.
Type
Select the transformer type from the list box. The following transformer types are available:
Cast-Coil
Sealed-Dry
Gas-Fill-Dry
Vent-Dry
Liquid-Fill
Other
Non-Vent-Dry (non-vented dry type)
Class
AA OA/FA/FOA NAN FWF

ANAN
AA/FA OA/FOA/FOA NWN DWF
ANAF
AFA OW NWN/NAN NAN/FAN/FAF
GN
FOA OW/A NAN/NAF FAN
GF
FOW ANV NAN/NAF/NAF FAN/FAF
GNAF
OA GA NAN/NAF/FAF NWF
GNAN/GNAF
OA/FA Other NAN/FAF/NAF AN
GNAN
OA/FA/FA NAF FAF AF
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature from the list box. The following transformer operating temperatures are available:
55 115
60 130
65 150
80
Other temperatures can be typed directly into the temperature box.
BIL
Select the transformer basic impulse level (BIL) in kV from the list box. The following transformer basic impulse levels are available:
10 95 250 900
20 110 350 1050
2050
30 125 550 1300
45 150 650 1550
60 200 750 1800
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - 3-Winding Transformer Editor

Within the Rating Page, specify the 3-winding transformer ratings.
Rating
Prim - Sec - Ter kV Rating
Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary voltage ratings of the 3-winding transformer in kilovolts.
Note: When connecting a transformer to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal to the bus nominal kV. ETAP uses the voltage at the lowest-
numbered swing system as the base voltage and calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. ETAP gives an error message when it detects
Prim - Sec - Ter MVA Rating

Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary MVA or kVA ratings of the 3-winding transformer. The MVA rating of the primary winding is used as the base MVA for all
transformer impedances. For example, for a 20/15/5 MVA transformer with an OA 55°/FA 65° C rating, the nameplate transformer impedances should be entered in 20
MVA base (OA 55° C rating).
Max MVA Capability

These values, if non-zero, are used to calculate the percent overload of the transformer windings. If the maximum MVA capability of the transformer is greater than
zero, the branch will be listed on the overload summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero and this branch will not
be included in the overload summary report. For a transformer with OA 55°/FA 65° C ratings, the FA 65° C rating should be used as the maximum MVA capability if
fans have been installed on the transformer.
FLA
This displays the FLA of the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings in amperes.
Connected Bus
This displays the nominal kVs of the connected buses to the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Page - 3-Winding Transformer Editor

Within the Impedance page, specify the 3-winding transformer impedance and its variation, the tolerance, no load loss and buried delta winding data.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances
For 3-winding transformers, specify three impedance values in percent on the primary winding MVA base:
Zps = Leakage Z between the Primary and Secondary windings with the Tertiary winding open circuited.
= Rps + j Xps = Rp + Rs + j ( Xp + Xs ) % (base MVA = MVAp)
Zpt = Leakage Z between the Primary and Tertiary windings with the Secondary winding open circuited.
= Rpt + j Xpt = Rp + Rt + j ( Xp + Xt ) % (base MVA = MVAp)
Zst = Leakage Z between the Secondary and Tertiary windings with the Primary winding open circuited.
= Rst + j Xst = Rs + Rt + j ( Xs + Xt ) % (base MVA = MVAp)
If the nameplate given impedance for any pair of winding is not based on primary then ETAP requests such impedance to be converted into the primary winding rating.
The following examples are provided to show how the impedance parameters of a three-winding transformer must be entered in ETAP.
Example 1: Given nameplate impedance data is based on primary winding rating.

30 / 25 / 5 MVA
230 / 13.8 / 4.16 kV
MVAp = 30 MVA kVp = 230 kV

MVAs = 25 MVA kVs = 13.8 kV
MVAt = 5 MVA kVt = 4.16 kV
Zps = 9.5 % MVAb = 30 MVA, X/Rps = 48.2

Zpt = 9.4 % MVAb = 30 MVA, X/Rpt = 46.9
Zst = 18.1 % MVAb = 30 MVA, X/Rst = 42.5
Example 1 – Given Nameplate Data
The input parameters in impedance page need to be entered as following:
Example 1 – Impedance Data Entry
Example 2: Given nameplate impedance data is not based on primary winding rating.
MVAp = 30 MVA kVp = 230 kV

MVAs = 25 MVA kVs = 13.8 kV
MVAt = 5 MVA kVt = 4.16 kV
Zps = 9.5 % MVAbps = 30 MVA, X/Rps = 48.2

Zpt = 14.4 % MVAbpt = 30 MVA, X/Rpt = 46.9
Zst = 2.1 % MVAbst = 5 MVA, X/Rst = 42.5
Example 2 – Given Nameplate Data
The given Zst is not based on primary winding rating (30MVA) so it needs to be converted as follows:
Z’ps = Zps * ( MVAp / MVAbps ) = 9.5 % * ( 30 / 30 ) = 9.5 %
Z’pt = Zpt * ( MVAp / MVAbpt ) = 14.4 % * ( 30 / 30 ) = 14.4 %
Z’st = Zpt * ( MVAp / MVAbst ) = 2.1 % * ( 30 / 5 ) = 12.6 %
The input parameters in impedance page need to be entered as following:
Example 2 – Impedance Data Entry

ETAP models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances.
In some cases, parallel transformers with different voltage ratings are present. If this happens, a fictitious tap setting is required. To calculate this setting, refer to the 2-
Winding Transformer kV rating.
X/R Ratio
Enter the transformer X/R ratios. For 3-winding transformers, three X/R values are needed, corresponding to the three winding impedances Zps, Zpt, and Zst.
X/R ps = Xps / Rps

X/R pt = Xpt / Rpt
X/R st = Xst / Rst
These ratios are used in ETAP to calculate the transformer winding resistances and reactances from given percent impedances.
MVA Base
The Base MVA field is the primary winding MVA rating and this value is also used to represent the per-unit impedance of all the windings of the three-winding
transformer. ETAP uses this value to represent the percent impedance of all the windings.
Z Variation
Enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then the final transformer impedance will be calculated based on the
nominal tap impedance values (entered for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary, secondary, and tertiary winding tap positions
(from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at –5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer
impedance.

Enter transformer impedance variation at –5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer
impedance due to either the primary , secondary, or tertiary winding tap changes.
Zt at –5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ –5% Tap) / 100

Enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer
impedance due to either the primary , secondary, or tertiary winding tap changes.
Zt at +5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ +5% Tap) / 100
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value. This value should be zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value.
For a new transformer with a designated impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer. The value of the tolerance must
be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the positive or negative value for all the impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst, which will result in a conservative
solution.
Tolerance
Negative Positive
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Harmonics X
Depending on loading conditions, more conservatism can be achieved by applying the positive or negative tolerances to the impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst independently.
For instance, if the transformer primary side is connected to a source while the secondary and tertiary sides are both connected to induction motors, then when the
positive tolerances are applied to Zps and Zpt and negative tolerance is applied to Zst, the voltage will drop more across the transformer for load flow type studies.
Therefore, when the tolerances can be applied to the impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst independently, ETAP recommends that the tolerances become incoporated into the
impedance Zps, Zpt and Zst manually based on user's discretion while the tolerance is entered as 0.
No Load Test Data
Enter the transformer impedance no load test data for positive sequence and zero sequence. If there is a buried delta winding, the test data of the zero sequence will be
substituted by the test data of the zero sequence impedance between the windings. Please refer to Chapter 20.4 Calculation method - Modeling of Transformers section
to see how the transformer is modeled for no load test data.
%FLA
Positive/zero sequence no load current in percentage of Full Load Ampere of the transformer.
kW
Positive/zero sequence no load power loss in kW.
%G
Positive/zero sequence shunt conductance in percentage.
%B
Positive/zero sequence shunt susceptance in percentage.
Buried Delta Winding

Enter buried delta winding data in the page.
kV
Buried delta winding rated voltage in kV.
MVA
Buried delta winding rating in MVA or KVA.
Max. MVA
Buried delta winding maximum rating in MVA.
Z(ohms) - P
Zero-sequence impedance from the primary winding to the buried delta winding.
Z(ohms) - S
Zero-sequence impedance from the secondary winding to the buried delta winding.
Z(ohms) - T
Zero-sequence impedance from the tertiary winding to the buried delta winding.
Z(ohms) - PS
Zero-sequence impedance from the primary winding to the secondary and the buried delta windings.
Z(ohms) - PT
Zero-sequence impedance from the primary winding to the tertiary and the buried delta windings.
Z(ohms) - ST
Zero-sequence impedance from the secondary winding to the tertiary and the buried delta windings.
Z(ohms) - PST
Zero-sequence impedance from the primary winding to the secondary, the tertiary and the buried delta windings.
%Z
Zero-sequence impedance in percentage based on the MVA base and the rated voltage of the first winding.
X/R
Zero-sequence impedance from X over R ratio.
MVA Base
Zero-sequence impedance MVA base.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Tap Page - 3-Winding Transformer Editor

You can specify the 3-winding transformer tap data for both fixed tap and LTC tap within the Tap page. Transformer winding and grounding connections are also
specified in this page.
Fixed Taps
% Tap / kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button for kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in percent
or kV. In either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
ETAP allows modeling a tap off-load (fixed tap) changer on all three sides of the transformer. Standard off-load tap changer transformers typically have 5.0% settings
available, with two steps above and two steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, -2.5, 0, 2.5, or 5.0.
The transformer is treated as a simple circuit impedance for transformers without voltage taps or where the tap is set at a nominal value (n = 0),.
Placing a +10% tap setting (n=+10% or N=1.1) at the primary side is not equivalent to -10% tap at the secondary side. ETAP will correctly model a transformer with a
tap setting as long as the tap setting is indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap changer). To increase the voltage at the other side of
the transformer, use a negative tap value.
Per Unit Turn Ratio

Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 + %Tap/100
Connection
These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and rating of the grounding device in amperes. Grounding can be placed on any transformer winding.
Prim./Sec./Ter. Buttons
The transformer grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired connection is displayed. The available connections are
Wye and Delta.
Auto LTC (Load Tap Changer)

You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on all transformer windings. However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on more
than 2-windings of the 3-winding transformers.
Prim.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the primary winding, i.e., if checked LTC is in automatic mode, else it is in
manual mode.
Sec.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the secondary winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is
in manual mode.
Ter.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the tertiary winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is in
manual mode.
LTC Button
When the associated check box is selected, the LTC button is enabled. Click this button to enter LTC data.
LTC Tap Position

Operating
You can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC automatic mode here.
The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies providing the option to Update Transformer LTCs is by selecting them in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Note: The tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in automatic mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is
used as the initial value.
OnLine Scanned
If in the On-Line Monitoring mode, Real-Time will display the scanned Tap Position in this field.
Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify phase-shift associated with the transformer. Phase-shift for a 3-winding transformer can be uniquely defined by two values.
ETAP uses Sec. and Ter. to describe phase-shift of a 3-winding transformer. The value displayed in the Sec. field is the secondary voltage angle with respect to
primary voltage angle and the value displayed in the Ter. field is the tertiary voltage angle with respect to primary voltage angle. For example, a value of –30 in the Ter.
field indicates that the tertiary voltage leads the primary voltage by –30 degree, or equivalently it actually lags the primary voltage by 30 degrees. The phase-shift
between the secondary and the tertiary windings can be calculated from the values in the Sec. and Ter. fields.
Std Pos. Seq.

Select this option to specify positive sequence phase-shift, which means that when the primary and secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-
Delta), the high voltage side leads the low voltage side by 30 degrees. If the primary side has a higher rated voltage, the Sec field displays –30 degrees; otherwise, the
Sec field shows 30 degrees. When the primary and the secondary have the same connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules apply to the primary and
tertiary windings and the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter field.
Std Neg. Seq.

Select this option to specify negative sequence phase-shift, which is the opposite of the previous case. When the primary and secondary windings have different
connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high voltage side lags the low voltage side by 30 degrees. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec. field displays
30 degrees; otherwise, the Sec. field shows -30 degrees. When the primary and the secondary have the same connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules
apply to the primary and tertiary windings and the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter. field.
Special.
When this option is selected, the Sec. and Ter. fields become enabled and you can specify the phase-shift in these two edit boxes.
Sec.
This field is for display only when one of the first two options is selected. It shows the angle of the secondary winding with respect to the primary winding. When the
third option is selected, you can enter the phase-shift in the field.
Ter.
When one of the first two options is selected, this field is for display only, and it shows the angle at which the tertiary winding is with respect to the primary winding.
When the third option is selected, you can enter the phase-shift in the field.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Grounding Page - 3-Winding Transformer Editor

Display
The button options Font and Symbols allow you to determine how the grounding connection is displayed on the one line diagram.
Font
Display connection using ETAP Font. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor-Wye Solid Grounded
Symbols
Display grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line element can be sized, rotated, deleted, and changed depending on the
grounding connection type. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor-Wye Solid Grounded
The main purpose of using symbols is to show ground CTs on the one-line and connect them to devices such as relays.
Primary / Secondary/ Tertiary

These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and rating of the grounding device in amperes. Grounding can be placed on any transformer winding.
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:
Type Description
Xfmr-Reactor A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the secondary of the transformer.
Xfmr-Resistor A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the secondary of the transformer.
V ln
Amp
Enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes for a resistor or reactor grounded generators.
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohm)
Ohm
This is the resistor or Reactor impedance in ohms.
Transformer-Resistor \ Transformer Reactor Grounding Ratings:
V ln
The line-to-neutral voltage is calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2
kV1
This is the transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms)
Prim Ohms
This is the Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
kV2
This is the transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
This is the secondary current in amps. This is calculated based on the primary amps and the transformer turn ratio.
Sec Ohms
This is the Resistor / Reactor impedance in ohms. This is calculated based on the grounding transformer turn ratio and secondary current. If sec. Ohms are entered first,
then the primary amps and ohms will be calculated automatically.
Transformer kVA
This is the grounding transformer kVA rating.Enter the resistance between the chassis and ground in Ohms.
Rg
This field is for the inclusion of the element’s grounding in electric shock protection calculation. This field reflects both the elements grounding grid (if the transformer
is big enough) and the soil resistance between the grounding grid and the load grounding electrode. The Rg result from ETAP’s ground grid module can assist in
determining this value.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Protection Page - 3-Winding Transformer Editor

This page provides options that allow you to plot the transformer damage curve on an active Star View. Even though transformers are the simplest and most reliable
devices in an electrical system, transformer failures can occur due to any number of internal or external conditions that make the device incapable of performing its
proper function.
Some of the common failures are:
 Winding failure
 Terminal and no-load tap changer failure
 Bushing failure
 Load tap changer failure
 Insulation breakdown
Appropriate transformer protection should be employed with the following objectives:
 Protect the system in case of a transformer failure

 Protect the transformer from system disturbances
Overcurrent protective devices such as fuses and relays have well defined operating characteristics. The characteristic curves for such devices should be coordinated
with the transformer through-fault withstand capability curve or transformer damage curve.
Short-Circuit
Calculated
Three phase short-circuit fault current (kA) is calculated / updated based on the through-fault current as seen by the transformer for a fault placed on primary and/or
secondary and/or tertiary side of the transformer. System impedance is calculated based on three phase fault current. The 3-phase fault current is updated automatically
when the Run / Update short-circuit Clipping kA button is clicked in Star Mode.
The primary / secondary / tertiary fault kA is calculated based on the prefault voltage of the faulted bus to the rated primary/ seconday kV of the transformer,
respectively.
Fault on Prim.
When Run / Update short-circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar, the primary through-fault current (kA) is calculated and updated for a fault placed on the
primary side of the transformer.
Fault on Sec.
secondary side of the transformer.
Fault on Ter.
tertiary side of the transformer.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on the Protection and Fault selected from Plot Options.
Pin (Disable short-circuit Update)

Select this option to disable auto update of short-circuit current from three phase short-circuit analysis. When this option is checked and Run / Update short-circuit
Clipping kA button is clicked, Fault on Prim., Fault on Sec. and Fault on Ter. values remain unchanged or pinned.
Fault Frequency
Fault frequency determines the shape of the transformer damage curve depending upon the application of the transformer in an electrical system.
Note: For ANSI Category I and IV, frequent and infrequent curves are considered identical. Curves are drawn based on transformer Type selected on the Info page. A
Liquid-Fill selection is treated as Liquid-Fill Type transformer. All other Type selections are treated as Dry Type transformer.
Frequent
For applications in which faults occur frequently, the through-fault curve shows how the transformer is subjected to both thermal and mechanical damage (for example,
transformers with secondary or tertiary side overhead lines).
Infrequent
For applications in which faults occur infrequently, the through-fault curve shows how the transformer is subjected primarily to thermal damage (for example,
transformers with secondary or tertiary side conductors enclosed in a conduit).
Both
Both of Frequent and Infrequent fault damage curve is displayed in Star View TCC when this option is selected. Selection of this option also affects the evaluation of
source and load side protective devices in Auto-Evaluation program meaning the frequent damage curve is used for protection by load side protective device(s) and
infrequent damage curve is used for protection by source side device.
Curve Shift
Apply Curve Shift
Select to apply the transformer curve shift. The curve shift is applied as a multiplier to the current (horizontal axis) components of the entire transformer damage curve.
The applied curve shift factor is displayed on the Preferences tab of the Devices page in the Star View Plot Options. The shift factor is dependent upon:
 Winding connections specified on the Grounding page of the Transformer Editor.

 Source and Protection, and Fault side selections on the Preferences tab of the Devices page in the Star View Plot Options.
The table below describes this relationship:
Winding Connections Factor

Source and Protection On rd
Fault on 3 Winding
Delta Delta Any 0.87
Delta Wye Solid Grounded Any 0.58
Wye Solid Grounded Wye Solid Grounded Delta 0.67
Wye Open Wye Solid Grounded Delta 0.67
Source: IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRY APPLICATIONS. VOL. IA-22, NO.4, JULY/ AUGUST 1986
Magnetizing Inrush
Inrush Curve Type
Select the type of inrush curve to display: Points, Curve – Piecewise, or Curve – Equation.
Multiplier
Select current multiplier to plot the transformer inrush point on the Star View. Typical multiple values are 6, 8, 10 and 12. These are multiples of FLA of the
transformer. The FLA of the transformer is selected based on Device - Adjustment setting in the Star Plot options. For example, if the FLA of the transformer is 1804
Amps based on the secondary winding and the magnetizing inrush multiplier is 8, then the magnetizing current would be 8 times 1804 or 14.4 kA based on the
secondary side. Typical inrush multipliers for 3-winding transformers are given below.
kVA Multiplier
0 – 1000 9.5 – 12
1000 – 10000 5.9 – 11.4
10000 – 100000 3.6 – 7.5
> 100000 2.5 – 4.8
th
Source: Siemens Power Engineering Guide, Transmission and Distribution, 4 Edition
Duration\Time Constant
When the inrush curve type is Point or Curve – Piecewise, the inrush duration is entered here in cycles. When the inrush curve type is Curve – Equation, the time
constant is entered here in cycles.
Damage Curve
Show on TCC
Check the box to display the transformer damage curve on the Star View. Transformer damage curves are shown on Star Views by default.
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Grounding Page
Protection Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Harmonic Page
Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a harmonic library needs to be defined on this page.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, pick a manufacturer name and a model name (typically a current source harmonic type).
Type
This displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
This displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
This displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic library.
Wave Form
This displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)
This prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
This displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
This prints the harmonic spectrum.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Voltage Regulator
Voltage regulators on utility distribution systems deliver dependable voltage levels, to meet customer demands for improved voltage control.
A voltage regulator holds line voltage within predetermined limits and assures the proper operation of lights, appliances, HVAC, motors, etc. Voltage regulators may
include Line Drop Compensation (LDC) allowing for a constant voltage to be maintained at a load center remote from the regulator. A resistive and reactive element in
the sensing circuit of the control us set to simulate the resistance and reactance of the line from the regulator to the load center. Sample of the load current and regulated
system voltage is applied to these elements. A voltage drop is created across these elements that is proportional to the load on the actual system. The additional drop in
the LDC circuit reduces the voltage sensed causing the controller to raise the voltage.
The circuit determines the type of regulator. The circuit voltage and kVA ratings and required voltage correction determine the regulator size. To regulate a 3 Phase 3
Wire circuit with a system voltage of 13.8 kV and connected load of 1.5 MVA that requires 10% voltage correction:
The properties associated with Voltage Regulator of the electrical distribution system can be entered in Voltage Regulator Editor.
This editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Regulator
Rating Reliability
Impedance Remarks
Tap Comments
Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the Voltage Regulator ID, whether the regulator is in or out of service, directly connected bus is a Load or Source, the connection,
grounding, standard, type, FDR tag number, name, and manufacturer’s data.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Voltage Regulator. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of regulators increase. The default regulator ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager.
Source/Load
The Bus ID of the first connected bus to the terminal of the regulator is displayed. This bus can be designated to be a Source or Load through the use of the toggle
button. If the terminal of the regulator is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown.
Condition
Service
activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the de-energized color (theme manager). The default color for a de-energized element is grey.
State
Revision Data
Connection
The phase connections for a regulator are defined by selecting 3-Phase or 1–Phase. The default connection is 3-Phase and can be changed from the Defaults menu or
from the System Manager.
Once the voltage regulator is connected, the phase connection selections will become unavailable. You need to disconnect the regulator to change the connector type.
When the 3-Phase is selected, the 3-Reg., 2-Reg., and 1-Reg. options will become available and the default is 3-Reg.. When 1-Phase is selected, editor will default to 1-
Reg. option and the rest will become unavailable.
If 3-Reg. option is selected, then Delta Lag, Delta Lead or Y solid Grounded can be selected. If 2-Reg. option is selected, then Y Open A, Y Open B, Y Open C, Delta
Open AB, Delta Open BC, and Delta Open CA grounding options are available. If 1-Reg. is selected then A, B, C, AB, BC, and CA options
3 Phase
Select this to define the Voltage Regulator as three-phase. This regulator can only be connected to three-phase buses, branches and protective devices.
1 Phase
Select this to define the Voltage Regulator as single-phase. This regulator can only be connected to single-phase buses and branches and protective devices.
Standard
You can select either ANSI or IEC.
Type
You can select either Type A or Type B.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Voltage Regulator
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Regulator Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page
On the Rating page, specify the Voltage Regulator’s voltage, power rating, and alert data.
Voltage Rating
kV
Enter voltage rating of the Voltage Regulator in kilovolts. The rating is per regulator.
FLA
This displays the regulator’s full load amperes.
Bus kVnom
This displays the bus nominal kV.
Power Rating
Rated MVA
Enter the MVA rating per regulator.
Alert - Max
This value is used to calculate the overload percentage of the regulator. The Load Flow and Unbalance load flow modules will generate a Voltage Regulator Alert if the
Critical or Marginal percent limit of Maximum current capability of the regulator is exceeded. The Critical and Marginal percent limits can be specified in the Loading
section in the Alert page of the Load Flow and Unbalanced Load Flow study case editors under Cable/Busway or Line.
Voltage Regulator
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Regulator Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Page
On the Impedance page, specify the Voltage Regulator impedance and variation data.
Impedance
This is the impedance per regulator in percent, with the regulator’s MVA and kV ratings as the base values. These values correspond to the nominal impedance, which
are subject to manufacturer tolerance limits.
Include Impedance in Calculation

Check this option to include the Voltage Regulator’s impedance in Load Flow and Short Circuit based calculations. By default, this option is unckecked and related
impedance fields are hidden. The default can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager. Once the option is checked, related impedance fields
become active and data can be entered.
X/R and R/X Ratios

Enter the Voltage Regulator X/R or R/X ratio. These values are used in ETAP to calculate the Voltage Regulator winding resistances and reactances from the given
percent impedances.
%X and %R
These values are calculated from the given percent impedances using X/R or R/X ratios. These fields are editable and can also be used to calculate the percent
impedance as well as resistance and reactance ratios.
Typical Z and X/R

Voltage Regulator uses the same typical impedance and X/R ratio values as the 2-winding transformer. Click on the button to obtain the typical impedance and X/R
ratio. The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for ANSI 2-winding transformers are based on two sources: American National Standard C57.12.10 and Industrial
Power System Handbook by Beeman.
Typical Impedance for Transformer Less Than or Equal to 500 kVA:
The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for IEC 2-winding transformers are based on IEC 60076-5 1994 and Areva Ch.5
“Equivalent Circuits and Parameters of Power System Plant” listed in the table below:
Z Variation
Use this field to enter voltage regulator impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then the final voltage regulator impedance will
be calculated based on the nominal tap impedance values, voltage regulator impedance variation at –5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the
final transformer impedance.

Use this field to enter voltage regulator impedance variation at –5% tap position, in percent of the regulator’s impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to
adjust the regulator’s impedance due to winding tap changes.

Use this field to enter voltage regulator impedance variation at +5% tap position, in percent of the voltage regulator’s impedance at nominal tap position. This value is
used to adjust the voltage regulator impedance due to winding tap changes.
%Z
Variations.
Voltage Regulator
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Regulator Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Tap Page
Within the Tap page, specify the transformer tap data for both fixed taps and LTC taps. Transformer winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.
Potential Transformer
Parameters related to the potential transformer ratings can be specified in this section.
Primary
The Primary Rating of the potential transformer is entered here. The entered primary voltage needs to be entered in kV and it represents the voltage rating of the
potential transformer’s primary winding. The default value of the primary rating is the same as the voltage regulator’s voltage rating.
Secondary
The Secondary Rating of the potential transformer is entered here. The entered secondary voltage needs to be entered in Volts and it represents the voltage rating of the
potential transformer’s secondary winding. The default value of the secondary rating is 120 Volts.
Ratio
The Ratio field displays the actual turn ratio of the potential transformer based on the primary and secondary voltage rating and its independent of the connection type.
Phase angle shift between primary and secondary of potential Transformer, if any, it is not considered in the calculation.
Current Transformer
Parameters related to the current transformer ratings can be specified in this section..
Primary
Enter the current rating in Amps of the primary winding of the Potential Transformer. The default value of the primary rating is set to 100 Amps.
Secondary
Enter the current rating in Amps of the secondary winding of the Potential Transformer. The default value of the secondary rating is set to 5 Amps.
Ratio
The Ratio field displays the actual turn ratio of the current transformer based on the primary and secondary current rating.
Independent Phase Control

If this option is selected, then the user is allowed to modify the data for VR1, VR2 and VR3 independently, provided that connection is 3-Phase and 3-Reg are selected.
Note that VR1, VR2, and VR3 options are dependent on the Phase Connection, Number of Regulators and Grounding type specified in the info page of the voltage
regulator editor. Depending on the defined parameters, VR1, VR2 or VR3 may not be displayed.
Gang Operated Based on Measurements

If this option is selected the user can select the measurement of VR1, VR2, VR3, or Average to be used to control the tap settings for all three phases provided that
connection is 3-Phase and 3-Reg are selected. Note that VR1, VR2, and VR3 and Average selectable options are dependent on the Phase Connection, Number of
Regulators and Grounding type specified in the info page of the voltage regulator editor. Depending on the defined parameters VR1, VR2, VR3 or Average may not be
displayed.
Tap
Parameters related to Voltage regulator’s LTC tap settings can be specified in this section.
Auto or Operating % Tap

Here you can specify the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or to specify the initial position for the LTC automatic mode by clicking on the up or down
arrows or by directly entering the value. By clicking on the arrows, you will be stepping to the available tap settings based on the specified entries on Tap Step section.
The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies provided that the “Update Transformer LTCs” option is selected in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
VR1 Auto
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for Voltage Regulator 1 (i.e., if selected, LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is
in manual mode).
VR2 Auto
in manual mode).
VR3 Auto
in manual mode).
%Tap and kV Tap display

These three fields will display the corresponding kV or % Tap values for the LTC tap positions for VR1, VR2, and VR3.
Real Time Scanned

In these fields, Real-Time will display the Scanned Tap Position value for corresponding regulators when in On-Line monitoring mode.
Tap Step
In this section you can enter parameters related to Voltage regulator’s Tap Step settings.
% Tap / kV Tap
Enter the Voltage Regulator’s load tap changer (LTC) tap setting as a percentage while the button is set on % Tap; or click the button to switch to kV Tap selection.
When the kV Tap selection is set, enter the Voltage Regulator’s LTC tap setting in kV. In either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting
entry format.
%Tap and kV Tap display

These three fields will display the corresponding kV or % Tap values for LTC Min. Tap, Max. Tap, and Step.
Min
Enter the lower limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter –10.0 for a ±10% range (-15 for ±15%
range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value of the lower range of the LTC setting.
Max
Enter the upper limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 10.0 for a ±10% range (15 for ±15% range). If
the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value of the upper range of the LTC setting.
Step
Enter the LTC step size in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 0.625 for a ±10% range with 33 steps (sixteen steps on each side plus the
nominal setting). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the step size of the LTC in kV. Based on this entry, as well as the Maximum and Minimum tap settings defined, the
program automatically calculates the # of Taps and displays it on the # of Taps field. This value is calculated according to the following formula:
# of Taps
Enter the number of Taps or click the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the number of taps of the regulator. Based on this entry, as well as the Maximum and
Minimum tap settings defined, the program automatically calculates the step size and displays it on the Step field. This value is calculated and displayed according to
the following formula:
Voltage Regulator
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Regulator Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Regulator Page
Within the Regulator page, specify the voltage Regulator’s regulation settings. Such as the Control type, Forward and Reverse control settings, Forward and Reverse
Line Drop compensation settings, and Forward and Reverse Time Delay information.
Control
In this section, through the dropdown list, you can select the voltage regulator’s type of control from the following available options:
 Forward
 Reverse
 Bi-directional
 Neutral Idle
Selecting Forward Control will only enable fields associated with Forward Control. Selecting Reverse Control will only enable fields associated with Reverse Control.
Bi-directional will enable fields pertaining to both, Forward and Reverse Control. Neutral Idle will de-activate all associated fields.
Forward
In this section you can select the Bus or Line / Cable which the regulator will be controlling in the Forward direction.
Bus
Select this radio button to select a bus from a list of existing available buses for which the regulator will be controlling the voltage. Selecting this option will cause fields
in the Line Drop Compensation to not be displayed as these are not applicable.
Note: The load flow routine may not be able to regulate the voltages of the buses, cables or lines that are not affected by the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may
reach its limit before the desired voltage is reached for the controlled element. Possible examples of this are when the regulated element is not downstream of the
voltage regulator, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in between the two components. When this occurs, the LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated element.
Line / Cable / Section

Select this radio button to select a line or cable from a list of existing available lines and cables for which the regulator will be performing line drop compensation.
Selecting this option will cause fields in the Line Drop Compensation to be enabled.
Voltage Control (Forward)

In this section you can specify the Voltage Control settings such as the Band Center, Upper Band, and Lower Band voltage values for the Forward direction.
Band Center % / V
Enter the regulated voltage value in percent or volts of the regulated Secondary Voltage winding of the of the Potential Transformer.
Upper Band % / V
Enter the upper band limit value above the desired Band Center Voltage in percent or in volts.
Lower Band % / V
Enter the lower band limit value below the desired Band Center Voltage in percent or in volts.
Line Drop Compensation (Forward)

In this section you can define the resistance settings for the line drop compensation such as the resistance and reactance value for the Forward direction.
R
Enter the voltage regulator resistance setting in volts for line drop compensation.
X
Enter the voltage regulator reactance setting in volts for line drop compensation.
Time Delay (Forward)

In this section you can define the time delay settings of the regulator for the Forward direction.
Initial
Enter the regulator’s initial time delay in seconds or click on the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the value. This is the time duration from the moment when the
regulated bus voltage goes outside and stays outside the voltage control band to the time when the regulator triggers the first step change.
Operating
Enter the regulator’s operating time delay in seconds or click on the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the value. This is the time duration that the regulator takes to
complete a step change.
Reverse
In this section you can select the Bus or Line / Cable which the regulator will be controlling in the Reverse direction.
Bus
Select this radio button to select a bus from a list of existing available buses for which the regulator will be controlling the voltage. Selecting this option will cause fields
in the Line Drop Compensation to not be displayed as these are not applicable.
Note: The load flow routine may not be able to regulate the voltages of the buses, cables or lines that are not affected by the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may
reach its limit before the desired voltage is reached for the controlled element. Possible examples of this are when the regulated element is not downstream of the
voltage regulator, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in between the two components. When this occurs, the LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated element.
Line / Cable / Section

Select this radio button to select a line or cable from a list of existing available lines and cables for which the regulator will be performing line drop compensation.
Selecting this option will cause fields in the Line Drop Compensation to be enabled.
Voltage Control (Reverse)

In this section you can specify the Voltage Control settings such as the Band Center, Upper Band, and Lower Band voltage values for the Reverse direction.
Band Center % / V
Enter the regulated voltage value in percent or volts of the regulated Secondary Voltage winding of the of the Potential Transformer.
Upper Band % / V
Enter the upper band limit value above the desired Band Center Voltage in percent or in volts.
Lower Band % / V
Enter the lower band limit value below the desired Band Center Voltage in percent or in volts.
Line Drop Compensation (Forward)

In this section you can define the resistance settings for the line drop compensation such as the resistance and reactance value for the Reverse direction.
R
Enter the voltage regulator resistance setting in volts for line drop compensation.
X
Enter the voltage regulator reactance setting in volts for line drop compensation.
Time Delay (Reverse)

In this section you can define the time delay settings of the regulator for the Reverse direction.
Initial
Enter the regulator’s initial time delay in seconds or click on the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the value. This is the time duration from the moment when the
regulated bus voltage goes outside and stays outside the voltage control band to the time when the regulator triggers the first step change.
Operating
Enter the regulator’s operating time delay in seconds or click on the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the value. This is the time duration that the regulator takes to
complete a step change.
Voltage Regulator
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Regulator Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
service. When the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It
λP
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year. The passive failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of
protection breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore
service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers. Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The
passive failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the
remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
MTTR
µ
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years, calculated automatically based on λA and λP (MTTF = 1.0/( λA+ λP)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA and λP (FOR = MTTR/ (MTTR+8760/( λA + λP)).
MR
Replacement
Available
Check this box to enable rP
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Voltage Regulator
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Tap Page
Regulator Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Zigzag Grounding Transformer

Zigzag grounding transformer provides the zero-sequence impedance for the system. Zigzag grounding transformer shall act like a normal transformer with YgD
grounding connection; while the Delta side bus is open (not connected to any other element).
The properties associated with Zigzag grounding transformer of the electrical distribution system can be entered in Zigzag Grounding Transformer Editor.
In addition, this editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page
Within the Info page, specify the Zigzag Grounding Transformer ID, whether the transformer is in or out of service, bus it is connected to, FDR tag, name, and
manufacturer’s data.
Info
ID
the number of transformers increase. The default transformer ID (ZT) can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the System Manager.
Bus
Bus ID is shown for the connecting bus of a zigzag grounding transformer. If the terminal of a transformer is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for
the Bus. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection, after you
click OK.
Note: You can only connect to bus that reside in the same view where the zigzag grounding transformer resides, that is, you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the
Dumpster or in another composite network.
existing protective device to the new bus (as shown in the figure below, where ZT2 is reconnected from Bus3 to Bus8).
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the bus ID.
Condition
Service
activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the de-energized color (theme manager). The default color for a de-energized element is grey.
Revision Data.
State
Revision Data
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data
is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names, navigate to the Project
Menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Lock / Unlock

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page
On the Rating page, specify the zigzag grounding transformer’s voltage and current ratings, impedance and grounding type.
Rating
Rating kV
Enter voltage rating of the zigzag grounding transformer in kilovolts. It defaults to the connected bus nominal kV.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous phase current rating in Amperes.
Fault Amp
Enter the short time phase fault current rating in Amperes. Make sure that Fault Amps should always be greater or equal to Continuous Amps.
Duration
Enter the rated time duration under fault conditions in seconds.
Impedance
Ohm
Enter grounding resistor or reactor in ohms.
X/R
Enter the grounding transformer X/R ratio.
Grounding
Type
Choose from the three grounding types provided in the list box:
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded transformer, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.
Ohm
Resistor or Reactor impedance in ohms.
Bus kVnom
Displays the nominal kV rating of the connected bus.

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
service. When the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It
MTTR
µ
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years, calculated automatically based on λA and λP (MTTF = 1.0/( λA+ λP)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA and λP (FOR = MTTR/ (MTTR+8760/( λA + λP)).
MR
Replacement
Available
rP
Library

Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Cable Editor Overview
The properties associated with cables of the electrical distribution system the one-line diagram can be entered in this data editor.
ETAP allows you to place cables in the one-line diagram to connect two elements (two buses, a motor to a bus, or a static load to a bus) and place the same cable in a
cable raceway. However, you can add cables to the one-line diagram without placing them in a cable raceway, or add cables to the raceway without adding them to the
one-line diagram. To explain this further, here are the definitions of the four types of cables in ETAP.
1. One-Line Cable appears as a graphical element on the one-line diagram. This is a cable that you add to the one-line
diagram to connect buses, but has not been previously routed through any cable raceway, i.e., does not exist in any raceway.
2. Equipment Cable can be attached to equipment such as motors and static loads, but do not appear graphically as a separate
element on the one-line diagram. This is a cable that you add to equipment from the equipment editor, and has not been
placed in any raceway.
3. Raceway Cable is used exclusively within the cable raceway system only. This is a cable, which is routed through a
raceway such as an underground cable system, but does not exist in the one-line diagram or as an equipment cable.
4. Compound Cable represents a cable that is included in the cable raceway system as well as the one-line diagram (either as
a one-line or equipment cable). This cable is added to the one-line diagram as a one-line or equipment cable, and then is
placed inside a raceway (graphically or from Cable or Raceway Editors). Or, conversely, the cable is added as a raceway
cable, and then is placed in the one-line diagram as a one-line cable.
Compound Cables
The following paragraphs describe three different methods of changing a one-line or equipment cable to a compound cable (routing an existing cable through a
raceway):
From the underground raceway presentation, click the Existing Cable button on the Edit toolbar and place the cable in the desired location. Then select the desired one-
line or equipment cable from the selection box provided.
From the Cable Editor, Routing page, route the cable through any raceway that exists in the system. These cables are attached or associated with the raceways without
being placed in a specific location inside the raceway. From the underground raceway system, you can then graphically move the cable to the desired location.
To graphically place a one-line cable inside a cable raceway, select the cable from the one-line diagram and press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button
down). The pointer will now have an X over it indicating that you can only drop it in an underground cable system. Hold the mouse button down until you have moved
the pointer from the one-line view to the UGS view, place the pointer on top of a conduit or the desired location in a raceway, and then release the mouse button. Since
an equipment cable is not displayed graphically in the one-line diagram, you can only use the first two methods explained above to route an equipment cable.
Note: a raceway cable cannot be changed to an equipment cable. However, an equipment cable can be changed to a compound cable.
You can add a raceway cable to the one-line diagram and make it a compound cable in two ways:
1. First select the cable from the raceway and cut it to the Dumpster. Now you can add it back to the same raceway as an existing cable while a copy of it stays in
the Dumpster. To add this cable to the one-line diagram, use the Move From Dumpster command.
2. Select the cable from the raceway and then press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button down). The pointer will change to a cable shape with an X
over it. Hold the mouse button down until you have moved the pointer from the UGS view to the desired location on the one-line view, and then release the
mouse button.
The Cable Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Protection Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Cable Editor

You can specify the cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Length, Size, number of conductors per phase, and Library link from within the Info page of the
cable editor.
Cable Type
This information is displayed on top of every page of the Cable Editor to reflect the cable type and size selected from the Cable Library. This is a partial list of the
library header which includes the library source name (ICEA, NEC), rated voltage (0.6, 5, 15 kV), voltage class (100%, 133%), # of conductors per cable (1/C, 3/C),
2
conductor type (CU, AL), insulation type (Rubber, XLPE), installation type (Magnetic/Non-Mag.), and cable size (350 kcmil, 180 mm ). The unit for cable sizes will be
in AWG/kcmil for English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables.
Note: ETAP provides list of all available cable sizes from the selected library for quick selection.
If you change the cable size, all library data will be substituted from the cable library into the Cable Editor. If you modify any data that was extracted from the library,
the color of Cable Type will change to a dark blue color to indicate that there is a conflict between the editor and library data.
Info
ID
Entering a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each cable. The assigned IDs consist of the default cable ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as
the number of cables increase. The default cable ID (Cable) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a cable branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new
connection after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
For 3 Phase Cables, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop down lists. For Single Phase Cables only single phase buses will be displayed.
If a branch is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the branch to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown here where Branch X is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the From and To bus IDs for your convenience.
Single Phase Cable can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as such, then the Phase Adapter ID will be shown in the Primary or Secondary
field.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Connection
Cables can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase cable by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Defines the cable as a three-phase cable. This cable can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Defines the cable as a single-phase cable.
Library
Library Button
To select cables from the Cable Library, click the Library button and the Cable Library Quick Pick will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library
type and size at the same time.
Note: After the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to the Cable Editor, the cable size can be changed directly from the Cable Editor and
the cable parameters are refreshed from the library. Therefore, the most important action is to select the correct Cable Library type from the Cable Library Quick Pick.
When data is transferred from the Cable Library, ETAP automatically corrects the cable reactances for the system frequency.
Link to Library
A library link is also available to use Cable Library data instead of the stored cable impedance and dimension parameters that are displayed in the Cable Editor.
Note: Link to Library is only used at the time of execution of studies. For example, when you run a load flow study, ETAP uses the cable library type and size as an
identifier to extract data from the Cable Library. This option is provided so that you can globally update the cable parameters by changing the library data only.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Length
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Note: every cable in the system can have a different unit.
Tolerance
Enter the percent of tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to consider +/- % tolerance in line length, effectively increasing
or decreasing the impedance based on the type of study being performed.
# Conductors / Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e. if 2-3/C cables or 6-1/C cables are used (6 conductors total), then the number of conductors per phase is equal to two (2).
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Protection Page (3 Phase)
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Physical Page - Cable Editor

Order of Layers
This field displays the order of the layers of cables: Conductor, Insulation, Shield/Screen, Sheath, Armor, and Jacket, or Conductor, Insulation, Shield/Screen, Armor,
Sheath, and Jacket. The order of the cable layers is based on cable library selection.
Dimensions
The physical properties of cables entered in this page are used for calculating engineering data needed for cable ampacity derating studies (U/G Raceway Systems), as
well as for positive and zero sequence impedance calculations.
Conductor Construction
Conductor construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for calculating the ac to dc ratio parameters. Several available choices of
conductor construction are:
ConRnd Concentric Round None Coated None Treated

ConRnd-Coated Concentric Round Coated None Treated
ConRnd-Treated Concentric Round None Coated Treated
CmpRnd-Treated Compact Round None Coated Treated
CmpSgm Compact Segmental None Coated None Treated
CmpSgm-Coated Compact Segmental Coated None Treated
CmpSgm-Treated Compact Segmental None Coated Treated
CmpSct-Treated Compact Sector None Coated Treated
The coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to a drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on
paper power cables.
Diameter
This is the physical outside diameter (OD) of the conductor in inches or centimeters.
Insulation
Conductor insulation type.
Thickness
This is the thickness of the conductor insulation in mils or mm.
Shield/Screen
Choose shielded/screened or not shielded/screened.
Thickness
This is the thickness of the shield/screen in mils or mm.
Max Stress
This is the calculated maximum voltage stress of the conductor insulation in V/mil or V/mm.
Shield/Screen Grounding
Choose either the open or grounded option. Grounded option implies that the shield is grounded at more than one location.
Armor
Select armor type among:
Steel Armor
None St Armor/45dg/25w
St Armor/45dg/80w Aluminum Armor
St Armor/30dg/15w St Armor/45dg/30w
St Armor/45dg/90w Cu Concentric
St Armor/45dg/100w Wire
St Armor/45dg/9999w Al Concentric
Copper Armor Wire
Examples of Armor type definitions:
Type Definition
St Armor/30dg/15w Steel Armor with 30 Degree deviation from cable axis; 15 wires
St Armor/45dg/50w Steel Armor with 45 Degree deviation from cable axis; 50 wires
Note: Copper Armor, Steel Armor, Aluminum Armor, Copper Concentric Wire, and Aluminum Concentric Wire are all assumed to have 15 wires inclined at 30 degrees
(30dg/15w).
Note: Copper and Aluminum Concentric Wires are usually used for grounding and have different thermal properties than regular wires that are taken into account in the
UnderGround raceway System (UGS) calculations.
Diameter
Armor diameter in mm or mils.
Sheath
Select sheath type among:
None
Lead Sheath
Aluminum Sheath
Copper Sheath
Thickness
Thickness of the sheath in mm or mils.
Armor / Sheath Grounding

Select armor/sheath connection type between open or grounded.
Max Induced
This is the maximum induced voltage gradient on the sheath or/and armor in V/ft or V/m. This value is calculated for 3 phase single core cables. It is based on the
Layout (Triplex or Flat) specified in the Configuration page. The loading current is based on the average Operating Load/Current specified in the Loading page. If
Phase Max Operating Current is selected for phase conductor sizing, the maximum phase operating current will be used for this calculation.
Jacket
Select jacket type among:
None NeoPrene RHH THW

Paper PVC RHW THWN THWN2
PE FEP SA TW USE2
XLPE FEPB SIS UF XHHW2
EPR MI TA USE ZW
SBR MTW TBS V ZW2
Rubber PFA TFE XHHW XHH
Rubber1 PFAH THHN RHW2 Z
Rubber2 RH THHW THW2
For further details please refer to “Article 300 General Requirements for Wiring Methods and Materials” of the National Electric Code (NEC).
Thickness
Thickness of the sheath in mm or mils.
Cable
Source name (manufacturer or technical standard).
Diameter
Cable outside diameter (OD) in inches or cm.
DC Resistance
Rdc
This is the DC resistance of the cable in micro ohm per foot/meter at 25 degrees C.
Cable Pulling
Weight
This is the weight of the cable in lbs/1000ft or kg/km.
Max. Tension
This is the maximum tension that the cable can withstand without damage in lbs/kcmil or kg/mm2.
Max. SW
This is the maximum Side Wall pressure in lbs/ft or kg/m.
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Page - Cable Editor

Option
User can select between library (Lib) values or calculated (Calc) values for the Positive and/or Zero sequence impedances. Unused fields will be grayed-out.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a length should also be designated, including a unit from the list
box. Units available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Project frequency
This field shows the frequency selected for the project
Library Impedance
If in the Option field the button Lib is selected for either or both Positive and Zero sequence impedance, red arrows will point at ETAP library values for the following
parameters: R, X, L, Z, X/R, R/X, Y, R0, X0, L0, Z0, X0/R0, R0/X0, Y0; library values are editable and if modified the header will turn blue.
In particular:
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R & R0)

Positive and zero sequence resistances at the base temperature, in ohms, or ohms per unit length, per conductor. This is for each conductor, not the total resistance per
phase. ETAP corrects these resistances for different studies based on the specified temperature limits, as well as on the number of conductors per phase. The zero
sequence resistance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X & X0)

Positive and zero sequence reactance levels, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor. This is for each conductor, not the total reactance per phase. When cable
data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically corrects for the current project operating frequency. Users may enter different
values for the reactances, but at the system operating frequency specified for the data file. After the reactances are entered,ETAP will not make any further adjustment.
The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Positive and Zero sequence inductances (L and L0)

Positive and zero sequence library inductances in Henries, or Henries per unit length, are based on the library values X and X0, given at the selected library frequency
(50 or 60 Hz). Users can manually change the values of X and/or X0, and updated values for L and L0 will accordingly be shown. Users can also change L and/or L0,
and updated values for X and/or X0 based on project frequency will be shown.
Positive and Zero sequence impedances (Z)
Positive and zero sequence library impedances in Ohm, or Ohm per unit length, are based on the library values of the cable R, X, R0 and X0.
Positive and Zero “X over R” ratios (X/R and X0/R0)

Positive and zero sequence library X over R ratios are based on the library values of the cable R, X, R0 and X0.
Positive and Zero “R over X” ratios (R/X and R0/X0)

Positive and zero sequence library R over X ratios are based on the library values of the cable R, X, R0 and X0.
Note that ETAP automatically doubles the cable R & X values for single phase calculations to represent both the forward and return conductors.
Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y & Y0)

Positive and zero sequence susceptance values from library in Siemens, or Siemens per unit length, for each conductor. If the value of Y is greater than zero, the circuit
element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the charging susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the circuit. If Y=0, the cable is treated as a simple
impedance. Susceptances can be changed, but must be entered at the system operating frequency specified for the data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz)
or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically corrects for the system operating frequency. After the susceptances are entered, ETAP will not make any further
adjustment to their values.The zero sequence susceptance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a length should also be designated, including a unit from the list
box. Units available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Calculated Impedance
If in the Option field the button Calc is selected for either or both Positive and Zero sequence impedance, red arrows will point at the calculated values for the following
parameters: R, X, L, Z, X/R, R/X, Y, R0, X0, L0, Z0, X0/R0, R0/X0, Y0, whose symbols have the same meanings as the same above; calculated values, based on the
equations of IEC 60909-3, IEC60287-1-1 and ICEA P-34-359, are not editable.
In particular:
 If Calc is selected for either or both Pos. and Zero sequence impedances, the values of Y1 and/or Y0 are also calculated.
 If Calc is selected for either or both Pos. and Zero sequence impedances, the value of L1 and L0 will be determined from the calculated values of X1 and/or X0,
obtained at the project frequency.
 If Calc is selected for either or both Pos. and Zero sequence impedances, the results are displayed according to the user choice in the Units box; by changing the
units, values in the Calc fields will accordingly change. It is important to note that Library values, although not shown, will also have the same unit.
 If the project frequency is changed for an existing project, the following warning message will be displayed:
After OK is pressed, ETAP will use the new project frequency to recalculate X1 and X0 based on the original calculated values. The new project frequency will also be
used to recalculate Y1 based on the original calculated value. Besides cables, the rest of the equipment parameters are not changed with the frequency.
Cable Temperature
Base Temperature
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistances are entered.
Minimum & Maximum Temperature

Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero sequence resistances (R and R0) for different studies. The first
limit is the minimum operating temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most conservative temperature limit for each
study type. For example:
Temperature Limit
Min Max
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
If this correction is not wanted, set both minimum and maximum temperature limits equal to the base temperature. ETAP uses the following equations for temperature
corrections:
R’ = R ( 234.5 + Tc )/( 234.5 + Tb ) Copper Conductors
R’ = R ( 228.1 + Tc )/( 228.1 + Tb ) Aluminum Conductors
where:
R = Resistance at base temperature Tb
R’ = Resistance at operating temperature Tc
Tb = Conductor base temperature in °C
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in °C
If the conductor type is not known (no cable library is selected), ETAP defaults to copper as a conductor type.
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Configuration Page - Cable Editor

The Configuration page is utilized to set up cable configuration that details the cable components which include Neutral and Protective conductors, Armor, Sheath and
also Auxiliary Components (outside of cable) which include Neutral, Protective and Structure Conductors.
Note: The conductors in this page are not considered in Load Flow or Short Circuit based modules and are only utilized in STAR module, Shock Protection, and
protective conductor sizing features for this release. For more information about shock protection calculation and protective conductor sizing, refer to Chapter Protective
Sizing and Shock Protection. For more information about plotting the conductors in STAR, refer to the cable protection page and Chapter STAR Views (TCC).
The fields in configuration page are grouped inside and outside a table. The fields inside the table are located below the following columns:
 Cable
 Conductor
 No. of Conductors
 Size
 Type
 R
 X
 Insulation
The checkboxes and buttons outside the table are located below the following columns:
 Auxiliary Cable Bunched check box

 Aux Library button
 Typical R, X button
Cable
The Neutral and Protective conductors can be part of the main cable that are the same size as the Phase conductor or smaller.
Separate auxiliary conductors (neutral and protective) that are external to the main cable or structures can also be selected.
The structure is only available when the cable is connected to a TT or IT earthing type system.
Main
The Main cable set contains the Phase, Neutral, Protective conductors, Armor and Sheath.
The Neutral and Protective rows grays out if one of the following conditions occur:
1. A cable is not selected from the library

2. The cable selected from the library does not have extra conductors for Neutral or Protective and there is no Ground/Neutral conductor available.
Aux
The Auxiliary section allows users to specify Neutral and Protective conductors that are external to the main cable. If the cable is connected to a TT or IT earthing type
system, users can also specify the structure impedance.
Conductor
Phase
The values of the Phase conductor are associated with the information shown in the header at the top of the editor. The conductor’s parameters can be loaded from the
library by selecting the library button in the info page or their impedance can be manually entered in the impedance page.
Main Neutral
This row is only visible for three phase cables and reflects the Neutral conductor of the main cable. If the conductor is the same size as the Phase conductor, then it will
share all its characteristics; otherwise, its R and X values are loaded from the R (G/N) and X (G/N) from the impedance page of the cable library. Multiple Neutral
conductors can be selected under the “No. of Cond.” Column; for more information, refer to the “No. of cond.” Section.
Main Protective
This reflects Protective conductor of the main cable. If the conductor is the same size as the Phase conductor, then it will share all its characteristics; otherwise, its R and
X values are loaded from the R (G/N) and X (G/N) from the impedance page of the cable library. Multiple Protective conductors can be selected under the “No. of
Cond.” Column; for more information, refer to the “No. of cond.” Section.
Main Armor
This reflects the armor of the main cable which can be utilized as a return path for the Electric Shock calculation. Its R and X values can be populated manually or by
using the “Typical Armor Z” button. The typical Armor Z button will be displayed once the row is selected. In order to activate the “Typical Armor Z” button, refer to
the “Typical Armor Z” section. Refer to Chapter 46, for how to perform the thermal checking of armor of cables.
Main Sheath
This reflects the Sheath of the main cable which can be utilized as a return path for the Electric Shock calculation. Its R and X values can be populated manually or by
using the “Typical Sheath Z” button. The typical Sheath Z button will be displayed once the row is selected. In order to activate the “Typical Sheath Z” button, refer to
the “Typical Sheath Z” section. On how to perform the thermal checking of the sheath of cables, refer to Chapter Protective Sizing and Shock Protection.
Auxiliary (Aux) Neutral

This row is only visible for three phase cables and reflects the external Neutral conductors outside of the main cable.
The auxiliary neutral cable parameters (Size, Type, R, and X) can be selected by clicking on either the library button or the “Typical R, X” button at the bottom of the
page. Multiple Neutral conductors can be selected under the “No. of Cond.” Column; for more information, refer to the “No. of cond.” Section.
Auxiliary (Aux) Protective

This reflects the external Protective conductor. The protective conductors parameters (Size, Type, R, and X) can be selected by clicking on either the library button or
the “Typical R, X” button at the bottom of the page. Multiple Protective conductors can be selected under the “No. of Cond.” Column; for more information, refer to the
“No. of cond.” Section.
Auxiliary Structure
This can reflect the installation structure which can be used distribute fault current to ground. This field is only visible when TT or IT earthing type is set by the source
connected to the cable.
No. of Conductors
Phase
The number of conductors for the Phase conductor is calculated based on:
 Phase configuration (e.g. 3-phase, 1-phase 2 Wire, 1-phase 3 Wire)
 Number of conductors per cable displayed in the cable editor header(e.g. 1/C, 3/C)
 Number of conductors per phase entered in the info page (e.g. 4 conductors/phase)
The calculation assumes that if:
 The number of conductors in the cable (shown in cable editor header) is equal to or greater (e.g. 5/C) than the number of phases and wires (e.g. 1 phase 2 Wire
which equates to 2 conductors), then there will be excess conductors (i.e. 3 conductors) that can be utilized as Neutral or Protective conductors inside of the main
cable.
 The number of conductors per cable (e.g. 1/C) is less than the number of Phases and wires (e.g. 1 phase 2 Wire); then there will not be enough excess conductors
that can be utilized for phase as well as Neutral or Protective conductors inside of the main cable. The calculation will assume the existence of multiple cables in
order to fulfill the phase configuration (two cables will be assumed); however, the main Neutral and Protective conductor rows will be grayed-out due to lack of
excess conductors.
 The number of conductors per cable (e.g. 2/C) is less than the number of phases and wires (e.g. 3 phase); then there will not be enough excess conductors that can
be utilized for Phase as well as Neutral or Protective conductors inside of the main cable. The calculation will assume multiple cables in order to fulfill the phase
configuration (three cables with two cores each will be assumed). The three phases will be distributed between the three cables and the remaining three cores can
be used as either Neutral or Protective conductors.
Main Neutral
The available number of conductors for the main Neutral conductor will be the excess conductors after the distribution of Phase conductors. Refer to the Phase section
for more information.
If the cable library provides dedicated Ground/Neutral (Protective Earth for IEC cables) conductors that are of different size from the phase conductors, the main
Neutral conductor row can utilize the conductors that are loaded from the library.
Main Protective
The available number of conductors for the main Protective conductor will be the excess conductors after the distribution of Phase conductors. Refer to the Phase
section for more information.
If the cable library provides dedicated Ground/Neutral conductors that are of different sizes from the phase conductors, the main Protective conductor row can utilize
the conductors that are loaded from the library.
Aux Neutral
Select up to 10 auxiliary Neutral conductors.
Aux Protective
Select up to 10 auxiliary Protective conductors.
Size
Phase
The size reflects the size chosen from the library in the info page
Main Neutral
The main neutral size is either selectable or display only. It is selectable if there is a dedicated Ground/Neutral (Protective Earth) conductor with a different size loaded
from the library. It becomes display only when there are no dedicated Ground/Neutral conductors that are of a different size that can be loaded from the library.
Main Protective
The main protective size is either selectable or display only. It is selectable if there is a dedicated Ground/Neutral conductor with a different size loaded from the library.
It becomes display only when there are no dedicated Ground/Neutral conductors that are of a different size that can be loaded from the library.
Aux Neutral
The auxiliary neutral conductor can have its size chosen manually from the size dropdown box, loaded from the library using the library button available at the bottom
of the page, or loaded using the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the page. If the parameters are loaded from the library, then the phase conductors of the library will
be utilized as the Neutral conductors.
Aux Protective
The auxiliary protective conductor can have its size chosen manually from the size dropdown box, loaded from the library using the library button available at the
bottom of the page, or loaded using the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the page. If the parameters are loaded from the library, then the phase conductors of the
library will be utilized as the Protective conductors.
Type
Phase
The type reflects the conductor type chosen from the library in the info page.
Main Neutral
Main Protective
Aux Neutral
The auxiliary neutral conductor can have its type chosen manually from the type dropdown list, loaded from the library using the library button available at the bottom
of the page, or loaded using the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the page.
If users manually choose a different type when the insulation displays as “Library”, then the R&X value will be reset to 0.
Aux Protective
The auxiliary protective conductor can have its type chosen manually from the type dropdown list, loaded from the library using the library button available at the
bottom of the page, or loaded using the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the page.
If users manually choose a different type when the insulation displays as “Library”, then the R&X value will be reset to 0.
R, X
Phase
The R and X fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page and displayed in the impedance page.
Main Neutral
The R and X fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page. These values can be edited if the main neutral size is different from the
size of the Phase conductor or can be edited from the impedance page if the size is the same as the phase conductor.
Main Protective
The R and X fields reflect the impedance values loaded using the library button in the info page. These values can be edited if the main protective size is different from
the size of the phase conductor or can be edited from the impedance page if the size is the same as the Phase conductor.
Armor
The Armor R and X may be entered manually in ohms, or ohms per unit length. Once one of those fields is selected and the cable editor header voltage is 3.3 kV or less,
the “Typical Armor Z” button will be activated and typical low voltage cable Armor resistance may be loaded.
Sheath
The Sheath R and X may be entered manually in ohms, or ohms per unit length. Once one of those fields is selected and the cable editor header voltage is 3.3 kV or less,
the “Typical Sheath Z” button will be activated and typical low voltage cable Sheath resistance may be loaded.
Aux Neutral
The auxiliary Neutral conductor can have the R and X values entered manually, loaded from the library using the library button available at the bottom of the page, or
loaded using the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the page.
Aux Protective
The auxiliary Protective conductor can have the R and X values entered manually, loaded from the library using the library button available at the bottom of the page, or
loaded using the Typical R, X button at the bottom of the page.
Structure
The Structure R and X can be entered manually in ohms or ohms per unit length. This field is only displayed when the selected source earthing type is a TT or IT type.
Insulation
Phase
This is insulation type, also shown in the header, that is loaded from library.
Main Neutral
Main Protective
Aux Neutral
The choices shown in the insulation dropdown list will be utilized in a future release of ETAP. The Library insulation will be displayed if the cable parameters are
loaded from the library.
Aux Protective
The choices shown in the insulation dropdown list are utilized for protective conductor thermal sizing. The Library insulation will be displayed if the cable parameters
are loaded from the library.
Aux Cable Bunched

This check box is visible only if the Tables method for the Factor k calculation is selected in the Sizing- GND/PE page and the proper Aux Protective conductor type of
insulation is selected in the Capacity/Ampacity page based on table A54.4 from the IEC standard and table 54.3 from BS7671 standard.
Typical R, X
If the Auxiliary Neutral, or Auxiliary Protective rows are selected, then the “Typical R, X” button will be activated and the Typical Cable Data window will be ready to
be launched.
Typical Armor Z / Typical Sheath Z

If the Armor and/or Sheath rows are selected and the main cable, loaded from library, is 3.3 kV or less, then the “Typical Armor/ Typical Sheath Z” button will appear
and typical armor data or typical sheath data will populate the armor/sheath R and X fields. If the selected cable is above 3.3 kV, the Typical Armor Z and the Typical
Sheath Z buttons will not be displayed.
Units
Impedance
The impedance units reflect the impedance unit selected in the cable impedance page.
Size
The Size units reflect the wire size unit selected in the cable editor Info page, which is also displayed in the cable editor header.
No. of Conductors/Phase
This reflects how many conductors are assigned per phase and is selected from the cable editor Info page.
Aux Library
If the Auxiliary Neutral or the Auxiliary Protective rows are selected, then the “Aux Library” button will be activated and the quick pick window will be ready to be
launched. The data selected from the quick pick will only apply to the auxiliary row selected.
This button will not be activated for the Main Neutral, Main Protective, Armor, Sheath and Structure rows.
Layout for Ampacity and Impedance calc

This section is only available if single-core cables are selected.
Trefoil
Single-core cables are arranged in a trefoil formation (cables are bound together, thus and their center-to-center distance is constant along their run).
Flat
Single-core cables are arranged in a flat formation; C-C spacing indicates the center-to-center distance between phase conductors, which is supposed to be constant
along the entire run of cables.
Random Lay
Single-core cables are not bound together and lie loosely in one conduit, so that their spacing may be unequal, perhaps caused by thermal flexing.
Soil
Resistivity
The soil resistivity is expressed if the Ohm-m. Default value is 100 Ohm-m.
Counduit for Impedance Calc

Types and sizes of conduits are taken into account for sequence impedance calculations.
Type
Select conduit among: Aluminum, PVC and Steel.
Size
Select the conduit size in inches or millimeters among the following standard sizes:
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Loading Page - Cable Editor

The Loading Page provides information regarding cable loading (amp) and other parameters, which are used in cable ampacity derating (Underground Raceway
System) and cable sizing calculations.
Operating Load / Current

The operating load is specified in amps. This value is used for the steady-state temperature calculation or as the initial value of the cable load profile for the transient
temperature calculation. The operating Avg. Phase A, Phase B, and Phase C can be updated with the results from the load flow studies. You can do this by checking the
Update Cable Load Amp option in the Info Page of the Load Flow and Unbalanced Load Flow Study Cases.
%PF is updated with operating current updating from load flow studies. %PF is used in Vd calculation in phase conductor sizing.
Growth Factor (GF)

The Projection Multiplying Factor (MF) must be specified in percent. This value is used to indicate future load projection (load reduction or growth). You can select the
option to use this Projection Multiplying Factor for cable temperature calculations from the Cable Ampacity Derating Study Case.
Loading Current for Sizing

Operating Current
The operating load current specified for this cable in the Loading page will be used if this option is selected.
Full Load Amps of Element

The continuous current rating (rated current or FLA) of the selected element will be used for sizing requirements. The motor ID is displayed here for motor equipment
cables and the FLA of the motor is used.
User-Defined
Use this option to enter any value for the cable current and %PF.
NEC 430.6
The ampacity of the equipment cables is based on the motor ratings as determined by section 430.6 of NEC code. The current, in Amps, is derived based on the
following:
Motor Nameplate HP NEC Table

Motor Type Motor Rated kV Motor Connection
(or equivalent in kW) Number
DC Motor 1/4 to 200 0.090 to 0.550 430.247
AC Induction 1/6 to 10 0.115 to 0.23 Phase-to-Ground 430.248
AC Synchronous 1/6 to 10 0.115 to 0.23 Phase-to-Ground 430.248
AC Induction 1/2 to 200 0.115 to 2.3 Phase-to-Phase 430.249
AC Synchronous 1/2 to 200 0.115 to 2.3 Phase-to-Phase 430.249
AC Induction 1/2 to 500 0.115 to 2.3 3-Phase 430.250
AC Synchronous 25 to 200 0.23 to 2.3 3-Phase 430.250
Harmonics
Zero Seq./Triple
Enter the zero sequence/triple harmonic content in percent of the cable fundamental current.
Cf (Other Orders)
This field displays the Cf factor for other harmonic orders (excluding multiples of 3rd order harmonics). The harmonic order factor is entered or automatically
calculated based on the Harmonic Spectrum defined in the Harmonic section of the Loading page. Note: ETAP uses Cf to represent the Other Harmonic Orders factor
Ch as used by BS-7671.
The formula provided in BS-7671 Standard is used in the determination of the Cf factor.
Spectrum
Clicking on this button brings up the Harmonic Spectrum dialog for the user to enter the harmonics spectrum % Magnitude vs. Order. The harmonic magnitude is in the
percent of the cable fundamental current.
Add/Delete
By clicking Add or Delete, user can add or delete harmonic orders to define the spectrum.
Library
The user has the choice to select the harmonic spectrum from ETAP Harmonic Library by clicking on Library.
Select
If the user has previously run a harmonic load flow study, the associated harmonic spectrum can be selected to be used by clicking on the Select button.
Help
This option will guide the user to the appropriate Help File section.
OK/Cancel
These options will accept or cancel the user-entered data in this window.
UnderGround Raceway (UGS)

Load Factor
The load factor is the ratio of the average load to peak load in percent. Use the following equation to calculate the load factor:
Load Factor = 100 ( kWi x Ti )/( kWp x Tt ) %

= 100 E/( kWi x Tt ) %
where
i = Interval of time when the load is non-zero
kWi = Load at interval i
Ti = Number of hours of interval i
kWp = Peak load
Tt = Ton + Toff
Ton = Total hours when the load is on
Toff = Total hours when the load is off
E = Energy (kWh) consumed by load over the interval
If the cable carries load (current) at every interval, then the equation can be simplified to the percentage of time that the cable will be carrying the current:
Load Factor = 100 Ton/Tt %

= 100 % (if it carries the load for 24 hours per day)
IEC 287 method ignores the load factor. It uses 100% Load factor for the calculation of the conductor temperature.
Sheath/Armor Current
The sheath/armor current can be specified as a percent of the cable load current. This value indicates the amount of neutral or ground current that is carried by sheath or
armor, and is considered only by the Neher-McGrath method.
Transient Load Profile

The load profile provides up to 20 time and current entry fields for specifying the loading pattern of the cable as a function of time.
# Time Current
1 0.0 230
2 3.5 560
3 7.3 400
4 0.0 0.0 (all data from this point are
ignored since time = 0.0)
In this example, the cable loading is changed from the steady-state (initial value) to 230 amperes at time zero, to 560 amps at time 3.5 hours, and finally to 400 amps
after 7.3 hours. The steady-state or initial value can either be 230 amps (value entered at the first time slot) or it can be set equal to the cable operating load. You can set
the option for the initial/steady-state value from the Cable Derating Study Case Editor.
Time Unit
Select the time units for the load profile.
Optimization Options
These options are for ampacity and sizing calculations for the U/G raceway systems.
Fixed Current
If this box is checked, the cable current will remain unchanged for the ampacity calculations (Uniform Temperature and Uniform Ampacity). Use this flag for cables
that do not require ampacity optimization.
Fixed Size
If this box is checked, the cable size will remain fixed for the cable sizing calculations.
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Ampacity/Capacity Page
Refer to Chapter Cable Ampacity and Sizing for detailed information.
Calculation Methods and Standards
Depending on the cable installation type, different methods can be used to calculate cable current-carrying capability (ampacity/capacity).
IEEE 399
This calculation method is according to the IEEE Std 399, IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis. It covers installation
types of underground duct and directly buried. The calculation is based on ampacity at a base condition and adjustment factors derived from detailed calculations using
the Neher-McGrath Method.
These factors established a maximum feasible load capacity, which results in no reduction of the cable’s expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of
several components as listed on the following page.
Fta = Derating factor for ambient temperature

Ftc = Derating factor for maximum allowable conductor temperature
Fth = Derating factor for underground soil thermal resistance
Fg = Derating factor for cable grouping
Fc = Derating factor for A/G tray covers
Fm = Derating factor for A/G tray maintained spacing
Fce = Cumulative effect factor for A/G trays
Fm = Derating factor for A/G conduit (NEC and diversity factor)
Ffc = Derating factor for A/G fire coating
Ffs = Derating factor for A/G fire stop
Ffw = Derating factor for A/G fire wrap
ICEA P-54-440
The method based on ICEA P-54-440 applies to cables in above ground trays using calculated derating factors based on tray size, cable fill, and environment conditions.
The actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries will be taken into account, which gives more accurate results and is based on the method described in the
Stolpe paper (Paper 70 TP 557-PWR)1. However, the Stolpe method may provide a smaller ampacity for large cables (for example, 750 mm2) compared to those from
ICEA P-54-440.
In addition, if both the ambient temperature and conductor temperature differ from those shown in the ICEA standard (40 °C ambient temperature and 90 °C conductor
temperature), the resulting ampacity values may be smaller because the standard used the product of both correction factors as the temperature correction. In ETAP
calculations, the ambient temperature and conductor temperature values are used directly in the calculation and, therefore, yield more accurate results.
In the used method, the following AC resistance equations for temperature corrections are employed:
R’ = R(234.5 + Tc) / (234.5 + Tb) Copper Conductors

R’ = R(228.1 + Tc) / (228.1 + Tb) Aluminum Conductors
Where:
R = Resistance at the base temperature Tb

R’ = Resistance at the operating temperature Tc
Tb = Conductor base temperature in °C
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in °C
NEC does not cover 1/C cables in A/G Trays that have a size < 1/0 AWG. Therefore, 1/C cable installed in A/G Trays shall be size 1/0 AWG or larger. Same limitation
is applied to ICEA P-54-440.
NEC (NFPA 70)

This method calculates derating factors according to National Electric Code (NEC). It applies to cables in above ground trays, above ground conduits, air drop, and
underground direct buried and underground conduits. NEC does not provide ampacity derating due to bottom cover or correction of the ampacity multiplying factors
due to the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fireproofing. In general, cable sizes of 2/0 AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly
filled manner, with a maximum of two cables high.
Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here
corresponds to a maximum fill condition and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal depths.
For NEC standard, the selected cable Base ampacity must be in accordance with the ampacities listed in the tables from NEC Article 310 and Appendix B.
Users have the option to select to read the cable Base ampacity from either the Library or directly from the NEC tables. Please contact the support team of ETAP in
order to enable the Library Data option as this option is hidden in the standard release. The default is set to use the NEC ampacity Tables.
The NEC method is only applicable to a cable insulation voltage rating of 35 kV or less.
Ambient temperature correction factor should be calculated based on the equation below, as required by NEC standard.
where:
I1 = ampacity from tables at ambient TA1

I2 = ampacity at desired ambient TA2
TC = conductor temperature in degree Celsius (°C)
TA1 = surrounding ambient from tables in degree Celsius (°C)
TA = desired ambient in degree Celsius (°C)
ΔTD = dielectric loss temperature rise.
ETAP currently uses the following equations:
These formulae come from AIEE-IPCEA – “Power Cable Ampacities – Copper Conductors”, p. III. B and IEEE Std. 242-1986, section 8.5.2.4.
In case the Ta ambient temperature checkbox is checked under the Ampacity/Capacity page of the cable editor, these two equations will be applied for the operating
conductor temperatures that are outside the range provided by the NEC tables for both A/G and U/G installations. The Ta adjustment will come from the NEC tables if
the checkbox is checked. If the checkbox is unchecked, these equations will apply to both the Ta and Tc temperature correction factors.
If the Base Tc of the selected cable from the Library does not match any of the NEC tables, the Base ampacity will be set to 0. If the Base Ta of the selected cable from
the Library does not match any of the NEC tables, ETAP will automatically convert the ambient temperature to the one of the NEC tables, retrieve the ampacity, and
convert back to display the ampacity at the Base ambient temperature. The conversion factor will depend on whether the Ta adjustment per NEC Table is checked or
not.
For U/G Duct and U/G Buried installations, if the Operating RHO is different than the Base RHO, then the following derating rules are applied:
Using ETAP Library Data
 IEEE 399 Tables 13-5 through 13-7 are applied. In case a different RHO than the ones specified in these tables is entered, interpolation between the two closest
RHO values will be used.
Using NEC Tables
 For LV cables installed in U/G Ducts, at 50% Load Diversity, only Base RHO = 60 C.cm/W is allowed. If the header of the selected cable from the library does
not match this condition, 0 ampacity shall be provided. At No Load Diversity, Base RHO of 90 and 120 C.cm/W are allowed. If the operating RHO is different
than these two values, interpolation or extrapolation between and outside these two given points is applied. Table 310.16 is specified for U/G Buried installation
but does not provide a RHO. Therefore, changing the Operating RHO will have no effect as this table is RHO-independent. Tables B.310.8 through B.310.10 are
provided at RHO of 90 C.cm/W. If the Operating RHO is different than the Base RHO, then the IEEE 399 Tables 13-5 through 13-7 shall apply.
In case an insulation type is not listed in any of the NEC tables, e.g. XLPE, SBR, Neoprene, etc, no ampacity shall be provided by the NEC ampacity calculation
method. It is also important to know that both insulation type and conductor base temperature (Base Tc) must match the header of the said NEC table. An exception
shall be made for Rubber and Rubber 2 insulation types as they are general types of insulation and were present since the earliest version of ETAP and, therefore, were
mapped to any of the columns that supported rubber-based insulation types at 75 °C. For instance, the under-ground ampacity tables in Appendix B are all listed at 75 °
C. If the header of the selected cable mentions 90 °C instead of 75 °C, then the method will read the base ampacity from NEC tables 310.16 and 310.17 based on the
number of conductors per cable and installation type.
Grouping factor is applied based on the number of conductors per cable and the number of cables per location or conduit controlled by # C/Loc field under the Grouping
section. Rows and Columns can be defined for cables installed underground per NEC Figure 310.60 for high voltage cables and Figure B.310.2 for low voltage cables.
Load diversity can be applied at 50 % and at 100 % (Without Load Diversity option). The entire grouping factor can be bypassed by checking the Without Grouping
Effect option under the Amp Adjustment section of the Ampacity/Capacity page of the cable editor. For more than 4 conductors in cable or location, NEC tables 310.15
(B)(2)(a) and B.310.11 shall apply.
For above ground (A/G) installation in trays, NEC sections 392.11 for low voltage cables and 392.13 for high voltage cables shall apply. These two sections also handle
the Top Cover and Maintained Spacing options for A/G Trays installations as displayed in the figure below.
NEC does not cover 1/C cables in A/G Trays that have a size < 1/0 AWG. Therefore, 1/C cable installed in A/G Trays shall be size 1/0 AWG or larger.
In case the “Without Grouping” option is checked, even if the cable is a 4/C through 10/C, the grouping factor will be equal to 1 and the ampacity of that cable will be
obtained from the NEC tables, which are designed for 1/C, 2/C, and 3/C only. Therefore only 1 through 3 conductors of the cable will be considered for current-
carrying.
The footnote (*) in NEC Tables 310.16 and 310.17 for cable sizes 14, 12 and 10 AWG in these tables refers to 240.4.D. The overcurrent protection shall not be
exceeded after any correction factor is applied:
14 AWG Copper: 15 amperes

12 AWG Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum: 15 amperes
10 AWG Aluminum and Copper-Clad Aluminum: 25 amperes
On the Cable Editor: Protection page, check the Overload Protection nominal current In. It must be filled out as Protective Device or User-Defined. If violation is
found, ETAP posts a message: “Protective device’s In exceeds the limit of XX amperes as specified in NEC 240.4(D)”. If this limitation is violated but there is no
protective device defined, then the message will not be posted.
BS 7671 Standard
This method is based on BS 7671 (17th Edition): Requirements for Electrical Installation. It applies to a number of types of installation, including above ground and
underground configurations. This method can be used for cables at nominal voltages up to and including 1000V a.c. and 1500V d.c.
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30 Co for cables in Air and 20 Co for buried cables directly in soil or in ducts in the ground per BS 7671.
The actual cable operating ambient temperature can be specified in the Operating Ta field. The cable’s Base and Operating conductor temperature (Tc) is determined
based on cable conductor type and insulation type corresponding to Tables 4D1A and onwards of BS 7671.
Cable Base Ampacity (Current-Carrying Capability) is from Tables 4D1A and onwards of BS 7671. Under certain conditions, the base ampacity may not be available
from these tables and the “Base” Ampacity field will show zero or/ and a message will be posted. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Cable Ampacity/Capacity calculation result is displayed in the “Derated” Ampacity field. The following correction factors are considered for cable Capacity calculation:
 Ca – Correction factor for ambient temperature. This factor is from Table 4B1 or Table 4B2 of BS 7671.
 Cg – Correction factor for grouping. This factor is from Tables 4C1, 4C2, 4C3, 4C4 or 4C5 of BS 7671.
 Ci – Correction factor for conductors embedded in thermal insulation. Refer to Section 523.7 of BS 7671 for detailed information.
 Cc (Note: Cf which represents the factor for semi-enclosed fuse to BS 3036 is included as part of the Cc factor) – Correction factor for the type of installation
condition and/or type of protective device. A factor of 0.725 is applied for cables protected by a Fuse to BS 3036 and 0.653 is applied for cables protected by a
Fuse to BS 3036 and the installation method is “in a duct in the ground” or “buried direct”. A factor of 0.9 is applied for cables protected by other BS Regulation
433.1.201 protective devices. Refer to Section 5 of BS 7671 Appendix 4 for detailed information. A BS 3036 Fuse or BS Reg. 433.1.201 protective device is
specified on the Protection page of cable editor by selecting Device ID or User-Defined Overload Protection device.
 Cs (Note: Cs is represented as Cr in ETAP) – Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity. Refer to Table 4B3 of BS 7671 for detailed information.
 Cd – Correction Factor for Depth of Laying (Burial). Refer to Table 4B4 of BS 7671.
Note: Interpolation or extrapolation may be used if a factor cannot be found directly from the tables.
If a correction factor cannot be determined, the “Derated” Ampacity field on the Ampacity page will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more
information.
Sheath/Armor and Jacket Layer

According to BS 7671, sheath layer is an important factor in current-carrying capacity calculation and the sheath layer can be either metallic or non-metallic.
Determination of the Base Ampacity for a cable for a particular installation method may require the cable to be Armored and/or Sheathed. Such setup can be performed
in the Physical page of the Cable Editor. In some cases a message will be posted providing information of such requirement. In other cases Base and Derated Ampacity
will be displayed as zero. You may also refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
In the current version of ETAP, a sheath layer is only metallic: lead, aluminum or copper. For 1/C cables, Steel Armor is considered as non-magnetic. A Jacket in
ETAP is treated as non-metallic sheath for BS 7671 based calculation. Therefore, for current- carrying capacity calculations based on BS 7671, a cable is considered to
have a sheath layer if the cable has either a sheath type or a jacket type specified. It is required to enter a nonzero thickness value if a Sheath, Armor or Jacket Type is
selected. Note that Paper type Jacket is not treated as a sheath for BS 7671 based calculation.
Note: For Mineral Insulated cables, only with a non-metallic (Jacket in ETAP) layer is treated as non-bare cable.
Note:
1. Unarmoured multicore cables installed in underground Conduits or Ducts are treated the same as armoured cables, referring to section 16.8 of “Commentary on IEE
Wiring Regulations 17th Edition” by Paul Cook.
2. Flexible cable is not handled in this ETAP release.
IEC 60364 Standard

This method is based on IEC 60364-5-52: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Wiring systems. It applies to a number of types of installation, including
above ground and underground configurations. This method can be used for single core or multiple core cables with nominal voltages up to and including 1000V a.c.
and 1500V d.c.
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30° C for above ground installation and 20° C for underground per IEC 60364-5-52. The actual cable
operating ambient temperature can be specified in the Operating Ta field. The cable’s Base and Operating conductor temperature (Tc) is determined based on cable
conductor type and insulation type corresponding to Tables B.52.2 to B.52.13 of Annex B, IEC 60364-5-52.
Cable Base Current-Carrying Capability is from Tables B.52.2 to B.52.13 of Annex B, IEC 60364-5-52. Under certain conditions, the base current-carrying capability
may not be available from these tables and the “Base” field will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP cable editor log pane for more information.
Cable Current Carrying Capacity calculation result is displayed in the “Derated” field. The following correction factors are considered for cable Current Carrying
Capacity calculation:
 Ca – Correction factor for ambient temperature. This factor is from Table B.52.14 or Table B.52.15 of IEC 60364-5-52 Annex B.
 Cg – Correction factor for grouping. This factor is from Tables B.52-17 to B.51-21 of IEC 60364-5-52 Annex B. A group containing different sizes of insulated
conductors or cables is not considered for this ETAP release.
 Cr – Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity. Correction is considered based on Table B.52.16 for soil thermal resistivities other than 2.5 K-m/W (250 C-
cm/W).
If a correction factor cannot be determined, the “Derated” field on the Capacity page will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP cable editor log pane for more
information.
According to IEC 60364-5-52, sheath layer is an important factor in Current-Carrying Capacity calculation and it can be either metallic or non-metallic. In ETAP, a
sheath layer is only metallic. A Jacket in ETAP is treated as non-metallic sheath for 60364-5-52 based calculation. Therefore, for Current-Carrying Capacity calculation
based on 60364-5-52, a cable is considered to have a sheath layer if the cable has either a sheath type or a jacket type specified. It is required to enter a nonzero
thickness value if a Sheath or Jacket Type is selected. Note that Paper type Jacket is not treated as a sheath for 60364-5-52 based calculation.
Note:
1. For Mineral Insulated cables, only with a non-metallic (Jacket in ETAP) layer is treated as non-bare cable.
2. Armored multicore cables are treated the same as unarmored cables based on B.52.1.
IEC 60502 Standard
This method is based on IEC 60502-2: Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV– Part 2:
Cables for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV). It applies to above ground and underground installation. This method can be used for
single core or multi-core cables with nominal voltages greater than 1000V a.c. and less than 36000V a.c.
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30° C for above ground installation and 20° C for in underground installation per IEC 60502-2. The
actual cable operating ambient temperature can be specified in the Operating Ta field. The cable’s Base and Operating conductor temperature (Tc) is determined based
on cable conductor type and insulation type corresponding to Tables B.2 to B.9 of IEC 60502-2.
Cable Base current rating is from Tables B.2 to B.9 of IEC 60502-2. Under certain conditions, the current rating may not be available from these tables and the “Base”
field will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP cable editor log pane for more information.
 Ca – Correction factor for ambient temperature. This factor is from Table B.10 or Table B.11 of IEC 60502-2.
 Cg – Correction factor for grouping. This factor is from Tables B.18 to B.23 of IEC 60502-2. A group containing different sizes of insulated conductors or cables
is not considered for this ETAP release.
 Cd – Correction factor for installation to account for a depth of laying not 0.8 meters. This factor is from Table B.12 (for direct buried cables) or B.13 (for cables
in ducts) of IEC 60502-2.
 Cr – Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity. Correction is considered based on Tables B.14 to B.17 for soil thermal resistivity other than 1.5 K-m/W (150
C-cm/W).
Note: Interpolation or extrapolation may be used if a factor cannot be found directly from the tables
information.
According to IEC 60502, the cable must be shielded (and unarmored if 1/C). Based on the current rating tables of IEC 60502-2, current rating values are available only
for cable sizes of 16 mm2 through 400 mm2. For all other sizes current rating is not provided. As a result, based on this condition, if the selected cable size does not
meet this criterion then the current rating will not be available and the “Base” field will show zero.
IEC 60092 Standard

This method is based on IEC 60092-352: Electrical installations in ships. It applies to cable installations intended for fixed electrical systems on ships for voltages up to
and including 15 kV. This standard covers single and multiple core Copper conductors. The current carrying capacity calculation covers both methods mentioned in
Annex A and Annex B of IEC 60092. Annex A is applies to more detailed installation types, whereas Annex B is for general set of installations, which is applicable to
installations previous to 2003.
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 45° C for any installation type per IEC 60092-352. The actual cable operating ambient temperature can
be specified in the Operating Ta field. The cable’s Base and Operating conductor temperature (Tc) is defaulted to 90° C. The cable’s Operating temperature can be set
to 60°, 65°, 70°, 75°, 80°, 85°, 90° or 95° C through the Operating Tc dropdown list as per IEC 60092. The conductor Base temperature (Tc) will automatically be set to
be the same as the selected Operating conductor temperature.
Cable Base current carrying capacity based on installations methods of Annex A is from Table A.1 to A.5 and Table B.1 to B.5 for calculation method based on Annex
B of IEC 60092-352. If current carrying capacity calculations are performed using the installation methods described in Annex A, interpolation is used to determine the
Base capacity values of current for conductor temperatures of 65°, 75° and 80° C since tables containing these values are not available. Under certain conditions, the
base current rating may not be available from these tables and the “Base” field will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP cable editor log pane for more
information.
 Ca – Correction factor for ambient temperature. This factor is from Table 3 of Annex A of IEC 60092-352 and it applies to calculations for installation methods
of Annex A and Annex B.
 Cg – Correction factor for grouping. This factor is from Tables A.6 to A.8 of IEC 60092-352 for the calculation for installation methods based on Annex A. For
calculation of installations based on Annex B, a correction factor of 0.85 is applied for installations in which more than six cables exist in a group.
 Cst – Correction factor is for short time duty. It is used to account for the installation conditions in which the cable is meant to supply a motor or equipment
operating for Short Time periods or Intermittently. This factor is calculated based on section 3.3.5 of IEC-60092-352.
Note: Interpolation may be used if a factor cannot be found directly from the tables
information.
Based on the current rating tables of IEC 60092-352, current rating values are available only for cable sizes of 1.5 mm2 through 630 mm2. As a result, based on this
condition, if the selected cable size does not meet this criterion then the current rating will not be available and the “Base” field will show zero.
NF C 15-100 Standard
This method is based on NF C 15-100: Low-voltage electrical installations. It applies to various types of installations, including above ground and underground
configurations. This method can be used for single core or multiple core cables with nominal voltages up to and including 1000V a.c. and 1500V d.c.
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30° C for above ground installation and 20° C for underground installations per NF C 15-100. The actual
cable operating ambient temperature can be specified in the Operating Ta field. The cable’s Base and Operating conductor temperature (Tc) is determined based on
cable insulation type corresponding to Table 52H or Table 52J of Part 5-52, NF C 15-100.
Cable Base Current-Carrying Capability is from Table 52H or Table 52J of Part 5-52, NF C 15-100. Under certain conditions, the base current-carrying capability may
not be available from these tables and the “Base” field will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP cable editor log pane for more information.
Cable Current-Carrying Capacity Calculation result is displayed in the “Derated” field. The following correction factors are considered for cable Current-Carrying
 Ca – Correction factor for ambient temperature. This factor is from Table 52K or Table 52L of NF C 15-100 Part 5-52.
 Cg – Correction factor for grouping. This factor is from Tables 52N to 52T of NF C 15-100. A group containing different sizes of insulated conductors or cables
is not considered for this ETAP release.
 Cc – Correction factor according to methods of installation. This factor is from Table 52G.
 Cr – Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity. Correction is considered based on Table 52 M for soil thermal resistivity other than 1.0 K-m/W (100 C-
cm/W).
If a correction factor cannot be determined, the “Derated” field on the Ampacity page will show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP cable editor log pane for more
information.
Type
If the option of Installation Type is selected, the Installation Type field contains all the installation types currently available in ETAP. When one of these installation
types is selected, the Standard field will contain only the standards applicable to the selected installation type. The table below gives all the installation types and
applicable standards.
Sub-Type
When the BS 7671, IEC 60364, IEC 60502, IEC 60092 or NF C 15-100 Standard is selected in the Standard field, the installation Sub-Type and installation Method will
also show up along with the installation Type if applicable. You can select a different installation Sub-Type from the list.
Method
This field displays the Reference method for the selected Sub-Type per Table 4A2 of BS 7671, Requirements for Electrical Installations as shown below.
This field displays the Reference method for the selected Sub-Type per Table B.52.1, IEC 60364-5-52, Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Wiring systems
as shown below.
This field displays the Reference method for the selected Sub-Type per Table A.1 of Annex A, IEC-60092, Electrical installations in ships as shown below.
This field displays the Reference method for the selected Sub-Type per Table 52G, NF C 15-100, Low-voltage electrical installations as shown below.
Note: Magnetic/Non-magnetic Installation

Magnetically installed cables imply that there is a continuous raceway (conduit) around the cables with circulating current due to the magnetic field of the cables. This
circulating current will cause the cable reactance (X1 and X0) to increase by up to 15% for smaller size cables, and 5 to 10% for larger size cables. The following table
shows when to use cable libraries designated as Magnetically and Non-magnetically Installed cables:
Cable Library Header

Non- Magnetically
Magnetically Installed
Installed
U/G Duct – PVC Conduits X
U/G Duct – Mag. Conduits X
U/G Buried X
A/G Tray – No Cover X
A/G Tray – Solid & Mag. Material X
A/G Conduit - PVC X
A/G Conduit – Mag. Conduit
Air Drop X
Results
Operating/FLA
This field displays the required load current for the cable. For a branch cable, the required current will be the Average or Phase Max operating current entered by user or
updated by load flow calculations in the Loading page of the cable editor. For an equipment cable user can select to display either the operating or full load current
(FLA) of the load.
Base
The full rated current value in amperes for the chosen cable before any correction occurs. Depending on the selected standard, this value is the base Ampacity in ETAP
cable library or is from NEC tables or is the Current-Carrying Capability from tables of IEC 60364-5-52, IEC 60502, IEC-60092, BS 7671, or NF C15-100.
This is the ampacity stated or specified by the manufacturer or other authoritative sources, such as NEC, IEC, BS or NF standards. Note that if the calculation standard
is ICEA P-54-440, this field is hidden, since the base ampacity is not required for the calculation by the standard.
Derated
The calculated maximum allowed current carrying Capacity (Ampacity) for the chosen cable after all the correction factors have been applied to the Base
Ampacity/Capacity based on the specified installation conditions.
Allowable Ampacity / Capacity

This is the maximum allowable current carrying Capacity (Ampacity) of the cable. It is used in the output reports of Load Flow type studies to indicate the percent of
cable overloading. This value is also used as a base for the cable flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies and for Star plot and Auto-Evaluation.
ETAP provides the following options for selecting the maximum allowable current:
Derated Select this option to make the derated ampacity the maximum allowable current for this cable.
User-Defined Select this option to enter the maximum allowable current for this cable
UGS Calculated Select this option to use the ampacity calculated by the Underground Raceways Systems module.
Temperature/RHO
This section includes information about cable temperature and earth soil thermal resistivity if the installation type is U/G Duct or U/G Buried.
Base
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius obtained from the library or from the current-carrying capability tables of the corresponding Standard for the base
capacity (ampacity). The ambient temperature is the temperature at a cable installation location when the cable installation is absent. Base Capacity (Ampacity) for A/G
(Above Ground) cables is usually given at 30 degree Celsius and for U/G (Under Ground) cables is usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
This is the conductor temperature in degrees Celsius obtained from the library or from the current-carrying capability tables based on the corresponding Standard for the
base capacity (ampacity). This order is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C-cm/Watt) obtained from the library or from tables of corresponding Standard for the
base capacity (ampacity). This field will be hidden if the installation type is not U/G Duct or U/G Buried.
Operating
Ta
This is the actual ambient temperature for the actual installations in degrees Celsius. The operating ambient temperature is the temperature at the cable installation
location when the installation is absent.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable actual operating conductor temperature for the actual installations in degrees Celsius.
RHO
This is the actual thermal resistivity of the soil for the underground installation in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta Adjustment per NEC Table

This Check Box only appears when NEC standard is selected. Please refer to NEC standard section.
Note: This checkbox is only available when Tools | Options (Preferences) set to “FALSE” and for cable insulation voltages below 2 kV.
Ampacity (Capacity)
Ampacity (Capacity) ratings are displayed for comparison of base, derated and, required ampacities. The method used here is based on a concept of a derating factor
that is applied against a base ampacity (capacity) to calculate the derated ampacity (capacity).
Id = F x Ib, where Id is the derated ampacity (capacity), F is the total derating factor and Ib is the base ampacity (capacity).
Tray
This section is enabled when the installation type is A/G Trays and the Standard is either ICEA P-54-440 or NEC.
Top Cover
Select Top Cover if there is a removable top cover on the cable tray.
Bottom Cover
Select bottom cover if there is a bottom cover on the cable tray, whether it is removable or solid, of more than 6 feet.
Cumulative Effect
Cumulative effect applies correction factors for combinations of barriers, fire coatings, and covers on cable trays. The following table summarizes the factors ETAP
uses:
Fire Coating Fire Stop Fire Wrap Top Cover Bottom Cover PS Uses…
X X Fire Wrap
X X Smaller
X X Smaller
Top &
X X X
Bottom
X X Wrap
X X Wrap
X X X Wrap
Maintained Spacing
Check this box to indicate that cables are kept in the tray with maintained spacing.
Ampacity Adjustment
The Ampacity Adjustment section is enabled when the cable installation type is A/G conduit and the Standard is NEC. From this section, you can select options to
consider grouping effect.
Without Grouping Effect

NEC standards do not allow for grouping effects (that is, the number of rows and columns) of cables. If the check box is not selected, grouping effects of number of
rows and columns will be considered. Note that when this box is checked, the Rows and Columns fields and the Fire Protection section will be hidden.
With 50% Load Diversity and Without Load Diversity

The level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be either 50% or none.
Layout
This section is enabled when the standard is BS 7671 and the installation type is one of the above ground types.
This section or part of this section is enabled when the standard is IEC 60364.
Horizontal
Select Horizontal layout with Touching or Spaced if applicable. Note that this field is hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type.
Vertical
Select Vertical layout with Touching or Spaced if applicable. Note that this field is hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type.
Spaced
Select this option if the cables are placed with required spacing (spaced by a clearance between adjacent surfaces of at least one cable diameter (De) between them. Note
that this field is hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type or standard.
Touching
Select this option if the cables are placed touching each other in the installation. Note that this field is hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type or
standard.
Note: Please refer to BS 7671, IEC 60364, IEC 60502 and IEC-60092 for the definitions of Spaced and Touching.
Trefoil
This field is hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type and mirrors the corresponding selection in the Configuration page.
Flat
This field is hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type and mirrors the corresponding selection in the Configuration page.
No. of Trays
Select No of Trays for determining correction factor for grouping based on Tables B.52.20 or B.52.21 of IEC 60364-5-52, Tables B.22 or B.23 of IEC 60502 or Tables
A.7 and A.8 of IEC 60092. If BS 7671 Standard is used, the correction factor is based on Tables 4C4 or 4C5 of BS 7671 (17th Edition).
<= 0.3*Cable OD or > 0.3*Cable OD

Switch between these two selections for different Installation Methods. Refer to Table B.52.1 of IEC 60364-5-52. If BS 7671 Standard is used, refer to Table 4A2 of BS
7671 (17th Edition).
1.5 De <= V < 20 De or V > 20 De

Switch between these two selections with different Installation Methods. Refer to Table B.52.1 of IEC 60364-5-52. If BS 7671 Standard is used, refer to Table 4A2 of
BS 7671 (17th Edition)
Circuit Clearance
This field is enabled for Underground (U/G Duct or U/G Buried) installation of IEC 60364-5-52, IEC 60502 and BS 7671. Refer to Tables B.52.18 and B.52.19 of IEC
60364-5-52 or Tables B.18 to B.21 of IEC 60502. If BS 7671 Standard is used, refer to Tables 4C2 and 4C3 of BS 7671 (17th Edition).
This field is also enabled for NF C 15-100 standard only when installation types are U/G Buried - No Mechanical Protection or With Mechanical Protection. Refer to
Table 52R of NF C 15-100.
Conduit Clearance
This field is applicable only for NF C 15-100 standard and when Underground (U/G Duct or U/G Buried - In Conduit) installation is selected. Refer to Table 52S of NF
C 15-100.
# of Conduit
This field is applicable only for NF C 15-100. This field is enabled when Underground (U/G Duct or U/G Buried - In Conduit) installation is selected. Refer to Table
52S of NF C 15-100.
# of Layer
This field is enabled only for NF C 15-100 standard. The field is used for installations where cables are arranged in multiple layers. Refer to Table 52O of NF C 15-
100.
Depth of Laying
This field is enabled only for IEC 60502 standard Underground installations. The field is used for installations where cables are installed at a depth other than 0.8
meters. Refer to Table B.12 and Table B.13.
Grouping
In this section, user can specify the installation information related to the calculation of cable grouping factors. The fields in this section are dependent on the
installation type and standard selected.
Note: Under certain conditions this field may be hidden. For BS 7671 and IEC 60364 standards, this section is unavailable if a cable is a Copper conductor, Mineral
insulated and the Conductor Temperature (Tc) is set to 105 ° C based on the standard. For more information refer to Tables B.52.7 and B.52.9 of IEC 60364-5-52 and
Table 4G2A of BS 7671.
Parameters in Grouping Section for IEEE 399 Standard, U/G Raceway

Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the ampacity, the number of rows and columns of the duct bank must be specified to
determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.
The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on 7.5 inches center-to-center spacing. For more details see the IEEE Brown Book.
Parameters in Grouping Section for NEC Standard

Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the cable ampacity, the number of rows and columns of conduit installed next to each
other, as well as the total number of conductors per location or conduit can be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.
The number of Rows and Columns affects the grouping factor as followed:
Using ETAP Library Data

 For A/G Conduit installation, up to 6 by 6 Rows by 6 Columns can be defined per IPCEA P-46-426 Table IX.
 For U/G Buried and U/G Duct installations, the grouping derating factor is calculated based on IEEE 399 Tables 13-8 through 13-11 for the Rows and Columns
entered.
Using NEC Tables
 For A/G Conduit installation, Rows and Columns are fixed to 1 as NEC does not provide any grouping factor for this installation.
 For U/G Buried and U/G Duct installations, Rows and Columns fields are limited to the combinations allowed by NEC Figure 310.60. This applies to MV and
HV cables only (2 < kV ≤ 35).
NEC does not support grouping factors based on more than 4 current-carrying conductors per location or conduit for MV and HV cables (2 < kV ≤ 35), therefore, the
#C/Loc is fixed to 1 if such cable is selected. The number of current-carrying conductors per location or conduit needs to be calculated as followed:
# of conductors per location = (# of current-carrying conductors per cable) x (# of cables per location or conduit)
NEC Table B.310.11 Ampacity Correction Factor

Number of Conductors 50 % Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 through 85 50 %
NEC Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) Ampacity Correction Factor

Number of Conductors No Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 and above 35 %
Parameters in Grouping Section for ICEA P-54-440 Standard, A/G Trays

The following items are displayed only when ICEA is selected.
Height
Height of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
Width
Width of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
% Fill
The total amount of cable tray cross-sectional area used by cables placed in the tray, including gap between cables.
Where ni is the number of cables in the tray with diameter di and l is the number of different sizes of cables in the tray.
Depth
Depth of cable mass calculated in inches or centimeters using Height*%Fill/100. If the calculated depth is smaller than the cable diameter, an * sign will be displayed
on the right of Depth and above Derated, and the cable diameter will be treated as the depth for derating calculation.
No. of Circuit
This field is enabled when BS 7671, IEC 60364, IEC 60502, IEC 60092 or NF C 15-100 is selected. This is used for reduction factor of grouping. The maximum
allowable number of circuits is limited based on the appropriate standards.
Parameters in Grouping Section for NF C 15-100 Standard
The following items may be displayed when NF C 15-100 Standard is selected. To calculate the cable current-carrying capabilities, for some installation types, the
number of rows and columns can be specified to determine a cable grouping correction factor.
Rows
This field is used to specify the number of conduits arranged vertically. Please refer to Table 52P and 52Q of NF C 15-100.
Columns
This field is used to specify the number of conduits arranged horizontally. Please refer to Table 52P and 52Q of NF C 15-100.
Additional Derating
This section applies to ampacity/capacity calculation based on all the standards.
The additional derating section provides the ability for user to enter an additional derating (correction) factor. This allows using the Total Derated ampacity/capacity.
User Defined
Check this box to consider additional ampacity/capacity derating (correction) of the cable.
User Defined Factor

Enter the additional derating (correction) factor (0-9.90) to be considered.
Tot. Derated
Displays the total derated ampacity/capacity of the cable when the installation conditions differ from those for which the capacity (ampacity) value was calculated based
on a standard. This “Tot. Derated” value will overwrite the “Derated” value in the Results section and to be used as the Allowable Ampacity/Capacity and to be applied
for cable sizing calculation.
Short Time Duty

This option only applies to current carrying capacity calculation based on IEC 60092 Standard.
Check the Short Time Duty box to consider the correction factor for Short Time Duty.
Service
Select this option if the cable supplies a motor or equipment which is intended to operate for a specific service period. Typically the periods of service are half an hour
or one hour.
Service Period
Enter the service period in minutes for which the cable is intended to supply the motor or equipment.
Intermittent
Select this option if the cable supplies a motor or equipment which operates at an intermittent service.
Intermittent Period
Enter the intermittent period in minutes for which the cable is intended to supply the motor or equipment.
Constant Load
Enter the constant load duration in minutes, which is the time that the motor or equipment operates at a constant load.
Fire Protection for ICEA or NEC Standards, A/G Installation

The fire protection area provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices. Each of the three libraries may be selected individually to best
describe the fire protection associated with the cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection material specifications
selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire protection is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Note: Fire Protection only applies to ICEA P-54-440 and NEC based Above Ground (A/G) installations.
Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations. Each configuration has an ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against
the base ampacity.
For maintained spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between adjacent cables or groups to less than the required values, the
cable shall be considered to be non-maintained spacing. On the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable coating and no other cable
can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for a reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.
Fire retardant coating is not a standard procedure for A/G conduits.
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for cables in tray routed through fire stops. Note: for A/G conduits, there
may not be any reason to derate the cable for fire stops since typical fire stops are constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be
insufficient to cause an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
The Fire Wrap Library provides a selection of configurations. Each fire barrier configuration has an ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it. This ACF must
be applied whenever the raceway is wrapped for a length exceeding 6 feet and whenever the raceway has multiple, wrapped segments whose combined length exceeds 6
feet and which are spaced less than 10 feet apart.
Fire Protection for BS 7671 Standard, A/G Installation

This section is about thermal insulation. Refer to Section 523, BS 7671 for detailed information
According to BS 7671-16th Edition, thermal insulation for fire protection may be considered for all installation types, except Installation Methods 4 and 6. For
Installation Method 4 or 6, cables are in conduits which are in thermally insulated walls or above thermally insulated ceilings, and the effect of thermal insulation is
already considered in the current-carrying capacity tables.
Refer to Section 523.7, BS 7671–17th Edition for detailed information.
According to BS 7671-17th Edition, thermal insulation for fire protection may be considered for all installation types, except Installation Methods 1, 2, and 3. For
Installation Methods 1, 2 and 3 the cables are in conduits which are in thermally insulated walls or above thermally insulated ceilings, and the effect of thermal
insulation is already considered in the current-carrying capacity tables.
Thermal Insulation Applied
Check this box if the cable has thermal insulation.
Insulation Length
Enter the length of cable thermal insulation in mm.
Correction Factors
The Correction Factors button is only available when BS-7671, IEC 60364, IEC 60502, IEC 60092 or NF C 15-100 standard is selected.
Correction Factor Button

Click on the Correction Factors button to display the Correction Factors Editor
Correction Factors Editor

The editor displays the correction factor value that is being applied when the installation conditions differ from those for which the base capacity (ampacity) value was
specified.
Ambient Temperature
Ca – Correction factor for Ambient Temperature
Grouping
Cg – Correction factor for Grouping.
Short Time Duty
Cst – Correction factor for Short Time Duty.
Thermal Insulation
Ci – Correction factor for conductors embedded in thermal insulation.
Protective Device or Installation Condition

Cc – Correction factor for the type of protective device or installation condition.
Note: Protective (Cc) applies for BS 7671 while the BS 3036 Fuse option or BS Reg. 433.1.201 is checked in Overload Protection device section of the Cable
Protection Page, for installation method being "in a duct in the ground" or "buried direct".
Installation (Cc) also applies for NF C 15-100 to reflect the correction factor being used for methods of installation based on Table 52G.
Soil Thermal Resistivity

Cr – Correction Factor for Soil Thermal Resistivity
Depth of Laying
Cd – Correction Factor for Depth of Laying
Note: Cd applies for IEC 60502 and BS 7671 to reflect the correction factor being used for the Depth of Laying.
Cable Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the cable calculations in the current project folder. Select a file to view the report or to create a new report.
Note: In the latter case, the existing file will be overwritten. When Prompt is selected, a new file will be created.
Cable Report Manager Button

The Cable Report Manager button is used to access the various output reports.
DC Cable Editor Overview
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Protection Page (3 Phase) - Cable Editor

The Protection page provides options related to cable protection. It includes options for plotting the cable thermal capability (I2t) curve on a Star View, updating short-
circuit current, and entering cable protection information. Cables do not have unlimited power handling capabilities and need protection to prevent operation beyond
that capability in the event of short-circuit conditions. The main cause of reduced cable lifetime is high temperature generated by continuous overloading or
uncoordinated fault protection. Cable protection is required to protect personnel and equipment.
Thermal Damage Curve

The maximum current that a cable can carry for a given time period is defined by an I2t characteristic curve. There are four standards which define this I2t
characteristic: ICEA P-32-382, IEC 60949 / 60364-5-54, BS 7430/7454/7671, and GOST R 50571.10-96.
Initial Temperature
The initial temperature is the maximum allowable operating temperature of the conductor in the cable. It represents the initial temperature of the cable before a fault or
overload condition. The selections are
 Base Temp
 Operating Temp
These values are defined in the Ampacity page of the cable editor. The Base temperature is read from the cable library, and the Operating temperature is a user-
definable value. The selected temperature is displayed in the damage curve plot table in the Initial °C column.
Final Temperature
The final temperature is the maximum short-circuit temperature the insulation is capable of handling. This value is dependent on the standard. Therefore, by selecting
this value, the standard used to plot the damage curve is also defined. The selections are:
 ICEA P-32-382
 IEC 60949 / 60364-5-54
 BS 7430/7454/7671
 GOST R 50571.10-96
 User-Defined
The insulation type of the cable defines the maximum short-circuit temperature. The selected temperature is displayed in the damage curve plot table in the Final °C
column. If the User-Defined option is selected, the temperature value can be defined in the Final °C column.
Damage Curve Plot Table

The damage curve plot table displays the cables which have been defined, and the temperatures to use when plotting each cable curve. The option to plot or not plot a
damage curve is also set here.
Thermal Curve
The types of cables defined are listed here. Neutral and Protective Earth cables, if present, must first be properly defined in the Configuration page of the cable editor in
order for them to appear in this table.
Plot I2t
Check this to display the damage curve for the respective cable when it is plotted in a Star View.
Initial Conductor Temperature

The initial conductor temperature, as selected, is displayed here. This value will represent the maximum conductor temperature when plotting the damage curve.
Final Conductor Temperature

The final conductor temperature, as selected, is displayed here. This value will represent the maximum short-circuit temperature of the cable insulation when plotting
the damage curve.
Number of Conductors to Plot

Select the number of conductors to plot the damage curve based on the selections which are: 1, n-1, and n, where n is the defined number of conductors per phase in the
Info page of the cable editor. Typically the damage curve is used to represent a fault on a single conductor of the cable. (IEEE Std. 242-2001) Therefore, this value, by
default, is set to 1.
Reference kV
Calculated Base kV
This kV value is automatically updated with terminal bus base kV when you Run/Update Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination Mode and at
least one cable terminal bus is faulted. This is a display only field.
Short-Circuit Current (Sym. rms)

This group allows specification of maximum and minimum short-circuit current when the terminal bus of the cable is faulted. These short-circuit currents are used for
cable sizing as well as for determining the equivalent system impedance. The short-circuit currents can also be updated automatically by running 3 Phase Run/Update
Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination mode.
Calculated
Select Calculated to let ETAP update the:
 3 phase maximum fault kA

 3 phase minimum fault kA
 Line to ground/earth maximum fault kA
 Line to ground/earth minimum fault kA
 Line to line maximum fault kA
 Line to line minimum fault kA
 Line to line to ground/earth maximum fault kA
 Line to line to ground/earth minimum fault kA
Max. Fault kA is updated with selection of ½ Cycle kA for standard ANSI and Max Short-Circuit Current for standard IEC. Min. Fault kA is updated with 30 Cycle kA
for standard ANSI and Min. Short-Circuit Current for IEC. If both terminal buses of the cable are faulted: the fault kA from the bus that has bigger Max/ Fault kA will
be used.
Note: There is an Option of “Update from the bus with lower SC kA value” from the Tools|Options (Preferences) in the Cable Sizing section as shown below. This
Option is applicable when both terminal buses of a cable are faulted. The Option is defaulted to False so that the short-circuit currents are updated based on the terminal
bus that gives higher fault current. If this Option is set to be True, the short-circuit currents will be updated based on the bus that gives lower fault current.
When running the 3 phase “Run / Update Short – Circuit kA” in STAR mode, ETAP will update both Line fault kA and ground fault kA.
User-Defined
Enter the maximum and minimum fault currents for the different fault types by selecting the User-Defined options. Once this option is selected, the different fault
currents in this group become editable.
3 Phase Maximum
The 3 Phase maximum short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this
field automatically when 1/2 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted. If both of the cable terminal buses are faulted for one run of
short circuit study, the bigger value will be displayed. All other fault currents are based on this corresponding bus also.
3 Phase Minimum
The 3 Phase minimum short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates this
field automatically when 30 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Ground/Earth Maximum

The maximum Line to Ground short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates
this field automatically when 1/2 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Ground/Earth Minimum

The minimum Line to Ground short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates
this field automatically when 30 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Line Maximum
The Line to Line maximum short-circuit current can be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates
this field automatically when 1/2 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Line Minimum

The Line to Line minimum short-circuit current will be user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP updates
this field automatically when 30 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Line to Ground/Earth Maximum

The maximum Line to Line to Ground short-circuit current (3I0) user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP
updates this field automatically when 1/2 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Line to Line to Ground/Earth Minimum

The minimum Line to Line to Ground short-circuit current (3I0) user defined or calculated in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP
will updates field automatically when 30 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted.
Pin (Disable Update)

This checkbox is enabled only when the calculated option is selected. When this option is selected, the Fault kA fields does not update when “Run / Update Short –
Circuit kA” in Star Mode is run.
Electric Shock
Display loop currents on TCC
If this check box is selected, loop currents resulting from the Electric Shock calculations, will be displayed as fault arrows on TCC plots.
Calculated
Calculated loop current.
Permissible
Permissible loop current for shock protection as per applicable standards.
Protective Device
Overload
This section is used only for BS – 7671 and IEC 60364 based cable sizing. The available selections are "None", "User-Defined" or "Device ID" options for overload
protection. When the User-Defined option is selected, the In, I2 and BS 3036 fields is enabled. When Device ID is selected, the Overload ID/Type dropdown list
becomes available Device ID selection.
In – Nominal current of overload protection device in amperes.

I2 – Operating current of overload protection device in amperes.
BS 3630
Check BS 3036 if the overload protection is a Fuse to BS 3036. This field is applicable only when the BS 7671 is selected as the installation standard in the Ampacity
page.
ID/Type
The available overload protection devices (Fuse, Circuit Breaker, Recloser, Overload Heater and In-Line Overload Relay) for the cable are displayed in the dropdown
list. If either side of the cable does not have a protective device, the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors, transformer, double
throw switch, source, or a load.
In and I2
Enter or display the In and I2 values for the selected Overload protection. If User-Defined is selected in the Overload field, this field is editable and allows the user to
enter the values. If a protective device is selected in the ID/Type dropdown list, these values are filled automatically.
Overcurrent
This overcurrent section is utilized for electric shock and touch voltage calculations, thermal protective conductor sizing, and phase conductor sizing.
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", “BS 7671” for overcurrent protection.
If User-Defined is selected, users can enter the Overcurrent Protection Time which is used in the “Sizing - Phase” and ”Sizing – GND/PE” pages.
If Device ID is selected the Overcurrent ID/Type dropdown list becomes available for Device ID selection.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical overcurrent protective devices from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes available for selection. This selection only is available when BS
7671 Installation Standard is selected in the Ampacity (Capacity) page.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overcurrent protection devices (Fuse, Circuit Breaker, and Recloser) for the cable will be
automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the protective devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a protective device
the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors, a transformer, a double throw switch, a source or a load.
Phase Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the highest thermal energy will be selected to populate the Phase current field. ETAP will select from among
the minimum and the maximum of the 3 – phase, Line - to – ground, and Line- to – Line short-circuit current.
Phase Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the phase/line current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the highest thermal energy applicable to Phase/Line current.
Ground Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the highest thermal energy will be selected to populate the ground current field. ETAP will select from
among the minimum and the maximum of the Line - to – Ground, and Line- to – Line – to ground short-circuit current.
Ground Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the current in the Short-Circuit Current section with the highest thermal energy applicable to Ground current.
BS 7671
Select an applicable BS7671 protective device for the clearing time. The clearing time will be based on the curve points given in Appendix 3 of the standard. The
protective device is assumed to be in the same area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with a non 1-1 ratio.
Rating (A)
Select the applicable BS7671 protective device size. The clearing time will be displayed in the time fields.
GFCI/RCD
This GFCI/RCD section is utilized for electric shock calculations in this release and not for modules such as STAR.
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", “BS 7671” for GFCI/RCD protection.
If User-Defined is selected, user can enter the GFCI/RCD Protection Time.
If Device ID is selected the GFCI/RCD ID/Type dropdown list becomes available for selecting a Device ID.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical RCDs from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes available for selection. This selection is only available when BS 7671 Installation Standard
is selected in the Ampacity page. The protective device is assumed to be in the same area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with a non 1-1 ratio.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from the dropdown list.
Trip (mA)
The trip setting will be displayed for the selected device or applicable BS7671 GFCI/RCD.
Trip (sec)
The maximum clearing time will be listed for the selected GFCI/RCD device.
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Protection Page (1 Phase) - Cable Editor

The Protection page provides options related to cable protection. It includes options for plotting the cable thermal capability (I2t) curve on a Star View, updating short-
circuit current, and entering cable protection information. Cables do not have unlimited power handling capability and need protection to prevent operation beyond that
capability in the event of short-circuit conditions. The main cause of reduced cable lifetime is high temperature generated by continuous overloading or uncoordinated
fault protection. Cable protection is required to protect personnel and equipment.
Thermal Damage Curve
The maximum current that a cable can carry for a given time period is defined by an I2t characteristic curve. There are four standards which define this I2t
characteristic: ICEA P-32-382, IEC 60949 / 60364-5-54, BS 7430/7454/7671, and GOST R 50571.10-96.
Initial Temperature
The initial temperature is the maximum allowable operating temperature of the conductor in the cable. It represents the initial temperature of the cable before a fault or
overload condition. The selections are
 Base Temp
 Operating Temp
These values are defined in the Ampacity page of the cable editor. The Base temperature is read from the cable library, and the Operating temperature is a user-
definable value. The selected temperature is displayed in the damage curve plot table in the Initial °C column.
Final Temperature
The final temperature is the maximum short-circuit temperature the insulation is capable of handling. This value is dependent on the standard. Therefore, by selecting
this value, the standard used to plot the damage curve is also defined. The selections are:
 ICEA P-32-382
 IEC 60949 / 60364-5-54
 BS 7430/7454/7671
 GOST R 50571.10-96
The insulation type of the cable defines the maximum short-circuit temperature. The selected temperature is displayed in the damage curve plot table in the Final °C
column.
Damage Curve Plot Table

The damage curve plot table displays the cables which have been defined, and the temperatures to use when plotting each cable curve. The option to plot or not plot a
damage curve is also set here.
Thermal Curve
The types of cables defined are listed here. Neutral and Protective Earth cables, if present, must first be properly defined in the Configuration page of the cable editor in
order for them to appear in this table.
Plot I2t
Check this to display the damage curve for the respective cable when it is plotted in a Star View.
Initial Conductor Temperature

The initial conductor temperature, as selected, is displayed here. This value will represent the maximum conductor temperature when plotting the damage curve.
Final Conductor Temperature

The final conductor temperature, as selected, is displayed here. This value will represent the maximum short-circuit temperature of the cable insulation when plotting
the damage curve.
Number of Conductors to Plot

Select the number of conductors to plot the damage curve based on. The selections are 1, n-1, and n, where n is the defined number of conductors per phase in the Info
page of the cable editor. Typically the damage curve is used to represent a fault on a single conductor of the cable. (IEEE Std. 242-2001) Therefore, this value, by
default, is set to 1.
Reference kV
Calculated Base kV
This kV value is automatically updated with terminal bus base kV when you Run/Update Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination Mode and at
least one cable terminal bus is faulted. This is a display only field.
Short-Circuit Current (Sym. rms)

This group allows you to specify Line (lint to line fault) and Ground (line to ground fault) short-circuit currents when the terminal bus of the cable is faulted. The short-
circuit currents can be updated automatically by running Run/Update 1 phase Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination mode. Note that only Line
current will be updated for this ETAP release.
Calculated
When running the “Run / Update 1 phase Short –Circuit kA” in STAR mode, ETAP will only update the Line fault kA. If this option is selected, the “Ground” field is
hidden and the short-circuit calculated value will only be displayed and used in the Sizing – GND/PE calculations. For more information regarding PE/Grounding
Conductor Thermal Sizing, refer to section PE/Grounding Conductor Thermal Sizing of Chapter Protective Sizing and Shock Protection.
User Defined
You may enter the fault currents for the different fault types by selecting the User-Defined option. Once this option is selected, both, the “Line” and “Ground” fault
currents in this group are displayed and become editable The user entered Line value is then used for Sizing-Phase calculation and the user entered Ground value is then
used for Sizing – GND/PE calculations. For more information regarding Phase Conductor Sizing, refer to section Cable Editor Sizing Page of Chapter Cable Ampacity
and Sizing and for more information regarding PE/Grounding Conductor Thermal Sizing, refer to section PE/Grounding Conductor Thermal Sizing of Chapter
Protective Sizing and Shock Protection.
 Line maximum fault in kA

 Ground maximum fault kA
Line
If "Calculated" is selected, ETAP will update this field automatically for all cables when STAR “Run Update 1 phase short-circuit kA” is run in STAR mode. Since
both of the cable terminal buses are automatically faulted in the short circuit study, the value that will be displayed will depend on the selection in the Tools | Options
(Preferences) | Cable Sizing | “Update from the bus with lower SC kA value”.
Ground
The Ground short-circuit current can be entered in the user-defined Ground field in the “Short-Circuit Current” section. Automatic updating from short-circuit
calculation will be available in a future release of ETAP.
Pin (Disable Update)

This checkbox is enabled only when the calculated option is selected. When this option is selected, the Fault kA fields does not update when “Run / Update Short –
Circuit kA” in Star Mode is run.
Electric Shock
Display loop currents on TCC
If this check box is selected, loop currents resulting from the Electric Shock calculations will be displayed as fault arrows on TCC plots.
Calculated
Calculated loop current.
Permissible
Permissible loop current for shock protection as per applicable standards.
Protective Device
Overload
This section is used only for BS – 7671 and IEC 60364 based cable sizing. The available selections are "None", "User-Defined" or "Device ID" option for overload
protection. When the User-Defined option is selected, the In, I2 and BS 3036 fields are enabled. When Device ID is selected, the Overload ID/Type dropdown list
becomes available Device ID selection.
In – Nominal current of overload protection device in amperes.

I2 – Operating current of overload protection device in amperes.
BS 3630
Check BS 3036 if the overload protection is a Fuse to BS 3036. This field is applicable only when the BS 7671 is selected as the installation standard in the Ampacity
page.
ID/Type
The available overload protection devices (Fuse, Circuit Breaker, Recloser, Overload Heater and In-Line Overload Relay) for the cable are displayed in the dropdown
list. If either side of the cable does not have a protective device, the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors, transformer, double
throw switch, source, or a load.
In and I2
Enter or display the In and I2 values for the selected Overload protection. If User-Defined is selected in the Overload field, this field is editable and allows user to enter
the values. If a protective device is selected in the ID/Type dropdown list, these values are filled automatically.
Overcurrent
This overcurrent section is utilized for electric shock and touch voltage calculations, thermal protective conductor sizing, and phase conductor sizing.
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", “BS 7671” for overcurrent protection.
If User-Defined is selected, users can enter the Overcurrent Protection Time which is used in the “Sizing - Phase” and ”Sizing – GND/PE” pages.
If Device ID is selected the Overcurrent ID/Type dropdown list becomes available for Device ID selection.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical overcurrent protective devices from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes available for selection. This selection only is available when BS
7671 Installation Standard is selected in the Ampacity (Capacity) page.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overcurrent protection devices (Fuse, Circuit Breaker, and Recloser) for the cable will be
automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the protective devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a protective device
the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors, a transformer, a double throw switch, a source or a load.
Line Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section will be selected to populate the Line current field.
Line Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the line current in the Short-Circuit Current section.
Ground Current
The fault current in the Short-Circuit Current section will populate the ground/Earth current field.
Ground Time
Displays the fault clearing time of the current in the Short-Circuit Current section.
BS 7671
Select an applicable BS7671 protective device for the clearing time. The clearing time will be based on the curve points given in Appendix 3 of the standard. The
protective device is assumed to be in the same area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with a non 1-1 ratio.
Rating (A)
Select the applicable BS7671 protective device size. The clearing time will be displayed in the time fields.
GFCI/RCD
This GFCI/RCD section is utilized for electric shock calculations in this release and not for modules such as STAR.
Select "None", "User-Defined", "Device ID", “BS 7671” for GFCI/RCD protection.
If User-Defined is selected, user can enter the GFCI/RCD Protection Time.
If Device ID is selected the GFCI/RCD ID/Type dropdown list becomes available for selecting a Device ID.
If BS7671 is selected, the typical RCDs from BS 7671 Appendix 3 becomes available for selection. This selection is only available when BS 7671 Installation Standard
is selected in the Ampacity page.
The protective device is assumed to be in the same area as cable and not have crossed a transformer with a non 1-1 ratio.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from the dropdown list.
Trip (mA)
The trip setting will be displayed for the selected device or applicable BS7671 GFCI/RCD.
Trip (sec)
The maximum clearing time will be listed for the selected GFCI/RCD device.
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Sizing - Phase Page - Cable Editor

Refer to Chapter Cable Ampacity and Sizing for detailed information.
Standard
The Standard field displays the standard selected in the Ampacity page. When the Loading requirement is checked in the Requirements section, the ampacity calculation
in cable sizing will be based on the standard displayed.
Results
Using the selected cable type from the library, ETAP recommends an optimal cable size along with the number of conductors per phase that meets the specified
requirements. Additionally, ETAP provides one cable size smaller than the optimal size for your selection. For the voltage results, Vd is in percent based on bus
nominal kV and Vst is in percent based on motor rated kV.
Along with the calculation results, this section also displays the required cable sized, ampacity, percent of voltage drop, and percent of starting voltage if cable sizing
options for the corresponding requirements are checked. The required cable size is the largest size from Short-Circuit, Overload, and Shock requirements. The
requirement ampacity is the larger value from Load Amp and Overload requirements. Note that if the Use MF for Ampacity option is selected, the Load Amp used for
sizing will be multiplied by the MF value displayed in the Cable Application section.
Constraints
You can select one or both requirements for determining the recommended size of cable. Note that some of the options are dependent on the installation type and if the
cable is an equipment cable for a motor.
Loading
If Loading is selected as one of the constraints, sizing will be conducted to meet the load current requirement based on the cable installation and ambient conditions
specified in the Capacity (Ampacity) page. The load ampere value displayed is based on the option selected in the Loading Current for Sizing section in the Loading
page. Average or Maximum of 3 phase load may be used depending on the selection in the Loading page.
Voltage Drop (Vd)

If you check Vd, ETAP will size the cable based on the percent voltage drop value you enter here. Voltage drop is in percent of nominal kV of the bus connected to the
cable. If the nominal voltages of the From Bus and To Bus are different, nominal kV of the From Bus is selected. If the cable is directly connected to the output of a
VFD, Vd is in percent based on VFD output nominal kV. The following table shows the methods used for calculating the voltage drop for different types of load
currents flowing through the cable. Note: The Load Type is selected on the Loading page when "FLA of Element" is selected.
Load Type Calculation Method

Motors Constant Power
Static Load Constant Impedance
Bus Constant Current
Circuit Breaker Constant Current
Fuse Constant Current
Transformer Constant Current
Generator Constant Current
MOV Constant Impedance
If the cable is an equipment cable, the cable voltage drop is calculated based on a fixed bus voltage that is equal to the bus Initial %V multiplied by the bus nominal kV.
The load will be treated as given in the above table. The calculated voltage drop is the magnitude difference between bus voltage and load terminal voltage values.
If the cable is a branch cable connected between two buses, the voltage drop is calculated by multiplying the cable impedance by the current.
If the cable is connected with an overload heater, the resistance of the overload heater will be considered in Vd calculation as well.
Base kV for Vd
This field displays the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus, or the VFD’s rated output voltage, if the cable is directly connected to the output side of the VFD.
Max. Length
This field displays the Maximum Length that the currently selected cable can have and still satisfy the Maximum Voltage Drop Requirement.
Permissible Feeder Vd
This read only field displays the Maximum % Voltage Drop between the origin of consumer’s installation and any load point. These values are based on Table4Ab of
BS-7671, Table G.52.1 of 60364, or Table 52W of NF C 15-100. These values are for users’ reference. It is the users’ responsibility to verify that the voltage drop is
within the permissible values.
Starting Voltage (Vst)

This option is enabled only when the cable is an equivalent cable of a motor, or when the Loading is FLA of a motor.
If the option of Vst is selected, cable sizing calculation considers the motor starting voltage requirement. At starting, the motor terminal voltage must be higher than the
Vst limit, which is in percent based on motor rated voltage. The motor starting voltage is calculated based on a fixed bus voltage that is equal to the bus Initial %V
multiplied by the bus nominal kV. The motor is represented by its locked-rotor impedance.
If the cable is connected with an overload heater, the resistance of the overload heater will be considered in Vst calculation as well.
Base kV for Vst

This field displays the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus.
Apply Power Factor
If this is checked, the percent loading power factor value is considered in the voltage drop calculations.
Short-Circuit
If this is checked, sizing will be based on the cable short-circuit capacity to withstand the short-circuit current magnitude specified or defined in the Protection page for
the corresponding time (duration). The Standard used to calculate the cable size based on the Short-Circuit kA and the Short-Circuit Time can be found in either ICEA
Publication P-32-382 or the Buff book IEEE 242 Standard.
Min. Size for Short-Circuit

The required minimum cable size calculated based on the short-circuit current and duration is displayed in this field.
Short-Circuit kA
This field displays the used Fault kA from the Short-Circuit Current section in the Protection page.
Short-Circuit Time (s)

This field displays the Time value from the Protection Device section in the Protection page.
Overload
This option is enabled only when BS 7671 Edition or IEC 60364 is selected as the standard in the Installation section of the Capability (Ampacity) page.
If this box is checked, overload protection will be considered for cable sizing. ETAP calculates the minimum size required by the overload protection conditions. The
cable at the Min. Size for Overload protection must meet the following two conditions:
 1.45 times De-rated Ampacity >= I2

 De-rated Ampacity >= In
where the De-rated Ampacity is that for the cable at the Min Size. In and I2 are the nominal and operating current of the overload protective device respectively. Please
refer to Sections 4 and 5 in Appendix 4 of BS 7671 - 17th Edition or Section 433 of IEC 60364-4-43 for detailed information.
Overload Min. Size

This field displays the required minimum cable size for overload protection calculated based on BS 7671 or IEC 60364.
Overload kA
This field displays the Overload Protective Device In current value from the Protective Device section in the Protection page. It is the nominal current of the protective
device.
Cable Application
This section allows the user to specify cable application type for cable loading modification.
Note: When IEC 60364, BS 7671 or NF C15-100 Standard is selected for sizing, additional Cable Applications will be listed. When any of these additional cable
applications is selected, the corresponding permissible feeder voltage drop percent value will be displayed in “Permissible Fdr Vd” field. . For more information, refer
to the “Permissible Feeder Vd" section.
MF
This Multiplication Factor (MF) is determined by the application type selected from the drop-down list provided. You can modify the values of Application MF by
selecting Project, Settings, and Cable Ampacity MF from the Menu Bar. This Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity (MF times operating or
full load current).
Use MF for Ampacity

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Multiplying Factor (MF) displayed in the MF field.
Options
Use Motor Service Factor (SF) (Motor Equipment Cables Only)
If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the motor Service Factor (SF) as specified for the motor in the Nameplate page.
Use Load Growth Factor (GF)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Growth Factor as specified for this cable in the Operating Load / Current section of the Loading
page.
Cable Library Selection

Use Available Cable Sizes Only
Use only cable sizes which are flagged as Available in the Cable Library for the specified cable type (cable library header).
Use All Cable Sizes From Library

Use all cable sizes, which exist, in the cable library for the specified cable type (cable library header).
Report
This section is used to access and print various output cable reports. Model Forms used in BS 7671 Appendix 6 can also be accessed. These forms will open using
Microsoft Word, and will contain populated data applicable to the cable.
Cable Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the cable calculations in the current project folder. Select a file to view the report or to create a new report. Note: in the latter
case, the existing file will be overwritten.
When Prompt is selected, a new file will be created.
Cable Report Manager Button

Click the button to access reports for Cable Ampacity and Cable Sizing results as well as the cable data.
Model Forms Button

Click this button to view and generate Model forms based on the BS7671 standard. The templates of the Model forms are saved in ETAP installed folder. It is in
subfolder named "Cable Model Forms" under folder Formats1100. Users can modify the templates in MS Word. For users who use MS Word 2003 may use the files
with _2003 in the file names. The default templates from ETAP are saved also in the subfolder "BACKUP".
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page - Cable Editor

Note: This page is for Protective Equipment (PE) conductor thermal sizing and Electric Shock calculations. Load Flow and Short Circuit based modules do not utilize
the parameters or results of this page in this release.
Thermal Sizing
The input data required to perform PE sizing is in the “Thermal Constraints” section.
Ground Fault (kA)

This read only field is a value that is either calculated or user defined in the Short Circuit section of the protection page for 3 phase cables. For a 1 phase Line to Line or
Line to Ground cable connection, the cable is either user defined in the Short Circuit section in the Protection page or calculated in the Electric Shock tab.
Ground Fault (s)

This read only field value is either user defined in the Overcurrent section of the protection page or returned by ETAP when the Ground Fault value is entered is
described in the Ground Fault (kA) section.
Leakage Current
Enter the leakage current, if it is known, in order to increase the minimum size of protective conductors, as per applicable BS or IEC standards. Armor and sheath used
as protective conductors are not considered in establishing a minimum size in the presence of leakage currents.
Temperature
The temperature fields are displayed only and used for thermal sizing calculation.
Main Cable
The Main Cable describes the Main PE, or the earthing conductor, of the cable and does not include the phase conductors, Armors, etc.
The initial temperature value for the Main Protective Equipment conductor (PE) can be set by the selection of either the Table or Formula methods in the Factor K
section.
If Table or Formula method is used for the Main PE, then the initial temperature value is acquired from the “Thermal Damage curve” section from the Protection page.
The final temperature value for the Main Cable can be set by the selection of either the Table or Formula method.
If either the Table or Formula method is used for the Main PE, then the final temperature value is acquired from the “Thermal Damage curve” section from the
Protection page.
Aux Cable
The Aux Cable describes the auxiliary PE (external to the phase conductor carrying cable), or the earthing conductor.
If the Table method is used for the determination of the factor k for the Aux PE, then the initial temperature value is acquired from the applicable standard, based on
checking the check box Aux Cable Bunched in the Configuration page.
The Aux Cable Bunched check box will only be visible if in addition to choosing the Table method, the Aux Protective conductor type of insulation is selected based on
table A54.4 from the IEC standard and table 54.3 from BS7671 standard in configuration page.
If the Formula method is used for the Aux PE, then the initial temperature value is acquired from the “Thermal Damage curve” section from the Protection page.
The final temperature value for the Aux Cable can be set by the selection of either the Table or Formula method.
If Table method is used for the Aux PE, then the final temperature value is acquired from the applicable standard.
If Formula method is used for the Aux PE, then the final temperature value is acquired from the “Thermal Damage curve” section from the Protection page.
Armor / Sheath
Values for the initial temperature of armor and sheath is 10°C lower than the maximum operating temperature of phase conductors, as per applicable standard.
Values for the final temperature of armor and sheath are always 200°C as per applicable standard.
Factor k
Select the method for calculating the Factor k for Main or Aux Cable.
If Formula is selected, then the Factor k is based on the Factor K formula given in the applicable standard.
If Tables is selected, then the tables in the applicable standard will be looked up to find the appropriate Factor k.
For Aux Cable, if Formula radio button is missing, then the data in the Aux cable row in the Configuration page is not loaded from the library. Once the Aux cable in
the Configuration page is selected from library, then the Formula radio button in the Aux Cable section will be selected.
Thermal Required Size
Protective Conductor (PE)

This header indicates the protective conductors in the Main Cable, Auxiliary, or as an Armor and /or sheath, as set in the Configuration page.
Existing
For the selected row, Main or Auxiliary cable, the existing size is the size user has selected in the configuration page.
Required
For the selected row, the required size is the minimum cross-sectional area of protective conductors and/or armor and/or sheath, calculated by ETAP based on thermal
constraints using the selected standard in the Ampacity page.
Regarding Armor and Sheath, ETAP establishes if either the armor or the sheath, if simultaneously present in the cable, can be safely employed as the sole return path
to the source for ground-fault currents.
For more details on the thermal checking of armors and sheaths refer to Chapter 46.
Size
Check the size check box in either the Main or Aux cable row for which to determine the minimum required protective conductor size.
K2S2
2
This read only field is the calculated allowed thermal let through energy value of the cable in units of kA s. This value is to be compared to either the protective device
manufacturers or standards let through energy value for protective device disconnection times less than 0.1 seconds.
Update Size
After the required thermal size in the auxiliary row is calculated, this button will be activated. Once clicked, the protective cable size in the auxiliary row of
configuration page will be updated.
Electric Shock Constraints
Earthing Type
This read-only field reflects the system earthing type determined by the source elements.
Distributed/Undistributed
This read-only field, available for AC cables only, indicates if the ungrounded neutral wire is distributed or not.
Local Resistance
Additional
This is the additional resistance, if present (e.g. due to an extension cord) is to be considered in series to both the protective conductor (which may be in parallel to
armor and sheath, if present), as well as to the impedance of the line conductor.
Ground/Earth
This is the combined resistances for all of the bus bar grounding electrodes, their bonding, and other forms of resistance until the earth surface.
Load Type
These are the various load types mentioned in BS7671 and IEC standards.
Exclude Second Earth Fault for IT System

Checking this box will only include first fault touch voltage calculation for IT systems.
Permissible Vt
The table below shows the conditions in which the permissible touch voltages are shown.
Standard Earthing Type Permissible voltage Displayed?

BS7671 TN No
EN 50122: 2011 TN Yes
EN 50122: 1997 TN Yes
IEC TN No
BS7671 IT-Collective No
EN 50122: 2011 IT-Collective Yes
EN 50122: 1997 IT-Collective Yes
IEC IT-Collective No
BS7671 IT-Individual, in Groups Yes
IEC IT-Individual, in Groups Yes
EN 50122: 2011 IT-Individual, in Groups Yes
EN 50122: 1997 IT-Individual, in Groups Yes
Electric Shock Results

This section contains the table of calculated Actual compared with Allowed results for the following parameters:
 First Fault Touch Voltage (IT systems)

 Second Fault Touch Voltage (IT systems)
 Touch Voltage (TN/TT systems)
 Disconnection Time
 Loop Impedance
 Loop Current
This entire section is read only and is calculated automatically once all required parameters have been entered.
Note: If the Actual value exceeds the Permissible, the value is displayed in magenta color.
Permissible Touch Voltage (V)

The permissible touch voltage as per the selected standard.
Calculated Touch Voltage (V)

The calculated touch voltage of this circuit in Volts.
Permissible Disconnection Time (s)

The permissible disconnection time, in seconds, as per the BS7671 or IEC standard.
Calculated Disconnection Time (s)

The calculated disconnection time, in seconds, of protective devices designed to de-energize the circuit. If the protective device is a low voltage circuit breaker tripped
by an over current relay, the clearing time will be the total of relay and breaker operating times.
Permissible Loop Current (Amps)

The minimum line to ground loop current allowed for this circuit based on the disconnection time of the selected load type. If the protective device is a low voltage
circuit breaker tripped by an over current relay, the clearing time will be the total of relay and breaker operating times.
Calculated Loop Current (Amps)

The calculated loop current in Amps.
Permissible Loop Impedance (ohms)

The loop impedance allowed for this circuit based on the Permissible Loop Current.
Calculated Loop Impedance (ohms)

The Calculated Loop Impedance of this circuit.
Report
Report Manager
Click on the report button to enter a report name and generate a report that will include Thermal Sizing and Electric Shock Protection results for this cable. The default
report name will be the same as the cable ID.
Model Forms
Click this button to view and generate Model forms based on Appendix 3 of BS7671 standard.
Note: The MS Word2003 files are for MS Word 2003 users.
Standard
This read only field displays the standard selected from the Ampacity page. The standard displayed is utilized in both Thermal and Electric Shock calculations.
DC Cable Editor Overview
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from service,
after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be
λP
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not
cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component will
per
Select the length unit for failure rate length unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
MTTR
Use this field to enter the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage and/or restore the system to its normal
operating state.
µ
Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR (µ = 8760/MTTR) in Repair/yr.
MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA and λP of (MTTF = 1.0/(λA+λP) in yr for unit length automatically).
FOR
Calculate and display the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability), calculated based on MTTR, λA and λP (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(λA+λP)) for unit length
automatically.
MR
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Routing Page
The Routing page provides lists of routed raceways and available raceways. The cable ID and raceway type are shown for both the routed and available raceways.
This is a list of raceways through which this cable is routed. When you add a raceway to this list (by using the insert or add buttons), the cable is placed in a container
attached to the raceway without being placed in any specific conduit or location.
When you bring up the Graphical Editor for the underground systems, you will see the cables in a container of cables that are assigned to this raceway but not assigned
to a specific conduit. This container is attached to the raceway and will disappear when it is empty. You must select and graphically move the cable from the
unassigned cable container to the desired location.
Available Raceways
This is a list of all existing available raceways in this project, i.e., raceways that this cable can be routed through.
Note: Since you cannot route a cable twice through a raceway, this list does not include the raceways listed under Routed Raceways.
Insert: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list ,i.e., insert the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Add: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list ,i.e., add the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Cut: Unroute this cable from the selected raceway.
Cable
Info Page
Physical Page
Impedance Page
Configuration Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Phase Page
Sizing Gnd/PE Page
Reliability Page
Routing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Transmission Line Editor Overview

The properties associated with transmission lines of the electrical system can be entered in this editor. You can perform the following functions within this editor:
 Calculate electrical parameters of lines

 Calculate conductor ampacity and temperature
 Calculate Sag and Tension
 Conductor transposition
 Series Compensation
The Transmission Line Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Transmission Line Editor

You can use the Info page to specify the transmission line ID, From and To bus ID and kV, In/Out of Service, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and Length.
Line Type
The Transmission Line editor type displays information from the transmission line header of the library selected. It is arranged as follows:
Source
Source of the transmission line data for the selected line.
Conductor Type
Conductor material. The current types available are listed in the following table
Type Description
AAAC All Aluminum Alloy Conductor
AAC All Aluminum Conductor
AAC/TW All Aluminum Conductor / Trapwire
AACSR Aluminum Alloy Conductor Steel Reinforced
ACAR Aluminum Conductor Alloy Reinforced
ACCC Aluminum Conductor Composite Core
ACCR Aluminum Conductor Composite Reinforced
ACSR Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
ACSR/AW Single Layer Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Clad Steel Reinforced
ACSR/COMP Compact round Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
ACSR/TW Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced / Trapwire
ACSS Aluminum Conductor Steel Supported
ACSS/AW Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Clad Steel Supported
ACSS/TW Shaped Wire Concentric Lay Compact Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Steel Supported
AHC Anaconda Hollow Copper
AW Aluminum-Clad Steel Conductor
CU Copper
CW Copper Weld
CWC Copper Weld Copper
GTACSR Gas Type Thermal Resistant ACSR
TACIR Thermal Resistant Aluminum Conductor Invar Reinforced
TACSR Aluminum-Zirconium Alloy Conductor, Steel Reinforced
VR Wind Induced – Motion Resistant Conductor
Base Temp.1 for R

Base Rated Temperature 1 for the Resistance value in degrees Celsius. This temperature plus the rated temperature 2 are used to calculate the resistance variation for the
line at various temperatures.
Base Temp.1 for R

Base Rated Temperature 2 for the Resistance value in degrees Celsius. This temperature plus the rated temperature 1 are used to calculate the resistance variation for the
line at various temperatures.
Frequency
Line rated frequency in Hz. This value indicates the frequency at which reactance, GMR, and other parameters are specified by the manufacturer or standard. If the
frequency of the system is different, ETAP will automatically adjust these parameters to the system frequency.
Code
Code name given to a transmission line by the standard or source of data. For most available lines, their code (for example, bird, flower, city, or sport) has been entered
in this field. In the case of the T&D book, since they do not use the bird names, size-strands has been used for the code.
Size
2
Line size in AWG, kcmil, or mm .
Con. # of Strands
Main conductor number of strands.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transmission line. The assigned IDs consist of the default line
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of lines increase. The default line ID (Line) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the
menu bar or from the System Manager.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a transmission line are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
For 3 Phase Transmission Lines, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop down lists. For Single Transmission Lines only single-phase buses will be displayed.
If a branch is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the branch to a new bus from the editors will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where Branch X is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Single Phase Transmission lines can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as such, then the Phase Adapter ID will show in the Primary or
Secondary field.
Next to the From and To bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses for your convenience.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Connection
Transmission Lines can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase lines by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Define the line as a three-phase line. This line can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Define the line as a single-phase line.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Enter the equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Lock / Unlock
Length
Length
Enter the length of the transmission line, in the units specified in the Unit field.
Unit
Select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Tolerance
Enter the percent tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to consider +/- % tolerance in line length, effectively increasing or
decreasing the impedance based on the type of study being performed.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Parameter Page - Transmission Line Editor

In the parameter page you can select the Phase and ground conductors from the library or enter the conductor properties.
Phase Conductor
Conductor Type
Select the main conductor material (Copper or Aluminum).
R T1
This is the phase conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.
R T2
This is the phase conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.
Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per mile at 1ft spacing or ohms per kilometer at 1 ft spacing.
Outside Diameter
Specify the conductor outside diameter in inches or cm. ETAP calculates the equivalent diameter of the bundled conductors (d’) by using the following formulas:
Two bundled conductors:
Three bundled conductors:
Four bundled conductors:

Where d is a single conductor diameter in inches and S is the separation between conductors in inches or cm.
GMR
Specify the conductor geometric mean radius (GMR) in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the conductor radius. When Xa is entered and GMR has not
been entered, the program will calculate GMR using the following formula:
Where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled conductors in inches or cm.
Xa’
Enter the conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per mile or kilometer.
Conductor Lib
Click the Conductor Lib button to access the Library Quick Pick – Transmission Line (Phase Conductor) dialog box, which allows you to select line data from the
library.
Ground Wire
Conductor Type
Select the main conductor material (Aluminum, Copper, or Steel).
R T1
Enter the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.
R T2
Enter the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.
Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per mile at 1ft spacing.
Outside Diameter
Specify the conductor outside diameter in inches or cm. For bundled conductors, ETAP calculates the equivalent diameter of the bundled conductors (d’) using the
following formulas:
Two bundled wires:
Three bundled wires:
Four bundled wires:

Where d is a single conductor diameter in inches and S is the separation between conductors in inches or cm.
GMR
Specify the conductor geometric mean radius (GMR) in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the conductor radius. When Xa is entered and GMR has not
been entered, the program will calculate using the following formulas:
Where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled conductors in inches or cm.
Xa’
Conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per mile or kilometer.
Ground Wire Lib

Click the Ground Wire Lib button to access the Library Quick Pick – Transmission Line (Ground Wire) dialog box, which allows you to select line data from the
library.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Configuration Page - Transmission Line Editor

Configuration Type
Several types of physical configurations are available for transmission lines to accommodate most setups. Available options for transmission line placement are:
Horizontal Parallel Vertical

Vertical Parallel Horizontal
Triangular General*
The general configuration allows you to specify the physical location of the conductors with respect to a reference point. The reference point is located at the same level
as the base of the tower or pole. This defines the height of the lines with respect to the soil level. For example:
For this configuration, the following parameters would be used:
The spacing is calculated automatically by ETAP. The ground wires are also entered with respect of the reference point.
GMD
The geometric mean diameter (GMD) is calculated based on the spacing and configuration type. The value is in feet or meters.
Phase
Height
Enter the height (in feet or meters) of the transmission line from Earth to the highest conductor in the system.
Spacing
Specify the distance between the phase conductors as three pairs of conductors (AB, BC, CA) in feet or meters. This provides the ability to configure the wires to almost
any shape. For parallel circuits, you need to specify the distance between the two circuits. ETAP treats the triangular and parallel configurations symmetrically (that is,
AB = BC and CA<(AB+BC)).
This field is dimmed when General is selected for the Configuration Type. in this case, the fields are calculated based on the X,Y coordinates of the conductors.
Layout
Layout is a graphical representation of the location of the conductors and ground wires. The image is not to scale and it does not update with changes in spacing.
d12
This is the distance between the closest conductors from each parallel circuit. It is used to define the separation between the two circuits as indicated in the image below.
Ground Wires
GG
The distance between the ground wires in feet or meters. This field is active if you have more than one ground wire.
CG
The distance between the ground wires and a phase conductor closest to the ground wire in feet or meters. The value of CG can be negative if ground wires are located
under the phase conductors.
G1 and G2
These fields are available only when you have selected General under the Configuration Type. Check G1 if you have at least one ground wire in the system. Then
specify the X, Y coordinate of this wire with respect to the reference. Check G2 if you have two ground wires in the system.
Conductors
Transposed
Select his option if the 3-phase transmission line is fully transposed. This option affects the calculation of transmission line impedance values.
Separation
Enter the separation between the adjacent bundled conductors of the same phase in inches or centimeters.
Conductors/phase
You can specify up to four bundled conductors
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Grouping Page - Transmission Line Editor
The Grouping page of the Transmission Line Editor allows you to take the effect of mutual coupling into account.
Group
The Group section allows the user to specify a coupling group that a line is involved in. You can also specify other related parameters such as relative location of this
line with respect to the common reference point of the coupling group.
The parameters in this section are not applicable if the User-Defined option is selected in the Impedance page of the editor. This means that, if the impedance values for
the line are defined by the user, the coupling effect of this line with other lines will not be considered.
Name
This is the mutual coupling group name. Click in this field to select a coupling group from the drop-down list. If you have not created a coupling group, you can create
one by clicking on the Mutual Coupling Group button located below the Tower area.
Length (M)
This is the length of the section in which the lines in the group are coupled. This value is defined in the Mutual Coupling Group editor.
X (ft)
Enter the horizontal distance between the reference point of this line and the reference point of the coupling group. You can set the X value for one of the lines to make
it the reference point. Then set the X value for the rest of the lines with reference to the first line.
Y (ft)
Enter the vertical distance between the reference point of this line and the reference point of the coupling group. You can take the line that has its pole or tower at the
lowest elevation and set the Y of the line equal to 0. Then for each of the rest of the lines, set Y equal to the difference in elevation between the line and the first line.
Click this button to switch the start bus and end bus values. This indicates the starting and ending side of all lines in the coupling group.
Start Bus
This is the bus on the side where the line coupling starts. The starting and ending buses of a line are used to determine the terminal buses that are on the same side for all
the coupled lines in the group. The start bus affect the calculation of the voltage drops of coupled lines.
End Bus
This is the bus on the side where the line coupling ends.
Tower
Ground Resistance
Specify the value of the grounding resistance through the tower in ohms.
Segmented Earth Wires

Select this option to make the earth wires segmented.
Average Distance
Specify the average distance between each tower in the unit specified in the Unit field.
Unit
Select the units in which the average distance is specified.
Mutual Coupling Group Button

Use this button to access the Mutual Coupling group editor. You can define the coupling groups here and then select it on the group name filed above.
Note: You can also access the Mutual Coupling Group Editor from the Project Menu.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Earth Page - Transmission Line Editor

This page allows you to model the earth layers. This information is used to calculate the grounding resistance of the line.
Earth Layers
This group allows you to specify up to 3 layers of ground and the properties of each layer.
Number of Earth Layers

Select the number of earth layers you want to model. ETAP will display a row to enter properties for each layer.
P(ohms-m)
Enter the earth resistivity for each layer in ohm-meters (ohms-m).
e
Enter the earth permitivity of each layer.
μ
Enter the earth permeability of each layer.
Depth
Enter the depth of each layer in feet/meters.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Page - Transmission Line Editor

Impedance (per phase)
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Resistances (R-T1,R-T2)
ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence resistances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, and at base temperature T1 and T2,
according to the specified configuration and grounding information of a transmission line. ETAP corrects these resistances for different studies based on the specified
temperature limits in the Operating Temperatures group. You can also specify positive and zero sequence resistances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, and at
base temperatures T1 and T2 specified for this data file.
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Reactances (X)

ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence reactances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, according to the specified configuration,
grounding, and grouping information of a transmission line. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP corrects these reactances for
the system operating frequency. The user can also specify positive and zero sequence reactances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, at the system operating
frequency specified for this data file. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y)

ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence susceptances in microsiemens or microsiemens per unit length, per phase, according to the
specified configuration and grounding information of a transmission line. If the value is Y>0, the transmission line is treated as a model, with one half (1/2) of the
charging susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the line. If Y=0, the transmission line is treated as an external impedance. When data is recalled from English
(60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP corrects these susceptances for the system operating frequency. The user can also specify positive and zero sequence
susceptances in microsiemens or microsiemens per unit length, per phase, at the system operating frequency specified for this data file. The zero sequence susceptance
is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
When the Calculated option is selected for line impedance, the impedance values displayed in this section is calculated for the line itself, even if the line is involved in a
coupling group with other lines. The impedance matrices considering coupling effect are displayed when the R, X, and Y buttons are clicked.
Note that ETAP automatically doubles the Transmission Line R & X values for single phase system calculations to represent both the forward and return conductors.
Calculated
Select the Calculated option if you want ETAP to calculate the impedance of the line according to the parameters, configuration, grounding, and grouping.
User Defined
Select the User-Defined option if you want to enter the impedance values. When this option is selected, the parameters in the Group section of the Group page do not
apply and the coupling effect of this line with other lines will not be considered.
Unit
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. Select a unit for unit length from the list box. Units available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers. If you
select ohms, the impedances calculated or entered represent the total impedance of the line. ETAP uses ohms per mile as the unit of impedance calculation.
R, X, Y Matrices
Select Phase Domain or Sequence Domain and click the buttons under this group to display the Resistance (R), Reactance (X), or the Susceptance (Y) sequence
matrixes.
Library Temperatures
Base T1 and Base T2
If you have selected the phase conductors from the library, ETAP displays the temperatures (in degrees Celsius) at which the resistance values where entered in the
library. These temperatures allow ETAP to determine the impedance variation versus temperature.
If you have selected to specify the impedance, then select or enter the temperatures (in degrees Celsius) at which you have entered the resistances upstream in the
Impedance (per phase) group.
Operating Temperatures
Minimum and Maximum
Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero sequence resistances (R and R0) for different studies. The first
limit is the minimum operating temperature and the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most conservative temperature limit for
each study type.
For example:
Temperature Limit Used by some modules
Min. Max.
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Dynamic Stability X
If this correction is not wanted, set both minimum and maximum temperature limits equal to the base temperature. ETAP uses the Base T1 and Base T2 temperatures to
calculate the impedance variation of the line.
If R-T1 and R-T2 entered on the Parameters page are equal, it indicates that the line resistance does not vary as conductor temperature fluctuates. In this case, the
calculation will use a constant resistance at the base temperature.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Protection Page - Transmission Line Editor

This page contains options to plot the transmission line thermal capability curve on a Star View.
Thermal Capability
Transmission line capability curve is an I2t characteristic curve, which depends on the following parameters:
 Conductor area
 Number of conductors/phase
The thermal capability curve is always drawn between t = 1 to t = 10 seconds.
Plot Phase Conductor I2t on TCC

Click to plot conductor I2t on Star View. This option will plot or hide the phase conductor thermal capability curve from the Star View. This check box is only active
when a phase conductor is selected from the library.
Plot Ground Wire I2t on TCC
Click to plot wire I2t on Star View. This option will plot or hide ground wire thermal capability curve from the Star View. This check box is only active when a ground
conductor is selected from the library.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Sag & Tension Page - Transmission Line Editor

It is important to perform a sag and tension calculation for a transmission line to ensure an adequate operating condition for the line. If the tension applied on the line is
beyond its tension limit, the line conductor will be damaged, which will in turn reduce line capacity and decrease the life span of the line. If the sag is too great, this may
cause a short-circuit between the line and objects below it or a short-circuit between lines in extremely windy conditions.
ETAP calculates the sag and tension of the line with a series of suspension spans based on the ruling span method on this page. It gives line sag and tension for the
specified operating conditions, including temperature, wind speed, and ice on the line and is based on the sag and tension under initial conditions (called Known
Conditions in the editor). The initial conditions may be at no load conditions or some other operating conditions at which line sag or tension can be measured. The sag
and tension to be calculated should be for the worst operating conditions, such as in strong wind conditions and lines covered with thick ice, etc.
The ruling span method represents a series of suspension spans between two dead-end structures by a level dead-end span. The level dead-end span, called ruling span,
gives the same change in tension from loading, temperature, and other operating conditions as that of the actual line. The method calculates sags for each suspended
section of the line. But it assumes that the tension of all the suspended sections is the same as that of the ruling span.
Line Section
You can specify the operating temperature and line sections of suspended spans in this group. ETAP calculates the length of the ruling span, tension of the ruling span,
and sags for each suspended section.
Same Tower Height

Select this option if the towers are at the same level. This option will allow you to calculate the Sag at the Spans entered in the table below. If this option is not checked,
ETAP will calculate the Sag and Tension as seen from each tower.
Op Temp.
Enter the operating temperature in degrees Celsius or check to use and display the operating temperature. The operating temperature is calculated on the Ampacity page
corresponding to the operating current. To obtain more conservative tension and sag results, a lower operating temperature should be used.
Horiz. Tension
The calculated line horizontal tension is displayed in this field in lbs/kN.
Ruling Span
The calculated length of the ruling span in ft./m is displayed in this field. This filed is displayed when Same Tower Height has been selected.
Span
Enter the individual span of suspended sections of the line in ft. or meters .
Height Diff
Enter the height difference between towers in feet or meters.
Span Vs Sag Table
Span (Ft)
Enter the individual span of suspended sections of the line in ft. or meters in this column.
Sag
This field displays the calculated sag in ft. or meters for each suspended section of the line in this column,
Low Tower and High Tower Tension and Sag

These fields display the Sag and Tension seen from the Lower Tower and from the High Tower, when the Same Tower Height option is not selected.
Loaded Conditions
This group includes operating parameters under loaded conditions that affect the line tension and sag calculation. The parameters should be entered to yield more
conservative results, such as higher wind pressure and thicker ice on the line, etc.
Weight
Enter the conductor weight in lb/ft or N/m. If you have selected the conductor from the library, the information from the library automatically updates this field.
k Factor
Enter the constant to be added from NESC table 251-1 under the loaded conditions in lb/ft or N/m.
Ice
Enter the ice thickness under the loaded conditions in cm/in.
Wind
Enter the NESC horizontal wind force requirement in lb/sq. ft or N/sq. m under the loaded conditions in cm/in.
Elongation Coefficient
Enter the coefficient of conductor elongation in 10-6/degrees C. Refer to the table below for nominal or minimum properties of conductor wire materials. This table can
be found in the Overhead Conductor Manual 2nd Edition page 1.4.
Intl. Commercial Standard Standard Standard Galvanized Aluminum

Annealed Hard-Drawn 1350-H19 1350-0 6201-T81 Steel Clad Steel
Property Copper Copper Wire Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Core Core
Standard Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire
Elongation
Coefficient
16.9 16.9 23.0 23.0 23.0 11.5 13.0
106 per
◦C
Al/Cu Strands
Enter the number and diameter of the conductor (Copper or Aluminum) strands. Diameter is specified in inches or centimeters. If you have selected the conductor from
the library, the information from the library automatically updates this field.
Steel Strands
Enter the number and diameter of the reinforcement (steel or composite) strands. The Diameter is specified in inches or centimeters. If you have selected the ground
wire from the library, the information from the library automatically updates this field.
Modulus of Elasticity
Enter the modulus of elasticity for Aluminum / Copper or Steel in 106 psi if using English units or Mpa in metric units. Refer to the table below for nominal or
minimum properties of conductor wire materials. This table can be found in the Overhead Conductor Manual 2nd Edition page 1.4.
Intl. Commercial Standard Standard Standard Galvanized Aluminum
Annealed Hard- 1350-H19 1350-0 6201-T81 Steel Core Clad Steel
Property Copper Drawn Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Wire Core Wire
Standard Copper Wire Wire Wire
Wire
Modulus of
Elasticity 17 17 10 10 10 29 23.5
106 psi 117,000 117,000 69,000 69,000 69,000 200,000 162,000
106 Pascal
Known Conditions
In this group you can enter the initial conditions under which line tension or sag value can be provided by measurement or previous knowledge.
Ice
Enter the ice thickness on the line under the known conditions in cm or inches.
Wind
Enter the known NESC horizontal wind force requirement under the known conditions in lb/sq. ft or N/sq. m.
k Factor
Enter the known constant to be added from NESC table 251-1 under the known conditions in lb/ft or N/m.
Temperature
Enter the known operating temperature in degrees Celsius.
Tension or Sag
Select to enter the known tension or sag. ETAP will calculate and display the other parameter. These two values are based on the ruling span of the line.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Ampacity Page - Transmission Line Editor

ETAP determines the current-temperature relationship for transmission lines in this page. The calculation is based on IEEE Standard 738-1993, “IEEE Standard for
Calculating the Current-Temperature Relationship of Bare Overhead Conductors.” Conductor surface temperatures are a function of:
 Conductor material
 Conductor OD
 Conductor surface conditions
 Ambient weather conditions
 Conductor electrical current
Based on the steady-state heat balance equation of a bear overhead conductor, the conductor current and temperature relationship can be given as the following
equation:
Where I is the conductor current, qc is the convected heat loss, qr is the radiated heat loss, qs is the heat gain from the sun, and R is the conductor AC resistance at
conductor temperature Tc.
For a bare stranded conductor, if the conductor temperature (Tc) and the steady state weather parameters are known, the heat losses due to convection and radiation,
solar heat gain, and conductor resistance can be calculated. While the calculation given in IEEE Std 738-1993 can be performed for any conductor temperature and any
weather condition, a maximum allowable conductor temperature and conservative weather conditions are often used to calculate the steady state thermal rating for the
conductor.
ETAP calculates the operating temperature corresponding to the user entered operation current for the specified installation and environment conditions, so that you can
determine the maximum operating temperature for given transmission line loading conditions. It also calculates the derated ampacity for the conductor temperature limit
you enter, so that you can determine the maximum loading current for your transmission lines.
Wind
Speed
Speed is wind velocity in ft./s. Conservative wind velocity is considered around 2 ft./s. Most wind speeds obtained from the weather bureau records are often inaccurate,
since most of the data has been recorded by standard cup-type anemometer that has significant starting inertia. Therefore, readings at low wind speeds are questionable.
Direction
Direction is defined as the direction of the movement of air relative to the line axis. The wind direction and the line axis are assumed to be in a plane parallel to the
earth.
Atmosphere
Ta
This shows the ambient temperature around the conductor in degrees Celsius.
Condition
Select the condition of the atmosphere. The two options are Clear and Industrial. The atmosphere condition affects the solar heat gain.
Sun Time
Local sun time used to calculate total solar heat gain. At different values of local sun time, the altitude and azimuth of the sun will be different and yield a different solar
heat gain.
Installation
In this group, you enter parameters for the installation of the transmission line.
Elevation
Elevation of the conductor above sea level is in ft./meter. This value is used to determine air density for calculating convection heat loss. Furthermore, the height of
conductors above the ground is significant in terms of wind shielding. High voltage lines normally have greater ground clearance and may be less shielded by trees and
terrain than low voltage lines. Select the highest altitude that is applicable at the location of the line, because this will give the most conservative results.
Azimuth
This represents Azimuth of the line in degrees, measured clockwise from the Northern direction to the line axis.
North Latitude
This represents the North latitude of the line location in degrees.
Solar Absorptivity
Solar absorptivity is typically 0.23 to 0.91, depending on the age of the line. The exact rate of increase depends on the level of atmospheric pollution and the line’s
operating voltage. Absorptivity is usually higher than emissivity.
Emissivity
Emissivity is typically 0.23 to 0.91, depending on the age of the line. The exact rate of increase depends on the level of atmospheric pollution and the line’s operating
voltage. Emissivity is usually lower than absorptivity.
Ampacity
This group displays conductor ampacity and temperature calculation results, as well as ampacity and temperature values from the transmission line conductor library.
Lib Ta
This field displays the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius from the conductor library.
Base Ampacity
This field displays the conductor base ampacity in amperes from the conductor library. This ampacity value is corresponding to the ambient and conductor temperature
values from the conductor library.
Operating Ampacity
Enter the conductor operating current in amperes and ETAP will calculate the corresponding conductor temperature, which is displayed in the Operating Conductor
Temp. field.
Derated Ampacity
For the user entered Tc value, ETAP calculates the corresponding conductor ampacity and displays the result in this field.
Note: For Parallel Vertical and Parallel Horizontal configurations the calculated ampacity is the total ampacity of the two parallel circuits. If the Conductors/phase in
the Configuration page is more than one, the calculated ampacity is for the total of the multiple conductors.
Lib Conductor Temp.

This field displays the conductor temperature limit in degrees Celsius from the conductor library.
Top Conductor Temp.

This field displays the calculated operating temperature in degrees Celsius.
Tc Conductor Temp.
Enter the maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. ETAP calculates the derated conductor ampacity and displays the result in the Derated
Ampacity field.
Allowable Ampacity
This is the maximum allowable ampacity of the line. It is used in the load flow output reports to indicate the percent of line overloading. This value is also used as a
base for the line flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
ETAP provides options for selecting the maximum allowable current:
Select this option to make the derated ampacity the maximum allowable
Derated
current for this line.
User-Defined Select this option to enter the maximum allowable current for this line
Note: The conductor Temperature Tc is calculated given the allowable ampacity.
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Compensation Page - Transmission Line Editor

Fixed Series Capacitor
Check this box to add a series or fixed capacitor to the 3-phase transmission line.
kV
Enter rated kV of the series capacitor.
Mvar/kvar button
Toggle between Mvar and kvar for capacitor size value.
Amps
Enter the rated amps of the series capacitor bank.
Xc (ohms)
Enter the capacitor reactance value in ohms at system frequency.
Xc = 1/(2*π*fsys*0.000001*microfarad)
Where, fsys is the system frequency.
Microfarad
Enter capacitor size in microfarad.
Max. kV
This is the maximum kv rating value of the capacitor bank.
Fixed Capacitor Location

Specifies the location of the fixed series capacitor on the line (From end or To end of the line)
Degree of Compensation
This is the percentage of Xc compensation that will be applied to the transmission line.
Bypass Switch (On/OFF)

Select to bypass the fixed series capacitor compensation for the line.
Protection Mode
MOV Protection
Selects the protection mode of the series capacitor.
Protective Level Current

Enter the capacitor protective level current. (Ipr)
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
operation of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from service,
after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be
λP
Per
Select a length unit from the list box for the failure rate. The units of length available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
µ
Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year. It is calculated automatically based on MTTR (µ = 8760/MTTR) in repair/yr automatically.
MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years. It is calculated automatically based on λA and λP of MTTF = 1.0/(λA+λP) in yr for unit length automatically.
FOR
Calculate and display the forced outage rate (unavailability). It is automatically calculated based on MTTR, λA, and λP (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(λA+λP)) for unit
length.
MTTR
The MTTR (Mean Time To Repair) in hours is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Library
Library Button
Source
This displays the Source Name of the library data selected
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected
Class
Transmission Line
Info Page
Parameter Page
Configuration Page
Grouping Page
Earth Page
Impedance Page
Protection Page
Sag & Tension Page
Ampacity Page
Compensation Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reactor Editor Overview

The properties associated with current-limiting reactors of the electrical distribution systems can be entered in this editor.
The Reactor Editor contains the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Reactor Editor
Info
ID
This allows the user to enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each current-limiting reactor. The assigned IDs consist of the default reactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of reactors increase. The default reactor ID (X) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a reactor branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new
composite network.
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where Branch X is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
For 3 Phase Reactors, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop down lists. For single-phase Reactors only single-phase buses will be displayed.
A single-phase reactor can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Reactor is connected as such, then the Phase Adapter ID is displayed in the Primary or Secondary
field.
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a reactor branch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service branch can
be edited like an In Service branch; however, an Out of Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service branch automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-
energized and become dimmed.
Note: the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property, which is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the
Base Data and Out of Service in Revision Data.
State
Connection
Reactors can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Click the button to define the reactor as a 3 Phase. This reactor can be connected only to 3 phase buses.
1 Phase
Click the button to define the reactor as single-phase.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data is updated, this
field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names, navigate to the Project Menu, point to Settings and select
Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are
allowed. To change priority names, from the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Reactor
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Reactor Editor

Rating
Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the current-limiting reactor in amperes.
This value is also used as a base for the reactor flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the current-limiting reactor in kV.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedance (Z and Z0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence impedance in ohms. The zero sequence impedance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations. ETAP will make no
adjustments to this value other than tolerance correction.
Positive and Zero Sequence X/R

Enter the positive and zero sequence X/R of the reactor. This value is used for calculating the resistance and reactance of the current-limiting reactor.
Typical X/R Button

Use typical X/R.
Note that ETAP automatically doubles the Reactor Z value for single phase calculations to represent both the forward and return conductors.
Tolerance
This is the tolerance of the nominal value of the positive and zero sequence reactance, in percent. This value should be zero for an existing reactor with a known
reactance. For a new reactor with a design impedance value, this should be the tolerance range for the reactance specified by the manufacturer. ETAP will automatically
select the positive or negative tolerance value, which will result in the most conservative solution. A negative value is used for short-circuit studies and a positive value
for all other studies.
Reactor
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Editor Overview

You can enter the properties associated with impedances of your electrical distribution system in this editor. Impedance branches are used to specify circuit elements in
per unit values. Impedance branches can be used to represent lines and current-limiting reactors.
The Impedance Editor contains the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Impedance Editor
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters in this field.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch. The assigned IDs consist of the default impedance ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of impedances increase. The default impedance ID (Z) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System
Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an impedance branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new
composite network.
protective device to the new bus, as shown here where Branch X is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Connection
Select the connection type of the impedance.
3 Phase
Select to setup impedance as three-phase.
1 Phase
Select to setup impedance as single-phase.
Condition
Service
Note: The In/Out of Service option is an engineering property, which is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Data Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Impedance
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Impedance Editor

Balanced Model
If Balanced is selected in the Model group, the Impedance and Units groups are displayed.
Unbalanced Model
If Unbalanced is selected in the Model group, the editor displays the R, X, Y, and Units groups.
Model
Balanced
Select this option to model the impedance as balanced; in other words, the impedance will be equal for all three phases.
Unbalanced
Select this option to model the impedance as unbalanced; in other words, the impance at each phase is different. Selecting this option allows you to express the
impedance of the branch in either phase or sequence domain. These options are available in the Data Format group.
Balanced Model
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R and R0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence resistances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified base MVA or in ohms. The zero sequence resistance is used only
for unbalanced fault current calculations. Note: When these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected buses as the base; however, this
voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally.
ETAP uses the transformer turn ratios for determining the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics, motor starting, and transient stability analyses.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X and X0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence reactances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for
unbalanced fault current calculations. Note: When these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected buses as the base, however, this voltage
value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally. ETAP uses
the transformer turns ratios to determine the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics, motor starting, and transient stability analyses.
Note that ETAP automatically doubles the Impedance R & X values for single phase calculations to represent both the forward and return conductors.
Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptance (Y and Y0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence charging (capacitive) susceptances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified base MVA. The zero sequence reactance
is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations. If Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the charging susceptance connected to
neutral at the end of the circuit. If Y=0, the circuit element is treated as a simple impedance. These susceptances must be entered at the system operating frequency,
which is specified for this data file.
Units
Percent/Ohms and Bank kV/MVA
This function toggles between percent and ohmic units for impedance values. Upon selection of the percent unit, the impedance values must be entered in a percent
value with the base kV and MVA as specified in this editor. If an ohmic unit is selected; resistance, reactance, and susceptance must be entered in actual ohms for the
impedance branch.
Unbalanced Model
Data Format
Use this area of the rating page to enter the resistance, reactance, and susceptance data in the phase domain or sequence domain. Depending on your selection, the R, X,
and Y groups are updated so you can enter the values in either domain.
Note: If you have already specified the R, X, and Y values in either domain, switching the option will recalculate the impedances entered to the domain specified.
The following equations are used to convert from phase to sequence domain:
And the following equations are used to convert from sequence to phase domain:
R, X, and Y
Enter the phase or sequence matrix R (resistance), X (reactance), and Y (susceptance) values. ETAP Unbalanced Load Flow and short-circuit modules will use these
values for calculations.
Units
Percent/Ohms and Base kV/MVA
This function toggles between percent and ohmic units for impedance values. Upon selection of the percent unit, the impedance values must be entered in a percent
value with the base kV and MVA as specified in this editor. If an ohmic unit is selected; resistance, reactance, and susceptance matrix values must be entered in actual
ohms for the impedance branch.
Impedance
Info Page
Rating Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Power Grid Editor Overview
Enter properties associated with power grids (utility systems) in this editor. A power grid is represented with its Thevenin’s equivalent, a constant voltage source behind
a short-circuit impedance. The default mode of operating for a power grid is swing type.
The Power Grid Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Short Circuit Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Energy Price Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Power Grid Editor

The Info page allows you to specify the utility ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name and Description, and the power grid Type.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each power grid. The assigned IDs consist of the default power grid ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of power grids increase. The default power grid ID (U) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the power grid. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a
power grid to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the power grid resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in
If a power grid is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the power grid to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next to the bus ID for your convenience.
Connection
The phase connection for the power grid can be defined by selecting 3 Phase or 1 Phase (AN). The default connection is 3 Phase.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the power grid to any device. Once the power grid is connected to a device, the phase connection selections
will be grayed-out. To change the connection type, you need to disconnect the power grid from all devices.
3 Phase
Select to define the power grid as a three-phase source.
1 Phase
Select this to define the power grid as single-phase source. Only single-phase devices can be connected to this source. Note that the connection available is Phase A.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Data Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Mode
The power grid mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor for your reference.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing power grid will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the voltage magnitude and angle of the power grid terminals will
remain at the specified operating values.
For motor acceleration and transient stability studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine initial conditions. For the initial load flow, a swing power grid
is represented as an infinite source. At time 0+, the power grid is modeled as a voltage source behind its short-circuit impedance.
For transient stability studies, one of the swing machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the reference machine for the entire system.
There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple
swing machines connected to any bus in the system.
Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line diagram and will be included in for studies. Also, the rated
voltage (kV) of a swing machine is used as the base kV of the connected bus. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then calculated using transformer turn ratios.
For transient stability studies, a swing power grid becomes the reference machine for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of the power grid is set to
zero, and the voltage angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this reference machine.
Voltage Control
A power grid can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the power grid will adjust its Mvar output to control the voltage. Therefore, the
terminal voltage magnitude, operating real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and Min Q) must be entered for voltage
control power grids. A voltage control power grid means that the power grid is base loaded (fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) controlling the
terminal voltage to a constant value. During load flow studies, if the calculated Mvar falls outside the Mvar capability limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the value of the
Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the power grid mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
Using this option you can specify the amount of fixed MW and Mvar generation in the Rating page of the Power Grid Editor. An Mvar control power grid means that
the power grid is base loaded (fixed MW) with a fixed Mvar generation (no AVR action).
PF Control
Setting the power grid in Power Factor (PF) Control allows you to specify the MW output as a fixed value on the Rating page. The Power Factor is also specified,
ETAP calculates the out Mvar of the grid into the system.
Power Grid
Info Page
Rating Page
Short Circuit Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Energy Price Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Power Grid Editor
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the power grid in kilovolts (kV). This entry is used by ETAP to convert the utility short-circuit MVA to percent short-circuit. This value is
also used as the power grid base kV. Base voltages are calculated by ETAP beginning with the swing systems (swing power grids and/or swing generators) and
continuing for the rest of the system, using the rated kV of the transformer windings.
Generation Categories
This group is used to assign the different power settings to each of the ten generation categories for this power grid.. Each grid can be set to have a different operating
power level for each generation category. Depending on the operation mode, some of the values become editable as follows:
Swing Mode: %V and angle

Voltage Control Mode: %V and MW
Mvar Control: MW and Mvar
Power Factor Control: MW and PF
Note: You can select any of the generation categories from the load flow settings in the study cases such as load flow, motor starting, transient stability, and others.
Gen. Cat.
This shows the names of the generation categories. To modify these names, from the Project Menu, point at Settings then select Generation Categories. Modify the
names in the Generation Category dialog box.
% V (Voltage Magnitude)
Enter the magnitude of the power grid voltage as a percentage of the power grid nominal kV. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for swing
and voltage control modes. This value is used as an initial operating voltage for Mvar control power grids.
Vangle (Voltage Angle)

Enter the angle of the power grid voltage in degrees. This value is used as a reference angle for power grids in swing mode. This value is used as an initial operating
voltage angle for Mvar control power grids.
MW/kW
Enter the megawatt/kilowatt generation (real power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled power grids. This
value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
Mvar/kvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided for Mvar controlled power grid types only. This value will be held
fixed for load flow solutions.
%PF
This is the power factor setting of the power grid. This column is editable for PF controlled grid types only. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
QMax and QMin

These entries specify the maximum and minimum limits for reactive power generation in Mvar/kvar. These limits are required for voltage regulated power grid types
only and should be obtained from the capability curve (Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the specified MW generation. If the
value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at the limit and the power grid type is changed to Mvar control.
Operating
Based on the latest load flow run, the operating voltage magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar are displayed here; or, you may enter the operating voltage magnitude,
voltage angle, MW and Mvar. ETAP will utilize these fields depending on the Operating Mode of the Power Grid. See Mode under the Power Grid - Info page.
Power Grid
Info Page
Rating Page
Short Circuit Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Energy Price Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Short Circuit Page - Power Grid Editor

The Short Circuit page provides the information to model the power grid as a source for studies such as Short Circuit, Motor Starting, Transient Stability, Shock
Protection, etc.
Short-Circuit Page of Three-Phase Power Grid
Short-Circuit Page of Single-Phase Power Grid
Grounding
Connection
The connection of the power grid can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye
and Delta. Note that this option is available only for 3 phase power grids.
Note: In unbalanced load flow studies this connection is ignored and the utility is considered grounded if “Unbalanced” is selected in the rating page.
Grounded
This checkbox is available only for 1 phase power grids. Check this box if the power grid is grounded.
Earthing Type
The earthing type menu is available when the Power Grid voltage is 1 kV or less. The available earthing types are dependent on the Grounding selection and they reflect
the source’s earthing method.
Distributed Neutral
This option is available only when the Grounded option is not checked in 1 phase Power Grid or if Grounding selection is ungrounded in 3 phase Power Grid. Check
this box if the neutral is distributed for the IT arthing type. This field is only utilized when running the Electric Shock feature from within the Cable Editor/Manager. It
is not utilized for modules such as Short Circuit, Load Flow, Arc Flash, and etc.
Rg
This field will only be visible if the Power Grid is 1 kV or less and TT earthing type is selected. It is for the inclusion of the Power Grid earthing in Electric Shock
calculation only. This field reflects both the source’s Ground Grid (Earthing Mat) and the soil resistance between this Power Grid and the load service entry point. The
Rg result from ETAP’s Ground Grid module can assist in determining this value. This field can be left as zero if the Ze field in the Earth/Ground Fault Loop Impedance
is populated.
SC Rating
The section is enabled only for 3 phase power grids.
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) faults. As you enter or modify MVAsc or X/R, ETAP recalculates the corresponding
short-circuit impedance values.
The short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) fault currents are calculated from the following equations:
MVA3P = 1.732 * kV * I3P

sqrt(3) Vll If: MVA1P = 1.732 * kV * I1P
Vln If: MVA1P = (kV / 1.732) * I1P
Where I3P and I1P are three-phase and single-phase short-circuit currents (kAsc). These values are calculated and displayed. Also, the MVAsc for 1-phase calculations
based on Vln if it is displayed as well.
kAsc
Enter the short-circuit contribution from the power grid. This value is updated if the MVAsc and X/R are specified.
X/R
Enter the following X/R ratios for the positive and zero sequence impedances:
 3-Phase X/R = X/R ratio for positive sequence impedance of the power grid.
 1-Phase X/R = X/R ratio for zero sequence impedance of the power grid.
SC Imp (100 MVA base)

Specify short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base. Short-circuit impedance values include positive, negative, and zero
sequences. As you enter or modify short-circuit impedance values, ETAP recalculates the corresponding MVAsc and X/R for three-phase and single-phase faults.
Earth/Ground Fault Loop Impedance

Specify equivalent Earth/Ground Fault Loop Impedance (Ze) in Ohms and X/R of the of the Power Grid. This section is only visible when a 3 phase power grid is 1 kV
or less and the Earthing Type is any earthing type except NEC. These fields are only used in the Electric Shock calculation.
Typical Ze & X/R

The enabling of this button, the fields to fill, and the values of the fields are based on the table below.
Earthing Type Button Enabled Ze Value* X/R Value*

TN-C No N/A N/A
TN-S Yes 0.8 10
TN-C-S Yes 0.35 10
TT Yes 21 10
NEC Hidden N/A N/A
All IT types No N/A N/A
* The Ze and X/R are only typical values and actual values from the local power supplier should be acquired.
SC Rating (Line to Line)

The section is enabled only for 1-Phase power grids.
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for line to line faults. As you enter or modify MVAsc or X/R, ETAP recalculates the corresponding short-circuit impedance values.
The short-circuit MVA for line-to-line fault currents are calculated from the following equations:
MVALL = kV * ILL
where ILL is the line to line short-circuit current (kAsc).
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio for power grid impedance to a line to line fault.
kAsc
SC Impedance (Line to Line)

Specify line to line short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base (or in Ohms). As you enter or modify short-circuit impedance
values, ETAP recalculates the corresponding MVAsc and X/R for the line to line fault in the Line to Line SC Rating section and for the Ohms fields (or in 100 MVA
Base). The Z value is calculated from any of the fields in this section or the SC Rating (Line to Line) section. The section is enabled only for 1-Phase power grids.
SC Rating (Line to Earth/Ground)

The section is enabled only for 1-Phase power grids.
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for line to ground faults. As you enter or modify MVAsc or X/R, ETAP recalculates the corresponding short-circuit impedance values.
For current ETAP release, these fields are used in the electric shock calculation only.
The short-circuit MVA for line-to-ground fault currents are calculated from the following equations:
MVALG = kV * ILG
where ILG is the line to ground short-circuit current (kAsc).
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio for the power grid impedance to a line to ground fault.
kAsc
Ze: Earth/Ground Loop Impedance

Specify line to Earth/Ground short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base (or in Ohms). As you enter or modify short-circuit
impedance values, ETAP recalculates the corresponding MVAsc and X/R for the line to Earth/Ground fault in the Earth/Ground Fault Loop Impedance section and for
the Ohms fields (or in 100 MVA Base). The Z value is calculated from any of the fields in this section or the SC Rating (Line to Earth/Ground) section. This section is
enabled only for 1-Phase power grids.
For current ETAP release, these fields are used in the Electric Shock calculation. This section is enabled for only 1-Phase power grids.
Typical Ze & X/R

The enabling of this button and the fields to fill, including the values, are based on the table below.
Earthing Type Button Enabled Ze Value* X/R Value*

TN-C No N/A N/A
TN-S Yes 0.8 10
TN-C-S Yes 0.35 10
TT Yes 21 10
NEC Hidden N/A N/A
All IT types No N/A N/A
* The Ze and X/R are only typical values and actual values from the local power supplier should be acquired.
Power Grid
Info Page
Rating Page
Short Circuit Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Energy Price Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Time Domain Page - Power Grid Editor

Fix Category/Constant
This is a default option for a device, which means generation category in loading page of study case is used in calculation just like Unbalanced Load Flow.
Sector
This option specify a sector profile for utility to use in load flow calculation. Sector was set selected in Sector Library before using. For details on profile and
sector library, refer to Section 58.8.1 – Profile Library and Section 58.8.2 – Sector Library.
If this option is selected, the Multi-Year Forecasting section is shown for user to specify the Energize date and Out of Service date.
Multi-Year Forecasting
 Energize: when did/will this utility be in service.
 Out of Service: when did/will this utility be out of service.
The default Energize date is set to the first date of the current year, while the default Out of Service date is set to 20 years after energize date.
External Data
This option allows user to use an External Data file as data entry for the power grid. When External Data type is selected, the data in an excel sheet with the
path specified in Time Domain Loading page of the study case will be used in calculation.
For examples of external data format and usage of external data for generation, refer to Section 58.8.3 - External Data.
Data Gap Options
Data gap options specify how to handle the missed data in external file. If the data in external file is inconsistent with Time Step, the extra data will be ignored,
while the missed data can be selected as one of the following data gap options.
 Maintain and use the last value.

 Switch to study case loading category.
Power Grid
Info Page
Rating Page
Short Circuit Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Energy Price Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Energy Price Page - Power Grid Editor

The Energy Price page contains the information on energy price (electricity price) from power grid, which is used in optimal power flow, and the energy cost related
calculation.
Model Type
Model for power grid energy price curve. Since most utilities bill customers in a fixed price, for segments of electricity usage, a Piecewise model is provided.
Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the power grid. Note that this number can be negative, in which case, the system is exporting power into the power grid.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the power grid.
Model Parameter
Enter and change points in the list to specify an energy price curve. The data points are specified in pairs: a MW value and the price of energy in Dollars/MWhr up to
the MW value specified. For the example shown in the graph, from 0 MW up to 1,000 MW, the price is $50 per MW.
Add
Click this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of list.
Insert
Click this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair.
Delete
Click this button to delete the highlighted data point pair.
Price Curve
This displays the curve from the data points entered.
Print
Click this button to print a hard copy of the price curve.
Power Grid
Info Page
Rating Page
Short Circuit Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Energy Price Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of additional data associated with this component. The names of the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings
option in the Project menu in the Menu bar.

up to five digits.



UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Generator Editor Overview

The properties associated with synchronous generators of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor. Synchronous generator kV rating, MW rating,
and operating mode are displayed on top of each page for your information.
The Synchronous Generator Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page Exciter Page Fuel Cost Page

Rating Page Governor Page Time Domain Page
Capability Protection O and M Page
Impedance/Model Page PSS Page Remarks Page
Grounding Harmonic Page Comment Page
Inertia Reliability Page
Info Page - Generator Editor

Within the Info Page, specify the synchronous generator ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name and Description, and synchronous generator type.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous generator. The assigned generator IDs consist of the default generator ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of generators increase. The default generator ID (Bus) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the
System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous generator. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a synchronous generator to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click OK. Note
that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the synchronous generator resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster
or in another composite network.
If a synchronous generator is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the synchronous generator to a new bus from the editor, will
reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below, where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Next to the bus ID, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus for your convenience.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Configuration
In ETAP, the operation mode of the synchronous generator is dependant on the configuration. This provides the flexibility of using multiple configurations to take into
account different modes of operation. See the Status Configuration Section in the Overview Chapter for information about creating new configurations.
Operation Mode
The generator mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing generator will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the voltage magnitude and angle of the generator terminals will
remain at the specified operating values.
For motor acceleration studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine initial conditions. For the initial load flow, a swing generator is represented as an
infinite source. At time 0+, the generator is modeled as a voltage source behind its direct-axis transient impedance.
All generators are modeled dynamically from time 0+ in transient stability studies. One of the swing machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the reference
machine for the entire system.
There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple
swing machines connected to any bus in the system.
Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line diagram and will be included in studies. Also, the rated voltage
(kV) of a swing generator is used as the base kV of the bus that the generator is connected to. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then calculated using
transformer turn ratios. For transient stability studies, a swing generator becomes the reference machine for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of
the generator is set to zero, and the voltage angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this reference machine.
Voltage Control
A generator can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the generator will adjust its var output to control the voltage. Therefore, the
generator’s terminal voltage magnitude, operating real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and Min Q) must be entered
for voltage control generators. A voltage control generator means that the generator is base loaded (droop mode with fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator
(AVR) controlling the field excitation for a constant voltage operation. During load flow studies, if the calculated generator Mvar falls outside the generator Mvar
capability limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the value of the Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the generator mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
Using this option you can specify the amount of fixed MW and Mvar generation in the Rating page of the Synchronous Generator Editor. An Mvar control generator
means that the generator is base loaded (droop mode with fixed MW) with a fixed field excitation (no AVR action).
PF Control
In this mode, the governor is operating in Droop mode, based loaded; therefore, the MW output is fixed to the MW setting. On the other hand, the exciter AVR adjusts
to the Power Factor Setting. The generator’s MW and %PF settings must be entered on the Rating page for the generation category selected when modeled in this mode.
Synchronous Generator
Capability Page Protection Page O and M Page
Grounding Page Harmonic Page Comment Page
Inertia Page Reliability Page
Rating Page - Generator Editor
Rating
kW/MW
Enter the rated real power of the synchronous generator in MW or kW. Choose from these two options by clicking on the MW/kW button.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the synchronous generator in kV. This entry is used by ETAP to convert the ohmic values of the circuit elements to per unit values for
calculations. This value is also used to convert the final synchronous generator voltage to the actual values for output reports. Base voltages are calculated by ETAP,
beginning with the swing systems (swing power grids and/or swing generators) and continuing for the rest of the system using the rated kV of the transformer windings.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the synchronous generator in percent.
KVA/MVA
Enter the rated power of the synchronous generator in kVA or MVA.
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the synchronous generator in percent.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the synchronous generator.
% of Bus kVnom
This displays the Rated kV as a percent of the nominal kV of the terminal bus.
FLA
The generator full load current is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
RPM
ETAP displays the rated RPM (synchronous speed) of the synchronous generator based on the system frequency and the number of poles entered (Ws=120 freq/pole).
This group is used to assign the different generation settings to each of the ten generation categories for this machine. Each machine can be set to have a different
operating generation level for each generation category. Depending on the operation mode, some of the values are editable as follows:
Swing Mode: %V and angle

Power Factor Control: MW and PF
Note: You can select any of the generation categories from the load flow settings in the study cases such as load flow, motor starting, transient stability and others.
Gen. Cat.
The displays the names of the generation categories. To modify these names, from the Project Menu, point at Settings then select Generation Categories. Modify the
names in the Generation Category dialog box.
% V (Voltage Magnitude)
Enter the voltage magnitude setting of the regulated bus at the synchronous generator terminal as a percentage of the bus nominal kV. This % operating voltage is used
as the control (regulated) value for swing and voltage control modes. This value is used as an initial operating voltage for Mvar controlled power grids.
Vangle (Voltage Angle)

Enter the voltage angle setting for the swing bus at the synchronous generator terminal in degrees. This value is used as a reference angle for generators in swing mode.
This value is used as an initial operating voltage angle for Mvar control generators.
MW
Enter the operating megawatt generation (real power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is provided for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled
synchronous generator types. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
Mvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is provided for Mvar controlled synchronous generator types only. This
value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
%PF
Power factor setting of the synchronous generator. This column is editable for PF Controlled synchronous generator type only. This value is fixed for load flow
solutions.
Min & Max Q (Minimum & Maximum Mvar/kvar)

These entries specify the minimum and maximum limits for reactive power generation. These limits are required for voltage controlled synchronous generator types
only and should be obtained from the generator capability curve (Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the specified MW generation.
If the value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at the limit and the generator type is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Limits
Enter the Peak Mvar or kvar rating of the Generator. This limit may be User-Defined or obtained from the Capability Curve. These parameters are used for alerts in the
Motor Acceleration program.
PrimeMover Rating
Enter the Continuous and Peak Horse Power, MW, or kW rating of the Generator Engine (Prime Mover) in this group. These parameters are used for alerts in the Motor
Acceleration program.
Operating
The results of the latest load flow run are displayed here; or, you may enter the operating voltage magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar. ETAP will utilize these
fields depending on the Operating Mode of the Power Grid. See Mode under the Generator - Info page.
Capability Page - Generator Editor
You can specify the steady-state operating capability region of the generator from the Capability page of the Synchronous Generator Editor. This region is used to
determine the maximum and minimum reactive power (Qmax and Qmin) that a generator can provide for a given reactive power output. When the generator is
operating in Swing mode or when operating generation values are applied in calculation, these limits will be used for alert checking.
The steady-state operating capability region is enclosed by four curves: the stator MVA limit curve, the excitation limit curve, the steady-state stability curve, and the
minimum real power output curve. In ETAP, you define the steady-state operating region by specifying four values: Qa, Qc, Qd, and Pmin, along with the rated reactive
power output, Qb, which is specified on the Rating page.
Parameters
Qa
This is the maximum possible reactive power output (point a) limited by generator excitation and the generator MVA rating. Point a is at the intersection of the
excitation limit curve and the vertical axis. You can let ETAP calculate the value or enter it yourself. If you select the Calculate Qa option, ETAP will compute the
value, based on generator rated reactive power output (Qb), rated output voltage, and synchronous reactance (Xd). When Xd is equal to zero, Qa will be set to Qb.
Qb
This is the rated reactive power output (point b) specified on the Rating page. Point b is the rated operating point of the generator.
Qc
Qc is the reactive power output at point c. Point c is at the intersection of the stator MVA limit curve and the steady-state stability curve.
Qd
Qd is the reactive power output at point d. Point d is at the intersection of the steady-state stability curve and the vertical axis. Because it is difficult for you to obtain
detailed data to calculate exact steady-state stability curve, ETAP uses a straight line between points c and d to represent the steady-state limit curve, which gives a
conservative result.
Pmin
This is the minimum real power output that must be delivered by a generator, such as one with a steam turbine engine.
Impedance / Model Page - Generator Editor
Impedance
Xd”
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xd”/Ra
This is the armature X/R ratio (Xd”/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both ½ cycle and 1½-4 cycle networks.
Ra (%)
This is the armature resistance in percent (machine base).
Ra (Ohm)
This is the armature resistance in ohms.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for Harmonic Analysis, short-circuit, and unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X2/R2
This is the negative sequence X/R ratio.
R2 (%)
This is the negative sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R2 (Ohm)
This is the negative sequence resistance in ohms.
Xo
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for unbalanced faults under ANSI Short-Circuit Studies.
X0/R0
This is the zero sequence X/R ratio.
R0 (%)
This is the zero sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R0 (Ohm)
This is the zero sequence resistance in ohms.
Rdc (%)
This is the stator winding DC resistance in percent (machine base), used for GOST short-circuit calculations.
Rdc (Ohm)
This is the stator winding DC resistance in ohms, used for GOST short-circuit calculations.
X/R
This is the armature X/R ratio (X”/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both ½ cycle and 1½-4 cycle networks.
Xd” Tolerance
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the reactance values during Short-circuit calculations. The Short-Circuit
analysis module uses the negative tolerance value.
H
This displays the machine total inertia from the Inertia page.
Machine Type
This is the short-circuit designation of the generator is used for ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standard requirements.
Gen. Type
The generator type is used only for determining the generator reactance for ANSI/IEEE short-circuit calculations as shown in the following table.
1½-4 Cycle 30 Cycle

Gen. Type ½ Cycle Xsc
Xsc Xsc
Turbo X" X" X’

Hydro X" X" X’
Hydro without Damper Winding 0.75 X’ 0.75 X’ X’
Rotor Type
Round-Rotor: For machines that are made of round-rotor.
Salient-Pole: For machines that are made of salient-pole.
IEC Exciter Type

Depending on the Rotor type, the IEC Exciter Type is used for determining the λmax factor for generators in the calculation of steady-state short-circuit currents per IEC
Standard 909. λmax is proportional to µfmax, which takes different values based on exciter types as shown in the following table.
Rotor Type IEC Exciter Type µfmax

Round Rotor Turbine 130% 1.3
Round Rotor Terminal Feed, Cylindrical 130% N/A
Salient Pole Salient-pole 160% 1.6
Salient Pole Terminal Feed, Salient Pole 160% N/A
There is no generator contribution to the steady-state short-circuit current for generator exciter types specified as terminal fed.
Compound Excitation
Generator exciter fields are designed with instantaneous and short-term overload capabilities. This is important so that the field can be overexcited (forced) for short
periods of time to provide high levels of var output to support the power system during disturbances that cause voltage to decay. Field forcing can help the power
system to ride through such disturbances.
IkP
Enter the steady state short-circuit current for a 3-phase terminal short-circuit in percent of FLA.
PG
Enter or select the generator’s voltage regulation in percent. This field is used for IEC Short-Circuit calculations when the generator is specified as a unit generator.
Adjust KG based on PG
Enable this option to consider operating generator terminal voltage to be different than the rated voltage. This option will be used for IEC Short Circuit calculations and
applied individually to generators to adjust the rated voltage based on PG for the impedance correction factor (K.G), when the generator is not modeled as a power
station unit.
GOST Exciter Type

This selection list contains machine excitation types that are used for GOST Short-Circuit Studies. The list has four options:
 Thyristor Independent Excitation

 Thyristor Self-Excitation
 Diode Independent Excitation
 Diode Brushless Excitation
Note that this is currently not used in ETAP GOST calculations.
Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous generator. All of the parameters listed under Dynamic Model are used only for Transient
Stability studies. Full descriptions of these variables are found in the Dynamic Models Chapter.
Model Type Description

A model that uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and
Equivalent
quadrature-axis reactance.
A more comprehensive model than the Equivalent model, including the machine’s
Transient
saliency.
A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine, including
Subtransient
both transient and subtransient parameters.
Xd
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xdu
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xd’
This is the direct-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value). This is used for both motor starting and Transient Stability Studies
and It is used for 30-cycle fault analysis and Motor Starting Studies.
XL
This is the armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base).
Xqu
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xq’
This is the quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base).
Xq”
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base).
Tdo’
This is the direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tdo”
This is the direct-axis subtransient open circuit-time constant in seconds.
Note: The Tdo” time constant from displayed values in Dynamic Model - Subtransient option is used for plotting of the generator decrement curve even when it is
hidden due to selection of Transient or Equivalent options.
Tqo’
This is the quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tqo”
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Sbreak
This is the per unit of terminal voltage at which the generator saturation curve skews from the air-gap line.
S100
This is the saturation factor at 100% terminal voltage.
S120
Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:
S100 = If100/If
S120 = If120/1.2If
where:
If = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the air gap line (no saturation)
If100 = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open circuit saturation curve
Damping
This is the shaft mechanical damping term in percent MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed (% MW/Hz). Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10% (long
shaft).
Info Page Exciter Page
Fuel Cost Page
Rating Page Governor Page
Time Domain Page
Capability Page Protection Page
O and M Page
Impedance/Model Page PSS Page
Remarks Page
Grounding Page Harmonic Page
Comment Page
Grounding Page - Generator Editor

Display
The Font and Symbols options determine how the grounding connection is displayed on the one- line diagram.
Font
Click on this button to display the grounding connection using the ETAP font. For Example:
Symbols
Display the grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line element, can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the
standard. For Example:
Connection
These entries specify the synchronous generator grounding connections, type, and rating. The generator grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the
connection button until the desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the following grounding types provided in the list box:
Grounding Type Description

A transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the
Xfmr-Reactor
secondary of the transformer.
A transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the
Xfmr-Resistor
secondary of the transformer.
Resistor and Reactor

The Resistor and Reactor connection types have the following grounding ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2.
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded generators, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes, where
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohms).
Ohms
Resistor or reactor impedance in ohms.
Xfmr-Resistor and Xfmr-Reactor

The Xfmr (transformer) Resistor and Reactor connection types have the following grounding ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2.
kV1
Transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms).
Prim. Ohms
Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
kV2
Transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
Secondary current in amps. This calculation is based on the primary amps and the transformer turn ratio.
Sec. Ohms
Resistor and reactor impedance in ohms. This calculation is based on the grounding transformer turn ratio and secondary current. If Sec. Ohms are entered first, then
primary amps and ohms will be calculated automatically.
Transformer kVA
Grounding transformer kVA rating.
Rg
This field is for the inclusion of the element’s grounding in electric shock protection calculation. This field reflects both the element’s grounding grid and the soil
resistance between the grounding grid and the load grounding electrode. The Rg result from ETAP’s ground grid module can assist in determining this value.
Fuel Cost Page
Time Domain Page
O and M Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Inertia Page - Generator Editor

Inertia Calculator
PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator. ETAP calculates WR2
or H when one of them is known and RPM has been entered based on the following equation:
Total RPM
The total RPM is equal to the Generator RPM.
Total WR2
The total WR2 is calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
Arithmetic sum of the PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator H in MW-sec/MVA.
Shaft Torsion
Include Torsion Effect
Select this option to consider torsion effect between turbine, coupling gear, and generator during transient stability calculation.
D1
This is the damping constant between turbine and coupling gear
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and generator
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of turbine and coupling gear
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and generator
Exciter Page - Generator Editor

1 2 3 1S DC1 DC2 DC3 ST1 ST2 ST3
AC1 AC2 AC3 AC4 AC5A SR8F HPC 840 JEUMONT ST1D
AC8B AC1A ST4B DC4B AC7B ST1A AC2A ST2A UDM
This Section allows you to define the representation of the excitation systems and automatic voltage regulators (AVR) for synchronous generators.
The excitation and AVR systems for synchronous generators can be very sophisticated. Complete modeling of these systems is usually necessary for Transient Stability
studies. The equivalent transfer functions used for the excitation and AVR systems and their variable/parameter names are either provided by exciter manufactures or in
accordance with the IEEE recommended types as found from the following references:
 IEEE Working Group Report, "Computer Representation of Excitation Systems", IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June
1968, pp.1460/1464.
 IEEE Committee Report, "Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-100,
No. 2, February 1981, pp.494/509.
 IEEE Std 421.5-1992, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies”, IEEE Power Engineering Society,
1992.
In general, exciter manufacturers should be contacted to determine the applicability of the IEEE-type representations to their excitation systems.
Excitation/AVR Type
You can specify the excitation/AVR type by selecting one of the following models from the list box. Refer to Machine and Load Dynamic Models for additional details.
Type Description
1 Continuously Acting Regulator With Rotating Exciter System
2 Rotating Rectifier Exciter With Static Regulator System
3 Static System With Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
1S Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage
DC1 DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation
DC2 DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and Supplies from Terminal Voltage
DC3 DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation
ST1 Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter
ST2 Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
ST3 Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC1 Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and Field Current Feedback
AC2 High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non Controlled Rectifiers and Field Current Feedback
AC3 Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter
AC4 High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC5A Simplified Rotating Rectifier Exciter
SR8F Basler SR8F and SR125A Exciter
HPC 840 HPC 840 AVR/Exciter Model
JEUMONT Jeumont Industrie Excitation / AVR System
ST1D IEEE Type ST1D
AC8B IEEE Type AC8B
AC1A IEEE Type AC1A
ST4B IEEE Type ST4B
DC4B DC communicator exciter with PID style regulator
AC7B Alternator-rectifier excitation system
ST1A Potential-source, controlled-rectifier exciter
AC2A High initial response alternator-rectifier excitation system with non-controlled rectifiers and feedback from exciter field current
ST2A Compound-source rectifier exciter
Constant Excitation (i.e., no regulator action). This can be used for generators with constant excitation or when the machine voltage
Fixed
regulator is operating under PF or Mvar control.
UDM User Defined Dynamic Models
Some exciter types require that you select a control bus from the dropdown list that appears when they are specified.
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of exciter to provide a set of sample data for the selected exciter and AVR type.
Excitation System Symbols

The following table contains some common symbols used to define the parameters of the various excitation systems. For other exciter parameters not listed, refer to the
Help Line for such parameters in the particular exciter parameter. In most cases, constants and gains are in per-unit and time constants are in seconds. The base voltage
for the excitation system is defined so that one per unit exciter voltage will produce rated generator voltage on the generator air-gap line.
Term Description
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage (applied to generator field)
FEX Rectifier loading factor
Ifd Generator field current
IN Normalized exciter load current
KA Regulator gain
KB Second stage regulator gain
KC Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance
KD Demagnetizing factor, function of exciter alternator reactances
KE Exciter constant related to self-excited field
KF,KN Regulator stabilizing circuit gains
KG Inner loop feedback constant
KH Exciter field current feedback gain
KI Current circuit gain coefficient
KL Gain of exciter field current limit
KLV Gain of exciter low voltage limit signal
KP Potential circuit gain coefficient
KR Constant associated with regulator and alternator field power supply
KV Fast raise/lower contact setting
SE Exciter saturation function
TA, TB, TC Regulator amplifier time constants
TE Exciter time constant
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant
TF1,TF2 Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants (rotating rectifier system)
TR Regulator input filter time constant
TRH Travel time of rheostat drive motor
VA Regulator internal voltage
VERR Voltage error signal
VG Inner loop voltage feedback
VI Internal signal within voltage regulator
VLR Exciter field current limit reference
VLV Exciter low voltage limit reference
VN Rate feedback input variable
VR Regulator output voltage
VR max Maximum value of VR
VR min Minimum value of VR
Vref Regulator reference voltage setting
VRH Field rheostat setting
Vt Generator terminal voltage
Vthev Voltage obtained by vector sum of potential and current signals, Type 3 system
XL Reactance associated with potential source
HV Gate High value gate: If A > B, C = A; if A < B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is output
LV Gate Low value gate: If A < B, C = A; if A > B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is output
UDM Model
ETAP gives you the ability to model your own Exciter through UDM (user defined models). When the UDM model option is selected, you can select any of the
predefined UDM models form the Type list.
Clicking on the UDM Model button brings up the UDM Graphic Logic View, where you can create, modify, and compile a UDM model. ETAP will use the selected
Exciter model for its calculations.
See the chapter on User Defined Dynamic Models for more information.
Fuel Cost Page
Time Domain Page
O and M Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Governor Page – Generator Editor

ST ST1 ST2 ST3 STM GT GT-2 GT-3 GTF GP
DT 505 UG8 2301 GTH GTS MARS GHH DDEC HYDR
SGT PL-A ST60 ST70 CT251 GGOV3 SGOV1 WGOV1 LM2500 LM6000
UDM
This section describes the representation of speed governing and engine control systems for synchronous generators. The majority of models provided here are
consistent with the IEEE committee report for governors and turbines, "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System Studies," IEEE Transaction
on Power Apparatus and System, Vol PAS-92, July/Dec 1973, pp.1904-1915. Other models are vendor specific.
Governor/Turbine Type
You can specify the governor/turbine type by selecting one of the following models from the list box. Refer to Dynamic Models for details.
Type Description
ST Steam-Turbine Governor System
ST1 Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
ST2 Tandem-Compound, Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
ST3 Tandem-Compound, Double-Reheat Steam Turbine
STM IEEE General Steam-Turbine Representation
GT Gas-Turbine Governor System
GTF Gas Turbine including Fuel System
GP General Purpose Governor-Turbine System
DT Diesel Engine Governor
505 Woodward 505E PID Governor for Extraction Steam Turbine
UG8 Woodward Governor
2301 Woodward 2301A Governor for Diesel Unit
GTH GE Heavy Duty Gas Turbine Model
GTS GE Simplified Single Shaft Gas Turbine Model
MARS Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set
DDEC Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine
GHH GHH BORSIG Steam Turbine Governor
HYDR Woodward Hydraulic Governor and Turbine
SGT IEEE Gas – Turbine
PL-A PowerLogic Governor and Turbine Model A
ST60 Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
ST70 Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
GT-2 Gas-Turbine Governor System
GT-3 Gas-Turbine Governor System (Non wind-up limit)
CT251 Combustion Turbine Governor Model
GGOV3 GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers
SGOV1 Solar Turbine Governor Model
WGOV1 Westinghouse Turbine Governor Model
LM2500 GE Gas Turbine Governor Model
LM6000 GE Gas Turbine Governor Model
None No Governor action, i.e., the mechanical power (Pm) is kept constant throughout the time simulation studies.
UDM User Defined Dynamic Model
Mode
Droop or isoch mode of operation.
LS GP#
From the dropdown list
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of governor to provide a set of sample data for the selected governor/turbine type
Compile UDM
ETAP allows you to model your own Governor through UDM (user defined models). When the UDM model option is selected, you can select any of the predefined
UDM models form the Type list.
Governor model for its calculations.
Fuel Cost Page
Time Domain Page
O and M Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
PSS Page - Generator Editor

Power system stabilizer (PSS) is an auxiliary device installed on the synchronous generator and tuned to help with system stability.
ETAP provides two standard IEEE type models:
 IEEE Type 1 PSS (PSS1A)

 IEEE Type 2 PSS (PSS2A)
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of PSS to provide a set of sample data for the selected stabilizer type.
Compile UDM
ETAP allows you to model your own PSS through UDM (user defined models). When the UDM model option is selected, you can select any of the predefined UDM
models from the Type list.
PSS model for its calculations.
Protection Page - Generator Editor

This page provides options to plot the generator (I2)2 t curve and short-circuit decrement curve for a generator on a Star View.
Thermal Capability
This section provides options to plot the generator (I2)2 t and stator damage curves.
Plot (I2)2 t
Check this box to plot (I2)2 t characteristic curve of the generator on a Star View. Generator thermal capability curve (I2)2 t is calculated based on the negative
sequence current, where, the negative sequence current is expressed in multiples of machine rated stator current or FLA.
(I2)2 t Factor
For synchronous generators with a rotor type defined as round rotor, this factor is typically equal to 30, whereas for salient pole, this factor is typically equal to 40.
The table below lists some of the other common generator types and their (I2)2 t factors.
Model Type Type of Generator 2

(I2) t product (K):
N/A Turbine Generator 30
N/A Synchronous Condenser 30
N/A Frequency-changer 30
N/A Hydraulic Turbines 40
N/A Engine-Driven Generators 40
Round-Rotor Indirectly Cooled 30
Round-Rotor Directly Cooled 0-800 MVA 10
10 – (0.00625*(MVA-800))
Round-Rotor Directly Cooled 801-1600MVA
Range ~ 5 to 10
Salient-Pole with damper winding Salient Pole 40
Salient-Pole without damper winding Salient Pole 40
Plot Stator Damage Curve

Check this box to plot the stator damage curve of generator in Star View based on the user defined points in editor.
Stator Damage Curve Points

Press Points… button to open stator damage curve point’s editor.
Stator Damage Curve ID
Name ID is editable.
Current Units
Select the units for current from following options in drop-down menu.
Multiple of FLA - current value in table will be multiplied by FLA of the generator when plotting.
Ampere - current will be plotted as defined in table.
Points Table
Time Multiple
120 1.15
60 1.27
30 1.5
10 2.18
Reference: IEEE C50.13-2005 section 4.2.1 or IEC 60034-3:2005 section 4.15
Insert
Add
Delete
Short-Circuit Decrement
Plot Decrement Total
Use this selection to draw the generator decrement curve (Sum of AC and DC components) on all Star View’s containing the selected generator.
Plot Decrement AC Only

Use this selection to draw the generator decrement curve (AC component only) on all Star View’s containing the selected generator.
Initial Loading Condition – No Load Condition

When No Load Condition is selected, ETAP will use load power factor angle = 0 degrees to calculate machine internal voltage.
Initial Loading Condition – Full Load Condition

When Full Load Condition is selected, ETAP will use power factor angle based on rated load to calculate machine internal voltage. The magnitude of the fault current
will be higher for a generator in full load condition when compared to no load condition.
Compound Excitation
When the Compound Excitation option is checked in the Imp/Model page of the generator editor the Current, Time, and I2t Limit fields are visible in the protection
page, and excitation damage point will be plotted in the Star Views containing the generator.
Current
Current % value is read from Imp/Model page. This value is used in calculation of excitation withstand capability limit or I2t.
The excitation withstand time is defined here in seconds. This value is used to calculate the excitation withstand capability or I2t. When the values in the I2t field is
changed, this field is updated using below equation.
I2t
The excitation withstand capability limit is defined here. When the values in the Current field or Time field are changed, this field is updated using below equation.
Fuel Cost Page
Time Domain Page
O and M Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Fuel Cost Page - Generator Editor

The Fuel Cost page contains the information on generator fuel cost, which is used in optimal power flow and the energy cost related calculation.
Model Type
Model for generator fuel cost curve. Three models are available:
 Piecewise
 Equation
 V Curve
Profile
Profile list is added to this page and can include up to 10 Fuel Costs ($/Mbtu) (Profile 1 – Profile 10). This is similar to the loading category in ETAP.
The Fuel Cost Profile names are user definable and can be changed from the Project Setting Menu.
By selecting Fuel Cost Profile, you can customize the name of any of the 10 fuel/energy cost profiles provided by ETAP. You can change these names at any time when
running the project. Each name may be up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
The 10 cost profiles will keep track of the Fuel Cost for each generator. That is there can be 10 fuel cost ($/MMBtu) per generator (one for each profile).
Optimal Power Flow Study Case includes a selection list for Fuel/Energy Cost profiles. For the selected cost profile of the generation and power grids, the Optimal
Power Flow program will calculate the minimum fuel source and minimize fuel cost.
Curve Type
The following options are available for the Piecewise model:
 Heat Rate vs. Output

 Cost vs. Output
The following options are available for the Equation model:
 Input vs. Output

 Cost vs. Output
The following options are available for the V Curve model:
 Cost vs. Output
Depending on the above selection Model Parameter’s heading and data are changed to reflect the appropriate heading. The plot is also updated based on the curve type
selection.
Model Parameter
Piecewise Model
For this model, data points for series fuel cost ($/hr) and average incremental fuel cost ($/MWh) for generating the corresponding MW are specified.
Note: The initial cost such as Operation and Maintenance costs can be specified for 0 MW.
The model parameter columns/headings for Cost vs. Output curve type are as follows for the Piecewise Model:
MW Output MW (x axis)
$/hr Input / Output (y axis)
Incremental $/MWh Average Incremental Cost (y axis)
The model parameter columns / headings for Heat Rate vs. Output curve type are as follows for Piecewise model:
MW Output MW (x axis)
1000 Btu/hr Input / Output Heat Rate (y axis)
Incremental Btu/kWh Average Incremental Heat Rate (y axis)
Add
Click this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of the model parameter list. This feature is available with the Piecewise models.
Insert
Click this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair. This feature is available with the Piecewise models.
Delete
Click this button to delete the highlighted data point pair. This feature is available with the Piecewise models.
Equation Model
For an equation based model the incremental plot is the instantaneous value (dy/dx) and not the average incremental. The Cost curve y is defined as $/hr. The Input-
Output Curve y is defined as 1000 Btu/hr and x = MW.
Instantaneous Incremental Cost = dy / dx
Where y = $/hr and x = MW
Instantaneous Incremental Heat Rate = dy / dx

Where y = 1000 Btu/hr, and x = MW
CO, C1, C2, C3, K

Enter the coefficients for the equation based cost curve
Y = C0 + C1*x + C2*x2 + C3*e(K*x)
V-Curve Type
For this model, a desired MW generation point MidPoint is entered in MW and the slope of fuel cost curve is entered in Weight. This model can be utilized to represent
energy cost at various MW output levels based on pre-defined power generation rate schedules.
For the V-Curve Model type, the Curve is set to Cost vs. Output and the list box is disabled (grayed out).
Fuel Cost
Fuel cost is used for the conversion of Heat Rate values to Cost values. The fuel cost is given in $/MBtu. (Note MBtu = 10-6 Btu) The fuel cost field is displayed for
Heat Rate vs. Output curve types only in the Model Parameter group. There can be up to 10 fuel costs for a given generator (10 profiles).
$ / hr = 1000 Btu/hr * $/MBtu
Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the generator.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the generator.
Cost Curve
Displays the curve from the data points entered.
For Piecewise and Equation models:
Curve Type = Cost vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Cost ($)

Y2 Axis: Incremental Cost ($/MWh)
X Axis: Output (MW)
Curve Type = Heat Rate vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Input (1000 Btu/hr)

Y2 Axis: Incremental Heat Rate (Btu/kWh)
X Axis: Output (MW)
For V-Curve model:

Curve Type = Cost vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Cost ($)

X Axis: Output (MW)
Print
Click this button to print a hard copy of the cost curve.
Fuel Cost Page
Time Domain Page
O and M Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Time Domain Page - Generator Editor

The Time Domain page allows you to specify the data type of the generator used in Time Domain Unbalanced Load Flow calculation. The available time domain data
types include Fixed Category / Constant, Sector, and External Data.
Sector
This option specify a sector profile for the generator to use in load flow calculation. Sector was set selected in Sector Library before using. For details on
profile and sector library, refer to Section 58.8.1 – Profile Library and Section 58.8.2 – Sector Library.
 Energize: when did/will this generator be in service.
 Out of Service: when did/will this generator be out of service.
External Data
This option allows user to use an External Data file as data entry for the generator. When External Data type is selected, the data in an excel sheet with the
Data Gap Options

O and M Page - Generator

Wind Turbine Generator Overview

You can enter the properties associated with wind turbine generators including wind aerodynamics of the electrical distribution system using Wind Turbine Generator
(WTG) Editor. WTG converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. Wind turbine rotor supplies fluctuating mechanical power (torque) from wind to the connected
generator. WTG is one of the important elements of renewable energy, micro-grid, smart grid, etc.
The Wind Turbine Generator Editor includes the following pages of properties that are variable depending upon the wind turbine technology type selected and whether
the control types are based on WECC, generic or UDM models.
Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
The following abbreviations are used for the wind turbine generator help file.
Abbreviation Definition
WTG Wind Turbine Generator
WECC Western Electric Coordination Council
UDM User Defined Dynamic Model
FDR Feeder
MFR Manufacturer
SC Short-circuit
MF Multiplying Factor
Cp Power Coefficient
RPM Revolution Per Minute
EFF Efficiency
FLA Full Load Ampere
FOR FForced Outage Rate
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
MTTF Mean Time To Failure
Wind Turbine Technologies

With high wind penetration levels being planned globally, the need for grid operators to quickly assess the impacts of wind generation on system stability has become
critical. In the planning phase, this assessment is normally done with positive sequence time-domain analysis, which allows for the simulation of the dynamic response
of a power system to major disturbances (e.g., short circuits). The lack of suitable dynamic models for the wide variety of wind turbines available in the marketplace has
been an obstacle in performing accurate analyses of this type, though efforts led by the Western Electricity Coordinating Council (WECC) to develop industry-standard
wind turbine models are addressing this issue.
WECC Modeling & Validation Working Group initiated an effort to develop and validate a series of generic dynamic models for wind turbine generators (WTG). The
objectives of this effort were to
1. Allow the performance of transient stability studies in the early stages of interconnection the process when WTG manufacturer/model may be undetermined
2. Reduce WTG manufacturer confidentiality concerns with respect to proprietary aspects of dynamic models
3. Improve the quality and usability of models, consistent with the level of accuracy expected in an initial system impact evaluation.
ETAP includes reduced-order, simplified wind turbine models developed by the WECC Modeling & Validation Working Group. These models were developed for
analyzing the stability impact of large arrays of wind turbines with a single point of network interconnection. Dynamic simulations have been performed with these
models, and comparisons have been made with the results derived from higher-order models used in manufacturer-specific representations of aero conversion and
drivetrain dynamics.
Generic WECC models were developed for four major WTG topologies. The first topology, referred to as a Type 1 WTG. This machine is pitch-regulated, and drives a
squirrel cage induction generator which is directly coupled to the grid.
Type 2 WTG is a variation on the Type 1, operating with variable slip. It utilizes a wound rotor induction generator whose rotor winding is brought out via slip rings
and brushes. An external rotor resistance is electronically modulated to effect dynamic changes in the machine’s torque-speed characteristics.
The doubly fed induction generator (DFIG), or partial conversion, topology is designated as WECC Type 3. The turbine is pitch-regulated and features a wound rotor
induction generator with an AC/DC/AC power converter connected between the rotor terminals and grid. The generator stator winding is directly coupled to the grid.
The power converter in the rotor circuit allows for independent control of generator torque and flux, providing fast active and reactive power control over a wide range
of generator speeds.
Finally, the full conversion topology is designated as WECC Type 4. The turbine is pitch-regulated and features an AC/DC/AC power converter through which the
entire power of the generator is processed. The generator may be either induction or synchronous type. As with the Type 3 WTG, the power converter allows for
independent control of quadrature and direct axis output currents at the grid interface, providing fast active and reactive power control over a wide range of generator
speeds.
The above information has been extracted from NREL Development and Validation of WECC Variable Speed Wind Turbine Dynamic Models for Grid Integration
Studies.
Info Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

You can specify the wind turbine generator (WTG) ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag #, Name, Description, Data Type, Priority,
Generator MFR (manufacturer), Type, Control, Configuration, Operation Mode, WTG Library, and Connection Quantity within the fields of the Info page.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each WTG. The assigned IDs consist of the default WTG ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as
the number of WTGs increase. The default WTG ID can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the WTG. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an
induction machine to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the WTG resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a WTG is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the wind turbine to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where WTG is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Data Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
WTG Type
MFR
WTG MFR (manufacturer) displays the manufacturer name from the library. If no library is selected, it will show Generic as default.
Type
Select a generator type for this WTG from the drop-down list where Type 1 is fixed-speed, conventional induction generator; Type 2 is variable slip, induction
generators with variable rotor resistance; Type 3 is variable speed, doubly-fed asynchronous generators with rotor-side converter; and Type 4 is variable speed,
asynchronous generators with full converter interface. Default is Type-1.
Control
Select a control model from the drop-down list. WECC, Generic and UDM controls are available when Type 3 is selected. For all other types, WECC and UDM are
available. The default selection is WECC. It will be hidden if library is selected. When UDM is selected, it will show a UDM type list to choose compiled UDM model
from WTG folder.
Configuration
In ETAP, the operation mode of the WTG is dependent on the configuration. This provides the flexibility of using multiple configurations to take into account different
modes of operation. For information about creating new configurations, see the Status Configuration Section in the Overview Chapter.
Select the operating status of the WTG for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Operation Mode
The Generator Mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor. Operation modes for different types and controls are shown in the following list.
When Type and Control selection change, operation mode will be pre-set and disabled/enabled or shown/hidden based on the following table.
Type Control Operation Mode

Type 1 WECC/UDM Induction Generator
Type 2 WECC/UDM Induction Generator
Type 3 WECC/UDM Voltage Control
Type 3 Generic / Existing Model (ETAP 5.0 onwards) Mvar Control
Type 4 WECC/UDM Votlage Control
WTG Library
WTG Library quick launches existing data for simulation. When the library is selected, the control list is hidden and type list is disabled. Operation mode will be
changed based on Type 1 through Type 4.
Connection
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of similar WTGs in the electrical network. The maximum number is 999 and the default is 1.
Wind Turbine Generator

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

On this page, you can specify the rating of the WTG, its Mvar Limits, its operating values, and the WTG categories.
Ratings
MW/kW
You can toggle between these two options by clicking on the MW/kW button. Enter the rated real power of the WTG in MW or kW.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the WTG in kV. This entry is used by ETAP to convert the ohmic values of the circuit elements to per unit values for calculations. This value
is also used to convert the final WTG voltage to the actual values used for output reports.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the WTG as a percentage.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the machine, in percent, at 100% loading. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for
calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the efficiency at 100% loading, the machine full load current is recalculated. All three values of the efficiencies are
used for determining the machine efficiency under different percent loading, i.e., when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder
losses for all loading categories are recalculated.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the synchronous generator. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the machine is recalculated and displayed in
RPM (revolutions per minute).
RPM = 120 * Freq./Poles
RPM
ETAP displays the rated RPM (synchronous speed) of the WTG based on the system frequency and the number of poles entered (Ws=120 freq/pole).
MVA
ETAP displays the rated power of the wind turbine generator in MVA.
% of Bus kVnom
ETAP displays the percentage of nominal bus kV.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the machine calculated and displayed in amperes. This is the current the WTG will pull from the system when it is fully loaded (that
is, when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency). When you modify FLA, the WTG efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated.
ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
Mvar Limits
The Mvar Limits (Qmax and Qmin) can be user-defined or calculated based on the controller parameters. When the WTG operating mode is Mvar Control (Type 3,
Generic Control), both options for Mvar Limits will be enabled. When the operation mode is Voltage Control or Induction Generator, it will be fixed at User-Defined.
Wind Speed
This field displays the average wind speed in the Avg Wind Speed field in meters per second (m/s). You can enter or modify average wind speed in Wind page of WTG
Editor.
Nominal Operating Voltage

Vmax
This field allows you to enter maximum operating voltage in percent of rated machine kV.
Vmin
This field allows you to enter minimum operating voltage in percent of rated machine kV.
This group is used to assign the various generation settings to each of the ten generation categories for this WTG. Each WTG can be set to have a different operating
generation level for each generation category. Depending on the operation mode, some of the values are editable as follows:

% wind speed will use the Cp curve data to calculate operating kW and kvar for each generation category to be used by load flow analysis and all other modules that
require pre-start generation levels.
Operating Values
%V
Operating terminal voltage magnitude (percent of the terminal bus nominal voltage)
Vangle
Operating voltage angle (degree)
MW
WTG operating real power (MW)
Mvar
WTG operating reactive power (Mvar)

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Model Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

The impedance model page describes the dynamic machine model used for the WTG. Depending upon the type of WTG technology, this page utilizes either the circuit
model or a transfer function to describe the dynamic machine model.
Impedance/Model Page for Type 1 & Type 2 - WECC and Type 3 - Generic Model
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
Enter the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the motor, using up to 5 numeric characters.
% PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent, using up to 5 numeric characters.
ANSI Short-Circuit Z
Std MF/Xsc
If you select Std MF, ETAP uses the following ANSI Multiplying Factors for calculating the positive sequence short-circuit impedances. If you select the User-Defined
option, you can directly enter the short-circuit impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base.
Note: The IEC short-circuit method does not use these impedances.
Xsc Xsc
HP kW RPM ½ Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network
> 1000 HP >745.7 £1800 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
> 250 HP > 186.4 3600 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
50 HP 37.28 other 1.2/LRC 3.0/LRC
< 50 HP < 37.28 1.67/LRC Infinity
User-Defined
If you select the User-Defined option, you can directly enter the short-circuit impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base.
Parameters
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base); used for calculating short-circuit currents for unbalanced faults. Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base); This value is used for harmonic analysis, short-circuit, and unbalanced load flow studies. Enter up to
7 numeric characters.
X/R
This is the induction motor’s X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra). Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
Td’
This is the induction motor transient time constant in seconds. Enter up to 5 numeric characters. This value is used in the IEC 61363 method.
Td’ = X”/(2*f* Rr) where Rr = rotor resistance, f=frequency and X”= sub-transient reactance
Grounding
You can select entries from the drop-down list to specify grounding connection, grounding type, and earthing type of WTG.
Note: When including a type 4 WTG in an unbalanced load flow study, the grounding check box is not utilized as the WTG is only considered grounded.
Connection
The grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Grounding Type
Choose one item from these four grounding types provided in the drop-down list for Wye connection:
 Open Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded).

 Solid Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path.
 Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.
 Reactor A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path.
Earthing Type
Select a system earthing type. The available earthing types are listed based on the system grounding type. Note that this field is applicable only for low voltage WTG.
Distributed Neutral
Check this box if neutral is distributed for the IT earthing type. Note that this field is only enabled for the IT earthing type.
Rg
This field is for the inclusion of the element’s grounding in electric shock protection calculation. This field reflects both the element’s grounding grid and the soil
resistance between the grounding grid and the load grounding electrode. The Rg result from ETAP’s ground grid module can assist in determining this value.
Note: The Rg field will not appear if Wye (star) resistor or reactor Grounding Types have been selected.
Model
The Model section is hidden if the UDM control model is selected from the Info page. In this case, the WTG representation is completely dependent on the UDM
model. When the UDM model is not selected, for Type 1 and Type 2 WTG, this section allows the user to select a circuit model from WTG model library. For Type 3
and Type 4 WTG, this section allows the user to select a model from Model Type list and specify parameters.
WTG CKT Model Library – Type 1 &2 WTG

The Model area provides performance graphs and a field that displays the generator model type. Clicking on the Lib… button causes the Library Quick Pick box to
appear. You can select from the provided list of Design IDs and Models to specify the Model Type, Design Class and Model ID using the Library Quick Pick.
You can access Motor Model Library data by selecting CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor model data
from the library can be obtained and transferred to the Motor Editor by selecting the Model Type (Single1, Single2, DBL1, or DBL2) and then highlighting a Design
Class and model ID. Motor model is used for dynamic motor starting and transient stability analysis.
After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the WTG CKT Model Editor and the WTG Parameter Update Editor appears, which displays the updated
WTG parameters. Click on the UPDATE button to apply these parameters or the Cancel button to reject them and close the editor without apply any changes. ETAP
recalculates model parameters after you select a new circuit or characteristic model. The update occurs when you click OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another
editor page, or navigate to another motor.
WTG Model for Type 3 & 4
WTG Type 3 and Type 4 technologies are based on dynamic transfer functions that represent the machine model rather than a conventional machine equivalent circuit
model as those used for Type 1 and Type 2 WTG. For WT3G and WT4G models the generator is modeled as a controlled current injection having a single or two-mass
shaft model.
Impedance/Model Page for Type 3 WTG

Impedance/Model Page for Type 4 WTG
The generator model includes the converter model including blocks for high voltage reactive current management, low voltage active current management and low
voltage power logics. For more information on the dynamic fields please refer to the Dynamic Models chapter in the ETAP user guide.
Parameter Definition Unit

X” Generator effective reactance p.u. (rated MVA base)
T1 First generator time constant sec.
T2 Second generator time constant sec.
T3 Third generator time constant sec.
Lvplsw Low Voltage Power Logic Switch
Lvpl1 Low Voltage Power Logic Point 1
Lvpl2 Low Voltage Power Logic Point 2
zerox LVPL characteristic zero crossing p.u.
brkpt LVPL characteristic breaking point p.u.
rrpwr LVPL ramp rate limit p.u.
Inverter SC Contribution
This section is applicable only for Type 4 WTG and it is hidden for all other Types of WTG. For Type 4 WTG, it is interfaced to the system through an inverter. This
section allows the user to specify the inverter short-circuit parameter used for AC short-circuit calculations.
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent based on FLA of WTG.
Isc
This field displays the short-circuit current in amperes for a fault at the WTG terminal, calculated based on the K factor and the FLA of the WTG.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
SC Model Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

Please find details regarding the SC Model page in the Short-Circuit Chapter within ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
FRT Model Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

Please find details regarding the FRT Model page in the Short-Circuit Chapter within ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Turbine Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

You can use the Turbine page to define the characteristics of the turbine either by selecting turbine data from a library or by entering the required data manually. Click
on the appropriate button to select the library or user-defined options. If you select data from a library all fields in the aerodynamics group will be populated. If you later
change any parameter in a field the library header text will change to a dark blue color to indicate a change was made to the library data by a user.
Turbine Page for Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 (Generic) WTG
Aerodynamics
This area contains rotor, air density and air speed data that are used to generate the curve displayed in the Power Curve field.
V Rated
This is the turbine rated wind speed in meters-per-second (m/s). Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Cut-in Speed
This is the minimum wind speed in m/s required for the turbine to generate power. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Cut-out Speed
This is the maximum wind speed in m/s required for the turbine to generate power. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Swept Area
This is the rotor swept area Pi*(D/2)2 in square meters for a horizontal type of turbine (Pi = 3.1415926 and D=diameter in meters). Enter up to 9 numeric
characters in this field.
Diameter
This is the rotor diameter (D) in meters. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Pitch Angle
This is the rotor blade pitch and angle in degrees. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Air Density
This is the air density in kg/m3. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
RPM
This is the rotor/turbine rated RPM. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Power Curve
This field displays a graph of the WTG power curve generated from either the Aerodynamics library data or the user-defined data.
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
Power Coefficient Cp
This area allows you to enter nine numeric constants for the turbine Cp (thrust coefficient) curve. Clicking the Sample Data button refreshes the nine fields with ETAP
default data. These data are used to generate the graph displayed in the Wind Power Cp Curve field. The Cp curve data is analyzed by the Transient Stability module to
allow you to accurately model system disturbances and events while performing studies such as impact of wind variation on running turbines.
The 9 fields of the Power Coefficient Cp area make up the coefficients for the equation based Wind Power Cp Curve. Enter the coefficients for the equation based
curve:
C1
This is the numeric constant for the first turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C2
This is the numeric constant for the second turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C3
This is the numeric constant for the third turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C4
This is the numeric constant for the fourth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C5
This is the numeric constant for the fifth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C6
This is the numeric constant for the sixth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C7
This is the numeric constant for the seventh turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C8
This is the numeric constant for the eighth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C9
This is the numeric constant for the ninth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Wind Power Cp Curve

This field displays a graph of the wind power curve generated from the user-defined Power Coefficient Cp data.
Power vs Angle
This is the turbine model for a single mass wind turbine generator based on Type 3 technology. See the dynamic models chapter in the ETAP user guide for the detailed
transfer function.
Turbine Page for Type 3 WECC Models
Kaero
This is the aerodynamic gain in per unit.
Theta2
Blade pitch angle in degrees.
Theta0
Initial blade pitch angle in degrees.
Pitch Angle – Theta Initialization

This field displays a graph of the blade pitch angle in degrees versus Vw – wind speed in per unit generated from the power vs angle data.
Initial wind speed (vw) is used only if WTG is at a rated power output and if vw is greater than rated wind speed (to compute the initial pitch angle).
Otherwise, this value is ignored, the pitch angle is set to its optimum value (0 degree in most cases), and wind speed is initialized to give initial generator power
output.
Power Coefficient Cp
This is the turbine model for a wind turbine generator based on Type 4 technology. See the dynamic models chapter in the ETAP user guide for the detailed transfer
function. Note that the aerodynamics section that applies to Type 1 through Type 3 does not apply for Type 4 machines.
Turbine Page for Type 4 WECC Models
Parameter Definition Unit

Kpp Proportional gain p.u.
Kip Integral gain p.u.
Kf Turbine feedback gain p.u.
Tpw Turbine time constant sec.
Tf Turbine feedback time constant sec.
dPmx Maximum power change p.u.
dPmn Minimum power change p.u.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Wind Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

You can use the Wind page to enter wind information that ETAP can use to create a wind profile for an individual or group of turbines. The average base speed is used
for power flow calculations however the remaining fields are used in transient stability calculations only. The wind page is common to all wind turbine technology
types.
Average Base Speed
This is the average wind speed in meter-per-second (m/s). The average wind speed entered on this page is displayed on the rating page and becomes the base wind
speed used to determine the rated wind power.
Wind Disturbance
This area allows you to enter wind-related data including wind ramp, wind gust and wind noise either individually or as a combined effect.
Wind Profile
This field displays an ETAP generated graph of the wind profile based on the supplied data. Click on the Print button to print the graph.
Ramp Wind
Use this area to define the ramp characteristics of wind.
Max. Ramp
This is the maximum ramp wind speed in meter-per-second (m/s).
Ramp Start
This is the ramp starting time in seconds.
Ramp Stop
This is the ramp stopping time in seconds.
Gust Wind
Use this area to define the gust characteristics of wind.
Gust Peak
This is the gust peak wind speed in m/s.
Gust Start
This is the gust starting time in seconds.
Gust Period
This is the gust stopping time in seconds.
Noise Wind
Use this area to define the drag coefficient, turbulence, mean speed and frequency characteristics of wind.
Surface Drag
This is the noise wind surface drag coefficient.
Turbulence Scale
This is the turbulence scale in meters.
Mean Speed
This is the mean wind speed in m/s.
Frequency
This is the Noise Fundamental Frequency in Radian per seconds.
N
This is the Frequency Component Number.
Sample Data
You can click on the Sample Data button in order to randomly generate wind noise / turbulence that will be used for the simulation.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Controls Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

The data on the WTG Controls page is analyzed by the Transient Stability module. Using it, you can define controls for each WTG based on Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4
wind turbine generators. Click on the Sample Data button in each area to reload ETAP default data into these fields.
Type 2 WECC Control – WT2E

Rotor Resistance Control
For more information about the dynamic transfer function for this controller, please refer to the dynamic models chapter in the ETAP user guide.
Model Type
It shows model type of the control. The parameters are described below:
Kp
This allows the user to enter the power filter gain in pu.
Kw
This allows the user to enter the speed filter gain in pu.
Kpp
This allows the user to enter the PI controller proportional gain in pu.
Kip
This allows the user to enter PI controller integral gain in pu.
Tp
This allows the user to enter the power filter time constant in sec.
Tw
This allows the user to enter the speed filter time constant in sec.
Rmax
This allows the user to enter the rising rate limiter in degrees per second.
Rmin
This allows the user to enter the falling rate limiter in degrees per second.
P vs Slip Curve
Define the power (pu) versus slip curve (%) which is obtained from the turbine model and then passed to the generator model as external rotor resistance adjustments.
Type 3 WECC Control – WT3E

Reactive Power Control
Model Type
It shows model type of the control. Parameters are described below:
Kiv
Enter the integral gain in the voltage regulator.
Kpv
Enter the proportional gain in the voltage regulator.
Kqi
Enter the reactive control gain.
Kqv
Enter the terminal voltage control gain.
Fn
Enter the fraction of WTG in the wind plant that are on line.
Tr
Enter the voltage control time constant in seconds.
Tv
Enter the proportional path time constant in seconds.
Tc
Enter the filter time constant in seconds.
Tp
Enter the power factor regulator time constant in seconds.
varflg
Enter the Var control type flag.
vltflg
Enter the voltage flag.
Qmax
Enter the maximum reactive power limit in the voltage regulator.
Qmin
Enter the minimum reactive power limit in the voltage regulator.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage limit.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage limit.
XIQmax
Enter the terminal voltage regulator maximum limit.
XIQmin
Enter the minimum voltage regulator maximum limit.
Active Power (Torque) Control

Model Type
Kptrq
Enter the torque control proportional gain.
Kitrq
Enter the torque control integral gain.
Pmax
Enter the maximum active power limit.
Pmin
Enter the minimum active power limit.
Ipmax
Enter the maximum current.
Tsp
Enter the active power time constant in sec.
Tpc
Enter the power control time constant in sec.
Tmax
Enter the torque control block anti-wind upper limit.
Tmin
Enter the torque control block anti-wind lower limit.
dPmax/dt
Enter the active power control rate limit.
Type 3 - Generic Control

Converter Control
Model Type
Rc
Compensating line resistance in ohms.
Xc
Compensating line reactance in ohms.
Ti
Converter time constant in seconds.
Tr
Voltage control time constant in seconds.
Tv
Voltage control time constant in seconds. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Tpc
Power order control time constant in seconds
Kp
Converter proportional gain factor in pu.
Ki
Converter integral gain in pu.
Kpv
Voltage control proportional gain in pu.
Kiv
Voltage control integral gain in pu.
Pmax
Maximum power order in percent
Pmin
Minimum power order in percent
Qmax
Maximum reactive power in percent.
Qmin
Minimum reactive power in percent.
Vmax
Maximum rotor voltage in percent.
Vmin
Minimum rotor voltage in percent.
Rate_max
Maximum power order rate of change in percent/sec.
Rate_min
Minimum power order rate of change in percent/sec.
Type 4 WECC Control (WT4E)

Converter Electrical Control
Model Type
Kiv
Enter the integral gain in voltage regulator.
Kpv
Enter the proportional gain in voltage regulator.
Kqi
Enter the reactive control gain.
Kvi
Enter the terminal voltage control integral gain.
Fn
Enter the the fraction of WTG in wind plant that are on line.
Tr
Enter the voltage control time constant in seconds.
Tv
Enter the proportional path time constant in seconds.
Tc
Enter the filter time constant in seconds.
Tp
Enter the power factor regulator time constant in seconds.
varflg
Enter the Var control type flag.
pfaflg
Enter power factor flag (0= Q priority, 1=PF priority).
Qmax
Enter the maximum reactive power limit in voltage regulator.
Qmin
Enter the minimum reactive power limit in voltage regulator.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage limit.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage limit.
Converter Current Limiter

Model Type
It shows the model type of the control. The Parameters are described below.
ImaxTD
Enter the converter current limit.
Iqhl
Enter the hard limit on reactive power in pu.
Iphl
Enter the hard limit on real power in up.
pqflag
Enter the PQ flag (0=Q priority, 1=PF priority).
Vt1
Enter Vt point 1.
Vt2
Enter Vt point 2.
Iqmxv2
Enter Iqmxv point 2 (qmax).
Iqmxv1
Enter Iqmxv point 1.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Pitch Control Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

A wind turbine is designed to produce maximum power at a wide spectrum of wind speeds. All wind turbines are designed for a maximum wind speed, called the
survival speed, above which they do not survive. The survival speed of commercial wind turbines is in the range of 40 m/s (144 km/h, 89 MPH) to 72 m/s (259 km/h,
161 MPH). The most common survival speed is 60 m/s (216 km/h, 134 MPH). The wind turbines have three modes of operation:
 Below rated wind speed operation.

 Around rated wind speed operation (usually at nameplate capacity).
 Above rated wind speed operation.
If the rated wind speed is exceeded the power has to be limited. There are various ways to achieve this.
A control system involves three basic elements: sensors to measure process variables, actuators to manipulate energy capture and component loading, and control
algorithms to coordinate the actuators based on information gathered by the sensors.
Stall
Stalling works by increasing the angle at which the relative wind strikes the blades (angle of attack), and it reduces the induced drag (drag associated with lift). Stalling
is simple because it can be made to happen passively (it increases automatically when the winds speed up), but it increases the cross-section of the blade face-on to the
wind, and thus the ordinary drag. A fully stalled turbine blade, when stopped, has the flat side of the blade facing directly into the wind.
A fixed-speed horizontal axis wind turbine (HAWT) inherently increases its angle of attack at higher wind speed as the blades speed up. A natural strategy, then, is to
allow the blade to stall when the wind speed increases. This technique was successfully used on many early HAWTs. However, on some of these blade sets, it was
observed that the degree of blade pitch tended to increase audible noise levels.
Vortex generators may be used to control the lift characteristics of the blade. The VGs are placed on the airfoil to enhance the lift if they are placed on the lower (flatter)
surface or limit the maximum lift if placed on the upper (higher camber) surface.
Pitch control
Curling works by decreasing the angle of attack, which reduces the induced drag from the lift of the rotor, as well as the cross-section. One major problem in designing
wind turbines is getting the blades to stall or furl quickly enough should a gust of wind cause sudden acceleration. A fully furled turbine blade, when stopped, has the
edge of the blade facing into the wind.
Standard modern turbines all pitch the blades in high winds. Since pitching requires acting against the torque on the blade, it requires some form of pitch angle control,
which is achieved with a slewing drive. This drive precisely angles the blade while withstanding high torque loads. In addition, many turbines use hydraulic systems.
These systems are usually spring loaded, so that if hydraulic power fails, the blades automatically furl. Other turbines use an electric servomotor for every rotor blade.
They have a small battery-reserve in case of an electric-grid breakdown. Small wind turbines (under 50 kW) with variable-pitching generally use systems operated by
centrifugal force, either by flyweights or geometric design, and employ no electric or hydraulic controls.
One can define the Pitch Control factors for each WTG. Click on the Sample Data button to reload ETAP default data for pitch control.
Type 1 - WECC Control (WT1P)

Pitch Control
Model Type
This displays the model type of the pitch control. Parameters are described below:
Kdroop
Enter the droop gain of generator power in pu.
Kp
Enter the proportional gain in pu.
Ki
Enter the integral gain in pu.
Tpe
Enter the power filter time constant in sec.
T1
Enter the output filter1 time constant in sec.
T2
Enter the output filter2 time constant in sec.
Pimax
Enter the maximum output limit.
Pimin
Enter the minimum output limit.
Type 2 - WECC Control (WT2P)

Pitch Control
Model Type
This displays the model type of pitch control. Parameters are described below:
Kdroop
This allows the user to enter the droop gain of generator power in pu.
Kp
This allows the user to enter the proportional gain in pu.
Ki
This allows the user to enter the integral gain in pu.
Tpe
This allows the user to enter the power filter time constant in sec.
T1
This allows the user to enter the output filter1 time constant in sec.
T2
This allows the user to enter the output filter2 time constant in sec.
Pimax
This allows the user to enter the maximum output limit.
Pimin
This allows the user to enter the minimum output limit.
Type 3 - WECC Control

Pitch Control
Model Type
This displays the model type of pitch control. Parameters are described below:
Kpp
Enter the pitch control proportional gain in deg./pu speed.
Kip
Enter the pitch compensator integrator gain in deg./pu P-sec.
Kpc
Enter the pitch compensator proportional gain in deg./pu P.
Kic
Enter the pitch compensator integral gain in deg./(pu P–sec).
Plmax
Enter the maximum pitch angle in degrees.
Plmin
Enter the minimum pitch angle in degrees.
Tp
Enter the blade response time constant in sec.
Pset
Enter power set point in pu.
wmax
Enter pitch control anti-windup upper limit.
wmin
Enter pitch control anti-windup lower limit.
Pmax
Enter pitch compensator anti-windup upper limit.
Pmin
Enter pitch compensator anti-windup lower limit.
Plrate
Enter pitch rate limit in deg/sec.
Type 3 and Generic Control

Pitch Control
Model Type
It shows model type of the pitch control. Parameters are described below:
K
Enter the control gain in pu.
Ts
Enter the control time constant in seconds.
Rmax
Enter the rising rate limiter in degrees per second.
Rmin
Enter the falling rate limiter in degrees per second.
Theta_max
Enter the maximum pitch angle in degrees.
Theta_min
Enter the minimum pitch angle in degrees.
Wmax
This is the maximum generator operation speed in percent.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Inertia Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor
Inertia Calculator
Turbine, Gear, and Generator RPM, WR2, and H
Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the Turbine, Gear, and Generator. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when
one of them is known and RPM has been entered based on the following equation:
H = 2.31 * 10-10 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA (for WR2 = Moment of inertia in lb-ft2)
or
H = 5.48 * 10-9 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA (for WR2 = Moment of inertia in kg-m2)
Total RPM
The Total RPM is equal to the Generator revolutions per minute.
Total WR2
The Total WR2 for Turbine, Gear, and Generator in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 is based on the system unit, as calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation
above.
Total H
This is the total inertia of the generator shaft including Turbine, Gear, and Generator in MW-sec/MVA.
As noted, some of the fields below accept user-defined data.
RPM/Turbine
This is the turbine rated speed in RPMs.
RPM/Gear
This is the gear rated speed in RPMs. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.
RPM/Generator
This is the Generator rated speed in revolutions per minute RPMs.
WR2/Turbine
This is the Turbine WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
WR2/Gear
This is the Gear WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
WR2/Generator
This is the Generator WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
H/Turbine
This is the Turbine inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
H/Gear
This is the Gear inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
H/Generator
This is the Generator inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Time Domain Page - Wind Turbine Generator Editor

Sector
This option specify a sector profile for the WTG to use in load flow calculation. Sector was set selected in Sector Library before using. For details on profile
and sector library, refer to Section 58.8.1 – Profile Library and Section 58.8.2 – Sector Library.
Note: Wind Speed profile is not available for current ETAP, they will be supported in future release of ETAP.
 Energize: when did/will this WTG be in service.
 Out of Service: when did/will this WTG be out of service.
External Data
This option allows user to use an External Data file as data entry for the WTG. When External Data type is selected, the data in an excel sheet with the path
specified in Time Domain Loading page of the study case will be used in calculation.
Data Gap Options


Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
This is the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that causes the operation of the
primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from service. After the actively
failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however,
that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
MTTR
This is the Mean Time to Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
µ
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA (MTTF = 1.0/λA).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/λA).
MR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick Editor for reliability data.
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the load sector name (or customer type) for the load. In the reliability calculation, the user sector information is used to get interruption cost from the Reliability
Cost library to calculate Expected Interruption Cost.

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this element. The names of the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in
the Project menu in the Menu bar.

up to five digits.



UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Comment Page
Enter any extra data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of
4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut,

Info Page
Rating Page
Imp/Model Page
SC Model Page
FRT Page
Turbine Page
Wind Page
Controls Page
Pitch Control Page
Inertia Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Photovoltaic (PV) Array Editor Overview

PV array is one of the important elements of renewable energy, micro-grid, smart grid, etc. It converts solar radiation energy into direct current using semiconductors
and then to electric power through inverters. ETAP PV Array is used to represent individual panels connected in series and parallel combinations with a grid tied
inverter and represents blocks of PV power. As shown below, a number of modules make up a typical PV panel that can be connected in a string configuration in order
to achieve a desired current and voltage at the inverter input.
You can enter the properties associated with Photovoltaic (PV) array including solar irradiance and inverter of the electrical distribution system using PV Array Editor.
The physics of the PV cell is very similar to the classical p-n junction diode. When light is absorbed by the junction, the energy of the absorbed photons is transferred to
the electron system of the material, resulting in the creation of charge carriers that are separated at the junction. The charge carriers may be electron-ion pairs in a liquid
electrolyte or electron hole pairs in a solid semiconducting material. The charge carriers in the junction region create a potential gradient, get accelerated under the
electric field and circulate as the current through an external circuit. The current squared times the resistance of the circuit is the power converted into electricity. The
remaining power of the photon elevates the temperature of the cell.
Several PV cells make a module and several modules make an array. In ETAP we define the PV panel information and specify the number of panels connected in series
and parallel that make up the final PV array.
The Photovoltaic Array Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
Info Page - PV Array Editor

You can specify the PV array ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment Tag #, Name, Description, Data Type and Priority within the fields of the Info page.
After selecting a PV array from the library (see PV Panel page of PV Array Editor), its header information will be updated accordingly.
Info
This section is for PV array ID and connected bus information.
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each PV array. The assigned IDs consist of the default PVA plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as
the number of PV arrays increase. The default ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the PV array. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a
PV array to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the PV array resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network. ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next to the bus ID for your convenience.
Condition
Service
The operating condition of a PV array can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of
grey.
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
This allows the user to enter the the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list.
As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names,
navigate to the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten
different priorities are allowed. To change priority names, from the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Click to lock / unlock the editor properties of the current element. When the editor properties are locked, all engineering data is displayed as read-only except
condition information. The user can change condition information (service & state) even though the element properties are locked.
Photovoltaic (PV) Array

Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
PV Panel Page - PV Array Editor

A PV array can be made up of a number of PV panels in series and parallel. On this page, the user can specify the individual PV panel rating including P-V and I-V
curves that make up the entire PV array.
Current versus voltage (I-V) characteristics of the PV module can be defined in sunlight and under dark conditions. In the first quadrant, the top left of the I-V curve at
zero voltage is called the short circuit current. This is the current measured with the output terminals shorted (zero voltage). The bottom right of the curve at zero current
is called the open-circuit voltage. This is the voltage measured with the output terminals open (zero current).
If the voltage is externally applied in the reverse direction, for example, during a system fault transient, the current remains flat and the power is absorbed by the cell.
However, beyond a certain negative voltage, the junction breaks down as in a diode, and the current rises to a high value. In the dark, the current is zero for voltage up
to the breakdown voltage which is the same as in the illuminated condition.
Rating
Power
Enter the individual panel rated power in watts (W). Note that if a model is selected from the library then the power property is read-only since this
information is linked to the library. The maximum power delivered by the PV panel, Pmax, is the area of the largest rectangle under the I-V curve as shown
below.
Tol. P
This allows the user to enter the panel power tolerance in watts. The tolerance is specified by the manufacturer, however in ETAP this field is not used and is
provided for information purposes only.
Vmp
This allows the user to enter the maximum peak power voltage of an individual panel in volts (V).
Voc
Enter the open circuit voltage of an individual panel in volts (V).
% Eff
It shows the calculated panel efficiency in percent.
Panel efficiency = Power / (Area in m2 * Base Irradiance in W/m2)
Area is calculated from length and width of Physical page of PV Array Editor.
Imp
Enter the maximum peak power current of an individual panel in amperes.
Isc
Enter the short circuit current of an individual panel in amperes.
% Fill Factor
It shows the calculated panel fill factor in percent. It is defined as the rectangular area in a I-V curve that utilizes the knee-point as one of the edges of the rectangle. Fill
factor should be greater than 0.7 for good panels. Fill factor can be calculated as:
Performance Adjustment Coefficients

Temperature affects the performance of the PV panels. The magnitude of this reduction is inversely proportional to VOC; that is, cells with higher values of VOC suffer
smaller reductions in voltage with increasing temperature. For most crystalline silicon solar cells the change in VOC with temperature is about -0.50%/°C, though the
rate for the highest-efficiency crystalline silicon cells is around -0.35%/°C. By way of comparison, the rate for amorphous silicon solar cells is -0.20%/°C to -0.30%/°C,
depending on how the cell is made. The amount of photogenerated current IL increases slightly with temperature increases because of an increase in the number of
thermally generated carriers in the cell. This effect is slight, however: about 0.065%/°C for crystalline silicon cells and 0.09% for amorphous silicon cells. Most
crystalline silicon solar cells decline in efficiency by 0.50%/°C and most amorphous cells decline by 0.15-0.25%/°C. The figure above shows I-V curves that might
typically be seen for a crystalline silicon solar cell at various temperatures.
Alpha Isc
This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for short circuit current. This coefficient is used to calculate the short circuit current.
Beta Voc
This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for open circuit voltage. This coefficient is used to calculate the open circuit voltage of the panel.
Delta Voc
This allows the user to enter the adjustment coefficient for open circuit voltage. This coefficient is used to calculate the open circuit voltage based on irradiance levels
other than base irradiance.
Base
This section consists of Temp, Irrad and NOCT fields, and they are described below.
Temp
This allows the user to enter the base temperature used by manufacturer to determine rated panel power in degrees Celsius (C). If data is not selected from
the library then the base can be defined or changed. Default base for temperature is 25 degrees C.
Irrad
This allows the user to enter the base irradiance used by manufacturers to determine rated panel power in W/m2. If data is not selected from the library then the base can
be defined or changed. Default base for irradiance is 1000 W/m2. If data is selected from the library then the base irradiance field cannot be edited and is obtained from
the library.
NOCT
This allows the user to enter the normal operating cell temperature (NOCT) in degrees Celsius (C). Default NOCT is 45 degrees C.
P-V Curve
A P-V curve will be generated using the PV array rating data. Maximum power point will be shown in the graph.
I-V Curve
An I-V curve will be generated using the PV array rating data. Maximum power point will be shown in the graph as well.
Library
You can bring existing data from library. Click the Library button and it will launch the Library Quick Pick page with available PV array manufacturers. Select a
desired manufacturer and model from the list and bring the data for simulation.

Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
PV Array Page - PV Array Editor

PV Panel
Watt/Panel
It shows the individual panel rated power in watts entered in the PV Panel page of the PV Array Editor. This field is display only.
#in Series
This allows the user to enter the number of PV panels connected in series. Series connected panels increase the overall string voltage.
#in Parallel
This allows the user to enter the number of PV panels connected in parallel. Parallel connected panels increase the overall string current in amps.
PV Array (Total) #of Panels

This is a calculated field and shows the calculated total number of panels based on number connected in parallel and series
Volts, dc
This is the total DC voltage calculated based on the number of panels in series.
kW, dc
This is the total DC power in kW calculated based on the number of panels in series and parallel that make up the PV array.
Amps, dc
This is the calculated DC current of the entire PV array based on the number of panels in parallel.
Generation Category
This section shows names of the 10 generation categories. These names are defined in project settings and are used for utility and generator components as well.
Irradiance
This is the value of solar irradiance incident on the PV panel in watts per square meter (W/m2). The value in this column is defaulted initially. Irradiance can be user
entered or updated using the solar position calculator (Irradiance Calc). Based on the irradiance value, the power output from the PV array is calculated and displayed in
the MPP kW column.
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius (C) where the PV panels are placed. Ta is user-defined and based on the data, the power output from the PV array is
updated and displayed in the MPP kW column.
Tc
This is the PV array cell temperature and is calculated using the equation given below. As irradiance and ambient temperature Ta are changed, the cell temperature Tc is
recalculated. Higher the Tc the lower the efficiency and power output from the panel.
MPP kW
This is the maximum peak power output from the PV array in kW based on the given irradiance level and ambient temperature, assuming optimal collector tilt.
Irradiance Calc.
This is an irradiance calculator. Click on the “Irradiance Calc.” button to launch the irradiance calculator. Based on the user specified location information and date and
time, and the calculator will determine the theoretical irradiance (direct component) in W/m2. All calculation results are given at sea level.
Latitude
Enter the latitude in degrees. North of the equator is defined as the positive direction.
Longitude
Enter the longitude in degrees. West of the Prime Meridian is defined as the positive direction.
Time Zone
Enter the time zone offset from UTC for the specified latitude and longitude.
Local Time
This is automatically the system / computer time at the instant the calculator is launched and may be changed to any other local time.
Date
This is automatically the current system / computer date at the instant the calculator is launched and may be changed to another date.
Calculate
Click this button to use the location, time and date information in order to calculate solar position and irradiance.
Declination
The apparent angle of the sun north or south of the earth’s equatorial plane.
Equation of Time
The equation of time is the difference between apparent solar time and mean solar time measured at a given instant at the same point on the earth. At any
given instant that difference is the same everywhere.
Solar Altitude
The solar elevation angle is the elevation angle of the sun. That is, the angle between the direction of the geometric center of the sun's apparent disk and the
(idealized) horizon.
Solar Azimuth
The solar azimuth angle is the azimuth angle of the sun. It is most often defined as the angle from due north in a clockwise direction.
Solar Time
Solar time is a reckoning of the passage of time based on the sun's position in the sky. The fundamental unit of solar time is the day. When the sun is visible,
an observer at any longitude may measure the sun's position in the sky and calculate its hour angle, which is interpreted as local time for that observer.
Sunrise
Sunrise is the instant at which the upper edge of the sun appears above the horizon in the east.
Sunset
Sunset or sundown is the daily disappearance of the sun below the horizon in the west as a result of earth's rotation. The time of sunset is defined in astronomy
as the moment the trailing edge of the sun's disk disappears below the horizon in the west.
Air Mass
The amount of sunlight either absorbed or scattered depends on the length of the path through the atmosphere. This path is generally
compared with a vertical path directly to sea level, which is designated as air mass = 1 (AM1). Air Mass will be more than unity for
nonvertical sun angles.
Irradiance
Solar Irradiance is a measure of how much solar power you are getting at your location. This irradiance varies throughout the year
depending on the seasons. It also varies throughout the day, depending on the position of the sun in the sky, and the weather.

Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
Inverter Page - PV Array Editor

All fields in this page are display only.
PV Array
Total Rated
This section shows voltage (Volts, dc), power (W, dc) and current (Amps, dc) from the PV Array page of PV Array Editor. It helps to see PV array ratings and inverter
ratings together.
Inverter
This section summarizes the inverter AC and DC power information.
ID
It shows a unique inverter ID (name) with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
DC
This row summarizes the DC rating of the inverter.
kW
Input DC power rating in kW.
V
Input DC input voltage in volts.
FLA
DC current rating in amperes.
%EFF
DC to AC conversion efficiency of inverter in percent.
AC
This row summarizes the AC rating of the inverter.
kW
Output AC power rating in kVA.
kV
Rated AC output voltage in kV.
FLA
AC current rating in amperes.
%PF
Rated power factor in percent.
Inverter Editor
You can edit inverter data using the regular inverter editor. Click on the “Inverter Editor” button to launch a regular Inverter Editor with Info page, Rating page,
Generation page, Harmonic page, etc. You can change/enter inverter data, AC operating mode and other characteristics using this regular inverter editor, and this data
will be reflected/affected to the Inverter section of Inverter page of PV Array Editor. For more information on the Inverter editor refer to the section in the AC/DC
elements chapter.
PV Array to Inverter Cable

By default the equipment cable does not exist and all fields in this section are left blank.
Cable Library
Click on Cable Library button to open the Cable Library Quick Pick and then you may pick a cable from the list.
Cable Editor
When a cable has not been selected from library, this button is invisible. If it is visible, you can click on this button to open the DC Cable Editor. The editor allows you
to edit/enter DC cable data.
Delete Cable
This button is enabled only when a cable has been selected from the library. Clicking on the button will null the cable selection and disable the Cable Editor and Delete
Cable buttons.

Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
Time Domain Page - PV Array Editor

The Time Domain page allows you to specify the data type of the power grid used in Time Domain Unbalanced Load Flow calculation. The available time domain data
types include Fixed Category / Constant, Sector, and External Data.
Sector
This option specify a sector profile for PV Array to use in load flow calculation. Sector was set selected in Sector Library before using. For details on profile and sector
library, refer to Section 58.8.1 – Profile Library and Section 58.8.2 – Sector Library.
 Energize: when did/will this PV Array be in service.
 Out of Service: when did/will this PV Array be out of service.
External Data
This option allows user to use an External Data file as data entry for the power grid. When External Data type is selected, the data in an excel sheet with the
Data Gap Options


Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
Physical Page - PV Array Editor

This page allows you to enter physical structure information of the PV array (e.g. length, width, depth and weight). If PV array is picked from the library then module
physical information comes from the library. If library information is not selected then users can enter this data manually.
Length
This allows the user to enter the panel length in inches.
Width
This allows the user to enter the panel width in inches.
Depth
This allows the user to enter the panel thickness in inches. It is optional.
Weight
Enter the panel weight in pounds or kilograms. This field is optional.

Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow the user to keep track of extra data associated with this element. The names of the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option
in the Project menu in the menu bar.

up to five digits.



UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
This allows the user to enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the
manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
This allows the user to enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Manufacturer
Name
This allows the user to enter the manufacturer’s name for this element here, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
This allows the user to enter the date of purchase for this element here, using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
Comments Page
This allows the user to enter any extra data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb
with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut,

Info Page
PV Panel Page
PV Array Page
Inverter Page
Physical Page
Time Domain Page
Remarks Page
Comments Page
Induction Machine Editor Overview

You can enter the properties associated with induction machines of the electrical distribution system using this editor.
The Induction Machine Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Induction Machine Editor

You can specify the induction machine ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, load Priority, Data Type, Configuration
Status, Quantity of induction machines, Phase Connection, and Demand Factor within the fields of the Info page.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each induction machine. The assigned IDs consist of the default induction machine ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of induction machines increase. The default induction machine ID (Mtr) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu
bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the induction machine. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or
reconnect an induction machine to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the induction machine resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or
in another composite network.
If an induction machine is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the induction machine to a new bus in this editor will reconnect
the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where Mtr3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
App. Type
Select the application type (either motor or generator) for this induction machine type.
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different
priorities are allowed. To change priority names, from the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Click to lock / unlock the editor properties of the current element. When the editor properties are locked, all engineering data is displayed as read-only expect condition
Configuration
Select the operating status of the induction machine(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options for operating status include:
Status Description
Continuous Continuously operating load
Intermittent Intermittently operating load
Spare Spare load (no short-circuit contribution)
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the machine is determined for load flow and machine starting studies.
Note: status is not a part of the machine engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown, indicating the machine status under the
specific configuration, i.e., you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a machine is shown to be Continuous
under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the induction machine. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options for phase connection include:
Selection Description
3 Phase Three-phase machine
Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B or C.
1 Phase
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB , BC or CA
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of induction machines for this machine ID. This allows you to group identical machines together without a need for graphical presentation
in the one-line diagram. View the explanations below to see how ETAP handles Quantity in Load Flow, short-circuit, Arc Flash, and Sequence of Operation.
Load Flow:
Notice in the following example of a load flow calculation the current at Bus 2 is equivalent to the sum of each current going to each load at bus 4. This occurs because
the quantity of Motor 1 is changed to three. ETAP simulates the effect of what you see in the system powered by U2 without having to display each load.
In the diagram above, the fuse is red which is showing a critical alert. In the alert view below, Fuse1 is shown to be operating at 156.569. The critical alert for the
protective device used on a load with a quantity greater than one is based on the operating current calculated by the characteristics of a single load.
Short-Circuit:
In the following short-circuit analysis Motor 1 is contributing 1.13kA to the system. Because Motor 1 has a quantity of three, that current is three times the current that
would be seen with a single motor. The load terminal fault current is shown as the current for each load.
protective device used on a load with a quantity greater than one is based on the operating short-circuit current calculated by the characteristics of a single load.
Sequence of Operation
You cannot run Sequence of Operation if you have a Quantity greater than one. Sequence of Operation is not used to run simultaneous faults on loads.
Arc Flash
In the following Arc Flash example, the bus Arc Flash characteristics of Bus 2 is equal to Bus 4. The reason is that Motor 1 has a quantity of three which is a quick way
of showing what you see in the system under Utility 2.
The Arc Flash Analysis report shows the incident energy at the terminal of Motor 1 is equal to the incident energy of the terminal at each motor in the equivalent One
Line View. The incident energy of a motor with a quantity greater than one is shown as the incident energy calculated by the characteristics of a single load.
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status in the provided entry fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the induction machine is
actually operating. Demand factor affects the following calculations:
 Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

 Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
This pertains when the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified % loading from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and
50% loading.
Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since demand factors are a part of engineering properties, ETAP uses the
same factors for all configurations.
Voltage Limit (Motor Starting Only)

This value represents the minimum allowable transient voltage drop during motor starting for the bus. This voltage limit can be enabled from the motor starting (MS)
study case “Alert” page. If the radio box toggle option is set to “Individual Element”, then the MS program will use this value to check the motor terminal voltage drop
limits.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Nameplate Page - Induction Machine Editor

In this page, you can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings). Select Motor Library data, specify % loading, and display motor loading and feeder losses for all
loading categories.
Ratings
HP/kW
Enter the machine output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following
equations for the nameplate parameters:
Rated kVA = HP * 0.7457 / ( PF * Eff ) Rating in HP

= kW / ( PF * Eff ) Rating in kW
Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA / (√3 * kV ) 3-phase machines

= Rated kVA / kV Single phase machines
where the PF and Eff are at full load condition ( 100% loading).
MVA/kVA
You can choose from these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button to display the machine rating in MVA or kVA and the machine operating load
and feeder losses in (MW + j Mvar) or (kW + j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the machine in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for three-phase machines.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the machine in amperes. This is the current the machine would pull from the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the
system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency. When you modify FLA, the machine efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated.
ETAP limits the entry of FLA in such a way that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
OL % -- Over-Load Percent
Enter motor over-load level in percent. The default value, 100%, is entered in the field, the corresponding %PF and %EFF fields displays the rated PF and EFF. When a
value different from 100% is entered, the %PF and %EFF fields for over-load become editable for you to enter values for the specified overloading condition.
Note that the value in this field also determines the method used for calculating PF (or EFF) for motor power displayed in the Loading section when the %Loading is
larger than 100%. If the value is 100%, then the same method as in the previous version of ETAP is used to calculate PF (or EFF) for overloading conditions. If the
value is different from 100%, the PF (or EFF) for overloading conditions will be calculated by linear interpolation/extrapolation based on the PF (or EFF) values at the
rated and this specified over-load condition.
NL 0 % -- No-Load Losses
Enter motor no-load current in percent of FLA. The default value for the no-load current is 0%. When this value is entered, the corresponding NL %PF (user-definable)
and NL %EFF (read-only) fields are used to calculated the no-load motor losses. The no-load kW and kVAR demand absorbed by the motor under no-load conditions
(0% HP/kW) are calculated automatically and displayed under the corresponding “Motor Load” columns of the loading section.
The 0% loading (HP/kW) condition may have especial meanings of handling under different modules. The following section provides a brief description of how each
calculation module handles the this condition.
Handling of No-Load Losses in Load Flow Type Modules:
For the following modules LF, ULF, HA, OCP, TS, VS, TDUL, OPF, SSM, if there are no-load losses specified for a particular motor, then these load flow programs
consider the no-load losses (even if loading category with 0% mechanical load has been entered). This is the cause since the no-load losses represent the motor
magnetizing branch and core resistance losses which are present as long as the motor is energized. That is, even if the motor is set to 0% load, the motor may still
demand some real and reactive power from the system. If for some specific reason, the motor no-load losses do not need to be considered in any of these LF type
modules listed above, (but the motor breaker or contactor is not normally open), the motor may be set to “Spare” with 0% load.
Short-circuit Type Modules (SC ANSI, SC IEC, GOST, STAR SC):
The short-circuit type modules do not consider the no-load losses of the motor. That is even if the motor has no-load losses specified, and the option “Loading
Category” has been selected from the SC study case “Info” page the motor will not contribute short-circuit current. In essence, the motor with 0% load are not
considered part of the system. Of course, if the motor “Configuration” has been selected to intermittent or continuous or with a non-zero value and the option “Both” or
“Motor Status” has been selected from the “Info” page of the short-circuit study cases, then the motor will make a contrition to the short-circuit current. Since the short-
circuit contribution is dependent on the motor load, under no-load conditions it is acceptable to neglect the motor contribution since its internal effective voltage is
considered negligible.
Motor Acceleration (MS) (Load transitioning events):
For motor acceleration the motor no-load losses may not be considered under certain circumstances since the motor loading category can be used to start the motor at
any time. Any motor with 0% loading can be considered by MS to be off at the beginning of the simulation. If a load transitioning event takes place from a loading
category with 0% loading towards a loading category with non-zero % loading, then the motor is started with the end loading category % load value. This is the case
with no-load losses specified or not.
If a motor is started with 0% load and the no-load losses have been specified (either through the dynamic circuit model or statically by means of the nameplate page),
then the motor will start and accelerate and draw power based on its no-load losses. Note that if a motor is started using the dynamic motor starting module that its no-
load losses are determined by means of the dynamic CKT model or the characteristic motor curves. If the motor is started using static motor starting, then the no-load
losses are calculated based on the nameplate entered values.
Transient Stability (TS) Acceleration Events:
In similar fashion as MS (but dynamically only), induction motors may be started under no-load conditions. If that is the case, the TS program will determine the motor
losses based on its dynamics circuit model. Contrary to MS, the TS program does not have any loading transitioning events and thus any motor energized and with 0%
load and no-load losses specified will draw no-load loss power from the system (even if not involved in any acceleration event). In other words, whenever a motor is
modeled dynamically or not dynamically in TS, it will always consider the no-load losses in the load flow calculation (initial or running) if they are specified.
% PF
Enter the machine power factor in percent at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading as well as the no-load and over loading conditions. The power factor at 100% loading is the
rated power factor and is used for calculating the rated values. (That is, when you change the power factor at 100% loading, the machine full load current is
recalculated.) All five values of the power factors are used for determining the operating power factor of the machine under different percent loading. (In other words,
when you change any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading categories are recalculated.)
The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. Since induction machines always take reactive power (kvars) from the system, they
have a lagging power factor, which must be entered as a positive value.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the machine, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading as well as the no-load and over loading conditions. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%
and the value for 0% load is fixed at 0. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the
efficiency at 100% loading, the machine full load current is recalculated. All five values of the efficiencies are used for determining the machine efficiency under
different percent loading, i.e., when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading categories are recalculated.
% FLA or Amp
Displayed in this line is the machine current, in percent of FLA or Amp, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading as well as the over loading condition. The current values are
calculated based on the PF and EFF for the corresponding loading level. The No-Load (NL) current is an editable field for the user to specify motor input current due to
losses. By default, the NL current is set to zero. Clicking on the %FLA/Amp button toggles the unit for the displayed current values.
Rated %Slip and RPM

Enter the rated slip or rated RPM (Speed in revolutions per second) for this machine. Slip is in percent. When one of these values is entered, the other is calculated
based on the following relation:
Rated RPM = (100 - %Slip)*Nominal RPM where Nominal RPM is calculated based on the poles.
The maximum rated speed is used by ETAP to calculate the torque at full load.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the machine is recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per
minute).
RPM = 120 * Freq. / Poles

SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading per unit. Service factor is not used for calculation of loading or feeder losses. ETAP gives you the option to use the
service factor for voltage drop calculations of the machine feeder.
Library
Access the Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick Pick - Motor. Motor Nameplate data can be obtained and
substituted from the library by highlighting and double-clicking on the selection. Library data includes motor ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff, and Pole
(transferred to the Nameplate page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR PF, X”, X’, X, X2, X0, X/R, and T” (transferred to the Model page). The library selected is
displayed next to the library button.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this machine, i.e., each machine can be set to have a different operating
loading (generator) level for each loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
The loading value can be entered in percent or in HP (kW). When a new value is entered in one field, the other field will be calculated accordingly.
Note: You can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.
ETAP uses the specified percent loading of each loading category to calculate the operating power factor and efficiency from the values specified at 100%, 75%, and
50% loading as well as the no-load and over loading conditions. This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and
efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the operating kW and kvar loading, as well as the feeder losses, if an
equipment cable with a non-zero length is specified for this load.
Note: Although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and feeder losses, the value of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating
power factor and efficiency.
To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project Menu.
Operating Load
Operating Load can be updated from the Load Flow Study Case Editor. The operating load option is available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Real-Time)
feature.
When the operating load box is checked in the load flow study case editor, the calculation results are updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as
input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the element editor; however, this data cannot be
used in a later study.
Typical Nameplate Data

You can choose from typical nameplate data, once a voltage and kW/HP are specified in a Machine Editor.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Typical Nameplate Data Page
Typical nameplate data is available to choose from once a voltage and kW/HP are specified in a machine editor. There are three fields to select from:
NEC
NEC data is available for a selected range of machine sizes and voltage levels. NEC specifies an ampacity. ETAP calculates %Efficiency and kVA using the NEC
Ampacity value and a typical %Power Factor.
MFR
Manufacturer typical data is available for any machine size. Ampacity and kVA are calculated using typical %Power Factor and %Efficiency.
Existing
A machine is considered to have an existing set of data after NEC or MFR have been selected. You can decide not to update parameters after changing a size or voltage
level by choosing to keep the existing set of data.
Library Button
This button will bring up the Motor Library Quick Pick.
Nameplate Page - Induction Machine Editor

Nameplate Page - Synchronous Motor Editor
Nameplate Page - Motor Operated Valve Editor
Impedance Page - Induction Machine Editor

Design
The list for induction motor design standard has two options to select: NEMA and Other. Select the NEMA standard to indicate that the motor follows the NEMA
design standard. Note that NEMA standard is applicable only to motors equal to or less than 500 hp.
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
This is the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the motor. Note that the three fields (%LRC, LRA and LR
kVA/HP) are related to each other. When a new value is entered in one of the fields, the other two fields will be updated automatically.
LRC
This is the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in ampere. Note that the three fields (%LRC, LRA and LR kVA/HP) are related to each other. When a new
value is entered in one of the fields, the other two fields will be updated automatically.
LR kVA/HP
This is the ratio of machine locked-rotor kVA over rating in HP. Note that the three fields (%LRC, LRA and LR kVA/HP) are related to each other. When a new value
is entered in one of the fields, the other two fields will be updated automatically.
For a machine by NEMA design standard, this field is also related to the Code Letter and Ratio Range fields. When a new LR kVA/HP value is entered, the Code Letter
and Ratio Range fields will be updated accordingly. Note that per NEMA standard, the higher boundary value of the ratio is excluded from the range. For example, for
code letter E the range shows 4.5 to 5.0 and for code letter F it shows 5.0 to 5.6. The ratio 5.0 belongs to code letter F. Therefore, if you select code letter E from the list,
the LR kVA/HP filed will be updated as 4.99 which is the highest value in the range for code letter E.
Code Letter
When Design standard in the Nameplate page is selected as NEMA, this field shows the NEMA design code letter for the motor. Note that the three fields (Code Letter,
Ratio Range and LR kVA/HP) are related to each other. If a new code letter is selected from the list, the corresponding ration range will be displayed and the high end
ratio will be set in the LR kVA/HP field.
Code Letter Ratio Range

When Design standard in the Nameplate page is selected as NEMA, this field displays the LR kVA/HP ratio range according NEMA standard.
% PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent. This field is related to the locked-rotor X/R field next to it. Whenever when one of the fields is changed, the other is
updated automatically.
X/R
This is the locked-rotor X/R. It is related to the locked-rotor power factor field next to it. Whenever when one of the fields is changed, the other is updated
automatically.
T”
This is the induction motor transient time constant in seconds. This value is used in the IEC 61363 method.
T”d = X”/(2 f Rr) (Rr = rotor resistance)
Sequence Z
X”
This is the transient reactance in percent (machine base), used for IEC short-circuit calculations. It is a displayed value calculated based on %LRC and locked-rotor
X/R.
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base), used for calculating short-circuit currents for unbalanced faults.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for Harmonic Analysis, Short-Circuit, and Unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X”/R
This is the induction motor’s X/R ratio.
ANSI Short-Circuit Z
Std MF
If you select Std MF, ETAP uses the following ANSI Multiplying Factors for calculating the positive sequence short-circuit impedances.
Note: The IEC Short-Circuit Method does not use these impedances.
Xsc Xsc
HP kW RPM ½ Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network

> 1000 HP > 745.7 ≤ 1800 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
> 250 HP > 186.4 3600 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
≥ 50 HP ≥ 37.28 other 1.2/LRC 3.0/LRC
< 50 HP < 37.28 1.67/LRC Infinity
User Defined
If you select the User Defined option, you can directly enter the short-circuit impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base.
From T”
This option considers decay in symmetrical short-circuit current contribution from induction motor based on the time constant T”. When this option is selected, the ½
cycle Xsc value is calculated based on motor LRC and T” at ½ cycle time. The 1.5-4 cycle Xsc is calculated based on motor LRC and T” at the time define in the Cycle
field next to it.
Cy
This is time in cycles for calculating motor reactance from T” and LRC. This reactance value is used to compute motor contribution during 1.5-4 cycle.
Torque
LR Torque
This is the locked Rotor Torque of the machine. You may enter the value as a percentage of the full load torque or in actual unit. Once a new value is entered in one
field, the other field is updated accordingly.
Max Torque
This is the maximum torque of the machine. You may enter the value as a percentage of the full load torque or in actual unit. Once a new value is entered in one field,
the other field is updated accordingly.
Rated Torque
These two fields display machine rated torque as in percentage or in actual unit. The value in percent is always 100.
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
The motor grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and
Delta.
Grounding Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:
 Open Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded)

 Solid Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path
 Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.)
 Reactor A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path
Amp Rating
Enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes for resistor or reactor grounded motors.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohm Value)
Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the rated voltage of the machine divided by √3.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Model Page - Induction Machine Editor

Parameter Estimation
Clicking on this button will call up the Parameter Estimation program. See Chapter Parameter Estimation for more information on parameter estimation.
Model
Note: The data in the Motor CKT model library is sample data. For a specific motor, enter the Motor CKT Model provided by the manufacturer.
Motor Designs (NEMA MG-1)
Locked Breakdown Locked Relative

Classification Rotor Torque (% Rotor Slip Typical Applications Efficiency
Torque (% Rated Current (%)
Rated Load (% Rated
Load Torque) Load
Torque) Current)
Design B Fans, blowers,
Normal centrifugal pumps and
locked rotor compressors, motor-
torque and generator sets, etc., Medium
normal where starting torque or
70-275* 175-300* 600-700 0.5-5
locked rotor requirements are High
current. relatively low.
Conveyors, crushers,
Design C
stirring machines,
High locked
agitators, reciprocating
rotor torque
600-700 1-5 pumps and compressors, Medium
and normal 200-250* 190-225*
etc., where starting
locked rotor
torque under load are
current.
required.
High peak loads with or
without fly wheels such
Design D
as punch presses, shears,
High locked
275 600-700 5-8 elevators, extractors, Medium
rotor torque 275
winches, hoists, oil-well
and high slip.
pumping, and wire-
drawing machines.
Fans, blowers,
Design E
centrifugal pumps and
IEC 34-12
compressors, motor-
Design N
800- generator sets, etc., High
locked rotor 75-190* 160-200* 0.5-3
1000 where starting torque
torques and
requirements are
currents.
relatively low.
Note: Design A motor performance characteristics are similar to those for Design B except that the locked rotor starting current is higher than the values shown in the
table above.
CKT Model Library

After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the
following message to update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.
Characteristic Model Library

You can access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick -
Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library data (slip, torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting a Model ID.
When you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor CKT Model Library data, the library data is not transferred to the Machine Editor, i.e., a reference to the
selected library design class and model ID is kept with the machine. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run Motor Starting Studies.
Note: The characteristic data is not considered a dynamic model for Transient Stability Studies.
After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts
you with the message shown above to update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the selected library.
Print
Click on this selection to print the torque, current, & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for the selected model (CKT or characteristic).
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Update Model Parameter Data Page

ETAP recalculates model parameters after you select a new circuit or characteristic model. The update occurs when you click OK to leave the Motor Editor, select
another editor page, or navigate to another motor. ETAP prompts you with the following message to update (modify) some nameplate parameters that do not match the
calculated values using the selected model.
Induction Machine Model Page

Synchronous Motor LR Model Page
Inertia Page - Induction Machine Editor
Inertia Calculator
Motor, Coupling Gear, and Load RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in either lb-ft2 for English unit system or in Kg-m2 for Metric unit system or H in MW-sec/MVA for
the Motor, Coupling Gear, and Load. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when one of them is known and RPM has been entered based on the following equation:
or
Total RPM
The total RPM is equal to the Motor RPM.
Total WR2
Total H
This is the arithmetic sum of the Motor, Coupling and Load H in MW-sec/MVA.
Shaft Torsion
Select this option to consider torsion effect between motor, coupling gear and load during transient stability calculation.
D1
This is the damping constant between turbine and coupling gear.
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and generator.
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of turbine and coupling gear.
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and generator.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Load Model Page - Induction Machine Editor
For starting and braking purposes, also for the choice of a variable-speed motor, the torque curve (load torque) of the driven machine must be known as a function of the
speed. This is the mechanical load connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third order polynomial of the motor speed or by points of %slip
and %torque versus motor speed.
The third order equation is defined as follows:
T = A0 + A1ω + A2ω2 + A3ω3
Load Torque
None, Polynomial, or Curve
Selecting None indicates to ETAP that the load is not being modeled. Transient stability and motor acceleration analyses will not run without this model.
Selecting Polynomial or Curve will bring up the library quick pick from which you will be able to select a predefined model from the library.
Load Model Lib

You can access the motor load library data by clicking the Load Model Lib button and opening the library quick pick. Motor Load Library data can be obtained by
double-clicking the selection.
There are four basic torque curves valid for the following main applications:
1. Load Torque practically remains constant or power is directly proportional to speed. This is in the case of cranes, reciprocating pumps and compressors when
pumping against constant pressure, enclosed blowers, rolling mills, conveyors, mills without fans, machine tools with constant cutting force.
2. Load Torque rises proportionally with speed or power is proportional to square of speed.
3. Load Torque rises proportionally with square of speed and power rises with the cube of speed. This applies to centrifugal pumps, blowers, and reciprocating
machines feeding in an open tubing system
4. Load Torque falls in inverse proportion to speed and power remains constant. This applies in case of lathes, coilers and also for variable speed drives.
Acceleration Time (Static Starting)

Enter No Load (0% Loading) and Full Load (100% Loading) motor acceleration time in seconds.
ETAP uses these values along with the motor percent loading to calculate the acceleration time for static motor starting (that is, the motor will carry the full LRC for the
entire acceleration time). If the motor percent loading (Defined by the start category selected in the study case) is between 0 and 100%, ETAP interpolates to find the
acceleration time. If the motor percent loading is outside this range, ETAP extrapolates to find the acceleration time.
These parameters are ignored for dynamic motor starting and the motor model, load model, and inertia are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.
The Full Load Motor Acceleration Time is also used by Star when Constant Terminal Voltage is selected under the Motor Starting Curve in the Protection Page. Star
uses this time in conjunction with the rated locked rotor current to calculate and display the Starting Curve for this motor.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Starting Device Page - Induction Machine Editor

You can select one of thirteen types of motor starting devices from the Starting Dev page and specify the control scheme for the selected starting devices. ETAP
preserves starting device data for all the types you specified, so that you can experiment with and compare results for different types of starting devices. This allows you
to select the best device type to accomplish your task.
Type
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. ETAP provides the following starting device types:
Type Description
None No starting device
Auto-xfmr Auto-transformer
Stator Resistor Series resistor to the stator
Stator Reactor Series reactor to the stator
Capacitor, Bus Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Capacitor, Terminal Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal
Rotor Resistor Series resistor to the rotor
Rotor Reactor Series reactor to the rotor
Y/D Star - delta
Partial Winding Partial winding
Current Limit Soft starter – current limit
Current Control Soft starter – current control
Voltage Control Soft starter – voltage control
Torque Control Soft starter – torque control
There are thirteen types of motor starting devices from which you can select. The last four types (Current Limit, Current Control, Voltage Control, and Torque Control)
are commonly used control modes of soft starters. To model a soft starter, you can select any of these four types and specify a control scheme as needed.
A soft starter employs power semiconductors, such as thyristors, to regulate the voltage applied on the motor according to a predefined scheme. The purpose is to
reduce the current drawn by a starting motor so that it has a “soft” impact on system operation. A soft starter is normally a reduced voltage starter, being able to
decrease, not to increase, the voltage applied on the motor comparing to the cross-line motor starting. This behavior is also modeled in ETAP. When the control
scheme of a soft starter, such as a voltage starting, requires a voltage value that is larger than the bus voltage, the bus voltage will be applied on the motor, as if the soft
starter does not exist.
Current Limit
When the starting device type selected is either Voltage Control or Torque Control, this field will be enabled so that you can enter a Current Limit value in percent of
motor full load amperes. This current limit value will be applied, along with motor voltage control scheme or torque control scheme, to ensure that the actual voltage
applied on the motor will not result in a motor current larger than this value.
Control Scheme
You specify a control scheme in this group for the selected starting device type. The control scheme is a function of motor speed or time for most of the types, except
the Y/D, Partial Winding, and Current Limit types. When you specify a control scheme in multiple stages, ETAP will list the stages by motor speed or time, first with
all active stages and then followed by inactive stages.
You can add or remove a stage by clicking the Add, Insert, or Delete buttons. When you click the Add button, a new stage is added before the last one. When you click
the Insert button, a new stage is inserted before the selected stage. When you click the Delete button, the selected stage will be removed. Note that you cannot remove
the first or the last stages.
Active
Check to activate the setting for the device. When you uncheck this box for a stage, ETAP will not consider that stage in studies, but the data is still saved.
%Ws or Seconds
Select %Ws or Seconds as the variable based on which to specify the control scheme for your starter. When Speed is selected, it is in percent of synchronous motor
speed.
Setting
Enter the setting for a control stage of the starter. The setting type varies by the type of starter you selected. The table below indicates the setting type and the units:
Starter Setting and Unit

None
Auto-xfmr Tap in percent
Stator Resistor Tap in percent
Stator Reactor Tap in percent
Capacitor, Bus Capacitor at bus in kvar
Capacitor, Terminal Capacitor at motor terminal in kvar
Rotor Resistor Rotor external resistor in Ohm coverted to stator side
Rotor Reactor Rotor external reactor in Ohm converted to stator side
Y/D N/A
Partial Winding N/A
Current Limit Motor current in percent of FLA
Current Control Motor current in percent of FLA
Voltage Control Motor voltage in percent of rated voltage
Torque Control Motor torque in percent of rated torque
Note: The Ohm values for Rotor Resistor and Reactor starters are the values converted to the stator side based on the turn ratio of the stator and rotor windings.
Control Type
Select between Ramp and Fixed. If you select Fixed, the control variable will be fixed until the next setting becomes active. This type is used when defining a control
such as step starter.
If you select Ramp, the control variable will vary linearly from the setting in this stage to the setting in the next stage. This type is used when defining a continuously
controlled starter.
Note: The Control Type for the last stage is set as Remove and the Control Type for the stage before the last one can only be Fixed.
Switching Off Starting Devices

When a motor that employs a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed. In ETAP, the time to remove the starting device is specified in the
last stage of the control scheme. Depending on the option you selected, the starting device is removed at a specified speed or time.
In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off
time will be set equal to the acceleration time. This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or the acceleration
time, whichever is smaller.
However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time
specified by the user, regardless of whether it is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Waveform
Displays the control scheme of the starter device. Click the Print button to print the control scheme plot.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Starting Category Page - Induction Machine Editor

Select motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting motor starting categories tells ETAP which motor(s) to include in that starting category.
The starting categories can be easily selected from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories can be edited from Project Menu, under Settings and
Starting Categories.
Starting and Final % Loading

When a motor is started, in some cases such as a compressor, the motor is started with a reduced load until it reaches the final speed and then the load is increased to the
required operating level. Starting and Final percent loading fields provide modeling of this adjustment in the motor load.
When entering a loading percent in the Start or Final loading fields, the value is related to the option of Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Motor Starting or
Transient Stability Study Case as well as the load model curve selected for the motor.
Starting Load Option in Motor Starting Study Case
Considering the two load model curves given below, both curves have exactly the same shape, but the load percent values at synchronous speed are different in the two
models. In Model 1 it is less than 100% while in Model 2 it is equal to 100%. In the Motor Starting and Transient Stability studies, depending on the option selected for
the Starting Load of Acceleration Motors, the load model curve is applied differently.
If the Based on Motor Electrical Load option is selected, the load curve will first be adjusted by multiplying a constant factor so that at the synchronous speed the torque
is equal to 100% and then used in the calculation. This is assuming that the load torque curve only represents the shape of the load as a function of speed. When this
option is selected, load Model 1 and Model 2 given below will lead to the same results, since both models have the same shape. If the Based on Motor Mechanical Load
option is selected, the load curve will be used in the calculation as it is entered without any adjustments. Note that if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at
the synchronous speed, the two options will make no difference, since load torque adjustment for the option of Based on Motor Electrical Rating has no effect on the
load curve.
Motor Load Model Curves

Model 1: Load @ Rated Speed < 100% Model 2: Load @ Rated Speed = 100%
Due to the difference in the two options for Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the study case, the values in the Start and Final % Loading columns in the Start Cat
page may have different bases. If in the study case the option of Based on Motor Electrical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated output torque of the
motor. If the option of Based on Motor Mechanical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated output load torque described by the load curve. Please note that
if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two bases become the same.
For example, let’s consider a motor of rated output torque Tr and having a load curve described by Model 1 given above, which has a value of 80% at motor operating
speed. When you enter 90% as the Start %Loading for the motor,
Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Load Selected in Study Case:
Base for Start %Load = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load Selected in Study Case:
Base for Start %Load = Motor Load Torque @ Operating Speed * Tr
= 0.8* Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *0.8 * Tr = 0.72*Tr
Note that for the same motor, if load Curve Model 2 is selected instead, Case 1 and Case 2 will be the same. Notice that in Model 2 the load torque value is equal to
100% at motor operating speed.
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 1.0* Tr = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *1.0 * Tr = 0.9*Tr
In Transient Stability Studies, only the Start % loading is used. The first starting category is used if the start event is by a switching action in Transient Stability Studies.
Load Change Time

Specify the beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category in these fields. The Load Change Time is not used for Transient Stability
Studies.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable/Vd Page - Induction Machine Editor

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable and overload heater associated with this motor.
Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this motor. Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size,
Length, and unit are provided here for editing and displaying.
ID
To add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
For automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the equipment Cable Editor.
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this load.
Overload Heater
When there is an Overload Heater directly connected to the motor, ETAP displays the properties as shown in the image above under this group.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking on the OL Editor.
Heater resistance and % Tolerance are displayed in the group and will be used for voltage drop calculations, if selected heater is InI-line Type.TypeIf selected heater is
CT Type then the resistance and tolerance are ignored and below message is displayed as heater element is not within electrical path of current flow.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with motor terminal voltage (Vt) and starting voltage (Vst) are calculated and
displayed here for all loading categories. Vd, Vt, and Vst are displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vst
Vst represents the motor terminal voltage during starting conditions with the bus voltage fixed, i.e., it includes voltage drop across the equipment cable only.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this load is connected to, if any) is displayed here for reference.
Voltage Calculation for a Motor Directly Connected to a VFD

If this load is directly connected to a VFD, then the VFD output voltage, not the voltage of VFD input bus, determines load terminal voltage and voltage drop on the
equipment cable. Under this condition, the VFD rated output voltage is used for Vt, Vd, and Vst calculation. The calculated values are in percent of VFD output rated
voltage instead of the bus nominal kV.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
When you select this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
Use SF
When you select this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable Amp Page - Induction Machine Editor

Refer to the Ampacity/Capacity Page section of Chapter Cable Ampacity and Sizing for detailed information.
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Protection Page - Induction Machine Editor

This page contains options to plot the Motor Starting curves, Thermal Limit curves, as well as the Stator curve on a Star View.
Starting Curves – Constant Terminal Voltage
A motor starting curve can be plotted on a Star View for the purpose of determining overload settings for motor protection devices. Constant Terminal Voltage can be
used to plot the motor starting curve based on a constant voltage at the motor terminal. Multiple approximate motor starting curves can be created and used in this
section in the event that a motor acceleration study was not created.. In the %Vt fields, a constant 100% Vt is given with the option of two more %Vt fields that are
entered by the user. The curves can be plotted on the TCC by selecting the check boxes next to the %Vt fields. Star plots the acceleration times using the Acceleration
Time fields in the Starting Curve section.
Include Starting Device, OLH, & Equipment Cable
When this option is not selected, the motor starting curve is generated using the rated locked rotor current (from the Model page) and acceleration time with full load
connected (from the Load Model page). Any overload heater, equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is ignored.
When this option is selected, the motor starting curve is generated by recalculating the locked rotor current and acceleration time with full load connected (from the
Load Model page). Any overload heater, equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is considered. A starting device can be selected from the Start Dev
page.
Smooth Corners
Select this option to apply curve smoothing for the locked rotor to FLA transition period of the motor starting curve.
Starting Curve – Study
When a motor acceleration study has been performed for a motor (static start or dynamic acceleration), the current plot can be imported into the Star View to use as a
more accurate starting curve.
Select
Click the Select Study to view list of available output reports to import data from. In the event a motor has not been accelerated in a selected report then ETAP displays
an alert message as shown below.
If a motor has been accelerated in a selected report, ETAP displays detailed information about the output report as shown below.
Asymmetrical LRC
Asymmetrical LRC multiplier adjusts the locked rotor current with respect to the adjustment value in the editable drop-down list. Asymmetrical current decay to
symmetrical current is fixed at 0.1 seconds.
LRC Asymmetrical = Asymmetrical Factor * LRC adjustment
Thermal Limit Curve

Motor thermal limit curve is drawn based on the hot stall, cold stall time, and stator hot and cold or acceleration of the motor. Locked rotor current used to calculate the
thermal limit is always considered on base kV equal to motor rated kV for both the Constant Terminal Voltage and Motor Acceleration Study options.
Stall Time (Hot Start)
Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. Once that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and
may be damaged. This time is provided by the manufacturer of the motor based on tests on a motor that had been previously started and stopped while not at ambient
temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Hot Start.
Stall Time (Cold Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. When that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and
may get damaged. This time is given by the manufacturer of the motor based on tests for a motor that has not been started for duration of time and is at ambient
temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Cold Start.
Thermal Curve
Thermal curve defines the thermal limit curve for the stator. This time is provided by the motor manufacturer. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the
checkbox next to Stator Curve.
Thermal Curve Points

The Thermal curve can be specified in Amperes or as Multiplies of the motor FLA representing the stator hot and cold thermal limit curves for motor. The entered
points can also be used to represent the accelleration thermal limit curve.
Insert
Add
Delete
Induction Machine
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Impedance Page
Model Page
Inertia Page
Protection Page
Load Model Page
Start Dev. Page
Start Cat. Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from service. After the
actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, service is restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
MTTR
µ
This is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR (µ = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA ( MTTF = 1.0/λA).
FOR
It is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/λA).
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the load sector name (or customer type) for the load. In the reliability calculation, the user sector information is used to get interruption cost from the
Interruption / Outage Cost section of Sector Library to calculate Expected Interruption Cost.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Synchronous Motor Overview

You can enter the properties associated with synchronous motors of the electrical distribution system in this editor.
The Synchronous Motor Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Synchronous Motor
Info Page Start Cat. Page
Nameplate Page Starting Mode Page
Model Page Cable/Vd Page
LR Model Page Cable Amp Page
Inertia Page Protection Page
Exciter Page Reliability Page
Load Page Remarks Page
Start Dev. Page Comment Page
Info Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

Within the Info Page, specify the synchronous motor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name, Description, Data
type, Configuration Status, Quantity or number of synchronous motors, Phase Connection, and Demand Factor.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous motor. The assigned IDs consist of the default synchronous motor ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of synchronous motors increase. The default synchronous motor ID (Syn) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the
menu bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous motor. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a synchronous motor to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the synchronous motor resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or
in another composite network.
If a synchronous motor is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the synchronous motor to a new bus from this editor will
reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where Syn3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the synchronous motor(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box.
 Continuous -Continuously operating load

 Intermittent -Intermittently operating load
 Spare -Spare load (no short-circuit contribution)
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the motor is determined for load flow and motor starting studies.
Note: status is not a part of the motor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown, indicating the motor status under the
specific configuration, i.e., you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a motor is shown to be Continuous
under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Priority
Select the load priority of this motor from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are
provided to select from. The names of the priorities can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as estimate, typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is
updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types and you can change their name from the Project Menu under
Settings and Data Type.
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this synchronous motor. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options for phase connection include:
 3 Phase Three-phase machine

 1 Phase Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B or C.
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC or CA
Quantity
in the one-line diagram. View the explanations below to see how ETAP handles Quantity in Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Arc Flash, and Sequence-of-Operation.
Load Flow:
Short-Circuit:
In the following Short-Circuit Analysis Motor 1 is contributing 1.13kA to the system. Because Motor 1 has a quantity of three, that current is three times the current
that would be seen with a single motor. The load terminal fault current is shown as the current for each load.
Sequence-of-Operation
You cannot run Sequence-of-Operation if you have a Quantity greater than one. Sequence-of-Operation is not used to run simultaneous faults on loads.
Arc Flash
The Arc Flash Analysis Report shows the incident energy at the terminal of Motor 1 is equal to the incident energy of the terminal at each motor in the equivalent One-
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status in the provided entry fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually
operating. Demand factor affects the following calculations:
 Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

 Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Where the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified % Loading from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and 50%
loading.
Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since demand factors are a part of engineering properties, ETAP uses the
Synchronous Motor
Nameplate Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

You can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings), select Motor Library data, specify % loading, and display motor loading and feeder losses for all loading categories
in this page.
Ratings
HP/kW
Enter the motor output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following
equations for the nameplate parameters:

Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA / (√3 * kV ) 3-phase motors

= Rated kVA / kV Single phase motors
where the PF and Eff are at the full load condition (100% loading).
MVA/kVA
You can choose from these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button to display the motor rating in MVA or kVA, and the motor operating load and feeder
losses in (MW + j Mvar) or (kW + j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the motor in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for three-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the motor in amperes. This is the current the motor would pull from the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., operating at the rated HP
(or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency. When you modify FLA, the motor efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the
efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
Rated PF and Eff

Enter the power factor and efficiency at the rated Horsepower and kV. Based on these two values, the program will calculate the Full Load Amps (FLA) of this
machine. These values will not be used in any other calculation.
% PF (100%, 75%, 50%)

Enter the motor power factor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. . All three values of the power factors are used for determining the operating power factor of
the motor under different percent loading, i.e., when you change any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading categories are
recalculated.
The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. The values of power factor can range from -0.01% to -100% for synchronous motors operating at
leading power factors (over excited) and range from +0.01% to +100% for lagging power factor (under excited) operations. The following V-curve indicates a
synchronous motor with a rated (100% loading) power factor of 80% leading (-80%).
% Eff (100%, 75%, and 50%)
This is the efficiency of the motor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency,
therefore when the rated efficiency is changed; this field is updated to the same value. All three values of the efficiencies are used for determining the motor efficiency
under different percent loading, i.e., when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading categories are
recalculated.
SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. The service factor is not used for calculation of loading or feeder losses. ETAP gives you option to use the
service factor for voltage drop calculations of the motor feeder.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the motor is recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per minute).
SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. The service factor is not used for calculation of loading or feeder losses. ETAP gives you option to use the
service factor for voltage drop calculations of the motor feeder.
Library (Motor Nameplate)

Access the Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick Pick - Motor. Motor nameplate data can be obtained and
substituted from the library by highlighting and double-clicking on the selection. Library data include motor ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff, & Pole
(transferred to the Nameplate page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR PF, X”, X’, X, X2, X0, X/R, & Td’ (transferred to the Model page).
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this motor, i.e., each motor can be set to have a different operating loading
level for each loading category. To edit the values of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading or HP (kW) column. Note that you can
select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.
The loading value can be entered in percent or in HP (kW). When a new value is entered in one field, the other field will be calculated accordingly.
ETAP uses the specified percent loading of each loading category to calculate the operating power factor and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency
specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and efficiency. The
calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the operating kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses if an equipment cable with a
non-zero length is specified for this load. Note that although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and feeder losses, the value of the demand
factor is not used in determining the operating power factor and efficiency.
To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project Menu on the menu bar.
Operating Load
feature. When the operating load box is checked in the load flow study case editor, the calculation results are updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be
utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the element editor; however, this data
cannot be used in a later study.
Synchronous Motor
Model Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

This page includes the synchronous machine impedances and time constants.
Impedance
Xd”
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (machine base, saturated). This reactance is used for ANSI short-circuit studies.
Xd”/Ra
This is the armature X/R ratio (Xd”/Ra). For ANSI short-circuit studies, this value is used for both ½ cycle and 1½-4 cycle networks.
Ra (%)
This is the armature resistance in percent (machine base). May also be interpreted to be R1 to be consistent with R2 and R0.
Ra (Ohm)
This is the armature resistance in ohms.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for harmonic analysis, short-circuit, and unbalanced load flow studies.
X2/R2
This is the negative sequence X/R ratio.
R2 (%)
This is the negative sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R2 (Ohm)
This is the negative sequence resistance in ohms.
Xo
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for unbalanced faults under ANSI short-circuit studies.
X0/R0
This is the zero sequence X/R ratio.
R0 (%)
This is the zero sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R0 (Ohm)
This is the zero sequence resistance in ohms.
Rdc (%)
This is the stator winding DC resistance in percent (machine base), used for GOST short-circuit calculations.
Rdc (Ohm)
This is the stator winding DC resistance in ohms, used for GOST short-circuit calculations.
Xd” Tolerance
This is the direct-axis sub transient reactance tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the reactance values during short-circuit calculations. The Short-Circuit
module will use the negative tolerance value.
H
This displays the machine total inertia from the Inertia page.
Machine Type
Application
Select the application type for this synchronous motor. (Motor or condenser)
Rotor Type
 Round-Rotor – For machines that are made of round-rotor.

 Salient-Pole – For machines that are made of salient-pole.
IEC Exciter Type

Depending on the Rotor type, the IEC Exciter type is used for determining the λmax factor for generators in the calculation of steady-state short-circuit currents per IEC
Standard 909. λmax is proportional to µfmax, which takes different values based on exciter types as shown in the following table.
Rotor Type IEC Exciter Type µfmax

GOST Exciter Type

This selection list contains machine excitation types that are used for GOST Short-Circuit Studies. The list has four options:
 Thyristor Independent Excitation

 Thyristor Self-Excitation
 Diode Independent Excitation
 Diode Brushless Excitation
Note that this is currently not used in ETAP GOST calculations.
Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous machines. Except for Xd, Tdo’, which are also shared by IEC 61363 Short-Circuit
calculation, all of the parameters listed under Dynamic Model are used only for Transient Stability studies. Full descriptions of these variables are found in Chapter 24,
Dynamic Models.
Model Type
Model Type Description

None The machine will not be dynamically modeled in Transient Stability Study.
Equivalent A model that uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and quadrature-axis reactance.
Transient A more comprehensive model than the Equivalent model, including the machine’s saliency.
A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine, including both transient and subtransient
Subtransient
parameters.
Xd
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xdu
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xd’
This is the direct-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value). This is used for both motor starting and transient stability studies.
XL
This is the armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xqu
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xq’
This is the quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xq”
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Tdo’
This is the direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tdo”
This is the direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tqo’
This is the quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used for the equivalent model.
Tqo”
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used for the equivalent model.
Sbreak
This is the per unit of Vt at which the generator saturation curve skews from the air-gap line.
S100
S120
Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:
S100 = If100/If
S120 = If120/1.2 If
where:
I = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the air gap line (no saturation)
f
Damping
This is the shaft mechanical damping term, in percent, and MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed (% MW/Hz). Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10%
(long shaft).
A Note on the Synchronous Motor Excitation System

The excitation voltages for synchronous motors are assumed as constants for motors operating within the speed range of 50% to 110% of the synchronous speed. During
the transient, if a motor's speed goes out of this range, the frequency relay should trip off the contactor to disconnect the motor from the system and shut down the
excitation system simultaneously. Correspondingly, the program sets the excitation voltage to zero if this condition occurs.
A Note on Synchronous Motor Reactance Values

The saturated reactance values are required to enter in synchronous motor editor for general studies. For transient stability study, the reactance values will be adjusted
internally based on the motor saturation factors (S100, S120 and Sbreak) and the terminal voltage or air-gap voltage during simulation.
Synchronous Motor
LR Model Page - Synchronous Motor Editor
Locked-Rotor
%LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the rated full load current of the motor, as specified in the Nameplate page.
%PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent.
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
The motor grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and
Delta.
Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:

Amp Resistor or reactor rating in amperes for resistor or reactor grounded motors.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohmic Value)
where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by (3)1/2.
LR Model (Starting)
The locked-rotor (LR) model is used only for the purpose of starting (accelerating) synchronous motors. This model is not used for transient stability studies.
LR Model Library
Access Motor Model Library data by selecting the CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor locked-rotor model
data from the library can be obtained and transferred to the Motor Editor by selecting the Model Type (Single1, Single2, DBL1, or DBL2) and then highlighting a
design class and a model ID. The LR Model is only used for the dynamic starting of a synchronous motor.
After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the
following message to update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.
Characteristic Library
You can access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick -
Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library data (slip, torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting a model ID. When
you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor Model Library data, the library data is not transferred to the Motor Editor, .i.e., only a reference to the selected
library design class and model ID is kept with the motor. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run dynamic motor starting studies.
After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts
you with the message shown above to update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the selected library.
Print
This prints the torque, current, & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for the selected model (CKT or characteristic).
Synchronous Motor
Inertia Page - Synchronous Motor Editor
Motor, Coupling Gear, and Load RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the Motor, Coupling Gear and Load. ETAP calculates WR2 or H
when one of them is known and RPM has been entered based on the following equation:
or
Total RPM
The total RPM is equal to the Motor RPM.
Total WR2
Total H
Arithmetic sum of the Motor, Coupling and Load H in MW-sec/MVA.
Shaft Torsion
Select this option to consider torsion effect between motor, coupling gear and load during transient stability calculation.
D1
This is the damping constant between motor and coupling gear
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and load
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of motor and coupling gear
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and load
Synchronous Motor
Exciter Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

1 2 3 1S DC1 DC2 DC3 ST1 ST2 ST3
AC1 AC2 AC3 AC4 AC5A SR8F HPC Jeumont ST1D
AC8B AC1A UDM
This help section is concerned with the representation of the excitation systems and automatic voltage regulators (AVR) for synchronous motors.
The excitation and AVR systems for synchronous generators can be sophisticated. Complete modeling of these systems is usually necessary for Transient Stability
studies. The equivalent transfer functions used for the excitation and AVR systems and their variable/parameter names are either provided by exciter manufactures or in
accordance with the IEEE recommended types as found from the following references:
 IEEE Working Group Report, "Computer Representation of Excitation Systems", IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June
1968, pp.1460/1464
 IEEE Committee Report, "Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-100,
No. 2, February 1981, pp.494/509
 IEEE Std 421.5-1992, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992
In general, exciter manufacturers should be contacted to determine the applicability of the IEEE-type representations to their excitation systems.
Excitation/AVR Type
You can specify the excitation/AVR type by selecting one of the following models from the list box. Refer to Machine and Load Dynamic Models for details.
Type Description
1 Continuously Acting Regulator With Rotating Exciter System
2 Rotating Rectifier Exciter With Static Regulator System
3 Static System With Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
1S Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage
DC1 DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation
DC2 DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and Supplies from Terminal Voltage
DC3 DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation
ST1 Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter
ST2 Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
ST3 Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC1 Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and Field Current Feedback
AC2 High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non Controlled Rectifiers and Field Current Feedback
AC3 Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter
AC4 High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC5A Simplified Rotating Rectifier Exciter
SR8F Basler SR8F and SR125A Exciter
HPC HPC 840 AVR/Exciter Model
Jeumont Jeumont Industrie Excitation / AVR System
ST1D IEEE Type ST1D
AC8B IEEE Type AC8B
AC1A IEEE Type AC1A
Constant Excitation (i.e., no regulator action). This can be used for generators with constant excitation or when the machine voltage
Fixed
regulator is operating under PF or Mvar control.
UDM User Defined Dynamic Models
Some exciter types require that you select a control bus from the dropdown list that appears when they are specified.
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of exciter to provide a set of sample data for the selected exciter and AVR type.
Excitation System Symbols

The following are some common symbols used to define the parameters of the various excitation systems. For other exciter parameters not listed, please refer to the
Help Line for such parameters in the particular exciter parameter. In most cases, constants and gains are in per-unit and time constants are in seconds. The base voltage
for the excitation system is defined so that one per unit exciter voltage will produce rated generator voltage on the generator air-gap line.
Term Description
Efdmax = Maximum exciter output voltage (applied to generator field)
FEX = Rectifier loading factor
Ifd = Generator field current
IN = Normalized exciter load current
KA = Regulator gain
KB = Second stage regulator gain
KC = Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance
KD = Demagnetizing factor, function of exciter alternator reactances
KE = Exciter constant related to self-excited field
KF,KN = Regulator stabilizing circuit gains
KG = Inner loop feedback constant
KH = Exciter field current feedback gain
KI = Current circuit gain coefficient
KL = Gain of exciter field current limit
KLV = Gain of exciter low voltage limit signal
KP = Potential circuit gain coefficient
KR = Constant associated with regulator and alternator field power supply
KV = Fast raise/lower contact setting
SE = Exciter saturation function
TA, TB, TC = Regulator amplifier time constants
TE = Exciter time constant
TF = Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant
TF1,TF2 = Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants (rotating rectifier system)
TR = Regulator input filter time constant
TRH = Travel time of rheostat drive motor
VA = Regulator internal voltage
VERR = Voltage error signal
VG = Inner loop voltage feedback
VI = Internal signal within voltage regulator
VLR = Exciter field current limit reference
VLV = Exciter low voltage limit reference
VN = Rate feedback input variable
VR = Regulator output voltage
VR max = Maximum value of VR
VR min = Minimum value of VR
Vref = Regulator reference voltage setting
VRH = Field rheostat setting
Vt = Generator terminal voltage
Vthev = Voltage obtained by vector sum of potential and current signals, Type 3 system
XL = Reactance associated with potential source
HV Gate = High value gate: If A > B, C = A; if A < B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is output
LV Gate = Low value gate: If A < B, C = A; if A > B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is output
UDM Model
ETAP allows you to model your own Exciter through UDM (User Defined Models). Once you select the UDM model option, you can select a model from a list of pre-
defined UDM exciter models in the Model Type list.
UDM Editor
Clicking on the UDM Editor button brings up the UDM Graphic Logical Editor. From the editor, you can create, modify and compile a UDM model.
Synchronous Motor
Load Model Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

This is the mechanical load connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third order polynomial of the motor speed or by points of %slip and %
torque versus motor speed.
The third order equation is defined as follows:
T = A0 + A1ω + A2ω2 + A3ω3
Load Torque
None / Polynomial / Curve
Selecting none indicates to ETAP that the load is not being modeled. Transient Stability and Motor Acceleration will not run without this model.
Selecting Polynomial or Curve will bring up the library quick pick from which you will be able to select a model that was defined in the library.
Motor Load Library

Access Motor Load Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the library quick pick. Motor Load Library data can be obtained by highlighting and
double-clicking on the selection.
Acceleration Time (Static Starting)

Enter No Load (0% Loading) and Full Load (100% Loading) motor acceleration time in seconds.
ETAP uses these values along with the motor percent loading to calculate the acceleration time for static motor starting (that is, the motor will carry the full LRC for the
entire acceleration time). If the motor percent loading (Defined by the start category selected in the study case) is between 0 and 100%, ETAP interpolates to find the
acceleration time. If the motor percent loading is outside this range, ETAP extrapolates to find the acceleration time.
These parameters are ignored for dynamic motor starting and the motor model, load model, and inertia are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.
The Full Load Motor Acceleration Time is also used by Star when Constant Terminal Voltage is selected under the Motor Starting Curve in the Protection Page. Star
uses this time in conjunction with the rated locked rotor current to calculate and display the Starting Curve for this motor.
Synchronous Motor

Starting Device Page - Synchronous Motor Editor
From the Starting Dev page, you can select one of six types of motor starting devices and specify the control scheme for the selected starting devices. ETAP preserves
starting device data for all the types you have specified, so that you can experiment with and compare results for different types of starting devices and select the best
one to accomplish your task.
Starting Device
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. ETAP provides the following starting device types:
Type Description
None No starting device
Auto Xfmr Auto-transformer
Stator Resistor Series Resistor to the stator
Stator Reactor Series Reactor to the stator
Capacitor, Bus Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Capacitor, Terminal Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal
Partial Winding Partial Winding
Control Scheme
You can specify a control scheme for the selected starting device type in this group. The control scheme is a function of motor speed or time for most of the types,
except the Partial Winding type. When you specify a control scheme with multiple stages, ETAP will list the stages by motor speed or time, with the active stages first,
and then followed by inactive stages.
You can add or remove a stage by clicking the Add, Insert, or Delete button. When you click on the Add button, a new stage is added before the last one. When you
click on the Insert button, a new stage is inserted before the selected stage. When you click on the Delete button, the selected stage will be removed. Note that you
cannot remove the first and the last stages.
Active
Check this to activate the setting for the device. When you uncheck this box for a stage, ETAP will not consider that stage in studies, but the data is still saved.
%Ws / Seconds
Select %Ws or Seconds as the variable on which to base the control scheme for your starter. When Speed is selected, it is in percent of motor synchronous speed.
Setting
Enter the setting for a control stage of the starter. The setting type varies by the type of starter you selected. The table below indicates the setting type and the units:
Starter Setting
None
Auto Xfmr Tap in percent
Stator Resistor Tap in percent
Stator Reactor Tap in percent
Capacitor, Bus Capacitor at bus in kvar
Capacitor, Terminal Capacitor at motor terminal in kvar
Partial Winding N/A
Control Type
Select either Ramp or Fixed. If you select Fixed, the control variable will be fixed until the next setting becomes active. This type is used when defining a control such
as step starter.
If you select Ramp, the control variable will vary linearly from the setting in this stage to the setting in the next stage. This type is used when defining a continuously
controlled starter.
Note: The Control Type for the last stage is set as Remove and the Control Type for the stage before the last one can only be Fixed.
Switching Off of Starting Devices

When a motor that employs a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed. In ETAP, the time to remove the starting device is specified in the
last stage of the control scheme. Depending on the option you selected, the starting device is removed at a specified speed or time.
In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off
time will be set equal to the acceleration time. This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or the acceleration
time, whichever is smaller.
However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time
specified by the user, regardless of whether it is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Waveform
Displays the control scheme of the starter device. You can press the Print button to print the control scheme plot.
Synchronous Motor
Starting Cat Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

Select synchronous motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting synchronous motor starting categories tells ETAP which synchronous motor
(s) to include in that starting category. The starting categories can be easily selected from the Synchronous Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories
can be edited from the Project Menu, under Settings and Starting Categories.
Starting and Final % Loading
When a motor is started, in some cases such as a compressor, the motor is started with a reduced load until it reaches the final speed and then the load is increased to the
required operating level. Starting and Final percent loading fields provide modeling of this adjustment in the motor load.
When entering a loading percent in the Start or Final loading fields, the value is related to the option of Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Motor Starting or
Transient Stability Study Case as well as the load model curve selected for the motor.
Starting Load Option in Motor Starting Study Case
Considering the two load model curves given below, both curves have exactly the same shape, but the load percent values at synchronous speed are different in the two
models. In Model 1 it is less than 100% while in Model 2 it is equal to 100%. In the Motor Starting and Transient Stability studies, depending on the option selected for
the Starting Load of Acceleration Motors, the load model curve is applied differently.
If the Based on Motor Electrical Load option is selected, the load curve will first be adjusted by multiplying a constant factor so that at the synchronous speed the torque
is equal to 100% and then used in the calculation. This is assuming that the load torque curve only represents the shape of the load as a function of speed. When this
option is selected, load Model 1 and Model 2 given below will lead to the same results, since both models have the same shape. If the Based on Motor Mechanical Load
option is selected, the load curve will be used in the calculation as it is entered without any adjustments. Note that if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at
the synchronous speed, the two options will make no difference, since load torque adjustment for the option of Based on Motor Electrical Rating has no effect on the
load curve.
Motor Load Model Curves
Model 1: Load @ Rated Speed < 100% Model 2: Load @ Rated Speed = 100%
Due to the difference in the two options for Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the study case, the values in the Start and Final % Loading columns in the Start Cat
page may have different bases. If in the study case the option of Based on Motor Electrical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated output torque of the
motor. If the option of Based on Motor Mechanical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated output load torque described by the load curve. Please note that
if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two bases become the same.
For example, let’s consider a motor of rated output torque Tr and having a load curve described by Model 1 given above, which has a value of 80% at motor operating
speed. When you enter 90% as the Start %Loading for the motor,
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 0.8* Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *0.8 * Tr = 0.72*Tr
Note that for the same motor, if load Curve Model 2 is selected instead, Case 1 and Case 2 will be the same. Notice that in Model 2 the load torque value is equal to
100% at motor operating speed.
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 1.0* Tr = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *1.0 * Tr = 0.9*Tr
In Transient Stability Studies, only the Start % loading is used. The first Starting Category is used if the start event is by a switching action in Transient Stability
Studies.
Load Change Time

The beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category can be specified here.
The Load Change Time is not used for transient stability studies.
Synchronous Motor
Starting Mode Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

The parameters entered in this page are used only in the Transient Stability Analysis. In Motor Starting Analysis, the starting process of a synchronous motor is
simulated in the same way as an induction motor. That is, the field winding of a synchronous motor is shorted directly and the application of field excitation is not
simulated.
Discharge Resistance
Enter the field winding discharge resistor value in ohms in this field. This discharge resistor is first applied to short the field windings during acceleration of the
synchronous motor in transient stability analysis.
Apply Excitation
Once the motor has reached a sufficient speed, the discharge resistance is automatically removed and field excitation is applied to synchronize the motor speed with the
system speed. The exact value of discharge resistance and the time/speed of field excitation application should be entered according to the manufacture data. Users can
also enter them by trial and error to ensure that the motor can be started if there is no manufacture data available.
Excitation can be applied automatically by ETAP based on the following criteria:
Fixed Time
Enter the time in seconds after which, the field excitation will be applied to this motor.
Note: This time duration is counted from the time the motor acceleration action is given in the Transient Stability Study Case.
Motor Speed
Enter motor speed in seconds after which, the field excitation will be applied to this motor. ETAP continuously monitors the speed of the machine and once the speed
reaches the specified value, the excitation is switched on. Exciters can be selected from the Exciter page of the synchronous motor. Custom exciter models may be used
with the help of UDM Module.
Synchronous Motor
Cable/Vd Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable and overload heater associated with this motor.
Equipment Cable
This section provides capabilities for adding, deleting or editing the equipment cable for this motor. Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size,
ID
This field allows you to add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Cable Editor
This button brings up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
This field allows you to add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
For automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing Page of the equipment cable Editor.
Delete Cable
Overload Heater
When there is an Overload Heater directly connected to the motor, ETAP displays the properties as shown in the image above under this group.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking on the OL Editor.
Heater resistance and % Tolerance are displayed in the group and will be used for voltage drop calculations if selected heater is In-line Type. If selected heater is CT
Type then the resistance and tolerance are ignored and below message is displayed as heater element is not within electrical path of current flow.
Voltage Drop
Vst
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus this load is connected to, if any) is displayed here for reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
By selecting this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
Use SF
By selecting this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
Synchronous Motor
Cable Amp Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

Synchronous Motor
Protection Page - Synchronous Motor Editor

This page contains options to plot the Motor Starting curves, Thermal Limit curves, as well as the Stator curve on a Star View.
Starting Curves – Constant Terminal Voltage
A motor starting curve can be plotted on a Star View for the purpose of determining overload settings for motor protection devices. Constant Terminal Voltage can be
used to plot the motor starting curve based on a constant voltage at the motor terminal. Multiple approximate motor starting curves can be created and used in this
section in the event that a motor acceleration study was not created. In the %Vt fields, a constant 100% Vt is given with the option of two more %Vt fields that are
entered by the user. The curves can be plotted on the TCC by selecting the check boxes next to the %Vt fields. Star plots the acceleration times using the Acceleration
Time fields in the Starting Curve section.
Include Starting Device, OLH & Equipment Cable
When this option is unchecked, the motor starting curve is generated using the rated locked rotor current (from the Model Page) and acceleration time with full load
connected (Load Model Page). Any overload heater, equipment cable and starting device connected to this motor are ignored.
When this option is checked, the motor starting curve is generated by recalculating the locked rotor current and acceleration time with full load connected (Load Model
Page). Any overload heater, equipment cable and starting device connected to this motor are considered. A starting device can be selected from the Start Dev Page.
Smooth Corners
Click to apply curve smoothing for locked rotor to FLA transition period of motor starting curve.
Starting Curve – Study
When a motor acceleration study has been performed for a motor (static start or dynamic acceleration), the current plot can be imported into the Star View to use as a
more accurate starting curve.
Select
Click the Select Study to view list of available output reports to import data from. In the event a motor has not been accelerated in a selected report then ETAP displays
an alert message as shown below.
If a motor has been accelerated in a selected report, ETAP displays detailed information about the output report as shown below.
Reference kV
Star will plot the TCC curve based on the Calculated Base kV or the User-Defined kV in reference to the Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system-calculated Base kV value at the connected bus to the element. The value will be updated when Short-Circuit Update
is performed from Star Mode.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-Defined option allows the user to enter the base kV value.
Asymmetrical LRC
Asymmetrical LRC multiplier adjusts the locked rotor current with respect to the adjustment value in the editable drop down list. Asymmetrical current decay to
symmetrical current is fixed at 0.1 seconds.
LRC Asymmetrical = LRC Symmetrical * LRC adjustment
Thermal Limit Curve

Motor thermal limit curve is drawn based on the hot stall, cold stall time, and stator hot and cold or acceleration of the motor. Locked rotor current used to calculate the
thermal limit is always considered on base kV equal to motor rated kV for both the Constant Terminal Voltage and Motor Acceleration Study options.
Stall Time (Hot Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. Once that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and
may be damaged. This time is provided by the manufacturer of the motor based on tests on a motor that had been previously started and stopped while not at ambient
temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Hot Start.
Stall Time (Cold Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. When that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and
may get damaged. This time is given by the manufacturer of the motor based on tests for a motor that has not been started for a duration of time and is at ambient
temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Cold Start.
Thermal Curve
Thermal curve defines the thermal limit curve for the stator. This time is provided by the motor manufacturer. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the
checkbox next to Stator Curve.
Thermal Curve Points

The Thermal curve can be specified in Amperes or as Multiplies of the motor FLA representing the stator hot and cold thermal limit curves for motor. The entered
points can also be used to represent the accelleration thermal limit curve.
Insert
Add
Delete
Synchronous Motor
Reliability Page
λA
MTTR
µ
MTTF
FOR
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Synchronous Motor
Lumped Load Overview

The properties associated with lumped loads can be entered in this editor. The Lumped Load Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Dyn Model Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Lumped Load Editor

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each lumped load. The assigned IDs consist of the default lumped load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of lumped loads increase. The default lumped load ID (Lump) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System
Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the lumped load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect
a lumped load to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only
connect to buses that reside in the same view where the lumped load resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite
network.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the lumped load for the selected configuration status from the list box.
 Continuous - Continuously operating load

 Intermittent - Intermittently operating load
 Spare - Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the lumped load is determined for load flow and motor starting studies.
Note that status is not a part of the lumped load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the lumped
load to indicate that this is the lumped load status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a lumped load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is
updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types, which can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings
and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this lumped load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different
priorities are provided to select from. Names of the priorities can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Load Type
Select to identify the load type. Select to choose if the lumped load is a HVAC load or other.
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this lumped load. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options for phase connection include:

Demand Factor
You can modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the load is
actually operating. Demand factor affects the following calculations:
 Operating kW = Rated kW * % Loading * Demand Factor

 Operating kvar = Rated kvar * % Loading * Demand Factor
Demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since demand factors are a part of engineering properties, ETAP uses the
Reference kV
Calculated
User-Defined
Lumped Load
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Dyn Model Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Nameplate Page - Lumped Load Editor

The Nameplate Page of the Lumped Load Editor allows for the specification of rating and loading. Since the Lumped Load is designed to model a combination of
different loads into one, several model types are available for accomplishing this task.
Model Type
The following models are available through the drop down list:
Conventional Exponential
Comprehensive
Unbalanced Polynomial
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the lumped load in kV.
Based on the Model Type, the rest of the page is adjusted to accommodate the parameters required for each model.
Conventional Load Model
Ratings
Click on the MVA/kVA button to choose from MVA and kVA units for entering and displaying MVA/kVA, MW/kW, and Mvar/kvar data.
ETAP uses the following equations to calculate kVA, kW, kvar, PF, Amps, and kV when one of the variables is changed:
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the lumped load in kV.
Amps
Enter the lumped load line rated current in amperes.
%PF
This is the power factor of the lumped load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of the power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading
power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging and -80% indicates leading.
Motor/Static load
Select the percent motor and static loading of the lumped load by shifting the slider position.
When the lumped load is connected below a VFD, the reactance of the static loading will be adjusted linearly based on the VFD operating frequency while the
resistance of the static loading will keep constant in calculations. The adjustment of the static loading will change the power factor of the total loading. The calculated
total loading will be displayed in the VFD editor loading page.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this lumped load, i.e., each lumped load can be set to have a different
operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Note: you can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.
Operating Load
Operating Load can be updated from the Load Flow Study Case Editor. The operating load option is available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Real-Time
System) feature. When the operating load box is checked in the load flow study case editor, the calculation results are updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they
can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the element editor; however, this
data cannot be used in a later study.
Unbalanced Load Model

The Unbalanced Load Model is used to model unbalanced loading for three different types:
Motor Load, Static Load, and Constant Current Load.

Ratings
kVA, kW, kvar, %PF, and Amp.
 For Delta Connected load, you can specify the Line-to-Line (AB, BC, CA) Ratings of the total connected load.
 For Wye- Solid Connected Load, you can specify the Phase A, B, C Ratings of the total connected load
Motor/Static Load
% Motor Load, % Static Load, and % Current Load
Specify the Motor Load and Static Load of the Lumped Load. ETAP automatically calculates the % current load by subtracting the %motor plus static load from 100%.
Loading
When Unbalanced Load is selected, the Motor Load, Static Load, and Constant Current Load kW and kvar are calculated based on the %Loading entered for the
category.
Select Loading Category from the Project Menu to edit the loading category names.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow or Unbalanced Load Flow, ETAP updates this field with the total per phase resultant load.
Exponential Load Model

The Exponential model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and reactive power components of the load:
where P and Q are active and reactive components when the bus voltage magnitude is V and where Δf is the frequency deviation (f – fo)/fo.
Ratings
P0
This is the initial operating real power in MW / kW.
Q0
This is the initial operating reactive power in Mvar / kvar.
a, b
These exponents define the characteristic of the load as follows:
0 = Constant Power
1 = Constant Current
2 = Constant Impedance
Kpf,
This is the real power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf
This is the reactive power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between –2.0 to 0
Loading
When Exponetial Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on the %Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
After running Load Flow, ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load.
Polynomial Load Model
The Polynomial model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and reactive power components of the load:
where P and Q are the real and reactive components of the load when the bus voltage magnitude is V and where Δf is the frequency deviation (f – fo)/ fo.
Ratings
P0
Q0
p1, q1, p2, q2, p3, q3

The polynomial model is composed of constant impedance, constant current, and constant power components. Each portion is defined by these constants respectively.
Kpf,
This is the real power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf
This is the reactive power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between –2.0 to 0
Loading
When Polynomial Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on the %Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load.
Comprehensive Load Model
The Comprehensive model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and reactive power components of the load:
Where:
The expression for the reactive component of the load has a similar structure. The reactive power compensation associated with the load is represented separately.
Ratings
P0
Q0
p1, q1, p2, q2, p3, q3, p4, q4, p5, q5

The Comprehensive model is composed of Polynomial and Exponential components. These constants define the constant impedance, constant current, constant power,
and exponential components of the load.
Kpf1, Kpf2
These are real power equation constants. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf1, Kqf2
These are reactive power equation constants. This constant typically ranges between –2.0 to 0
Loading
When Comprehensive Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on the %Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load after running Load Flow.
Lumped Load
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Dyn Model Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Short-Circuit Page - Lumped Load Editor

Enter the short-circuit parameters for the motor load portion of the lumped load here.
Note: All data in this page is based on the motor percentage of the total lumped load rating.
Short-Circuit Contribution
LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the motor load share of the lumped load current. For example, a lumped load with 120 amperes at 80% motor loading will
have a motor current of 96 amperes; therefore, at 600% LRC, the actual LRC will be 576 amperes (600% * 96 A).
Short-circuit contribution levels are defined individually for ANSI and IEC methods.
ANSI method short-circuit contributions are categorized per the following table:
Short-Circuit
Low Voltage ( ≤ 1000 Volts) High Voltage ( > 1000 Volts)
Contribution
High Large (100 < HP < 250) Large ( HP > 1000)
Medium Medium (50 ≤ HP ≤ 100) Medium (250 ≤ HP ≤ 1000)
Low Small ( HP < 50) Small (HP < 250)
IEC method short-circuit contribution are categorized per the following table.
Short-Circuit Contribution HP Speed

High Large High RPM
Medium Medium Intermittent RPM
Low Small Low RPM
% Total Load
For Converntional and Unbalanced loads, this fields is equal to the total motor load in percent. For Exponential, Polynomial, and Comprehensive, ETAP will utilize P0
and Q0 times the value specified in this field as the total load for consideration in the short-circuit calculations.
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the lumped motor.
Connection
The grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Type
For Wye-connected lumped motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:
 Open Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded).

 Solid Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path.
 Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.
 Reactor A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path.
Amp Rating
For resistor or reactor grounded lumped motor, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage) / (Resistor Ohmic Value)
where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by √3.
X/R Ratio
X/R
Lumped motor’s X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra)
Typical
If Typical is selected, typical X/R value will be substituted in the X/R field.
ANSI Short-Circuit
Std MF / Xsc
If you select Std MF, ETAP uses the following ANSI Multiplying Factors for calculating the positive sequence short-circuit impedances. If you select the Xsc option,
you can directly enter the short-circuit impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base. Note that the IEC Short-Circuit Method does not use these impedances.
Low Voltage (1000 Volts and below)

Short-Circuit Xsc Xsc
Contribution ½ cycle 1.5-4 cycle
High
1.2/LRC 3.0/LRC
< 250 HP
Medium 1.435/LRC infinity
Low
1.67/LRC infinity
< 50 HP
High Voltage (Above 1000V)

Short-Circuit Xsc Xsc
Contribution ½ cycle 1.5-4 cycle
High
1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
> 1000 HP
Medium 1.1/LRC 2.25/LRC

Low
1.2/LRC 3.0/LRC
< 250 HP
IEC Short-Circuit
X”
This is the motor subtransient reactance in percent (machine base)
MW/PP
This is the Rated active power in MW per pair of poles for the constant KVA portion of lump load.
Td'
This is the motor transient time constant in seconds; this value is used in the IEC 61363 method.
Td’ = X” / (2π f Rr) (Rr = rotor resistance)
Lumped Load
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Dyn Model Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Dynamic Model Page - Lumped Load Editor

From the Dynamic page, you can specify a model used in Transient Stability Analysis to a lump load. You may specify parameters of a build-in equivalent induction
motor, or select a predefined User-Defined Model (UDM).
Build-in Model
Dynamic Power-frequency relationship for an induction motor
The build-in dynamic model provides a means to establish a dependency of real power absorbed by the motor on the frequency of the power system.
This dependency is of the following form:
Ta
This is the inertia constant of the lump load dynamic model in seconds.
γ
This is the lump load power coefficient in MW/RPM.
UDM Model
ETAP allows you to have your own lump load dynamic model through UDM (User Defined Models). Once you select the UDM model option, you can select a model
from a list of pre-defined UDM models in the model list.
UDM Editor
Clicking on the UDM Editor button brings up the UDM Graphic Logical Editor. From the editor, you can create, modify and compile a UDM model.
Lumped Load
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Dyn Model Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Time Domain Page - Lumped Load Editor

The Time Domain page allows you to specify the data type of the lumped load used in Time Domain Unbalanced Load Flow calculation. The available time domain
data types include Fixed Category / Constant, Sector, External Data, and Composite Sector
This is a default option for a device, which means loading category in loading page of study case is used in calculation just like Unbalanced Load Flow.
Sector
This option specify a sector profile for lumped load to use in load flow calculation. Sector was set in Sector Library before using. For details on profile and
sector library, refer to Section 58.8.1 – Profile Library and Section 58.8.2 – Sector Library.
If this option is selected, the Multi-Year Forecasting section is shown for user to specify the Energize date, Out of Service date and Growth Curve.
 Energize: when did/will this lumped load be in service.
 Out of Service: when did/will this lumped load be out of service.
 Growth Curve: select the multi-year Growth Curve for this lumped load. The Growth Curves were set in Sector Library before using. By default the
Growth Curve is left as blank, meaning no Growth Curve is selected.
External Data
This option allows user to use an External Data file as data entry for the lumped load. When External Data type is selected, the data in an excel sheet with the
For examples of external data format, refer to Section 58.8.3 - External Data.
Data Gap Options

Composite Sector
This option allows users to select a composite sector from the pull-down menu. The composite sectors should be set in Sector Library, with the Sector Type
“Composite”. Composite sector can be combinations of multiple single sectors.
Lumped Load
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Dyn Model Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
It is the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary
protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from service. After the actively failed
component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that
the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
MTTR
It is the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
µ
It is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR (µ = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
It is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA ( MTTF = 1.0/λA).
FOR
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
It is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Library
No of Loads
It is the number of loads (customers) represented by a lump load. This number is used to calculate number of customer interrupted under a fault.
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Lumped Load
Info Page
Nameplate Page
Short-Circuit Page
Dyn Model Page
Time Domain Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Motor Operated Valve Overview (MOV)

The properties associated with a motor operated valve (MOV) can be entered in this editor.
The MOV Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Motor Operated Value (MOV)

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Motor Operated Valve Editor

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each MOV. The assigned IDs consist of the default MOV ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as
the number of MOVs increase. The default MOV ID (MOV) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the MOV. Connection for MOV is identical to that of induction motors. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry
will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an MOV to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new
connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the MOV resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
Initial Status
Select the initial status of the MOV for the selected configuration from the list box.
 Open MOV is initially in an open position

 Close MOV is initially in a closed position
 Throttle Throttle or jog control (provides flow control to achieve a desired valve position)
 Spare Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the MOV is determined for load flow and motor starting studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the MOV engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown, indicating the MOV status under a specific
configuration, i.e., you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status of an MOV is shown to be continuous under
Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Priority
Select the load priority of this MOV from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are
provided to select from. Priorities may be chosen from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as estimate, typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is
updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types where you can change their name from the Project Menu
under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this MOV. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options for phase connection include:

Quantity
Load Flow:
Short-Circuit:
Arc Flash
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for the Closing, Opening, Throttling, and Spare status in the provided entry fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually
 Operating kW = kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

 Operating kvar = kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
kVA, PF, and RF are the normal operating values.

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Nameplate Page - Motor Operated Valve Editor
HP/kW
Enter the MOV rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equations for the
nameplate parameters:

Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA / (√3 * kV ) 3-phase motors

= Rated kVA / kV Single phase motors
where the PF and Eff are at full load condition (100% loading).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the MOV in kV. This is the line-to-line voltage for three-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the MOV in amperes. This is the current which the MOV would pull from the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system
is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency. When you modify FLA, the efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of
FLA in such a way that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
PF
Enter the MOV rated power factor in percent at full loading.
Eff
This is the efficiency of the MOV in percent at full loading.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the MOV is recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per minute).
Rated T
Enter the MOV rated torque (optional) in lb.-ft. or N-M.
Library
Access Motor Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick Pick - Motor. MOV nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from
the library by highlighting and double-clicking on the selection. Library data includes MOV ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff, & Pole (transferred to the
Nameplate Page).
Hammer Blow
Check this box if the MOV is provided with the hammer blow feature. If the hammer blow feature is unchecked, the full speed stage (no load) stage is skipped (tnl = 0).
Micro Switch
Check this box if a micro switch is used to control the operation of the MOV. The limit switch controls the MOV by interrupting power to the motor contactor when the
valve actuator has completed its preset number of revolutions. If the micro switch feature is selected, the stall stage is skipped. For each operating stage, the
corresponding current, PF, and time should be specified.
Characteristics
%Current/Current
Toggle between %Current (percent of the rated current) or Current (in amperes). You can choose from these two options by clicking on this button. Enter the
corresponding value for each specified operating stage.
PF
Enter the MOV power factor in percent for the specified operating stage.
Time
Enter the time duration in seconds for the specified operating stage.
The characteristics of the MOV are defined in terms of the various operating stages of the valve. The following operating stages are provided based on the MOV’s
initial status (open, close, throttle, and spare) and selected features (micro switch and/or hammer blow).
 Start
 Full Speed
 Travel
 Seated or Unseated
 Stall
MOVs that are initially in the Open status travel the following stages based on the selected features. Note that without the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is
set to zero value. Also, if a micro switch is used, the stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.
The following stages are provided for a MOV which is initially in the Close status. Note that without the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is set to a zero
value. Also, if a micro switch is used, the stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.
For MOVs with throttle control, only the travel stage is displayed.

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Loading Page - Motor Operated Valve Editor

This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this MOV, i.e., each motor can be set to have a different operating loading
level for each loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Note: You can select any of these loading categories when conducting load flow and motor starting studies.
Operating Load

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Start Cat Page - Motor Operated Valve Editor

ETAP allows you to specify which MOV are included in a given starting category. The starting categories can be selected from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor.
The starting categories can be edited from the Project Menu under Settings and Starting Categories. Note that starting categories are particularly useful for group
starting motors as opposed to specifying individual motors to start.
%Voltage Limit
Start
Enter the MOV voltage limit for normal operation, in percent of the MOV rated kV. If the MOV terminal voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will maintain
current drawn to %LRC for the duration of the voltage limit violation for MOV start period.
Seating/Unseating
Enter the MOV voltage limit for normal operation, in percent of the MOV rated kV. If the MOV terminal voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will switch current
drawn to %LRC for the duration of the voltage limit violation during Seating or Unseating period.
Travel
Enter the MOV voltage limit for normal operation, in percent of the MOV rated kV. If the MOV terminal voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will switch current
drawn to %LRC for the duration of the voltage limit violation during travel period.
Frequency Correction Factor (used only by Transient Stability)

Start / Seating/Unseating/Travel Frequency Correction Factors
Enter the MOV voltage limit frequency correction factor. The values which can be entered are 0 to 5 where 0 is the default (a value of zero causes a multiplier factor of
1 and thus it has no effect). The frequency correction factor equation is described below:
Where the VLimit values are the voltage limits for each stage. The “Freq” (frequency) is the terminal bus frequency and k is the frequency correction factor.

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable/Vd Page - Motor Operated Valve Editor

Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this motor. Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size,
ID
To add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Library
To add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Sizing
For automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the equipment Cable Editor.
Delete
Overload Heater
When an Overload Heater is directly connected to the MOV, ETAP displays the properties as shown in the example figure above.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking the OL Editor button.
Voltage Drop
Vst
Vbus
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
By selecting this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage drop calculations.

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable Amp Page - Motor Operated Valve Editor

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
MTTR
µ
MTTF
FOR
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector

Info Page
Nameplate Page
Loading Page
Start Cat Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Static Load Editor Overview

The properties associated with static loads of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
The Static Load Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Static Load
Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Static Load Editor

You can specify the static load ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration
Status, Quantity or number of static loads, Phase connection, and Demand Factor within the Info page.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each static load. The assigned IDs consist of the default static load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of static loads increase. The default static load ID (Load) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System
Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the static load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a
static load to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only
connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite
network.
If a static load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the static load to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the static load for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options for operating status include:
 Continuous Continuously operating load

 Intermittent Intermittently operating load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the motor is determined for load flow and motor starting studies.
Note: status is not a part of the static load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the static load to
indicate that this is the static load status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following
example, status of a static load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is
updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types which can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings
and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of the static load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities
are provided to select from. Names of the priorities can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Load Type
Select to identify the load type. Select from the list to choose a specific type of load for information and identification.
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the static load. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options for phase connection include:

Quantity
Load Flow:
Short-Circuit:
Arc Flash
Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually

Static Load
Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Loading Page - Static Load Editor

Ratings
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the static load in kV. If this static load is a three-phase load, kV is the line-to-line voltage. For single-phase loads, kV load rated voltage must
be consistent with the way this load is connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A and neutral, then the rated
voltage of the load must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A and phase B, then the
rated voltage of the load must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
MVA/kVA Button
PF = kW / kVA Negative PF means leading PF
MVA/kVA
Enter the rated apparent power of the static load in MVA or kVA.
MW/kW
Enter the rated real power of the static load in MW or kW.
Mvar/kvar
Enter the rated reactive power of the static load in Mvar or kvar. To specify a capacitor, enter 0.0 for MW and a negative value for the Mvar field.
%PF
This is the power factor of the static load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of the power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading
power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging and -80% indicates leading.
Amps
Enter the static load rated current in amperes.
Calculator
ETAP Power Calculator is set up to calculate complex power, power factor, and current. The following equations are used to calculate these variables:
To use the calculator, select the variable units as kVA or MVA, and change one of the variables. For example, if kW is changed and the value of the kvar is changed,
new values of kVA, %PF, and Amp (if kV is specified) will be calculated. If the value of PF is changed, new values of kvar and kVA are calculated.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for this static load, i.e., each static load can have a different operating loading level
for each loading category. To edit the values of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Note: You can select any of these loading categories when conducting Load Flow and Motor Starting Studies.
ETAP uses the specified percent loading of each loading category to calculate the operating power factor and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency
specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and efficiency. The
calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the operating kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses, if an equipment cable with a
non-zero length is specified for this load. Note: although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and feeder losses, the value of the demand factor
is not used in determining the operating power factor and efficiency.
Operating Load
Static Load
Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable/Vd Page - Static Load Editor

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable and overload heater associated with this static load.
Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this load. Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size,
Length, and Unit are provided here for editing and displaying.
ID
To add a cable to a static load, select and retrieve the cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Editor
This button brings up the equipment cable Editor.
Library
To add an equipment cable to a static load, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Sizing
For automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing Page of the equipment Cable Editor.
Delete
Overload Heater
When an Overload Heater is directly connected to the Static load, ETAP displays the properties as shown in the example figure above.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking the OL Editor button.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with static load terminal voltage (Vt), are calculated and displayed here for all loading
categories. Both Vd and Vt are displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vbus
Vd Calculation
By selecting this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for voltage drop calculations.
Static Load
Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable Amp Page - Static Load Editor

Static Load
Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Time Domain Page - Static Load Editor

The Time Domain page allows you to specify the data type of the static load used in Time Domain Unbalanced Load Flow calculation. The available time domain data
types include Fixed Category / Constant, Sector, External Data, and Composite Sector.
This is a default option for a device, which means loading category in loading page of study case is used in calculation just like Unbalanced Load Flow.
Sector
This option specify a sector profile for static load to use in load flow calculation. Sector was set in Sector Library before using. For details on profile and sector
library, refer to Section 58.8.1 – Profile Library and Section 58.8.2 – Sector Library.
 Energize: when did/will this static load be in service.
 Out of Service: when did/will this static load be out of service.
External Data
This option allows user to use an External Data file as data entry for the static load. When External Data type is selected, the data in an excel sheet with the
For examples of external data format, refer to Section 58.8.3 - External Data.
Data Gap Options

Composite Sector
This option allows users to select a composite sector from the pull-down menu. The composite sectors should be set in Sector Library, with the Sector Type
“Composite”. Composite sector can be combinations of multiple single sectors.
Static Load
Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
MTTR
µ
MTTF
FOR
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Static Load
Info Page
Loading Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Time Domain Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Capacitor Editor Overview

The properties associated with a shunt capacitor can be entered in this editor.
The Capacitor Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Capacitor
Info Page
Rating Page
Switching Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Capacitor Editor

Specify the capacitor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status,
Phase connection, and Demand Factor within the Info page.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each capacitor. The assigned IDs consist of the default capacitor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of capacitors increase. The default capacitor ID (CAP) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the capacitor. Connection for capacitors is identical to that of static loads. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a capacitor to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new
connection after you click on OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the capacitor resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next ot the bus ID for your convenience.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the capacitor for the selected configuration status from the list box.

 Switched Switched capacitor mode
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the capacitor is determined for Load Slow and Motor Starting Studies.
When Switched is selected, the capacitor control function is enabled. And the demand factor is not applicable in this case.
Note: Status is not a part of the capacitor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the capacitor to
indicate that this is the device status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following
example, status of a capacitor is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the capacitor. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options for phase connection include:

Demand factor
Modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually

Demand factor is not applicable for switched capacitors.
Capacitor
Info Page
Rating Page
Switching Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Capacitor Editor

Ratings
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the capacitor in kV. If this capacitor load is a three-phase load, kV is the line-to-line voltage. For a single-phase capacitor, kV rated voltage
must be consistent with the way this capacitor is connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected between phase A and
neutral, then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected between
phase A and phase B (AB), then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
Max. kV
Enter the maximum rated voltage of the capacitor in kV. Typically this value is 110% of capacitor rated kV.
kvar/bank
Enter the capacitor reactive power per bank. This reactive power is the capacitive var to the system.
# of Banks
Enter the number of capacitor banks. ETAP automatically calculates the total kvar based on the kvar/bank and # of banks.
Mvar=(Mvar/Bank) × (# of Banks)
kvar=(kvar/Bank) × (# of Banks)
kvar/bank # × kvar Option

Select the option to choose from kvar and Bank # × kvar for displaying on one-line diagram.
Mvar/kvar Button
Click on the Mvar/kvar button to choose from Mvar and kvar units for entering and displaying Mvar/kvar data.
ETAP calculates and displays the amps and capacitor reactance as well as the capacitor size in microfarads. The following equations are used to calculate these
variables:
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for the capacitor, i.e., each capacitor can have a different operating loading level for
each loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note: You can select any of these
loading categories when conducting Load Slow and Motor Starting Studies.
Capacitor
Info Page
Rating Page
Switching Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Switching Page - Capacitor Editor

This page is used to specify the control logic of this capacitor. The page shows only when Status in Info Page is selected as Switched.
Control Mode
Control Mode
Select a control mode from the drop-down list. Voltage, Power Factor, Current and Reactive Power are available. The default selection is voltage.
Unit
You can toggle between different units by clicking on the unit button. Enter the control limits in the selected unit. Unit options are available as follows:
Voltage: % and Volt

Power Factor: %
Current: Amp
Reactive Power: Mvar, kvar and var
Switch Out
Enter the limit for switching capacitor banks offline.
Switch In
Enter the limit for switching capacitor banks online.
Upper Band
Enter the upper band limit threshold. This is the band for Switch Out option. Note that this field is applicable only for modules considering time delay
including Motor Starting, Transient Stability and Railway Traction Power.
Lower Band
Enter the lower band limit threshold. This is the band for Switch In option. Note that this field is applicable only for modules considering time delay including
Motor Starting, Transient Stability and Railway Traction Power.
Control variables are at From side of the controlled branches for Power Factor, Current and Reactive Power Control. Power factor and reactive power limits
can be positive or negative. For current control mode, current magnitude absolute value is the control variable.
# of Banks/Step
Enter the number of banks switched at each step. The last step might have less banks than this value. For example, the capacitor has five banks in total, with
two banks online initially. To switch rest of the banks in, the first step includes two banks, while the next step will be only one bank.
Capacitor loading category is used as the initial condition. Bus diversity factor is not applicable for switched capacitors. The rated value of capacitor is used
for short circuit based studies, single phase systems and systems under panel in load flow study without switching action.
Control Logic
Device Type
Select the device type to be controlled. Types of device included in the project will be in the list. Device types are available as follows:
Control Mode Device Type

Voltage Bus
Power Factor
Cable Line
Current
Impedance Reactor
Reactive Power
Device ID
Select ID of the device to be controlled.
Time Delay
Open Initial Time
Enter the switch out initial time delay in seconds. This is the time duration from the moment when the control variable goes outside and stays outside the
control band to the time when the controller triggers the first step change.
Open Operating Time

Enter the switch out operating time delay in seconds. This is the time duration that the capacitor takes to complete a step change.
Close Initial Time

Enter the switch in initial time delay in seconds. This is the time duration from the moment when the control variable goes outside and stays outside the
control band to the time when the controller triggers the first step change.
Close Operating Time
Enter the switch in operating time delay in seconds. This is the time duration that the capacitor takes to complete a step change.
The initial delay time starts counting whenever the control variable goes into the orange region if the initial delay time has not started already. The initial
delay time is reset whenever the control variable is entering the white region or jumps to the other side of the violation region.
After the initial delay time, if the control variable is not in the white region, a signal is issued to switching one step. The action is implemented after the
operating time. If at this time the control variable is still outside the white region, a new switching signal is issued. The process continues until either the
control variable returns to the white region or all steps are switched.
Capacitor
Info Page
Rating Page
Switching Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable/Vd Page - Capacitor Editor

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable associated with this capacitor.
Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this capacitor. Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase,
Size, Length, and Unit are provided here for editing and displaying.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for the capacitor, i.e., each capacitor can have a different operating loading level for
each loading category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note: You can select any of these
loading categories when conducting Load Slow and Motor Starting Studies.
ID
You can add a cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button brings up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
To set up automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the equipment Cable Editor.
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this capacitor.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable, along with capacitor terminal voltage (Vt) are calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Both Vd
and Vt are displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the rated kV of the capacitor.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this capacitor is connected to, if any) is displayed here for reference.
Vd Calculation
By selecting this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for voltage drop calculations.
Capacitor
Info Page
Rating Page
Switching Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Cable Amp Page - Capacitor Editor

Capacitor
Info Page
Rating Page
Switching Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
MTTR
µ
MTTF
FOR
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Capacitor
Info Page
Rating Page
Switching Page
Cable/Vd Page
Cable Amp Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Power Panel System Editor Overview

You can enter the properties associated with panel schedule of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor. Every panel and subpanel can have
unlimited circuits. Each circuit can be comprised of a load, protective device, and/or a feeder. Circuits are displayed in the panel editor in standard or column layout.
ETAP's Power Panel provides spreadsheet and graphical representations of the panel loads. The graphical panel provides a quick review
of loads via the one line diagram.
The Panel Schedule Editor contains six pages of properties.
Info page, Rating page, Schedule page, Summary page, Remarks page, and Comment page.
Within the Schedule page, there are five tabs: Description tab, Rating tab, Loading tab, Protective Device tab, and Feeder tab
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Lock / Unlock
For details on Panel Schedule, refer to Chapter Panel Systems
Harmonic Filter Overview

The Harmonic Filter Editor contains the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Parameter Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
In addition, a Harmonic Filter Sizing Editor is available through the Parameter page.
Info Page - Harmonic Filter Editor

You can specify the harmonic filter ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type,
Configuration Status, and Phase connection within the Info page.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each harmonic filter. The assigned IDs consist of the default filter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of filters increase. The default filter ID (HF) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the harmonic filter. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a harmonic filter to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that
you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a harmonic filter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the harmonic filter to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last
existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
Select the operating status of the harmonic filter for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options for operating status include:

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the filter is determined for load flow, motor starting, and transient stability
studies.
Note that status is not a part of the harmonic filter engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the harmonic
filter to indicate that this is the harmonic filter status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a harmonic filter is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the list box. As the
data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types which can be specified from the Project
Menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of the static load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different
priorities are provided to select from. Names of the priorities can be specified from the Project Menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock
Connection
Grounding
Specify the grounding connection type of harmonic filter. Y grounded connected filters are considered as solidly grounded.
Harmonic Filter
Info Page
Parameter Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Harmonic Filter Sizing
Parameter Page - Harmonic Editor

Within the Parameter Page, specify the filter type, its parameters and grounding connection. For the Single-Tuned filter, you also can use the filter sizing facility to
automatically size the filter.
Filter Type
Choose a pre-defined filter type from the dropdown list. Four types of filter structures are available.
By-Pass
A filter type that has by-pass frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Damped)
A filter type that has high-pass with damped frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Undamped)
A filter type that has high-pass with undamped frequency characteristic high-pass undamped filter.
Single-Tuned
A filter type that has a single tuned frequency point.
3rd Order Damped

Special high-pass damped filter where the inductance is replaced with a series LC Circuit to provide zero losses at the fundamental frequency and therefore avoiding
parallel resonance.
3rd Order C-Type

Special high-pass undamped filter where the inductance is replaced with a series LC Circuit to provide zero losses at the fundamental frequency and therefore avoiding
parallel resonance.
Capacitor C1
kvar
this is 1-phase kvar for capacitor C1.
Rated kV
This is rated kV in rms for capacitors C1.
Max. kV
This is maximum kV in rms for capacitor C1.
In ETAP it is assumed that a harmonic filter is installed on a single phase. Therefore the capacitor parameter value for kvar needs to be entered as single-phase. Since
the harmonic filter may have a Wye or Delta connection, the rated kV needs to be entered accordingly. For example, if a harmonic filter has a Wye connection and it is
connected to a 3-phase bus, then, the rated kV to be entered should be VL-L/√3 (or if Delta connection then VL-L). Refer to the following examples for details.
Case 1: Wye Connection.
For demonstration purposes a harmonic filter with capacitor parameters only is used. It has a Wye connection and it is connected to a 3-phase bus with a nominal kV =
4.16 kV. Note that the rated kV = 2.4 kV. Since each phase should provide 100 kvars, the load flow calculation shows that the 3 phases should provide about 300 kvars.
Case 2: Delta Connection
Same harmonic filter is used with Delta connection and rated kV = 4.16 kV. Note that the load flow calculation shows similar results for the harmonic filter (about 300
kvars.)
Capacitor C2
kvar
This is 1-phase kvar for capacitor C2.
Rated kV
This is rated kV in rms for capacitors C2.
Max. kV
This the maximum kV in rms for capacitor C2.
Inductor L1
XL1
This is XL1 in ohms for inductor L1.
Q Factor
This is the Q factor (XL1/RL1) for inductor L1.
Max. I
This is the maximum I in rms for inductor L1.
Inductor L2
XL2
This is the XL2 in ohms for inductor L2.
Q Factor
This is the Q factor (XL2/RL2) for inductor L2.
Max. I
This is the maximum I in rms for inductor L2.
Resistor
This is the external resistance of the filter in ohms.
Resistor R
This is the external resistance of the filter in ohms.
Sizing Button
When single-tuned is specified as the filter type, click on this button to activate Harmonic Filter Sizing editor.
Harmonic Filter
Info Page
Parameter Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
MTTR
µ
MTTF
FOR
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Harmonic Filter
Info Page
Parameter Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Harmonic Info
Harmonic Order
Use this filed to specify a harmonic order for sizing the filter.
Harmonic Current
Use this field to provide harmonic current for the specified harmonic order in amps.
Include Filter Overloading

Click on this check box to include filter overloading checking. Filter ratings that will be checked are the capacitor maximum peak voltage and inductance maximum rms
current.
Sizing Option
Click one of the buttons to define the filter sizing criteria per the following:
PF Correction
Size the filter based on the power factor correction criteria.
Minimize Initial Cost

Size the filter based on minimal initial cost.
Minimize Operating Cost

Size the filter based on minimal operating cost.
Initial Installation Cost

Specify the initial installation costs for the capacitor and inductor.
Capacitor
Use this field to enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the capacitor.
Inductor
Use this field to enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the inductor.
Operating Cost
Specify the operating cost for the capacitor.
Capacitor Loss Factor

Enter the capacitor loss factor in percent of the capacitor total rating in this field.
PF Correction
Use this area to specify system operating conditions. These values are used only if PF Correction is selected as sizing option.
Existing PF
Enter the existing PF in percent for the load connected to the filter terminal bus in this field.
Desired PF
Enter the desired PF in percent after the filter is installed on the filter terminal bus in this field.
Load MVA
Enter the 1-phase load MVA on the filter terminal bus in this field.
Size Filter Button

Click on this button to size the filter based on the selections and data entered.
Substitute Button
Click on this button to substitute the calculated parameters (results) back to the Harmonic Filter Parameter page.
Result
This area displays results from the sizing calculation.
1-Phase kvar
This is the filter 1-phase capacitor kvar.
Xl
This is the impedance of XL1 in ohm/phase.
Vc
This is the arithmetic sum (ASUM) of the fundamental kV and the tuned harmonic kV in rms, using the sized filter parameters.
IL
This is the computed inductor current (rms amps) using the sized filter parameters.
Harmonic Filter
Info Page
Parameter Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Remote Connector
The Remote Connector is a tool that allows two or more distinct elements to be connected to each other, while located in separate areas of the One-Line Diagram. The
Remote Connector Editor contains one page of information–the Info page. Section Editing the Remote Connector illustrates how the Remote Connector is used in the
One-Line Diagram.
Info Page
Editing the Remote Connector
Info Page - Remote Connector

The Info Page displays the Remote Connector ID, Protective Devices, and Elements connected to Side 1 and Side 2 of the Remote Connector.
Remote Connector
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Remote Connector. The assigned IDs consist of the default Remote Connector ID (CL) plus an integer, starting with
the number one and increasing as the number of connectors increase.
Side Connection (Side 1 and Side 2)

This displays the IDs of the Protective Device and Element connected to each side of the Remote Connector.
Protective Device
This displays the ID of the Protective Device connected to each side of the Remote Connector.
Element
This displays the ID of the Element connected to each Side of the Remote Connector.
Remote Connector
Info Page
Using Remote Connectors

When using the Remote Connector, the following tips are helpful to remember:
 The Remote Connector is composed of two sides, Side 1 and Side 2

 Each side can be located in a different area of the One-Line Diagram
 When one side is deleted, the other end of the Remote Connector is also deleted, and cannot be recovered from the system Dumpster.
 Right click on either Side 1 or Side 2 of a Remote Connector and select Find Other End, to locate the other side of the connector
 Double-clicking on one end of the remote connector will prompt ETAP to find the corresponding end
Copying the Remote Connector to a Composite Network

The Remote Connector can be used inside Composite Networks. To copy one side of the Remote Connector to a Composite Network, follow these steps:
Remote Connector ends in Composite Networks

The Remote Connector can be used inside Composite Networks. To copy one side of the Remote Connector to a Composite Network, follow these steps:
 Select the Remote Connector from the Toolbar, and place it in the One-Line Diagram
 Double click on the Composite Network you wish to copy one side of the Remote Connector to. The Composite Network window must be open.
 Press and hold the <Shift> key, click on one side of the Remote Connector then drag it to its new location inside the open Composite Network. Release the cursor
and key to place the connector.
 Add Elements to each side of the connector.
Remote Connector in the One-Line Diagram

Instrumentation Element Connections
In ETAP 18 and higher, remote connectors can be used to make connections between instrumentation elements such as Relays, Meters, CTs (Current Transformers) and
PTs (Potential Transformers). This flexibility simplifies tangled relay and meter connections even allowing them to be made between composite networks.
Remote Connector Insert & Delete (ETAP 19.0 and higher)
Insert on existing connection line
When a remote connector is dropped directly on an existing connector line it will automatically place each remote end adjacent to the originally connected elements
including those nested within composite networks.
Delete and automatically reconnect
When any remote connector end is deleted (or cut), the elements it previously connected will be reconnected through a direct connection line.
Remote Connector
Info Page
Phase Adapter - Overview

The Phase Adapter is a tool that allows a 1-phase element to be connected to a 3-phase bus. The Phase Adapter Editor contains the following pages of information.
Info Page
Load Page
Equivalent Load Page
The 1-phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter cannot be directly connected to a 1-phase load. It must first be connected to a transformer. The figure in Section
Phase Adapter in the One-Line Diagram illustrates how a Phase Adapter is used in the One-Line Diagram.
Phase Adapter
Info Page
Load Page
Phase Adapter in the One-Line Diagram
Phase Adapter in System Studies
Info Page - Phase Adapter Editor

Specify the Phase Adapter ID, In/Out of Service, 3-Phase Primary Side Bus ID, Phase Connection, 1-Phase Secondary Side Element ID, 1-Phase Feeder
Name/Description, Configuration and Status within the Info page.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Phase Adapter. The assigned IDs consist of the default Phase
Adapter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of adapters increase. The default Phase Adapter ID (PA) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Primary Side
Bus ID
This displays the ID and the voltage of the 3-Phase Bus (or AB, BC, and CA phase bus) that the Primary Side of the Phase Adapter is connected to.
Secondary Side
Element ID
This displays the ID of the element connected to the 1-Phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter.
Phase Connection
This allows for the selection of a specific phase for the 1-Phase output from the Phase Adapter to the load. The choices are: Phase A, B, C, AB, AC, and BC.
Each of these selections is uniquely color-coded.
Feeder
Name
Use this field to specify a customized name to the Phase Adapter, which differs from the ID.
Description
Use the field to specify a unique description for the Phase Adapter.
Configuration
Normal
Select the operating status of the Phase Adapter from the list below:
 Close - Provides a continuous connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.
 Open - Provides no connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.
Note: Status is not a part of the Phase Adapter’s engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration is shown above the actual status of the Phase
Adapter to indicate that this is the Phase Adapter status under the specific configuration.
Phase Adapter
Info Page
Load Page
Load Page - Phase Adapter Editor

The Load page displays information about the characteristics of the load connected to the Phase Adapter.
The following information is displayed within the Load page: Phase Adapter Primary 3-phase voltage, Total Connected Load kW and kvar, Total Operating Load kW
and kvar. The Loading Category can be chosen from the Loading Category list box.
3-Phase Voltage
This field displays the nominal voltage level of the bus that the Phase Adapter Primary Side is connected to.
Total Connected Load

Constant Power and Constant Impedance
This field displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total amount of load that is connected to the Phase Adapter.
Total Operating Load

Constant Power and Constant Impedance
This field displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total operating load amount that is connected to the Phase Adapter.
Loading Category
This pull-down list allows the user to select the Loading Category condition for the Total Operating load connected to the Phase Adapter.
Phase Adapter
Info Page
Load Page
Equivalent Load Page - Phase Adapter Editor

The Equivalent Load page shows parameters used for ETAP Power System Management System (PSMS) applications. This page is hidden is your ETAP license does
not include the PSMS capability.
Rated Connected Load

The rated connected load of a phase adapter can be summed-up from down-stream connected load or entered by the user. The rated load serves as the base for the
operating load in the Equivalent Load section.
Constant Power/Impedance kW/kvar Load

When the Sum option is selected, these fields display the rated connected constant power and constant impedance load of the phase adapter. When the User-Defined
option is selected, these fields become editable, allowing the user to specify rated load for the phase adapter.
Sum & Update

When the Sum option is selected, the rated load of the phase adapter will be calculated based on the rating of down-stream connected loads when the Update button is
clicked.
User-Defined
When the User-Defined option is selected, the fields for rated load will editable for the user to enter rated connected load of the phase adapter.
Equivalent Load
This section allows the user to specify load percent for each loading category and ETAP will calculate phase adapter load based on the rated connected load and the
loading percent.
%Load
Enter loading percent for the loading category. Once a new value is entered, the phase adapter load for the category will be calculated.
Phase Adapter
Info Page
Load Page
Phase Adapter
Info Page
Load Page

This section describes how the single-phase feeders are considered in system studies. In the current version of ETAP, the downstream elements from a single-phase
feeder are not considered in details in a system study. Instead, all the loads connected downstream from the single-phase feeder are summed up to the single-phase
feeder.
Load Flow Type System Studies And Reliability Study

The load flow type system studies are the ones that require to perform load flow calculations, including load flow, motor starting, harmonic load flow, transient stability,
optimal power flow. In these studies as well as reliability study, the downstream loads connected to a single-phase feeder are aggregated to get the total load. And this
single-phase feeder is considered as a single load in the system studies.
Radial System
In order to sum up load for a top panel, in the current version of ETAP, It is required that the system powered by a single-phase feeder must be a radial system. It is not
allowed for downstream elements from a single-phase feeder to form any loops. Furthermore, the single-phase feeder must be the only source for all the downstream
elements. Before carrying out a system study, ETAP checks if loops are involved in any single-phase feeders. If a loop is detected, an error message will be displayed
and the calculation is stopped.
Top Panel Load

The load aggregated to a single-phase feeder includes all downstream loads. Since downstream connections may involve any elements except three-winding
transformers, utilities, and generators, it can form a full radial system. In summing up the load for the single-phase feeder, ETAP considers all the loads connected.
Because no load flow calculations are conducted, the load summation does not include losses on the branches and equipment cables.
The aggregated load values are displayed in the Single-Phase Feeder Editor. Depending on the study case options, appropriate load diversity factors can also be applied.
Short-Circuit Type System Studies
In the current version of ETAP, it is assumed that single-phase feeders do not make any short-circuit contributions to any fault occurred in the system.
Phase Adapter
Info Page
Load Page
Grounding/Earthing Adapter
Note: In order for the Earthing types to be displayed, the Earthing Type determination option needs to be enabled. This can be done by going to the Tools drop down
menu and then selecting Options (Preferences). In the Cable Sizing section, set the “Earthing Type determination for Grounding/PE Sizing” option to True. For more
details refer to section Automatic Earthing Type Detection of Chapter System Grounding.
Having the “Earthing Type determination for Grounding/PE Sizing” option set to False, the Earthing type display fields will be hidden as shown on the image below:
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Phase Adapter. The assigned IDs consist of the default Phase
Adapter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of adapters increase. The default Phase Adapter ID (PA) can be changed from the
Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Primary Side
Bus ID
This displays the ID and the voltage of the 3-Phase Bus that the Primary Side of the Phase Adapter is connected to.
Earthing Type
This displays the grounding type of the upstream connected bus. If the bus does not contain a grounding type, this field is hidden.
Secondary Side
Element ID
This displays the ID of the element connected to the 1-Phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter.
Earthing Type
Select a system earthing type to switch to. The available earthing types are listed based on the system grounding type.
The following table lists the earthing type associated with the grounding types
Grounding Type Earthing method

Ungrounded IT type of the primary
Grounded TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S, TT, and NEC
For more information regarding Grounding System, Earthing types and definitions, refer to Chapter System Grounding.
Feeder
Name
Use this field to specify a customized name to the Grounding/Earthing Adapter, which differs from the ID.
Description
Use the field to specify a unique description for the Grounding/Earthing Adapter.
Grounded
Check this checkbox if the load side is solid grounded.
Enter the resistance to ground/earth in Ohms. This value is for the inclusion of the local grounding in electric shock protection calculation.
Static Var Compensator (SVC) Overview

The properties associated with High-Voltage Static Var Compensators (SVCs) can be entered in this editor.
The SVC editor includes the following pages of properties:
Static Var Comp (SVC)

Info Page
Rating Page
Model Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Static Var Compensator Editor
Info
ID
This is a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each SVC. The assigned IDs consist of the default SVC ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as
the number of SVC increase. The default SVC ID (SVC) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the SVC. Connection for SVC is identical to that of static loads. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be
shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a SVC to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after
you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the SVC resides. In other words, you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next to the Bus ID.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Enter a feeder tag number, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter an equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter an equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Data Type
This field provides a way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this
field can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten data types. To modify them, navigate to the Project menu, point to Settings and select
Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of the SVC from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are
provided. To modify the names of the priorities, navigate to the Project menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
Lock / Unlock

Info Page
Rating Page
Model Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Static Var Compensator Editor

The rating page defines the control region of the Static Var Compensator (SVC).
Voltage Rating
kV
This is the rated Voltage of the SVC in kV.
Vmax
This is the maximum voltage in percent of rated voltage. This value is used to calculate the maximum current of the SVC.
Vmin
This is the minimum voltage in percent of rated voltage. This value is used to calculate the minimum current of the SVC.
Vref
This is the voltage setting as a percentage of rated voltage. When the SVC is in control range, the SVC will maintain this voltage at its terminal.
Inductive Rating
These are the ratings of the inductive component of the SVC.
QL
The rated inductive reactive power in Mvar.
IL
The rated inductive current in kA.
BL
The rated inductive susceptance in Siemens.
Capacitive Rating
These are the ratings of the capacitive component of the SVC.
Qc
This is the rated capacitive reactive power in Mvars.
Ic
This is the rated capacitive current in kA.
Bc
This is the rated capacitive susceptance in Siemens.
Max Inductive Rating and Slope

QLMax
This is the maximum inductive reactive power in Mvars.
ILMax
This is the maximum inductive reactive current in Amps.
SLL
This is the slope of the operating terminal voltage in the inductive region.
Max Capacitive Rating and Slope

Qc Max
Maximum capacitive reactive power in Mvars.
Ic Max
Maximum capacitive reactive current in Amps.
SLC
Slope of the operating terminal voltage in the capacitive region.

Info Page
Rating Page
Model Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Static Var Compensator Models

The Static Var Compensator Control model can be accessed from the Static Var Editor, Model page. It is imperative to model this control when performing Transient
Stability Studies to determine the dynamic response of the SVC under different conditions.
ETAP contains the following SVC control models:
 Type1
 Type2
 Type3
See the Dynamic Models Chapter for more details.

Info Page
Rating Page
Model Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Harmonic Page - Static Var Compensator Editor

The Harmonic Page of the SVC allows you to specify the generation of Harmonics of this device.
Harmonic Library
Select this option to define the content of Harmonics of this device by selecting a model from the device. Notice when this option is selected the Harmonic Library
group is activated while the parameters group becomes gray out.
IEEE 519 Equation

Select this option to define the content of Harmonics of this device by the pulse level and the rectifier injection angle of the device. Notice when this option is selected
the Harmonic Library group is grayed out while the parameters group becomes active.
Library
This group displays the properties of the library selected such as type, manufacturer, and model.
Parameters
Pulse #
Select the Thyristor pulse modulation. This selection has a direct impact on the modeling of the harmonic generation of the SVC.
Shift Angle
Enter the transformer shift phase angle. ETAP enters the standard shift angles for different pulse modulation when the pulse number is selected:
Pulse Shift Angle

12 30°
24 15°
48 7.5°
For 6 Pulse, the phase shift is not taken in consideration for the harmonic generation model.
Alpha
Enter the Advance angle in degrees.
Xc%
Enter the commutation reactance in percent of the device rating.
Max Order
Maximum Harmonic order to be modeled.

Info Page
Rating Page
Model Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
MTTR
µ
MTTF
FOR
MR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library

Info Page
Rating Page
Model Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
High Voltage DC Link (DC Transmission Line) Overview

The properties associated with High-Voltage DC Link (HVDC) can be entered in this editor.
The HVDC editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Rectifier Control Page
Inverter Control Page
AC Control Page
Shut-Restart Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - High Voltage DC Link

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC Links. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as
the number of DC Links increase. The default transformer ID (DC_LINK) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
FromBus, ToBus
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC Link are designated as From Bus and To Bus. If the DC Link is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus
ID. To connect or reconnect a DC Link to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the DC Link resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a DC Link is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC Link to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last
existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Next to the From Bus, To Bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses for your convenience.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the feeder tag number in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Click to lock / unlock the editor properties of the current element. When the editor properties are locked, all engineering data is displayed as read-only expect
High Voltage DC Link

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - High Voltage DC Link

The DC Link model includes the following components which ratings can be defined in the Rating page of the DC Link Editor.
Rectifier (Input)
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the input of the rectifier in kilovolts. Note that this is the DC Link rectifier rated AC voltage at the secondary of rectifier transformer.
Hz
Enter the rated input frequency of the rectifier in Hertz.
Rectifier Transformer
Prim & Sec kV
Enter the primary and secondary voltage ratings of the rectifier transformer in kilovolts. Prim. kV refers to the AC system side. ETAP will use the voltage ratio to
calculate the DC voltage output of the rectifier.
MVA
Enter the MVA Rating of the rectifier transformer. This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance calculation.
Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage.
Xc
Enter the rectifier transformer reactance in percentage based on rectifier transformer rated MVA and Sec kV.
Tap Setting
Click on this button to specify the Max%, Min%, and Step% settings of the rectifier transformer tap in the Transformer Tap Setting dialog box.
Inverter (Output)
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the output of the inverter in kilovolts. Note that this is the DC Link inverter rated AC voltage at the secondary of inverter transformer.
Hz
Enter the rated output frequency of the inverter in Hertz.
Inverter Transformer
Prim & Sec kV
Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the inverter transformer in kilovolts. Prim. kV refers to the AC system side. ETAP will use the voltage ratio to calculate
the DC voltage output of the inverter.
MVA
Enter the MVA Rating of the inverter transformer. This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance calculation.
Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage.
Xc
Enter the inverter transformer reactance in percentage based on inverter transformer rated MVA and Sec kV.
Tap Setting
Click on this button to specify the Max%, Min%, and Step% settings of the inverter transformer tap in the Transformer Tap Setting dialog box.
DC Link
# of Bridges
Enter the number of bridges series
Configuration
Select a configuration type for the DC Link. The selections available are Bipolar, Monopolar, and Homopolar.
Resistance
Enter the total DC resistance of the DC Link in ohms.
Rating
Imax
Enter the maximum DC current rating in percent.
Vdc
Enter the DC voltage rating of the DC Link. This rating can be determined using the following equation:
Idc
Enter the DC current rating in kiloamps.
Pdc
Enter the DC power rating of the DC Link in megawatts.
Min Alpha
Enter the minimum rectifier ingnition angle in degrees.
Max Alpha
Enter the maximum rectifier ingnition angle in degrees.
Min Gamma
Enter the minimum inverter extintion angle in degrees.
Max Gamma
Enter the maximum inverter extintion angle in degrees.
Operating
ETAP updates the Vdc, Idc, Pdc, Alpha, and Gamma results in this group.

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rectifier Control Page - High Voltage DC Link

The Rectifier Control model can be accessed from the DC Link editor, Rectifier Control page. It is imperative to model this control when performing transient stability
studies to determine the dynamic response of the DC Link under different conditions.
ETAP contains the following control models for Rectifier Controller:
 Current Controller
 Alpha Controller
 Voltage-Dependent Current-Order Limiter (VDCOL)
Note: Contact OTI for information on the usage of this page.

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Inverter Control Page - High Voltage DC Link

The Inverter Control model can be accessed from the DC Link editor, Inverter Control page. It is imperative to model this control when performing transient stability
studies to determine the dynamic response of the DC Link under different conditions.
ETAP contains the following control models for Inverter Controller:
 Current Controller
 Gamma Controller
 Auxiliary Controller

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
AC Control Page - High Voltage DC Link

The AC Control model can be accessed from the DC Link editor, AC Control page. When AC controller is selected, the AC controller under different conditions when
performing transient stability studies will affect the dynamic response of the DC Link.
ETAP contains the following modulation types for AC Controller:
Current Modulation
Control Model: Type 1
Voltage Modulation
Power Modulation

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Shutdown-Restart Control Page - High Voltage DC Link

The DC Link Shutdown and Restart model can be accessed from the DC Link editor, Shut-Restart Control page. In transient stability studies this model determines the
dynamic response of the DC Link under shutdown and restart conditions.
ETAP contains model Type 1 for Shut-Restart Control.

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Harmonic-Rectifier Page - High Voltage DC Link

The Harm-Rect model can be accessed from the DC Link editor, Harm-Rect Control page.

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Harmonic-Inverter Page - High Voltage DC Link

The Harm-Inv model can be accessed from the DC Link editor, Harm Inv page.

Info Page
Rating Page
AC Control Page
Harm-Rect Page
Harm-Inv Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Composite Motors Overview

AC Composite Motor
AC Composite Motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the AC System.
DC Composite Motor
DC Composite Motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the DC System.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
AC Composite Motors
Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors in the system. The elements that you can include inside a composite motor are:
Induction Motors Single Throw Switches

Synchronous Motors Instrument Transformers (Current)
Static Loads Instrument Transformers (Potential)
Lumped Loads Overcurrent Relays
MOVs Frequency Relays
Capacitors Voltage Relays
Harmonic Filters In-Line Overload Relay
LV Circuit Breakers Voltmeters
HV Circuit Breakers Ammeters
Contactors Mulit-Meters
Overload Heaters Uninterruptable Power Supply
Reclosers Variable Frequency Drive
Fuses AC Composite Motors
The number of levels that you can nest composite motors inside composite motors is unlimited. Other than the limitation on the types of elements that you can include
inside a composite motor, the user interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as the one-line diagram.
To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the composite motor and double-click on the background where
there are no elements
To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
DC Composite Motors
Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements that you can include inside a DC composite motor are:
DC Motors
DC Loads (Static, Lumped, & Elementary Diagram)
Circuit Breakers, Fuses, & ST Switches
DC Composite Motors
The number of levels that you can nest composite motors inside composite motors is unlimited. Other than the limitation on the types of elements that you can include
inside a composite motor, the user interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as the one-line diagram.
To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the composite motor and double-click on the background where
there are no elements.
To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Composite Networks
You can consider a composite network an aggregation of all components in a subsystem since it can contain buses, branches, loads, sources, and even other composite
networks or composite motors. You can nest your subsystems to an unlimited number of layers. This allows you to construct systems and nest them by their order of
importance, by physical layout, by the geometrical requirements of elements, by study requirements, by relays and control device requirements, by logical layout of
elements, etc. You have full control as to how the system should be nested.
You may place composite networks anywhere on a one-line diagram or within other composite networks. These nested composite networks are part of the overall one-
line diagram of the system. All studies that are run include all the elements and connections nested within all composite networks and composite motors.
Composite Networks (ETAP 2.0 and Prior Release)

Composite networks in ETAP 2.0.8 and earlier versions have four entry points (pins). These are top pin, left pin, right pin, and bottom pin. Externally, these pins can
only be connected to buses (directly or through protective devices). They represent the connecting points of the composite network to the outside. Internally, these pins
cannot be directly connected to buses, i.e., they can be connected to branches, motors, fuses, etc.
The bus-like element seen in the composite network is the starting point for the composite network (internal pin). This element graphically represents the connecting
point of the composite network to the outside system. This connecting point is not considered as a bus for the studies.
When you open a composite network for the first time, all four pins are shown in their relative positions. You can move these internal pins anywhere inside the
composite network. If there is an external connection to a pin, the ID of the connected bus is displayed. If there is no external bus connection, the pins indicate No Ext
Bus. If there is an external bus connection, the bus ID is displayed.
Old Composite Network1 with top pin connected to bus Sub3
Composite Networks (ETAP PowerStation 3.0 to ETAP 12.6.5)

These composite networks are available in ETAP 3.0 or later versions. The new composite networks can have up to 20 pins. The default number of pins is 4 and can be
change from the right mouse click as shown below.
Changing number of pins
You can hide the unconnected pins inside a composite motor by using the right mouse click as shown below.
Hiding unconnected pins
The pins for the new composite motors can be connected to any bus, branch, load, or protective device. Once a pin is connected internally or externally to an element, it
becomes a proxy for that element and all connection rules for the element apply to the connected pin.
Composite network connections
ETAP does not automatically convert the old composite networks to the new type. This can be done by first cutting all elements from the old composite network, and
then use the "Move From Dumpster" command to place them in a new composite network.
The number of levels that you can nest composite networks inside composite networks is unlimited. There is no limitation on the elements that you can include inside a
composite network, i.e., the user interface characteristics of composite networks are the same as the one-line diagram where you can include both AC and DC elements.
Note: when you are working with a particular one-line diagram presentation, display attributes of composite networks and composite motors are saved along with the
one-line diagram presentations, i.e., composite networks are treated the same as the one-line diagram.
To change the ID (name) of a composite network, you can:
1. <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite network symbol from the one-line diagram

2. Open the composite network and double-click on the background where no device exists
3. Double-click on the composite network from the System Manager (under Components, Networks Composite)
You can change the ID to any unique 25-character name.
The following steps are used to move a subsystem (group of elements and connections) from the one-line diagram to a composite network:
1. Select the desired elements, including their connections, by rubber-banding, and <Ctrl>+click.
2. Press Delete to cut the elements into a Dumpster Cell.
3. Activate the composite network by double-clicking on it.
4. Right-click inside the composite network and select Move From.
Adding A Composite Network

This describes how to add a composite network to the one-line diagram. The ID will automatically default to Network1. To change the ID, press <Ctrl>+double-click.
To construct a one-line diagram inside this composite network, double-click on the composite network to bring up a composite network View, which is just like another
one-line diagram. Therefore, the steps required for constructing a composite network are the same as those for constructing the main one-line diagram.
When you open the composite network and it is not connected to any bus in the system, you get a view that indicates there is no external bus connection. When you
open the composite network and it is connected to a bus, you get a view that indicates the connecting bus for the composite network.
The bus-like element seen in the composite network is the starting point for the composite network. This element graphically represents the connecting point of the
composite network to the outside system. This connecting point is not considered as a bus for studies.
In order to move elements from one view to another (for example, from OLV1 to Network1), first select the desired elements, including their connections, from OLV1.
Select Delete to cut the elements into the Dumpster, activate the view you want the elements to be moved into Network1, then click on Move From.
Composite Networks (ETAP 14.0 and higher)
With ETAP 14.0, composite networks have unlimited connection capability, i.e. unlimited external connections can be routed to a nested network. There are no visible
connection pins. The pins are visible when you move the cursor to the edge of the composite network as shown below.
See section Composite Networks for more information regarding composite networks for ETAP 14.0 and higher.

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Fuse Editor Overview

The properties associated with fuses of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor. Fuse protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.
The Fuse Editor contains the following pages of properties with header information.
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected fuse model on each page of the AC Fuse editor.
Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the fuse selected from the library.
Max. kV
This displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected fuse in kV.
Size ID
This displays the selected size ID for the fuse.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified).
Model
This is the model name of the fuse selected from the library.
Speed
This displays the speed classification of the selected fuse.
Short-Circuit data
This displays the short-circuit interrupting kA for the selected fuse size.
Info Page - Fuse Editor

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each fuse. The assigned IDs consist of the default fuse ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of fuses increase. The default fuse ID (Fuse) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a fuse From or To is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be
shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a fuse is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or
reconnect a fuse to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only
connect a fuse to buses that reside in the same view where the fuse resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite
network.
If a fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the fuse to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective
device to the new bus, as shown below where Fuse1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line
presentation, any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified configuration.
Note: Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is
the fuse status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following example, status of a fuse is
shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Real-Time Status
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real time module only.
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either closed or open status. This option is provided to overwrite the actual status received from the real-time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real-time will request confirmation.
Fuse
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Fuse Editor

Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC button option to select that standard. Once the fuse is selected from the Library Quick Pick - Fuse, the standard is set based on the library
entry and is display only.
Rating, ANSI Standard

Click on ANSI standard to enter the ratings for Fuse in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards. When a Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters
shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a fuse from library
Quick Pick will turn the header to blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
kV
Select from drop down list or enter the rated kV rating for the Fuse in kV. When a Fuse is selected, the Rated kV value will be set equal to the Max. kV selected from
library Quick Pick.
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected fuse. Note: the Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from Library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select from drop down list or enter the continuous current rating for the Fuse in amperes. The Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is
selected from library Quick Pick.
Interrupting
Select from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the Fuse in kA. Note: when a Fuse is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA
value for selected fuse size from Library Quick Pick.
Test PF
Enter the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the fuse has been established. When a fuse is selected, the Test PF is set to the Test PF value selected
from library Quick Pick.
Rating, IEC Standard
Click on IEC standard to enter the ratings for Fuse in accordance with the IEC standards. When a Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below
will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a fuse from library Quick Pick
will turn the header to blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
kV
Select a rating from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the Fuse in kV. When a Fuse is selected, the Rated kV value will be set equal to the Max. kV
selected from Library Quick Pick.
Size
Select from drop down list and display the size in amperes for the selected fuse. Note that the Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select from drop down list or enter the continuous current rating for the Fuse in amperes. The Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is
selected from library Quick Pick.
Breaking
Select from the drop-down list or enter the AC breaking for the Fuse in kA. Note: when a Fuse is selected, the breaking value will be set equal to the kA value for
selected fuse size from library Quick Pick.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the fuse in kV.
Test PF
Enter the manufacturer testing power factor in percent. This field is related to Test X/R. When a new value is entered, the Test X/R will be recalculated according to
the following formula accordingly.
When retrieving the data from library, the Test PF is calculated based on Test X/R from the library using the above equation. If the library Test X/R is zero, then the
following logic applies.
For HV Fuses (Above 1kV), Test PF is set to 15% (per IEC 60282-1) and the corresponding Test X/R is calculated.
For LV Fuses (1kV and Below), If the Rated Breaking current from the library is less than or equal to 20 kA, Test PF is set to 30% and the corresponding Test X/R is
calculated.
For the Rated Breaking current in the library greater than 20 kA, Test PF is set to 20% (per IEC 60296-1) and the corresponding Test X/R is calculated.
The above logic applies to the Panel main disconnect and sub circuit IEC Fuse as well when the library data is zero for the Test X/R .
Note: If any data gets modified that was extracted from the library to the editor, the color of Fuse header will change to a dark blue color to indicate that there is a
conflict between the editor and library data.
Test X/R
Enter the manufacturer testing X/R. This field related to Test PF. When a new value is entered, the Test PF will be recalculated accordingly .
Library Quick Pick – Fuse - Tabular

To select a fuse from the library, click the Library button and the Library Quick Pick – Fuse dialog box will appear by default in Tabular format.
In the Tabular format, Manufacturer, Model, Max kV, and Speed together with other fuse model information can be viewed under separate columns next to each other,
representing all available models for selected standard. Selection of any row in this table will show the available sizes for the selected model.
Clicking on any header will open the dialog box for sort, search, and filer based on content of the selected column.
Select a fuse by selecting the row for Manufacturer name, Model, Max kV, Speed, etc. then select the size from displayed available sizes. Click the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: When you select library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name, along with other details, are displayed in the editor header. Should any changes be made in
the retrieved library data, the library header will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the Fuse Library Quick Pick with Tabular format is described below.
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard. The Standard selection in the Library Quick Pick - Fuse (and hence the fuse models displayed) will default
to the selected Standard on the Rating page of fuse editor. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box if desired.
AC/DC
Displays that the Fuse is AC or DC. This option is grayed out and updated based on selected symbol for AC or DC fuse.
Manufacturer Info
The available Manufacturer information for selected row will be displayed on the left as explained below.
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for selected manufacturer. For example, Siemens is the reference manufacturer for ITE.
Link
Displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Model Info
The available Model information for selected row will be displayed on the left as explained below.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected fuse model.
Manufacturer and Model Table

Manufacturer
Manufacturer column in the table displays a list of all fuse manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the row
with manufacturer name or click on header to open the dialog for sort, search, and filer.
Model Name, Max kV, Speed

The Model column displays list of all fuse models for the selected standard. The Model together with Max kV and Speed makes a unique record name in the fuse
library.
CLF
This displays if the selected fuse model is Current Limiting Fuse or not.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Class
This displays the class (E-rated, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This displays the type (Power Fuse, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Size and Short-Circuit Table

Size
Displays a list of all sizes available for the selected row in Manufacturer and Model. To select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight its row.
Note: The sizes listed for the selected fuse model are not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere value as provided by the manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.
Int. kA (ANSI Standard)

This displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA corresponding to each size for the selected ANSI fuse model.
Breaking kA (IEC Standard)

This displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected IEC fuse model.
Library Quick Pick – Fuse - Hierarchy

Click on the Hierarchy button at the bottom left corner of dialog box to change the interface of Library Quick Pick – Fuse from Tabular to tree view format.
From the dialog box, select a fuse by selecting the Manufacturer name and the desired fuse Model, Max kV, and Speed. This represents a unique record. Select the
desired size and short-circuit interrupting kA. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: When you select library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name, along with other details, are displayed in the editor header. Should any changes be made in
the retrieved library data, the library header will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard. The Standard selection in the Library Quick Pick - Fuse (and hence the fuse models displayed) will default
to the selectEd Standard on the Rating page. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box if desired.
AC/DC
Displays that the Fuse is AC or DC. This option is grayed out and updated based on selected symbol for AC or DC fuse.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Names
Displays a list of all AC fuse manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, Siemens is the reference manufacturer for ITE.
Link
Displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
The Model column displays list of all fuse models for the selected standard and fuse manufacturer. The models are displayed in the form of Model – Max kV – Speed,
which forms a unique record name in the fuse library. Select a Model – Max kV – Speed row by clicking it.
Size and Short-Circuit Data

Size
Displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model – Max. kV – Speed record for the fuse. To select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight its row.
Note: The sizes listed for the selected fuse model are not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere value as provided by the manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.
Int. kA (ANSI Standard)

This displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA corresponding to each size for the selected ANSI fuse model.
Breaking kA (IEC Standard)
This displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected IEC fuse model.
Model Info
Class
Type
Brand Name
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
Fuse
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page - Fuse Editor

TCC kA
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system-calculated 3-phase and line-ground short-circuit current values at the connected bus to the element. The values will
be updated when you run Short-Circuit Clipping kA from Star mode.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-Defined option allows the user to enter the short-circuit 3-phase and line-ground kA values. By default, the user-defined kA values are set to
calculated kA where available.
Reference kV
Calculated
User-Defined
TCC Clipping Current

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the fuse curves in Star View are specified in the TCC Clipping Current section.
Sym. rms and Asym. rms

These options are displayed only when the Calculated option is selected. The default is set to Asym. RMS option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the ½
cycle symmetrical current for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for short-circuit Current for IEC standard in the Star
Mode study case editor. The Asym. RMS option will display the corresponding asymmetrical current values.
3-Phase Fault (Show on TCC)

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the 3-phase fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical ½ cycle short-circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined
short-circuit current in kA for IEC standard. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.
Line-Ground Fault (Show on TCC)

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
kA (Line-Ground Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground symmetrical or asymmetrical ½ cycle short-circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-
defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
TCC Minimum Current (Sym)

The minimum short-circuit currents are specified in the TCC Minimum Current (Sym) section.

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in Star view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase 30 cycle short-circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and minimum initial symmetrical or minimum steady
state current based on the selection for minimum short-circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode study case editor. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase
Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star view.
state current based on the selection for minimum short-circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode study case editor. For the User-Defined option, the Line-
Ground Fault kA field is editable.

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the selected fuse. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of
pinned status.
Fuse
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Model Info Page - Fuse Editor

Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected fuse model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available for selected fuse model.
Brand Name
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected fuse model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected fuse model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected fuse model.
Application
Class
Type
Fuse
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Checker Page - Fuse Editor

Edited by
User Name
This field displays the name of the last person who changed any data.
Date
This field displays the date of change. The format for the date can be changed from the Projects Menu in the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
This field displays the name of the person who logs in as a Checker and checks the data.
Date
This field displays date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed from the Projects Menu in the menu bar.
Fuse
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
UD Field 1 (Num. Field)

This is a number field with the default name Num. Field. You can change the name of this field and enter the equipment reference number or any other number here, up
to five digits.
UD Field 2 (Install Date)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Install Date. You can change the name of this field and enter any extra data for this element here, up to 12

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can change the name of this field and enter any extra data for this element here, up to 12

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Next Maint. You can change the name of this field and enter any extra data for this element here, up to 12
UD Field 5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field 5. You can change the name of this field and enter any extra data for this element here, up to 12
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturer’s name for this element here, up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element here, up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
Fuse
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Comment Page
Enter any extra data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of
4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard keys such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste
information.
Fuse
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Contactor Editor Overview
The properties associated with a contactor of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor. The Contactor Editor contains the following pages of
properties.
Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Contactor Editor
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each contactor. The assigned IDs consist of the default contactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of contactors increase. The default contactor ID (CONT) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System
Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a contactor are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a contactor (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. If a terminal of a contactor is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal
connection. To connect or reconnect a contactor to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in
If a contactor is connected to a bus from this editor through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the contactor to a new bus will reconnect the last
existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where CONT3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration Status
You can change the status of a contactor (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line
presentation, any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (contactor, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified configuration.
Note that the status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the contactor to indicate
that this is the contactor status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following example,
status of a contactor is shown closed under Configuration Status Normal and open under Configuration Status Emergency.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the contactor in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the contactor in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Interrupting
Enter the rated short-circuit interrupting of the contactor in kA or select from the list box.
Dropout Time
Enter the dropout time for the contactor in seconds or select from the list box.
Type
Select the application type (contactor or starter) for the contactor. This is used for information purposes only.
Note for Star: When a contactor is plotted on a Star View, it is plotted as a straight line between continuous amps and interrupting kA. This line is plotted at the entered
dropout time. The contactor line is plotted using the base kV of the connected bus, where available.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Reference kV
Calculated
User-Defined
Application / Association
This information is used by ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Contactor
Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Interlock Page - Contactor Editor

In Switching Sequence Management mode, each switching device (i.e: HVCB, LVCB, DPST, SPST, Contactor, or Ground Switch), for either the open or close action,
has a pre-logic condition to determine the eligibility to change its own status either from one state to another state (ex: Close/Open).
Additionally, as each status change is implemented, this will trigger other devices to change status based on the post-action logic.
The following Sections will be covered:
 Pre Switching Logic

 Post Switching Logic
 Miscellaneous buttons and fields
Add
When a row is selected in the “Pre Switching Logic” or the “Post Switching Logic” sections, click this button to add a row beneath the selected row.
Delete
Click the Delete button to remove the selected row in the “Pre Switching Logic” or the “Post Switching Logic” sections.
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Clicking on this function will enable the Precondition Logic that you have entered. The Active function will always be grayed out unless the logic syntax requirements
have been met. Further help with the logic syntax is provided in the tutorial sections.
Action
This is a display only field and the ‘Open’ and ‘Close’ actions are given. If you choose the row with the ‘Open’ action, then ETAP will apply the syntax entered in that
row to the ‘Open’ action. The same procedure is applied with the ‘Close’ action.
Logic Operator (Blank Header)

This field gives you a choice of { AND }, { ( }, { ) }, or { OR } to enter as part of the logic syntax
Type
This drop down menu gives you the choice of the type of device you would like to utilize in your logic.
Note: The Int. function is not utilized in this release of ETAP and will be utilized in a future release.
ID/Tag
When you have chosen the type of device to use in the Pre-Condition Logic, the “ID/Tag” field will drop down to give you the available devices to choose from that
type.
Logic Operator
This field gives you a choice of { = }, or { != }to enter as a part of the logic syntax
Status
This field gives you the option to either set ‘Pos.A’ or ‘Pos.B’ for the Double Throw Single Pole switch, ‘Ground’ or ‘Open’ for the Ground Switch, a numerical value
for the Multi-Meters, or ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ for the rest of the devices.

This field gives you a choice of {AND}, { ( } ,{ ) }, or { OR } to enter as part of the logic syntax
Post Switching Logic

Active
Clicking on this function will enable the Post Switching Logic that you have entered. The Active function will always be grayed out unless the logic syntax
requirements have been met. Further help with the logic syntax is provided in the tutorial sections.
Action
Delay
This field is entered in Milli-Seconds. ETAP will apply this delay before this Post Action logic is entered.

This field gives you a choice of { IF }, { THEN }, { END }, { AND} , { ( } , { ) }, { OR} to enter as part of the logic syntax.
Type
ID/Tag
When you have chosen the type of device to use in the Pre-Condition Logic, the “ID/Tag” field will drop down to give you the available devices to choose for that type.

This field gives you a choice of { = }, { != }, or { → } to enter as part of the logic syntax Status.
Status
If the “Logic Operator” field before this field is set to { = }, { =! }, or { → }, then this field gives you the option to set to either ‘Pos.A’ or ‘Pos.B’ for the Double
Throw Single Pole switch, ‘Ground’ or ‘Open’ for the Ground Switch, a numerical value for the Multi-Meters, or ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ for the rest of the devices.

Logic Description
This is a text field that allows you to describe the logics entered above and you can type up to 255 characters.
Contactor
Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor Overview

The properties associated with high voltage circuit breakers of the electrical power system can be entered in this editor. High voltage circuit breakers include all
breakers above 1000V.
The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains the following pages of properties.
Info Page
Rating Page
Interlock Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the default circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of circuit breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the
System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a high voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after
you click on OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in
If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where CB3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a
one-line presentation, any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.
Note: status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate
that this is the breaker status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following example,
status of a circuit breaker is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open under Open Tie configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Real Time
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time (PSMS).
Scanned
Displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP will request confirmation.
Alert
Select this option for ETAP Real-Time to report an alarm when the breaker opens or closes.
High Voltage Circuit Breaker

Info Page
Rating Page
Interlock Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor

Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option button to select that standard.
Application/Association
Generator CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a generator circuit breaker. When verifying circuit breaker capability in ANSI short-circuit device duty calculation for a
generator circuit breaker, ETAP always uses the maximum through fault current, even if the short-circuit study case may have a different option selected.
In all practical applications, the system short-circuit current contribution is higher than that of the generator. Hence the system source short-circuit current is usually
used to verify the circuit break rating. However, the IEEE Standard C37.013 does not explicitly specify a method for calculating the X/R ratio for computing the
asymmetrical and peak currents from the symmetrical current. In ETAP, the equivalent X/R of the entire system (based on separate X and R networks) is used for
calculating the asymmetrical and peak currents, as required by IEEE Standard C37.010. This process would provide more conservative results if the X/R of the
generator is larger than system X/R. An alternative method is to calculate the equivalent X/R for the system side only, i.e., not including the generator. To do this, set
the generator out of service and run the short-circuit calculation.
A symmetrically rated generator circuit breaker has different rating for dc component of asymmetrical interrupting capability from regular symmetrically rated circuit
breaker. For a generator circuit breaker, the time constant for dc component decay is equal to 133 ms, while for a regular circuit breaker it is 45 ms.
Feeder CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a feeder circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Power Grid CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a utility/power grid circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Load CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a load circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Islanding CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a tie circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding System for correctly identifying subsystems
or islanded systems.
TRV
Clicking on the TRV button will open the Transient Recovery Voltage Editor. The following variables can be entered in this editor:
T1 Enter the rated delay time of transient recovery voltage in micro-seconds.

T2 Enter the rated time to peak value in micro-seconds.
R Enter the rate of rise of the transient recovery voltage in kV/micro-seconds.
Library Info
To access ANSI standard library data, click on the ANSI selection and then click on the Library button. Use the same procedure for accessing IEC standard library data.
As you change the standard from ANSI to IEC, the data fields change accordingly.
To select a circuit breaker from the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library, click on the Library button and the Library Quick Pick - HV Circuit Breaker will appear.
From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit breaker by highlighting the manufacturer name and model/class ID. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected
data from the library and transfer it to the editor. Note that upon selection of library data, the manufacturer name and model number are displayed in the fields directly
below the Library button.
Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library manufacturer name and model ID will change to a dark blue color to indicate that the library data
has been modified.
Rating, ANSI Standard

Click on ANSI to enter high voltage circuit breaker ratings according to the ANSI standards.
Max kV
Enter the rated maximum kV of the high voltage circuit breaker in rms kV or select the rating from the list box.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Standard
Select the high voltage circuit breaker type as Symmetrical or Total rated from the list box.
 Sym Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis
 Tot Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a total current basis
Cycle
Select the rated interrupting time for AC high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.
CB Cycle Description
2 2-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time
3 3-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time
CPT (Contact Parting Time)

You can either select a typical contact parting time from this field, or enter a value for your existing circuit breaker. The typical values are based on the available curves
for multiplication factor from Annex A, IEEE Std C37.010-1999, which are dependent on the Cycle of a circuit breaker. The value you can enter in the CPT field is also
limited by the available curves from the standard. For example, for a 5-cycle circuit breaker, since Figure A.10 in IEEE Std C37.010-1999 only provides curves for 3, 4,
5, and 6 cycles of contact parting time, the range for contact parting time is between 3 and 6 cycles.
Rated Interrupting
Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA or select the rating from the list box.
Note: The rated interrupting kA is applied at maximum voltage. Adjust the rated interrupting kA if the maximum voltage is changed.
Maximum Interrupting
Enter the maximum symmetrical interrupting capability in rms kA or select the rating from the list box.
The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker is calculated by ETAP as:
(Rated Short-Circuit Current) X (Rated Maximum kV)/(Bus Nominal kV)
The limit for this calculated interrupting capability is the rated maximum interrupting capability of the circuit breaker. This value is then used to compare with the
calculated short-circuit duty of the breaker.
Note: The value of the prefault voltage is not used in determining the interrupting capability, i.e., if Vf = 105 percent, the short-circuit duty is increased by 5 percent;
however the interrupting capability is not decreased by 5 percent.
C & L RMS
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in asymmetrical rms kA. This value is equal to 1.6 times the maximum interrupting
capability.
C & L Peak
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in peak kA. This value is equal to 2.7 times the maximum interrupting capability.
Time Constant
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. It displays the time constant for the dc component of asymmetrical capability of a
circuit breaker. The value displayed equals 45 ms for a regular high voltage circuit breaker, based on IEEE Std C37.010-1999, and 133 ms for a generator circuit
breaker based on IEEE Std C37.013-1997.
S Factor
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The displayed S factor reflects the symmetrically rated, high voltage, circuit
breaker’s ability to interrupt fault current with dc component. It is defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over symmetrical interrupting rms rating
of a circuit breaker.
% dc
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The %dc interrupting capability of a circuit breaker is calculated based on the
contact parting time and the time constant of dc component.

Click on the IEC button to enter the ratings of the high-voltage circuit breaker according to the IEC Standards.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the circuit breaker in kV, or select the rating from the list box.
Rated Amp
Enter the rated normal current of the circuit breaker in amperes, or select the rating from the list box.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the circuit breaker in kV. If this voltage limit is exceeded, the arc may re-ignite due to the voltage exceeding the dielectric
capability of the contact gap developed across the open contacts of the breaker and the heat from the previous arc. Note that this limit is not currently used in ETAP.
Making Peak
Enter the rated making capacity of the circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from the list box. The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by
evaluating the maximum possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Breaking
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA or select the rating from the list box.
Time Constant
Enter the rated circuit breaker dc time constant in milliseconds
% dc
Enter the percent dc component of the short-circuit current at the specified minimum delay time.
Ithr
Enter the rated short-time withstand current in kA. In the IEC 62271 standard, the short-time withstand current is defined as Ik
Tkr
Enter the rated duration of short-circuit in seconds. In the IEC 72271 standard, the rated duration of short-circuit is defined as tk
User-defined Tk
Enter the user-defined short-circuit duration in seconds. In the short-circuit study case, the user has an option to use the rated short-circuit duration (Tkr) or the user-
defined duration.
Min Delay
Enter the minimum time delay, including the circuit breaker and relays, in seconds, or select the rating from the list box.
Break Time
Enter the circuit breaker rated break time in seconds.
The Value of Break time shall always be greater than or equal to the value of min delay. If any entered value for either break time or min delay does not follow this
logic, then the value for min delay will be set equal to break time.
FPC Factor
First-Pole-to-Clear (FPC) factor represents the Transient Recovery Voltage (TRV) capability of the breaker and has application for switching overvoltage studies. For
now this is just an informative parameter for the HVCB and Recloser elements in ETAP when IEC standard is selected in editor or library.
Selection of this factor is primarily dependent on the system neutral grounding. Select a value from the drop-down list for the first-pole-to-clear (FPC) factor of the
breaker. The FPC Factor value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick
T Close
Enter the circuit breaker rated close time in seconds

Info Page
Rating Page
Interlock Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Interlock Page - HVCB Editor

In SSM mode, each switching device (i.e: HVCB, LVCB, DPST, SPST, Contactor, or Ground Switch), for either the open or close action, has a pre-logic condition to
determine the eligibility to change its own status either from one state to another state (ex: Close/Open).

Add
Delete
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Action

Type
ID/Tag
type.
Logic Operator
Status


Active
Action
Delay

Type
ID/Tag

Status

Logic Description

Info Page
Rating Page
Interlock Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor Overview

The properties associated with low voltage circuit breakers of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor. Low voltage circuit breakers include power,
molded, and insulated case breakers up to 1000V.
The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains the following pages of properties and the header information for each page.
Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected breaker model and trip device information on each page of the Low Voltage circuit breaker editor.
Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the breaker selected from the library.
Max. kV
This displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected breaker in kV.
Interrupting data
This displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the breaker.
Lock
The lock indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified).
Pole
This displays the breaker pole selected from the library.
Size
Select from drop-down list and display the sizes in amperes that are available for the selected breaker.
Trip Device Manufacturer

This displays the manufacturer name of the selected trip device.
Trip Device Model

This displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Trip Device ID
This displays the trip ID selected from the library.
Info Page - Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consists of the default circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of circuit breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the
System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a low voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after
you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in
the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where CB2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a circuit breaker can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In Service or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of
Service breaker can be edited like an In Service breaker. However, an Out of Service breaker will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service breaker automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service
branch will also be de-energized and become grayed out.
Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a
one-line presentation, any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.
Note: Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate
that this is the breaker status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following example,
status of a circuit breaker is shown closed under Normal configuration and open under Emergency configuration.
Real Time Status

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of the ETAP Real-Time module only.
Scanned
This displays the scanned status (Scanned or Not Scanned) of the switching device.
Pin
Click this button to pin the switching device to either the closed or open status. This option is provided to overwrite the actual status received from the real-time
system.
Control
Click this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real Time will request confirmation.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor
Standard
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Type
Select a type from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. Low voltage circuit breakers include Molded Case, Power, and Insulated Case breakers. Once the
breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick, the LVCB type is set based on the library entry and is display only.
CB and Trip Device library

The low voltage circuit breaker data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library button.
Exclude Trip Device

Check this box to exclude the trip device selection from LVCB Library Quick Pick. The breaker library Quick Pick will be launched without the trip device information.
Note that the Exclude trip device check box is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to unchecked once the Rating page is refreshed.
LV Circuit Breaker – Library Quick Pick

To select a circuit breaker from the Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library click on Library button and the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker window will appear.
From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit breaker by highlighting the Manufacturer name and breaker Model-Max kV-Pole, which is a unique record. Select the
desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the size and the desired trip device for that size. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected
data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note that upon selection of library data, the breaker manufacturer and model and trip device details are displayed on the editor header. Should any changes be made in
the retrieved library data, the library the header will be displayed in blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the breaker library Quick Pick is described below.
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard. Note that the Standard selection in the breaker library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models
displayed) will be defaulted to the selection
AC/DC
Displays that the LV breaker is AC. This option is grayed out and is not available for editing.
Type
Select from the drop down list and display the breaker type. The LV breaker types include Molded Case, Power and Insulated Case breakers.
Note: That the Type selection in the breaker library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed) will be defaulted to the selection made for the breaker type on
the Rating page. The breaker type selection can be changed on the Quick Pick if desired.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of all AC LV breaker manufacturers included in the library for the selected breaker standard and type. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the
manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, Westinghouse is the reference manufacturer for Cutler Hammer.
Link
This displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Lock
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays list of all models for the selected standard, breaker type and breaker manufacturer. The models are displayed in the form of Model – Max
kV – Pole, which forms a unique record name in the breaker library. Select the Model – Max kV – Pole by highlighting it.
Lock
Short-Circuit data
ANSI Short-Circuit data
When ANSI standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA, and test power
factor in %, for all breaker types. The short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and short-circuit data
by highlighting it.
IEC Short-Circuit data
When IEC standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, ultimate breaking capacity in kA (Icu), service breaking capacity in kA (Ics),
making capacity in kA (Icm), short time withstand in kA (Icw), short time in seconds (Tkr), and Tripping time or delay in seconds, for all breaker types. The short-
circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Fused/UnFused
This field displays whether the breaker is fused for unfused.
Size
Size
This displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model, Max. kV, and Pole record for the breaker. To select a size from the Library Quick Pick, highlight the
size.
Lock
Model Info
Additional information about the selected breaker is displayed using the parameters described below.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected breaker model.
Trip Device
Select from drop-down list and display the trip device type for the selected breaker.
Note: a circuit breaker may include different trip device types.
Trip Device Manufacturer

Highlight an item to select the trip device manufacturer from the drop-down list, for the selected trip device type.
Trip Device Model

Highlight an item to select the trip device model from the list, for the selected trip device manufacturer.
ID
Select the desired trip device ID from the list for the selected Model, Max kV and Pole. Note that the ID is labeled as TM ID for Thermal Magnetic trip, Sensor ID for
Solid state trip, MCP ID for Motor Circuit Protector trip, and EM ID for Electro-Mechanical trip.
When the Exclude Trip Device option is selected on the Rating page, the breaker Library Quick Pick is displayed as shown below.
Note: the trip device assignment group is not displayed.

Ratings, ANSI Standard
Click on ANSI standard button and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for LV circuit breaker in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards. When a breaker is
selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size,
changing the values after selecting a breaker from Library Quick Pick will turn the header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the size in amperes for the selected breaker. Note: the Size field will be empty when no breaker is selected from the
breaker Library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes. The Continuous Amp value will be set equal
to the breaker size when a breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Rated kV
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the low voltage circuit breaker in kV. When a breaker is selected, the rated kV value will be set
equal to the applied kV selected from Library Quick Pick.
Test PF
This is the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the circuit breaker has been established. When a breaker is selected, the Test PF is set to the Test PF
value selected from Library Quick Pick.
If a breaker is not selected from the breaker library Quick Pick, the Test PF value changes depending on the breaker type. The values for Test PF used for different
breaker types are described below.
For Molded Case and Insulated Case breakers, per UL 489:
 If Interrupting kA <= 10, Test PF = 50%

 If Interrupting 11<= kA <= 20, Test PF = 30%
 If Interrupting kA > 20kA, Test PF = 20%
For Power Breakers, per ANSI C37:
 If breaker is Fused, Test PF = 20%

 If breaker is Unfused, Test PF = 15%
CB Override
This field is display only and shows the breaker override in kA if the selected breaker Size and Rating ID of the assigned trip device has override amps modeled in
library. The CB Override value displayed in Rating page is different than Instantaneous Override showed in Trip Device page as the former is part of breaker
characteristics while latter is trip device characteristics.
Fused
When a breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the status as selected from the Quick Pick. The value of Test PF will change
appropriately for fused or unfused type, in case of power breakers. Select either fused or unfused by selecting or clearing the checkbox.
Note: The checkbox is displayed only when no breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Interrupting kA
Select from drop down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the low voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the interrupting kA value
will be set equal to the kA value for selected applied kV from library Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short time (Tkr) in seconds. Note that when a breaker is selected, the Tkr value will be set equal to the
Tkr value for the selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick. Default is one second.
ST Withstand
The rated short-time withstand current of a device is the kA value of the short-time withstand provided by the manufacturer that the device (breaker) can carry without
damage, under specified test conditions.
Enter the value of the short-time withstand for the low voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when the associated trip device has a solid state unit with an override
multiplier selected as “CB Withstand,” the rating ST Withstand kA in this field applies as base for override pickup current.

Click on IEC standard and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for LV circuit breaker in accordance with the IEC standards. When a breaker is selected from
library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the value(s)
after selecting a breaker from library Quick Pick will turn the header blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: the Size field will be empty when no breaker is chosen from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Rated Amps
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated ampere rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes. The Rated Amps value will be set equal to the
breaker size when a breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick.
Rated kV
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in kV. When a breaker is selected, the Rated kV value will be set
equal to the applied kV selected from Library Quick Pick.
Min. Delay
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the minimum time delay, including circuit breaker and relay operating time, where available, in seconds. When a breaker
is selected, the Min. Delay value will be set equal to the Tripping time of the circuit breaker selected from Library Quick Pick.
CB Override
This field is display only and shows the breaker override in kA if the selected breaker Size and Rating ID of the assigned trip device has override amps modeled in
library. The CB Override value displayed in Rating page is different than Instantaneous Override showed in Trip Device page as the former is part of breaker
characteristics while latter is trip device characteristics.
Fused
When a breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the status as selected from the Quick Pick. The value of Test PF will change
appropriately for fused or unfused type, in case of power breakers. Select either fused or unfused by selecting or clearing the checkbox.
Note: The checkbox is displayed only when no breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Making
The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of
the circuit breaker.
Select from the drop-down list or enter the peak value of the making capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA.
Note: when a breaker is selected, the making kA value will be set equal to the Icm (making capacity) kA value for selected applied kV from Library Quick Pick.
Ultimate Breaking
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of short-circuit breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated
operational voltage under specified test conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the ultimate breaking capacity for the low voltage circuit breaker in kA.
Note: when a breaker is selected, the ultimate breaking kA value will be set equal to the Icu (breaking capacity) kA value for selected applied kV from the Library
Quick Pick.
Service Breaking
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of service short-circuit breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated
operational voltage under specified test conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the service breaking capacity for the low voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when a breaker is selected,
the service breaking kA value will be set equal to the Ics (service capacity) kA value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short time (Tkr) in seconds. Note that when a breaker is selected, the Tkr value will be set equal to the
Tkr value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Tk
Enter the user defined short-time withstand duration in seconds. This value is used to determine Ith if the Thermal withstand is set to use Tk from the short-circuit study
case.
ST Withstand
The rated short-time withstand current of equipment is the kA value of the short-time withstand provided by the manufacturer that the equipment (breaker) can carry
without damage, under specified test conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short-time withstand for the low voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the
short-time withstand kA value will be set equal to the Icw (ST withstand) value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Trip Device Page - Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor

The trip devices for low voltage circuit breaker include Thermal Magnetic, Solid-state, Motor Circuit Protector and Electro-mechanical types. The Trip device page
allows selection and setting of these trip units.
Trip Device Quick Pick (Library)

The Trip device library Quick Pick is described in this section.
Type
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types.
LVCB Info Box

This displays the circuit breaker information for the selected trip device when circuit breaker is already selected in the LVCB editor. For example, the Library Quick
Pick shown above displays Solid-State Trip units assigned to a Cutler-Hammer DS-416 power breaker. If a breaker is not selected, the breaker information is not
displayed.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of manufacturer names for the selected trip device. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified). A library entry is locked if the lock icon is selected.
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. In the figure above, for example, Cutler Hammer is the reference manufacturer for
Westinghouse.
Link
This displays the manufacturer’s web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
This displays a list of model names for the selected manufacturer. Choose a model by selecting the model name.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for a selected model.
Trip ID
This displays a list of trip IDs (label depending on the trip device type) for the selected model. Select the trip ID by highlighting the ID. For example, the Quick Pick
Library shown above displays Sensor ID 1600 for model RMS 510 Series DS.
LVCB & Trip Device Selection

ETAP provides several options to retrieve circuit breaker and/or trip device from the library. The selection of the circuit breaker on the Rating page affects the trip
device selection and the data displayed on the Trip device Library Quick Pick. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 – Circuit Breaker and Trip Device

When a circuit breaker is selected along with its associated trip unit from the Library Quick Pick on the Rating page of the circuit breaker editor, the Trip Device page
displays the selected trip unit (Manufacturer, Model, and ID).
Since the circuit breaker and its trip units are selected as a combination, the Trip Device Library Quick Pick list will be limited to trip devices assigned to the selected
circuit breaker size. Thus, clicking on the Library button, to access the Trip Device Library Quick Pick will display only the pre-assigned trip units.
Case 2 – Breaker and Trip Device selected

When a circuit breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick on Rating page, with Exclude Trip Device box checked, the Trip Device page will not include
the trip device information. “No Trip device selected” message would appear in the Trip Device page status line.
In order to retrieve the pre-assigned trip device units for the selected circuit breaker, click on the Library button to launch the Trip Device Library Quick Pick. Since the
circuit breaker is previously selected, the Trip Device Library Quick Pick is limited to the trip units assigned to the breaker.
Case 3 – Breaker selected excluding Trip device
When a circuit breaker is not selected from the circuit breaker library Quick Pick on the Rating page, the Trip device page is blank and status line will display: “No trip
device is selected”.
The Trip Device Library Quick Pick can be accessed by clicking on the Library button. Since no circuit breaker is selected, all trip device unit types, manufacturer and
models will be available for selection.
Thermal Magnetic Trip
This section describes the settings available for Thermal Magnetic trip unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the trip device types. In this case, Thermal Magnetic trip type is selected.
TM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the manufacturer name for Thermal Magnetic trip type.
TM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
TM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display TM ID for the selected Thermal Magnetic trip model. Next to TM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is
displayed for the selected TM ID.
Thermal
The Thermal element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed or adjustable trip. The settings available are described below.
Fixed Thermal
Fixed thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve shape that cannot be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the thermal section
displays ‘FIXED’ in the thermal trip field.
Adjustable Thermal
Adjustable thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve shape that can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the thermal
section displays a drop down list of the available adjustable thermal trip in percent of trip device ampere rating. Also, next to the adjustable trip drop down list, the
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The settings available are described below.
Fixed
Fixed magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by fixed minimum and maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic
trip is fixed, the magnetic section displays ‘FIXED’ in the magnetic trip field.
Discrete Adjustable
Discrete adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by discrete values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the
Magnetic group displays a drop-down list of the available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The actual value of
the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable Trip drop-down list.
Continuous Adjustable
Continuous adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by continuously adjustable values between the low and high trip. When
the magnetic trip is continuously adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a Trip field to enter the magnetic setting in multiples trip device ampere rating or in actual
amperes. Next to the Trip field, the actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed. Note: the Trip
field is bounded by the Trip Range.
GFI/RCD
Pickup
Select a RCD selection from the Pickup drop-down list for the selected TM ID. The pickup settings are discrete values.
Time Delay
Select a RCD selection from the drop-down list for the selected TM ID. The settings are discrete values.
Note: GFI/RCD is utilized only by the shock protection calculation.
Low Voltage Solid State trip (LVSST) unit

This section describes the settings available for Low Voltage Solid State trip unit (LVSST) on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Click on the drop-down list to display the trip device types. In this case, the Solid State Trip type is selected.
SST Manufacturer
Click on the drop-down list to display the manufacturer names for the Solid State Trip type.
SST Model
Click on the drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
Sensor ID
Click on the drop-down list to display the Sensor ID for the selected Solid State Trip model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed next to the Sensor ID field
for the selected Sensor ID. If the selected solid state unit is labeled as Frame, then the tag for this field would be “Frame ID” instead.
Rating Plug
The Rating Plug field is displayed only if the selected Sensor ID has rating plugs defined in the library. Rating plugs can be defined in amperes, multiples, or percent.
Click the drop-down list to display the Rating Plug for the selected Sensor ID. The rating plug unit (amperes/multiples/percent) and the actual value of trip in amperes is
displayed next to the Rating Plug field for the selected Rating plug. An example of rating plugs in multiples and the actual trip displayed is shown below.
SST – Phase Settings

The settings available for the Phase element in Solid State are described in this section. The Phase element for Solid State trip has three sections – Long-Time, Short-
Time, and Instantaneous. Each section is defined by its pickup and band settings.
Long -Time
Click on the Long-Time button to enable the Long-Time element for the selected Sensor ID. If the Long-Time element is not selected in the library for the selected
Sensor ID, then long-time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the long-time pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. The actual long-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-Time Pickup
field.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the long-time band setting for the selected Sensor ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. For continuously adjustable long-time band, the range of the band, the multiple at which the band is defined, the calibration reference for band setting
(Average, Minimum or Maximum) and band step are displayed next to the Long-Time Band field.
If the selected LVSST has a long time band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows as a subset of the long time band curve. The time dial setting
can be either discrete or continuous adjustable, and this would shift the long time band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the time dial field is
continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial field.
Short -Time
Click on the Short-Time box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected Sensor ID. If the Short-Time element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor
ID, then short-time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the short-time pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. Next to the Short-Time Pickup field, the actual short-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are
displayed.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the short-time band setting for the selected Sensor ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. For continuously adjustable short-time band, the band step is displayed next to the Short-Time Band field.
If the selected LVSST has a short time band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows as a subset of the short time band curve. The time dial setting
can be either discrete or continuous adjustable, and this would shift the long time band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the time dial field is
continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial field.
IxT
Select the short-time IxT band setting from the IxT drop-down list. The short-time IxT band has IN and OUT settings, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting
shifts the short-time band curve inward (sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the short-time band curve outward (L-shaped).
Long – Time Pickup & Short –Time Pickup Restrictions

If the checkbox for “Block ST Pickup below LT Pickup” is checked in Model Edit Info page of selected solid state trip unit from library, then the short-time pickup
setting cannot be equal or below the long–time pickup. Therefore any short-time pickup selection or data entry which conflicts with said logic, will be automatically
corrected and jumps to first available pickup setting which is greater than long–time pickup to represent actual available setting in breaker.
Similarly, any long-time pickup selection or data entry which conflicts with said logic, will be automatically corrected and jumps to first available pickup setting which
is smaller than short–time pickup.
In above cases, the “Short-Time pickup cannot be below or equal to Long–Time pickup” informative message is displayed in Trip Device section as displayed below.
Instantaneous
Select to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected Sensor ID. If the Instantaneous element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then
Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the instantaneous pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. The actual Instantaneous pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous
pickup field.
Instantaneous Override
Click the Instantaneous box to enable the Instantaneous Override setting. Selecting this option displays the actual instantaneous override in amperes, for the selected
Sensor ID. If the Instantaneous Override is enabled, Instantaneous pickup is grayed out and vice versa.
Ground Tab
The Ground element settings for Solid State trip unit includes the Ground Pickup, Band, and IxT settings. These settings are described below.
Ground
Click the Ground box to enable the ground element setting for the selected Sensor ID. If the Ground element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID,
then Ground tab is not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the ground pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. Next to the Short-Time pickup field, the actual short-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the ground band setting for the selected sensor ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. For continuously adjustable Ground band, the band step is displayed next to the Ground band field, for your convenience.
If the selected LVSST has a ground band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows as a subset of the ground band curve. The time dial setting can
be either discrete or continuous adjustable, and this would shift the ground band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the time dial field is continuously
adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial field.
IxT
Select the ground IxT band setting from the IxT drop-down list. The Ground IxT band has IN and OUT settings, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the
ground band curve inward (sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the ground band curve outward (L-shaped).
Maintenance Tab
The primary application for the Maintenance Mode is, applying the low setting temporarily in order to reduce the short-circuit level specially the arc flash incident
energy level during the initially energizing the system and maintenance as well. So device coordination study is not the main concern for applying
Arc Flash Study would evaluate the Maintenance Mode curves independent from the Standard LVSST curve. In this case, the report will show the FCT and the incident
energy with the Maintenance mode curve and with the Standard curve for the same LVCB. Similarly, the Maintenance Mode curves re handled as separate curves from
the Standard curves in Star Sequence-of-Operation analysis.
Phase
Click the Phase checkbox to enable the phase element setting for the Maintenance Mode.
Ground
If the Ground setting is provided for the Maintenance Mode then the Ground section will be displayed. Click the Ground checkbox to enable the ground element setting
for the Maintenance Mode.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The pickup settings are discrete values. Next to the pickup field, the
actual pickup in amperes is displayed.
Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) unit

This section describes the settings available for Motor circuit Protector unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types. In this case, the Motor Circuit Protector type is selected.
MCP Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Motor Circuit Protector.
MCP Model
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
MCP ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the MCP ID for the selected Motor Circuit Protector model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed next to
the MCP ID field for the selected MCP ID.
Magnetic (Instantaneous)
The Motor Circuit Protector unit can be set as discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The settings available are described below.
Discrete Adjustable
Discrete adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by discrete values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the magnetic section displays
a drop down list of the available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes.
Continuous Adjustable
Continuous adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic is defined by continuously adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is
continuously adjustable, the magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in amperes or multiples. The trip range available for the selected
trip unit is also displayed in multiples or amperes. It should be noted that the Trip field does not accept values below the low set and above the high set.
Electro-Mechanical Trip unit

This section describes the settings available for Electro-Mechanical unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types. In this case, the Electro-Mechanical trip type is selected.
EM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Electro-Mechanical trip device type.
EM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
EM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the EM ID for the selected Electro-Mechanical trip model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed next to
the EM ID field for the selected EM ID.
Long-Time
Long -Time
Click the Long-Time check box to enable the Long-Time element for the selected EM ID. If the Long-Time element is not selected in the library for the selected EM
ID, then long-time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the long-time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. Next to the Long-Time Pickup field, the actual long-time pickup in amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed.
Band
Select the Long-Time band curve label from the Band drop-down list, for the selected EM ID. Each label for the long-time band is associated with a fixed point based
curve that defines the shape of the long-time band curve.
Short-Time
Short -Time
Click the Short-Time check box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected EM ID. If the Short-Time element is not selected in the library for the selected EM
ID, then short-time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the short-time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. The actual short-time pickup in amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time Pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the short-time band setting for the selected EM ID. The band settings can be discrete or continuously adjustable. For
continuously adjustable short-time band, the band step is displayed next to the Short-Time Band field.
When the short-time band is discrete, it can be defined as a horizontal band (minimum/maximum clearing times) or as a point –based curve. The example below shows
discrete short-time band defined as a horizontal band. Note: the field is called Horizontal Band.
Another example with discrete short-time band defined as a curve is shown below. Note that the field is called Band.
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Check the Instantaneous box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected EM ID. Note: if the Instantaneous element is not selected in the library for the selected
EM ID, then instantaneous settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the instantaneous pickup setting for the selected EM ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. The actual instantaneous pickup in amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous Pickup field.

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the trip device curves in Star View are specified in the TCC Clipping Current section.


kA (3-Phase Fault)



kA (3-Phase Fault)


Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the selected trip device. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless
of pinned status.

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Model Info Page - Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor

Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is accessed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Brand Name
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected breaker model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected breaker model.
Application

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Reliability Page
λA
It is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that causes the operation
of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from service. After the
actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted,
however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to service only after repair or
replacement.
λP
It is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the
operation of protection breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore
service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.
µ
It is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR (µ = 8760/MTTR).
FOR
It is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA and λP (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(λA+λP)).
MTTF
It is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on λA and λP ( MTTF = 1.0/(λA+λP) ).
MTTR
It is the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
MR
Library
Source
Displays the source of the selected breaker reliability data.
Type
Displays the Type (Fixed, Metal Clad, etc.) of breaker selected.
Class
Displaysthe class selected for reliability data.
Replacement
Available
rP
It is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Checker Page - Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor

Edited by
User Name
Date
Checked by
User Name
Date

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Interlock Page - LVCB Editor


Add
Delete
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Action

Type
ID/Tag
type.
Logic Operator
Status
This field gives you the option to either set ‘Pos.A’or ‘Pos.B’ for the Double Throw Single Pole switch, ‘Ground’ or ‘Open’ for the Ground Switch, a numerical value


Active
Action
Delay

Type
ID/Tag

Status

Logic Description

Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Reliability Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Recloser Editor Overview

The properties associated with reclosers of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
The Recloser Editor contains the following pages of properties with header information for each page:
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Interlock Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header - Recloser
The header displays the selected recloser model and controller device information on each page of the recloser editor.
Recloser Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the recloser selected from the library.
Recloser Model
This is the model name of the recloser selected from the library.
Recloser Device Type

This displays the recloser type (Electronic, Hydraulic, or HVCB) of the selected model.
Phase Type
This displays the number of phases the selected recloser is designed to protect (Single Phase or Three Phase).
SC Interrupting data
This displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the recloser.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified) depending on whether the icon is selected
Controller Manufacturer
This displays the manufacturer name of the selected controller.
Controller Model
This displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Info Page - Recloser
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each recloser. The assigned IDs consist of the default recloser ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of reclosers increase. The default recloser ID (REC) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a recloser are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a recloser (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry
will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a recloser is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection.
To connect or reconnect a recloser to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the recloser resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a recloser is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the recloser to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where REC2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a recloser can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In Service or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service
recloser can be edited like an In Service recloser. However, an Out of Service recloser will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service recloser automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will
also be de-energized and become grayed out.
Configuration
You can change the status of a recloser (for the selected configuration) by clicking on either the Close or Open option. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-
line presentation, any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, recloser, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.
Note: status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the recloser to indicate that this
is the recloser status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following example, status of a
recloser is shown closed under Normal configuration and open under Emergency configuration.
Real Time Status

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of the ETAP Real-Time module only.
Scanned
This displays the scanned status (Scanned or Not Scanned) of the switching device.
Pin
Click this button to pin the switching device to either the closed or open status. This option is provided to overwrite the actual status received from the real-time system.
Control
Click this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real Time will request confirmation.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Recloser
Standard
Note: Once the recloser is selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Type
Select a type from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. The recloser library includes Recloser–Hydraulic, Recloser–Electronic, and HV Circuit Breaker.
Once the recloser is selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick, the recloser type is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Recloser and Controller Library

The recloser data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library button.
Exclude Controller
Select this option to exclude the controller selection from Recloser Library Quick Pick. The Recloser Library Quick Pick will be launched without the controller
information. The Exclude Controller option setting is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to deselected once the Rating page is refreshed.
Note: this will have no effect if the recloser type is set to Recloser–Hydraulic.
Recloser – Library Quick Pick

To select a recloser from the recloser library click the Library button. ETAP displays the Library Quick Pick - Recloser dialog box. From the Library Quick Pick, select
a recloser by highlighting the Manufacturer name and recloser Model, which is a unique record. Select the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA.
Select the desired controller for that model. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: if the recloser type is Recloser–Hydraulic after selecting the model, the desired coil size needs to selected, followed by the desired applied voltage and short-
circuit interrupting kA. Furthermore, no controller information needs to be selected.
After selection of the library data, the recloser manufacturer, model, and controller details are displayed in the editor header. If any changes have been made in the
retrieved library data, the library header will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The header can also turn into blue if default or calculated values are displayed instead of zero entries in the library. Refer to Ratings section for more details.
The information available in the recloser Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.
Standard
Select either the ANSI or IEC option. The Standard selection in the breaker Library Quick Pick (and hence the recloser models displayed) will default to the selection
made for the standard on the Rating page. The standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of all recloser manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, Asea Brown Boveri is the reference for ABB.
Link
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified). The icon is selected if the entry is locked.
Model
Device Type
Select from the drop-down list the recloser type to display. The recloser device types include Recloser-Hydraulic, Recloser-Electronic, and HV Circuit Breaker. Note:
that the Device Type selection in the Recloser Library Quick Pick (and hence the recloser models displayed) will default to the selection made for the device type on the
Rating page. The device type selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Model Name
The Model group displays a list of all models for the selected standard, manufacturer, and device type. Choose a model by selecting the model name.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected recloser model.
Type
This displays the number of phases the selected recloser model is designed to protect (Single Phase or Three Phase).
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected recloser model.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified). Locked entries have selected lock icons.
Rating
Coil
This displays the available coils for the selected recloser model.
Note: this only appears if the Device Type is set to Recloser-Hydraulic.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified). Locked entries have selected icons.
Note: this only appears next to the Coil ID.
ANSI Short-Circuit Data

When ANSI standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic or Recloser-Electronic, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit
interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA, test X/R, Making kA rms (assymetrical), and Making kA Peak (assymetrical). These short-circuit parameters are
explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the short-circuit data by clicking the row.
When ANSI standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit interrupting current for the
applied voltage in kA, C&L rms, and C&L peak. These short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the
short-circuit data by clicking the row.
IEC Short-Circuit Data

When the IEC standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic and Recloser-Electronic, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit
breaking current for the applied voltage in kA, test X/R, Making kA rms (asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). The short-circuit parameters are
explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the short-circuit data by highlighting it.
When the IEC standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit breaking current for the
applied voltage in kA, Making kA rms (asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). The short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings
Section. Select an applied voltage and the short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Controller
The controller(s) assigned to the selected recloser model, can be chosen by selecting the manufacturer name, controller type, and model. The controller types include
Microprocessor and Static.
Note: This portion of the Recloser Library Quick Pick windows is not visible when the device type is set to Recloser-Hydraulic.
Controller Manufacturer
Highlight an item to select the controller manufacturer from the list.
Controller Type
Select from drop-down list and display the controller type for the selected recloser. Note: Selection is limited according to the controller assigned to the recloser model.
Controller Model
Highlight an item to select the controller model from the list, for the selected controller manufacturer.
Operation Intervals
Select a standard and device type to enter the operating intervals for the recloser in accordance to these selections. When a recloser is selected from Library Quick Pick,
the Time Unit and Interrupting Time fields will be filled in with the values defined in the library. Changing these values after selecting a recloser from Library Quick
Pick will turn the header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified. The Opening Time, Release Delay, and CPT are user-defined and can be
edited without turning the header blue. Note: A relationship of Opening Time + Release Delay = CPT is always maintained, therefore, changing one of these values will
cause the others to be updated.
Time Unit
Select the time unit (Cycle or Millisecond) according to which the Interrupting Time, Opening Time, Release Delay, and CPT are entered. When a recloser is selected
from the Recloser Library Quick Pick the time unit is set based on the library entry and is display only. Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to
HV Circuit Breaker the selection is fixed Cycle.
Interrupting Time
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting time for the recloser. When a recloser is selected from the Library Quick Pick the interrupting time is set
to the value in the library. The interrupting time cannot be less than the opening time. When the standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as Break Time. Note: When
the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is limited to the values in the drop-down list.
Opening Time
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the opening time for the recloser. This is nonessential data and is not stored in the library. The opening time cannot be
greater than the interrupting time. When the standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as Top.
Release Delay
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the release delay for the recloser. This is nonessential data and is not stored in the library. When the standard is set to
IEC this field is labeled as Tr. Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the field is labeled as Tripping Delay.
CPT
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the contact parting time (CPT) for the recloser. This is nonessential data and is not stored in the library. When the
standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as Min. Delay. Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is limited to
the values in the drop-down list.
Ratings
Select a standard and device type to enter the ratings for the recloser in accordance with these selections. When a recloser is selected from Library Quick Pick, all
parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. If any of the Interrupting / Breaking kA, Test X/R, Making kA rms, or
Making kA Peak entries in the selected recloser model from library are zero then these values may be automatically replaced with default or calculated values as
explained in respective sections. Therefore the header will turn blue as the indication of difference between library entries and editor displayed and replaced values.
Similarly, manual changing of the values after selecting a recloser from Library Quick Pick will also turn the header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has
been modified.
When ANSI or IEC is selected as the standard and device type is set to Recloser-Hydraulic or Recloser-Electronic, the rating data will display the rated kV, maximum
continuous amps , impulse withstand rating, Interrupting kA, test X/R, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), short-time withstand kA, and
short-time withstand durations as explained below.
Recloser Ratings – ANSI Standard

Recloser Ratings – IEC Standard
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the recloser in kV. The rated kV value will be set equal to the applied kV defined in the library
when selected from Library Quick Pick.
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the recloser in amperes. The Max. Amp value will be set equal to the value
defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the recloser in kV. The BIL Limit value will be set equal to the value defined
in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Interrupting kA / Breaking kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting / Breaking kA rating for the recloser in kA. When the IEC Standard is selected this field is renamed to
Breaking kA. The Interrupting / Breaking kA value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Test X/R
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the test X/R rating for the recloser. The Test X/R value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected
from the Library Quick Pick.
If Test X/R, Making kA rms, and Making kA Peak are all zero in selected model from library then it will be automatically filled with minimum standard Test X/R based
on below table.
Default Table for Recloser Minimum X/R based on Interrupting Medium type and Interrupting kA
Interrupting
Interrupting kA Minimum X/R Notes
Medium
Oil <= 1.25 8
1.25 < Int. kA <= 2 10
2 < Int. kA <= 4 12
X/R = 14 for 50 Hz and 17 for 60 Hz for a time constant of 45
4 < Int. kA 14 or 17
ms
Vacuum & Gas <= 2 10
2 < Int. kA <= 6 14
X/R = 14 for 50 Hz and 17 for 60 Hz for a time constant of 45
6 < Int. kA 14 or 17
ms
Reference: IEC 62271-11 - 2005 / C37.60 - 2003 Standard
If Test X/R is zero but either of Making kA rms or Making kA Peak have non-zero value in selected model from library then Test X/R will be automatically calculated
and updated.
The calculation is based on below presented equations for either of these non-zero data fields.
Making kA rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA. The Making kA rms value will be set equal to the value
defined in the library selected from the Library Quick Pick.
If Making kA rms is zero in selected model from library then it will be automatically calculated and updated based on Interrupting / Breaking kA and Test X/R values,
using
Similarly, Making kA rms will be calculated based on user entered Interrupting / Breaking kA and Test X/R values if recloser model is not selected from library (editor
header is blank).
Making kA Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA. The Making kA Peak value will be set equal to the value
defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick. Note: if the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this
field will automatically update to a value according to the following equation.
If Making kA Peak is zero in selected model from library then it will be automatically calculated and updated based on Interrupting / Breaking kA and Test X/R values,
using the following equation.
Similarly, Making kA Peak will be calculated based on user entered Interrupting / Breaking kA and Test X/R values if recloser model is not selected from library (editor
header is blank).
ST Withstand / Ithr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the recloser in kA. The ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in
the library when the recloser is selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration for the recloser in seconds. The Tkr value will be set equal to the value defined in the
library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
User-defined Tk (IEC)
Enter the user defined short-circuit duration in seconds. In the short-circuit study case, the user has an option to use the rated short-circuit duration (Tkr) or the user-
defined duration when IEC standard is selected.
When ANSI is selected as the standard and device type is set to HV Circuit Breaker, the rating data will display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse
withstand rating, interrupting kA, close and latch rms, close and latch peak, short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, time constant, percent dc, and S
factor.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the breaker in kV. The rated kV value will be set equal to the applied kV defined in the library
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the breaker in amperes. The Max. Amp value will be set equal to the value
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the breaker in kV. The BIL Limit value will be set equal to the value defined
Rating Std.
Select symmetrical (SYM) or total (TOT) from the drop-down list to specify the breaker type. Select SYM if the breaker is rated on a symmetrical current basis, or TOT
if the breaker is rated on a total current basis. The Rating Std. value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when elected from the Library Quick Pick.
Interrupting kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting kA rating for the recloser in kA. When the IEC standard is selected this field is renamed to Breaking kA.
The Interrupting kA value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
C&L rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the close and latch (C&L) rms asymmetrical rating for the breaker in kA. The C&L rms value will be set equal to the
value defined in the library when a breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick. Note: if the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or C&L
Peak is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the following equations.
When Int kA is entered the C&L rms will be automatically calculated as

C&L rms = Int kA * 1.6
When C&L Peak is entered the C&L rms will be automatically calculated as
C&L rms = C&L Peak * 1.6/2.7
C&L Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the close and latch (C&L) peak asymmetrical rating for the breaker in kA. The C&L Peak value will be set equal to the
value defined in the library when the breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick. Note: if the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or C&L
rms is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the following equations.
When Int kA is entered the C&L Peak will be automatically calculated as

C&L Peak = Int kA * 2.7
When C&L rms is entered the C&L Peak will be automatically calculated as
C&L Peak = C&L rms * 2.7/1.6
ST Withstand
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the breaker in kA. The ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in the
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration in seconds. The Tkr value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when
selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Tk
Enter the user defined short-time withstand duration in seconds. This value is used to determine Ith if the Thermal withstand is set to use Tk from the short-circuit study
case.
Time Constant
This field is available only for a breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. It displays the time constant for the dc component of asymmetrical capability of a circuit
breaker. The value displayed equals 45 ms for a regular high voltage circuit breaker, based on IEEE Std C37.010-1999, and 133 ms for a generator circuit breaker based
on IEEE Std C37.013-1997.
S Factor
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The displayed S factor reflects the symmetrically rated, breaker’s ability to
interrupt fault current with dc component. It is defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over symmetrical interrupting rms rating of a breaker.
% dc
This field is available only for a breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The %dc interrupting capability of a breaker is calculated based on the contact parting
time and the time constant of dc component.
When IEC is selected as the standard and device type is set to HV Circuit Breaker, the rating data will display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse
withstand rating, transient recovery voltage, breaking kA, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), first-pole-to-clear factor, short-time
withstand kA, and short-time withstand duration.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the breaker in kV. The rated kV value will be set equal to the applied kV defined in the library
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the breaker in amperes. The Max. Amp value will be set equal to the value
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the breaker in kV. The BIL Limit value will be set equal to the value defined
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage for the breaker in kV. The TRV value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick
Pick.
Breaking kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the breaking kA rating for the recloser in kA. The Breaking kA value will be set equal to the value defined in the library
when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Making kA rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating for the breaker in kA. The Making kA rms value will be set equal to the value
Making kA Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA peak rating for the breaker in kA. The Making kA Peak value will be set equal to the value defined in the
FPC Factor
First-Pole-to-Clear (FPC) factor represents the Transient Recovery Voltage (TRV) capability of the breaker and has application for switching overvoltage studies. For
now this is just an informative parameter for the HVCB and Recloser elements in ETAP when IEC standard is selected in editor or library.
Selection of this factor is primarily dependent on the system neutral grounding. Select a value from the drop-down list for the first-pole-to-clear (FPC) factor of the
breaker. The FPC Factor value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick
Ithr
IthrSelect a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated short-time withstand currentcurrent in kA. The ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in
the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick. In the IEC 62271 standard, the short-time withstand current is defined as Ik
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated duration of short-circuitcircuit in seconds. The Tkr value will be set equal to the value defined in the library
when selected from the Library Quick Pick. In the IEC 72271 standard, the rated duration of short-circuit is defined as tk
User-defined Tk
Enter the user defined short-circuit duration in seconds. In the short-circuit study case, the user has an option to use the rated short-circuit duration (Tkr) or the user-
defined duration.
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Controller Page - Recloser Editor

The controllers for recloser include Hydraulic, Static, and Microprocessor types. The layout and settings available on this page will depend on the type of controller
selected.
Controller Info
The recloser data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library button.
Controller Type
When a controller is selected from the Library Quick Pick, the controller type is displayed here. The possible values are Hydraulic-Three Phase, Hydraulic-Single
Phase, Electronic-Microprocessor, and Electronic-Static.
Info
Information about the controller and curves can be obtained by clicking on the Info button.
Controller Lib
To select a controller from the controller library click the Controller Lib button. ETAP displays the Library Quick Pick – Electronic Controller dialog box.
Note: This button is hidden when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the drop down list to select the manufacturer of the controller.
Note: The manufacturers in this list are limited to those which have controller models assigned to the recloser selected from the Library Quick Pick. This field is hidden
when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Model
Select a model name from the drop down list to select the model of the controller.
Note: The models in this list are limited to those which are assigned to the recloser selected from the Library Quick Pick. This field is hidden when a hydraulic recloser
is selected.
Control Info
To view further information about the controller selected click on the Info button. ETAP displays the Control Info dialog box. The manufacturer name, model,
controller type, model reference, brand name, catalog number, issue date, description, and application of the controller is displayed. Furthermore, the manufacturer TCC
ID, revision, and notes can be obtained for different curve types available in the model selected.
Controller Info
The controller type, reference, brand name, catalog number, issue date, description, and application of the selected controller model are displayed here.
Type
This displays type of controller selected. Possible values are Electronic-Static, Electronic-Microprocessor, Hydraulic-Single Phase, and Hydraulic-Three Phase.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected controller model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected controller model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected controller model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected controller model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected controller model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected controller model.
TCC Curve Info

The TCC ID, revision, and notes of the curves entered for this model are displayed here.
Note: Any changes made to the curve selection do not affect the selected curve on the main controller page.
Curve Type
Select a curve from the drop-down list to display the TCC ID, revision, and notes for.
TCC ID
This displays the time-current characteristic (TCC) curve ID assigned by the manufacturer for the curve selected.
Revision
This displays the revision date for the curve selected.
Notes
This displays any notes for the curve selected.
Controller – Library Quick Pick

To select a controller from the controller library click the Controller Lib button. ETAP displays the Library Quick Pick – Electronic Controller dialog box. From the
Library Quick Pick, select a controller by highlighting the Manufacturer name, the controller type (microprocessor or static), and Model, which is a unique record. Then
click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: if a recloser is already selected, the manufacturer and model lists will be limited to those assigned to that recloser.
After selection of the library data, the controller manufacturer and model are displayed in the editor header.
The information available in the recloser Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of manufacturer names available for selection. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
Note: If a recloser is already selected this list will be limited to those manufacturers that have a model assigned to the selected recloser.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. In the figure above, for example, Cooper Power Systems is the reference
manufacturer for Cooper.
Link
This displays the manufacturer’s web link or URL address.
Model
Type
Select the controller type, Microprocessor or Static, from the drop-down list to display the models of that particular type.
Note: if a manufacturer does not have a model for a type, that type will not be available for selection.
Model Name
This displays a list of model names for the selected manufacturer and type. Choose a model by selecting the model name.
Note: if a recloser is already selected this list will be limited to those models that are assigned to that recloser.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for a selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected model.
Recloser & Controller Selection

ETAP provides several options to retrieve recloser and/or controller from the library. The selection of the recloser on the Rating page affects the controller selection and
the data displayed on the Controller Library Quick Pick. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 – Recloser and Controller

When a recloser is selected along with its associated trip unit from the Library Quick Pick on the Rating page of the recloser editor, the controller page displays the
selected controller (Manufacturer, Model, and Type).
Since the recloser and its controller are selected as a combination, the Controller Library Quick Pick list will be limited to controllers assigned to the selected recloser.
Thus, clicking on the Controller Lib button to access the Controller Library Quick Pick will display only the pre-assigned trip units. The manufacturer and model drop-
down lists on the controller page will also exhibit the same behavior.
Case 2 – Recloser Only (Exclude Controller)

When a recloser is selected from the recloser Library Quick Pick on the Rating page with Exclude Controller box checked, the Controller page will not include the
controller information. “No controller is selected” message would appear in the Controller page status line.
To retrieve the pre-assigned controllers for the selected recloser, click on the Controller Lib button to launch the Library Quick Pick – Electronic Controller. Since the
recloser is previously selected, the Library Quick Pick – Electronic Controller is limited to the controllers assigned to the recloser.
Case 3 – Controller Only

When a recloser is not selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, the Controller page is blank and status line will display: “No controller is
selected.”
The Library Quick Pick – Electronic Controller can be accessed by clicking on the Controller Lib button. Since no recloser is selected, all controller types,
manufacturers, and models will be available for selection.
When a controller is selected from the Controller Library Quick Pick, the controller page displays the selected controller (Manufacturer, Model, and Type), and status
line will display: “Controller is selected, but recloser is not specified.”
Operation
The settings available in the Operation section of the Controller page are described below.
Level
Electronic (Static or Microprocessor) reclosers can have multiple Time Overcurrent (TOC) and/or High Current (HC) elements that can be simultaneously and
independently set in the library. The Level displays a Drop-down list of the TOC and HC levels that are available for the selected recloser model.
Enabled (checkbox)
This field is displayed if the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor. Check this box to enable the parameters for selected level.
Block TOC by HCHC & combine for this level (checkbox)

This field is displayed only if the selected controller type is Electronic (Static or Microprocessor) and “Independent TOC/HC” checkbox is checked in the Model Info
page of the Electronic Controller Library. Check this box to accomplish the followings if it is available as part of recloser logic.
Block the TOC by HC for the selected level. This logic is applied to all available trip elements for selected level. When checked, the definite delay time of HC will take
over the TOC delay, starting from the HC pickup and the TOC+HC will be combined as a single curve in Star View TCC. The Sequence-Of-Operation and Arc Flash
will calculate the trip time based on the displayed curve and respective bolted or arcing fault currents.
The impact of this checkbox, if any, will be reported in Sequence and Arc Flash Viewer.
For example in the Cooper 4C curve shown below, Block TOC by HC & combine for this level is unchecked in the Recloser Editor. Hence, the TOC and HC curves are
shown as two independent curves.
For the curve shown below, Block TOC by HC & combine for this level is checked. Hence, the TOC and HC curves are combined as one curve.
Sequence
Click on this button to open the Sequence Editor where the number of operations performed on the first enabled curve and the total number of operations for each trip
element can be defined.
Coordination
Click on this button to open the Coordination Editor where there a number of coordination curves that be shown on the Star View.
Note: This button is not available for microprocessor controllers that have more than two levels, and/or have “Enforce same settings for all HC levels” unchecked in the
library.
Sequence
To set the operating sequence of the controller selected click on the Sequence button. ETAP displays the Sequence dialog box. The number of operations on the fast
curve (or first enabled curve) and total number of operations for each trip element can be set here. Furthermore, the reclosing duration, and reset time can also be set
here.
Note: These settings are not part of the library and must be entered properly for Sequence of Operation analysis.
Operation
The number of operations the fast curve or first enabled level and the total number of operations for each trip element are defined here.
Operation 1st TCC

Select an item from the drop-down list for the number of operation(s) on the first enabled level or fast curve. The available values are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. This selection
must be made for each trip element. The value selected will affect the Sequence of Operation analysis. For example, if 2 is selected for phase, then for the first two
operations the phase fast curve will be considered. If 0 is selected then the phase fast curve will be ignored for all operations.
Operation to Lockout
Select an item from the drop-down list for the operation at which the recloser will go to lockout if the specific trip element’s curves are used for tripping. The available
values are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. This selection must be made for each trip element. When running sequence of operation analysis, if any of the trip element’s curves are used
for the operation selected then the controller will go to lockout.
For controllers of type Electronic-Static, Hydraulic-Single Phase, and Hydraulic-Three Phase the number selected for Operation 1st TCC will equal the number of
operations the fast curve will be considered for that trip element. The delayed curve will be considered for the remaining operations until the value selected for
Operation to Lockout is reached. For example if Operation 1st TCC is 1 and Operation to Lockout is 4, then the fast curve will be considered for the first operation, and
the delayed curve will be considered for the second, third and fourth operations.
For controllers of type Electronic-Microprocessor, the number selected for Operations 1st TCC will equal the number of operations the first enabled level will be
considered for that trip element. The second enabled level will be considered once, and so on until the last enabled level is reached which will be considered for any
remaining operations. For example, suppose a microprocessor controller is selected with four levels, and the second, third and fourth levels are enabled. The value
selected for Operation 1st TCC is 1 and Operation to Lockout is 4. The second level will be considered for the first operation, the third level will be considered only for
the second operation, and the fourth level will be considered for the third and fourth operations.
Duration
The time the recloser should remain open between operations, and the time after the fault has been removed the recloser should reset its operations counter are defined
here.
Reclosing Duration #1
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the first operation. This value is reported in the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence of
Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the first operation.
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the second operation. This value is reported in the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence of
Operation Analysis.
Note: this is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the second operation.
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the third operation. This value is reported in the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence of
Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the third operation.
Reset Time
Enter the time in seconds after the fault has been removed the recloser should reset its operations counter.
To see the effect of the Operation and Duration settings on the Sequence of Operation Analysis, consider the following example settings in the Sequence editor shown
below.
When a L-G fault is placed and Sequence of Operation ran on the system with a recloser, the result in normalized view with the phase clearing curves visible in ground
mode is shown below.
Due to the settings in the Sequence editor, the first operation will compare the Phase-Fast and Ground-Fast curves, with the one tripping fastest being used. The recloser
will then experience its first reclosing duration (2 secs). The second operation will compare the Phase-Fast and Ground-Delayed curves, and trip using the fastest curve.
The recloser will then experience its second reclosing duration (2 secs). The third operation will compare the Phase-Delayed and Ground-Delayed curves, and trip on
the faster of the two. The recloser will then experience its third and final reclosing duration (5 secs). The fourth operation will then compare the Phase-Delayed and
Ground-Delayed curves again, and tripping and locking out on the faster of the two. Below is the result in the Sequence Viewer.
Note: During Sequence of Operation Analysis, the fault cannot be removed, hence, the recloser will not reset. Furthermore, other elements upstream or downstream may
trip while the recloser is open, since they still experience the fault.
Coordination
To view coordination curves in the recloser star view click on the Coordination button. ETAP displays the Coordination dialog box. The K Factor, Cumulative
Sequences, or User-Defined coordination curve can be enabled and set from here.
Note: Only one type of coordination curve can be enabled. Coordination Editor is not available for Microprocessor Controllers having more than two levels, or having
“Enforce same settings for all HC levels” unchecked in the library.
K Factor
Coordination between a recloser and fuse links can be achieved by viewing the time-current curves adjusted by a multiplying factor known as the K Factor. The K
Factor coordination curves can be used for source side or load side fuse coordination (Source: Electrical Distribution – System Protection; 2005 - by Cooper Power
Systems). The fast or delayed clearing curve is multiplied by a factor found by considering the number of operations on the first TCC, the total number of operations,
and the reclosing durations.
Note: The coordination curve for phase and ground curves are independent from each other.
Show Load Side

Check this box to calculate and display the coordination curve for load side fuse links. For “Show Load Side” the fast clearing curve will be shifted vertically (time
multiplier) by the applicable K Factor as shown in the table below. The intersection of the coordination curve with fuse minimum melting time curve determines the
maximum coordinating current. The settings which affect the K Factor selected are the number of Operation to Lockout, Operation 1st TCC, and Reclosing Duration #1.
For Operation to Lockout ≠ 0 and Operation 1st TCC > 0, the following K Factors apply:
Reclosing Duration One Fast Operation Two or More Fast Operations

#1 (Cycles) (Operation 1st TCC = 1) (Operation 1st TCC >1)
t < 60 1.25 1.80
60 £ t < 90 1.25 1.35
90 £ t < 120 1.25 1.35
t ³ 120 1.25 1.35
For Operation 1st TCC = 0 or Operation to Lockout = 0 the coordination curve is not displayed in Star View.
Show Source Side

Check this box to calculate and display the coordination curve for source side fuse coordination. For “Show Source Side” the delayed clearing curve will be shifted
vertically (time multiplier) by the applicable K Factor as shown in the table below. The intersection of the coordination curve with fuse minimum melting time curve
determines the maximum coordinating current. The settings which affect the K Factor selected are Operation to Lockout, Operation 1st TCC, and Reclosing Duration.
Note: The reclosing duration used depends on the value of Operation 1st TCC.
For Operation to Lockout = 4, the following K Factors apply:
Column 1 Column 2 Colum 3

Reclosing
No Fast Operations One Fast Operation Two Fast Operations
Duration
(Cycles) (Operation 1st TCC = 0, (Operation 1st TCC = 1, (Operation 1st TCC = 2,
Reclosing Duration #1) Reclosing Duration #2) Reclosing Duration #3)
t < 30 3.7 3.2 2.7
30 £ t < 60 3.5 3.1 2.6
60 £ t < 90 2.7 2.5 2.1
90 £ t < 120 2.2 2.1 1.85
120 £ t < 240 1.9 1.8 1.7
240 £ t < 600 1.45 1.4 1.4
t ³ 600 1.35 1.35 1.35
For Operation to Lockout = 4, the K Factors in Columns 1, 2, and 3 of the above table apply.
For Operation to Lockout = 3, Columns 1 and 2 apply.
For Operation to Lockout = 2, only Columns 1.
For Operation to Lockout < 2, no coordination curve is plotted in Star View.
Cumulative Sequences
The cumulative sequence is defined as the fast and delayed curves multiplied (time shifted) by the number of operations assigned to the respective curves. This will only
be done on the clearing curves. The resulting curves can be displayed individually or summed together to display a total clearing curve. The number of operations
assigned to each curve is defined in the sequence editor.
When “Show Fast and Slow” and/or “Show Total Time (Fast + Slow)” are checked in the Phase Curves section the cumulative sequence coordination curves will
appear for the Phase trip element.
When “Show Fast and Slow” and/or “Show Total Time (Fast + Slow)” are checked in the Ground Curves section the cumulative sequence coordination curves will
appear for the Ground and Sensitive Ground trip elements.
Show Fast and Slow

When “Show Fast and Slow” is checked, two coordination curves will appear in Star. One will be the fast curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it,
the other will be the delayed curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it.
Fast cumulative sequence coordination curve:

Fast curve * Operation 1st TCC
Delayed cumulative sequence coordination curve:

Delayed curve * (Operation to Lockout – Operations 1st TCC)
Show Total Time (Fast + Slow)

When “Show Total Time (Fast + Slow)” is checked, coordination curve will appear in Star. This will be the summation of the fast curve multiplied by the number of
operations assigned to it and the delayed curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it.
Total clearing coordination curve:

(Fast curve * Operations TCC#1) + (Fast curve * (Operations to Lockout – Operations TCC#1))
User-Defined
The user-defined coordination curve is created by defining a current shift, time shift, and constant time adder, which are applied to either the clearing or response curve
of the fast and delayed curves.
The settings entered in the Phase Curves section will be applied to the Phase trip element. The settings entered in the Ground Curves section will be applied to the
Ground and Sensitive Ground trip elements.
Current Multiplier
Enter a value for the current multiplier which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain the coordination curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve
which is the selected curve shifted horizontally (in amps) by the factor entered.
Time Multiplier
Enter a value for the time multiplier which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain the coordination curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve
which is the selected curve shifted vertically (in time) by the factor entered.
Constant Time Adder

Enter a value, in seconds, for the constant time adder which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain the coordination curve. This has the affect of creating a
coordination curve which is the selected curve with the time entered added to it. Note: the constant time adder is applied after the time multiplier.
Apply to Clearing Curve

When selected the coordination curve will be created by applying the settings entered to the clearing curve of the selected speed/level.
Apply to Response Curve

When selected the coordination curve will be created by applying the settings entered to the response curve of the selected speed/level.
Overcurrent Elements
The different elements for the overcurrent function are Phase, Ground, and Sen. Ground (Sensitive Ground). These elements are defined as separate tabs on the
Overcurrent page. The selection of controller determines the overcurrent element tabs that will be displayed.
Phase
The Time Overcurrent, High Current, and High Current Lockout for the Phase trip element can be entered in the Phase element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High
Current operating sequence where applicable can be entered here as well.
Ground
The relay has a Ground element if the device provides ground fault protection. The Time Overcurrent, High Current, and High Current Lockout for the Ground trip
element can be entered in the Ground element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where applicable can be entered here as well.
Sen. Ground
Sensitive Ground elements are typically used for detecting low level ground faults. The Time Overcurrent, High Current, and High Current Lockout for Sensitive
Ground trip element can be entered in the Sensitive Ground element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where applicable can be
entered here as well.
Overcurrent (51) Settings

The Time overcurrent settings available for Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground are described below.
When the selected controller type is Hydraulic-Single Phase or Hydraulic-Three Phase the fast curve, delayed curve, and the coil ID can be assigned to the overcurrent
protection of a trip element.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for selected trip element.
Fast Curve
Select from the drop-down list the fast time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip element.
Delayed Curve
Select from the drop-down list the delayed time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip element.
Coil
Select from the drop-down list the Coil ID for the selected curves.
Note: this is an ID which represents the coils amps and minimum trip amps to use for the curves.
Coil Amps
The coil rating in amps for the selected Coil ID is displayed.
Trip Amps
The minimum trip (or pickup) for the selected Coil ID is displayed. This will be the pickup of the selected fast and delayed curves.
When the selected controller type is Electronic-Static the fast curve, delayed curve, and the trip plug can be assigned to the overcurrent protection of a trip element.
Furthermore, the alternate trip and/or modifiers, if available, can be defined.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for selected trip element.
Fast Curve
Select from the drop-down list the fast time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip element.
Delayed Curve
Select from the drop-down list the delayed time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip element.
Trip Plug
Select from the drop-down list the Trip Plug ID for the selected curves. Note: this is an ID which represents the trip plug amps to use for the curves.
Trip Plug Amps

The minimum trip (or pickup) for the selected Trip Plug ID is displayed. This will be the pickup of the selected fast and delayed curves.
Alternate Trip
Click on this button to open the Alternate Trip editor for the selected trip element where the alternate trip can be selected. Note: this button is hidden if “Alternate Trip”
is unchecked in the library of the selected controller model.
Modifiers
Click on this button to open the Modifiers editor for the selected trip element where the vertical shift multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if
available, can be defined.
When the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor the curve type, trip range, trip, and time dial can be defined for the selected level and trip element.
Furthermore, the alternate trip and/or modifiers, if available, can be defined.
Note: If “Enforce same setting for all TOC levels” is checked in the library then any changes made to the trip range or trip settings in one level will be reflected to all
levels.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for the selected level and trip element.
Curve Type
Select from the drop-down list the time overcurrent curve type for the selected level and trip element.
TCC Group
Select from the drop-down list the TCC group to use. This will limit the curve types to those assigned to the selected group.
Note: If “All” is selected then curve type will contain all curves available in the controller. If a curve is not assigned to any group in the library then when “All” is
selected it will be listed in curve type.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the time overcurrent trip range for the selected curve. The trip range is specified in amperes of the primary current.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the time overcurrent trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. This value represents the
pickup of the recloser curve.
Time Dial
Select and display the Time Dial for the selected curve type. The time dial can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Alternate Trip
Click on this button to open the Alternate Trip editor for the selected level and trip element where the alternate trip can be selected. Note: this button is hidden if
“Alternate Trip” is unchecked in the library of the selected controller model.
Modifiers
Click on this button to open the Modifiers editor for the selected level and trip element where the vertical shift multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response
time, if available, can be defined.
Alternate Trip
To select an Alternate Trip for the selected trip element, click on the Alternate Trip button. ETAP displays the Alternate Trip dialog box. The alternate trip can be
enabled and selected from here. Note: this editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types, and if “Alternate Trip” is
unchecked in the library of the selected Electronic-Static or Electronic-Microprocessor types.
Alternate Trip Rating / Setting

Check this box to enable the alternate trip to be applied to the time overcurrent settings for the selected trip element.
Alternate Trip
Select the Alternate Trip to be applied to the time overcurrent curves for the selected trip element.
Modifiers
To apply Modifiers to the time overcurent curves of the selected trip element, click on the Modifiers button. ETAP displays the Modifiers dialog box. The modifiers can
be enabled, and the vertical shift multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if available, can be defined. Note: this editor is not available for
Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types.
Constant Time Adder
Select or enter the Constant Time Adder, in seconds or cycles, to be applied to the time overcurrent curves of the selected level and trip element. The constant time
adder can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Note: the vertical shift multiplier is applied to the curve first.
Minimum Response Time

Select or enter the Minimum Response Time, in seconds or cycles, to be applied to the time overcurrent curves of the selected level and trip element. The minimum
response time can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Note: the vertical shift multiplier and constant time adder have no affect on this value.
Vertical Shift Multiplier

Select or enter the Vertical Shift Multiplier to be applied to the time overcurrent curves of the selected level and trip element. The vertical shift multiplier can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. Note: the vertical shift multiplier is applied before the constant time adder.
High Current (50) Settings

The High Current settings available for Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground are described below.
Note: if the controller type of the selected controller is Hydraulic-Single Phase or Hydraulic-Three Phase then these settings will not be available.
Note: If “Enforce same setting for all HC levels” is checked in the library then any changes made to the high current setting in one level will be reflected to all levels.
High Current
Check this box to enable the High Current settings for the selected trip element.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current trip range for the selected trip element. The trip range is specified in amperes of the primary current or multiples/percent
of the overcurrent pickup.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the high current trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Delay Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current delay range for the selected trip element. The delay range is specified in seconds or cycles.
Delay
Select or enter the intentional delay for the high current. The delay can be in seconds or cycles, depending on the selection of the delay range. The delay can be in the
form of discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Oper./Lockout
Click on this button to open the High Current Operation / Lockout editor for the selected level and trip element. The operations the high current is considered and the
high current lockout settings can be defined here.
High Current Operation / Lockout

To define the operations the high current is considered for a level and trip element, and the high current lockout settings, click on the Oper.. / Lockout button. ETAP
displays the High Current Operation / Lockout dialog box. Note: this editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types, and
if the selected trip element does not have high current defined.
Active Trip Number to Operate
Enter the operations the high current for the selected level and trip element is to be considered. For example, if 3,4 is entered then the high current for that level and trip
element will be considered for tripping during the third and fourth operations. Note: if this field is blank then the high current will be considered for all operations.
HC Lockout
Check this box to enable the High Current Lockout settings for the selected trip element. Note: the settings entered below affect all levels of the selected trip element.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current lockout trip range for the selected trip element. The trip range is specified in amperes of the primary current or
multiples/percent of the overcurrent pickup.
Lockout Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the high current lockout trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Active Trip Number to Lockout

Select from the drop-down list the operation from which to start considering the high current lockout. For example, if 3 is selected then the high current lockout will be
considered for the third and remaining operations.
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Reliability Page
λA
λA is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that causes the operation
of the primary protection zone around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from service. After the
actively failed component is isolated, the recloser is reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. However, the failed component itself
(and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
λP
λP is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the
operation of reclosers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.
Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of reclosers.
µ
m is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR (µ = 8760/MTTR).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate (unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, λA and λP (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(λA+λP)).
MTTF
MTTF is the mean time to failure in years calculated automatically based on λA and λP (MTTF = 1.0/(λA+λP)).
MTTR
MTTR is the mean time to repair in hours. This is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage and restore the system to its normal operating state.
MR
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Reliability Data dialog box.
Source
This displays the source of the selected recloser reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type (for example, Fixed or Metal Clad) of recloser selected.
Class
This displays the class selected for reliability data.
Replacement
Available
Select this option to enable rP.
rP
rP is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element with a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page - Recloser Editor

TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the trip device curves in Star View are specified in the TCC Clipping Current section.


kA (3-Phase Fault)



kA (3-Phase Fault)


Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the selected trip device. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless
of pinned status.
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Model Info Page - Recloser Editor

Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is accessed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Brand Name
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected breaker model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected breaker model.
Application
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Interlock Page - Recloser Editor


Add
Delete
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Action

Type
ID/Tag
type.
Logic Operator
Status


Active
Action
Delay

Type
ID/Tag

Status

Logic Description
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Checker Page - Recloser Editor
Edited by
User Name
Date
Checked by
User Name
Date
Recloser
Info Page
Rating Page
Controller Page
Reliability Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Remarks Page
The remarks page is common to all element editors.
User-Defined Info

up to five digits.


UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Ground Switch Editor Overview

The properties associated with Ground Switch in the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
The Ground Switch Editor includes the following pages of properties and header information.
Info Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header does not display any information and is always blank.
Info Page - Ground Switch Editor

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Ground Switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default Ground Switch ID plus an integer, starting with the number
one and increasing as the number of Ground Switches increases. The default Ground Switch ID (GroundSwitch) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
bar or from the System Manager.
To
Connection from above the Ground Switch to the element below is displayed in the ‘From’ and the ‘To’ field. If the Ground Switch does not have a connection
downstream, a blank entry will be shown for ‘To’ field
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Ground Switch
Info Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
Date
Checked by
User Name
Date

AC Elements
AC-DC Elements
CSD Elements
DC Elements
Interlock Page - Ground Switch Editor
In SSM mode, each switching device (i.e: HVCB, LVCB, DPST, SPST, Contactor, or Ground Switch), for either the open or close action, has a pre-logic condition to
determine the eligibility to change its own status either from one state to another state (ex: Close/Open).

Add
Delete
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Action

Type
ID/Tag
type.
Logic Operator
Status


Active
Action
Delay

Type
ID/Tag

Status

Logic Description
Ground Switch
Info Page
Checker Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Overload Heater Editor Overview

The properties associated with Overload Heater of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
Note: The editor for a overload heater connected to induction motor, synchronous motor, static load or MOV, can also be accessed from the Cable/Vd page of the
respective Motor/Load Editor.
The Overload Heater Editor includes the following pages of properties and header information.
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit clipping) Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected overload heater Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of the Heater Editor.

Info Page - Overload Heater Editor
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Overload heater. The assigned IDs consist of the default Overload heater ID plus an integer, starting with the number
one and increasing as the number of Overload heaters increase. The default Overload heater ID (OL) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the System Manager.
To
The Overload heater can be connected in between a bus and a load (Motor load, Static load or MOV) only. The connection from the overload heater to the load is
displayed by the ‘To’ field. If the overload heater is not connected to any load, a blank entry will be shown for ‘To’ field. If the overload heater is connected to a load
(directly or indirectly), the ID of the load will be displayed in the ‘To’ field.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Overload Heater
Info Page
Rating Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page - Overload Heater Editor
Library Info
Starter
Displays the starter type for the selected heater model.
FLA Range
Displays the range of full load amperes for the selected heater model.
Type
Displays the type (In-Line or CT) for the selected heater model.
In-line type heater is the type of heater directly connect in the path of flow of the current, when in-line type overload heater is selected, resistance section will be
displayed with ohm, range and % tolerance field which will be used for calculation of load flow and short circuit current.
CT type heater is the type of heater connect to the system through a CT and heater itself is not in the path of flow of the current, when a CT type heater is selected
Resistance field will be hidden and resistance will be ignored in calculation.
Application
Displays the application for the selected heater model.
Heater Unit
Select and display from the drop down list the heater unit for the selected heater model. The heater units available are displayed in the format ‘Heater
ID_Starter_Application_Type (FLA Range)’.
Library
To access the Overload heater library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button displays the Overload heater library Quick Pick. From the Library
Quick Pick, select the Overload heater by highlighting the Manufacturer name, Model name and desired heater unit. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected
data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Library Quick Pick

The information available in the Overload Heater Quick Pick is described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays list of all overload heater manufacturers included in the library. Select a manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available for the selected manufacturer. For example, Rockwell Automation in the reference manufacturer for Allen-
Bradley.
Link
This displays the web link for the selected manufacturer or URL address.
Lock
Model
Model Name
This displays list of available models for the selected manufacturer. Select a model by highlighting model name.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available for selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available for selected model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected model.
Lock
ID
This displays the heater ID for the selected heater unit.
Starter
This displays the starter type for the selected heater unit.
App
This displays the application for the selected heater unit.
Nom. R
This displays the nominal value of resistance for the selected heater unit.
%Tol.
This displays the available tolerance for resistance in percent, for the selected heater unit.
Min Amp
This displays the minimum value of ampere range for the selected heater unit.
Max Amp
This displays the maximum value of ampere range for the selected heater unit.
Resistance
Ohm
Enter the resistance value in ohm for the selected heater unit.
Note: when a heater is selected form the library, the ohm value is set to the nominal value of resistance for the selected heater unit. If a range is available for the
resistance value, then the ohm value entered is bounded by the range displayed.
When no overload heater is selected from the Quick Pick, the ohm field is user-editable and a resistance value can be entered.
Range
Displays the range of the resistance value in the form ‘Min R – Max R’ in ohms for the selected heater unit. If the range is available, then the ohm value entered should
be within the range displayed. This field is non-editable and is blank when no heater is selected from library.
%Tolerance
Enter the tolerance for the resistance in percent.
Note: When a heater is selected form the library, the tolerance value is set to the % Tolerance of the selected heater unit. Changing the tolerance after selecting a heater
from library Quick Pick will turn the header to blue color, to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Thermal Curve
Thermal (Checkbox)
Check to enable the thermal curve data.
Library Curve
Select this option to display the curve data for the selected heater from library. The default selection for thermal curve is set to library curve.
Typical Curve
Select this option to display curve data for typical overload heater curves (Class 10, Class 20, etc.).
Curve
Displays the thermal curve type for the selected overload heater.
If Library Curve is selected, the Curve field is blank when no heater is selected and displays the name of curve, when a heater is selected. In some cases, the name of the
curve is displayed as ‘Not available’, indicating that the curve data is not available for selected heater unit.
If the Typical Curve is selected, the Curve field changes to a list box and you can select a Class 10 or Class 20 curve.
Trip Amps
Display or enter the trip current in amperes for the selected overload heater. The Trip amps field functions as described below.
If no overload heater model is selected from the library, the Trip amps field is editable and you can enter a value of trip current. Default value is 0.
If no overload heater model is selected from the library, and if the heater is connected to a motor/load, then the full load amperes for the connected motor/load is
displayed in the Trip amps field. The field is editable, so the current value can be changed if desired.
If an overload heater is selected from the library, and the Library Curve option is selected, the Trip amps field displays the value of the Trip Amps in the library for the
selected heater unit. Furthermore, the Trip amps field is non-editable or editable, depending on the Fixed or Adjustable option selected in the library for the heater unit.
If an overload heater is selected from the library, and the Typical Curve is selected, the Trip Amps field is editable and you can enter a value of trip current.
Overload Heater
Info Page
Rating Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined
Reference kV
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the OLH curves in STAR View are specified in the TCC Clipping Current section.

cycle symmetrical current for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for Short Circuit Current for IEC standard in the Star

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the 3-phase fault arrow and clip the curve in STAR view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in STAR view.


Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in STAR view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
state current based on the selection for minimum short circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode study case editor. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the line-ground fault arrow in STAR view.
state current based on the selection for minimum short circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode study case editor. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the selected OLH. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of
pinned status.
Overload Heater
Info Page
Rating Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Model Info Page
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected Overload heater model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected Overload heater model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected Overload heater model.
Thermal Unit
This displays the thermal unit type for the selected Overload heater model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected Overload heater model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected Overload heater model.
Overload Heater
Info Page
Rating Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
Date
Checked by
User Name
Date
Overload Heater
Info Page
Rating Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
In-Line Overload Relay Editor Overview

The properties associated with the In-line Overload relay can be entered in this editor. The In-line Overload Relay Editor includes the following pages of properties.
Info Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected In-line overload relay Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of the heater editor.
Info Page - In-Line Overload Relay Editor
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each In-line relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and
increasing as the number of relay increase. The default In-line relay ID (OL) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
Note that In-line Overload Relay and Overload Heater elements use the same default properties.
To
Displays the connected bus.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
In-Line Overload Relay

Info Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Setting Page - In-Line Overload Relay Editor
Device Parameters
Displays the reference parameters for selected or user defined device (equipment / apparatus). These parameters can be used as reference for the relay settings.
Selected Device
Select this option to choose the device from the protection zone(s) which the relay is a member of. The provided list is displayed under the Device ID when the relay is
connected to supported equipment types.
User Defined
Select this option to choose the Type of device from the provided list displayed under the Type. The user defined device parameters fields will be displayed based on
device Type selection for data entry to be used by relay, if applicable.
Device ID
Displayed when the Selected Device option is chosen and shows the list of device IDs from the protection zone(s) which the relay is a member of. The list is displayed
when the relay is connected to supported equipment types.
Type
Displays the equipment type of selected Device ID when Selected Device option is chosen. If User Defined option is selected then the dropdown list displays the
supported equipment types.
FLA
Displays only the FLA (Full Load Amps) of selected device ID when Selected Device option is chosen. If User Defined option is selected then the FLA of selected
equipment type can be entered here.
LRC
Displays only the LRC (Locked Rotor Current in percent) of selected device ID when Selected Device option is chosen and Type is motor (induction or synchronous) or
lump load. If User Defined option is selected then the LRC of selected motor (induction or synchronous) or lump load equipment type can be entered here.
SF
Displays only the SF (Service Factor) of selected device ID when Selected Device option is chosen and Type is motor (induction or synchronous). If User Defined
option is selected then the SF of selected motor (induction or synchronous) equipment type can be entered here.
Relay Library
Library
To access the In-line Overload library data, click on the Library button.
Integrated Curves
Check this box to integrate the Thermal and Instantaneous curves.
Library Quick Pick - Tabular

Clicking the Library button displays the relay library Quick Pick in Tabular format by default. In the Tabular format, Manufacturer, Model, and other relay model
information is displayed under separate columns next to each other, representing all available models.
Clicking on any header will open the dialog box for sort, search, and filer based on content of the selected column.
Select a relay by selecting the row for Manufacturer name, Model, etc. then click OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Manufacturer
Displays all relay manufacturers included in the library or manufacturer names filtered as per selection or search criteria. The Reference and Link of selected
manufacturer is displayed on the left if available.
Model
Displays a list of all relay models included in the library or models filtered as per selection or search criteria. The Reference and Application of selected model is
displayed on the left if available.
Relay Type
Displays the relay type if it is Electronic or Electro-Mechanical. This field is used for Star Auto Evaluation applicable coordination time interval.
Protection Type
Display the applicable type of protection by relay.
Function
This displays all functions associated with selected relay model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected relay model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected relay model.
Lock
Library Quick Pick - Hierarchy

Click on the Hierarchy button at the bottom left corner of dialog box to change the interface of Library Quick Pick – In-Line Relay from Tabular to Hierarchy or tree
view format. In Hierarchy format, select the relay by highlighting the Manufacturer name and Model name. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data
from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays a list of all relay manufacturers included in the library. Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Lock
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer.
Link
Model
Model Name
Displays a list of all relay models or models filtered as per selection criteria, for the selected manufacturer.
Lock
Functions
This displays all functions associated with selected relay model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected relay model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected relay model.
Thermal Settings
The settings for thermal trip unit can be entered in the Thermal element tab.
Thermal
Check the box to enable the parameters for the thermal trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop down list and display the thermal curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop down list and display the trip range for the thermal element. The trip ranges can be specified in amperes.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the Thermal trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Trip Amps
This field displays the relay current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Acceleration Settings
The settings for Acceleration trip unit can be entered in the Acceleration element tab.
Acceleration
Check the box to enable the parameters for the acceleration trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop down list and display the acceleration curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop down list and display the trip range for the acceleration element. The trip ranges can be specified in amperes.
Instantaneous
Trip Range
Select from the drop down list and display the trip range for the selected element. The trip ranges can be specified in amperes.
Trip
Select or enter the element trip setting for the selected trip range. The trip setting can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Trip Amps
This field displays the relay secondary current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Prim. Amps
This field displays the relay primary current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Time Delay
Select and display the Time Delay in seconds or cycles. The time delay can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is
specified in the library, it will be added to the value selected.
Jam (50)
Trip Range
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the trip range for the selected element. The trip ranges can be specified in amperes.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the element trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
Select and display the Time Delay in seconds or cycles. The time delay can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is
specified in the library, it will be added to the value selected.
Ground Settings
Trip Range
Select from the drop down list and display the trip range for the selected element. The trip ranges can be specified in amperes.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the element trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
Select and display the Time Delay in seconds. The time delay can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is specified in the
library, it will be added to the value selected.

Info Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Comment Page
Enter any additional data or comments regarding the condition, maintenance, tests, or studies associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb and the default
size is 4kb. To increase the size of this field, you need to change the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut,

Info Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Single Throw Switch Editor Overview

The properties associated with a single throw switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
The Single Throw Switch Editor contains the following pages of properties.
Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Single Throw Switch Editor

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default switch ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing
as the number of switches increase. The default switch ID (SW) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will
be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To
connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing
protective device to the new bus, as shown below where SPST10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Next to the From and To bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses for your convenience.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Configuration
You can change the status of a switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on Closed or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line
presentation, any subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified configuration.
Note: Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this
is the switch status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations.
In the following example, status of a switch is shown to be closed under Configuration Status Normal and open under Configuration Status Open Tie.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV.
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) or making short-circuit rating of the switch in kA. As the switch does not have an ANSI or IEC standard designation. This value is used
in both ANSI and IEC device duty calculations. In ANSI device duty calculation, it is assumed to be the rated asymmetrical bracing (momentary) rms current in KA.
In IEC device duty calculation, it is assumed to be the rated making peak current in kA.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Real Time Data

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (PSMS).
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device.
Single Throw Switch

Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Reliability Page
Comment Page
Interlock Page - Single Throw Switch Editor


Add
Delete
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Action

Type
ID/Tag
type.
Logic Operator
Status


Active
Action
Delay

Type
ID/Tag

Status

Logic Description
Single Throw Switch

Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Reliability Page
Comment Page
Double Throw Switch Editor Overview

The properties associated with a single pole double throw (DT) switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
The Double Throw Switch Editor contains the following pages of properties.
Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Double Throw Switch Editor
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default switch ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing
as the number of switches increase. The default switch ID (2SW) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the System Manager.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an SPDT switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal
connection.
To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If an SPDT switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last
existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where SPDT10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Unlike SPST switch, the SPDT switch has to be connected to a bus before being connected to loads and branch elements.
Condition
Service
Revision Data.
State
Out of Service. Certain states have fixed service status like Removed, Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Other are out of service states
Configuration
Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the
switch status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following example, status of a switch is
shown to be in position A under Configuration Status Stage 1 and position B under Configuration Status Stage B.
Status
You can change the status of an SPDT switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Position A or Position B. Once a configuration status is selected for a
one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified configuration.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the SPDT switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the SPDT switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) or making short-circuit rating of the switch in kA. As the switch does not have an ANSI or IEC standard designation. This value is used
in both ANSI and IEC device duty calculations. In ANSI device duty calculation, it is assumed to be the rated asymmetrical bracing (momentary) rms current in KA.
In IEC device duty calculation, it is assumed to be the rated making peak current in kA.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Real Time Data

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (Real-Time).
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (Position A or Position B) of the switching device.
Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either Position A or Position B status. This option is provided to allow you to overwrite the actual status received
from the Real-Time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (Position A or Position B) of the device. Real-Time will request confirmation.
Double Throw Switch

Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Interlock Page - Double Throw Switch Editor


Add
Delete
Pre Switching Logic

Active
Action

Type
ID/Tag
type.
Logic Operator
Status
This field gives you the option to either set ‘Pos.A’ or ‘Pos.B’ for the Double Throw Single Pole switch, ‘Ground’ or‘Open’ for the Ground Switch, a numerical value


Active
Action
Delay

Type
ID/Tag

Status

Logic Description
Double Throw Switch

Info Page
Reliability Page
Interlock Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Ground Grid Editor Overview

The properties associated with ground grid design of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor. The ground grid system (GGS) has its own
presentation composed of Top View, Soil View, and 3D View.
To create a GGS presentation, a ground grid must first be added to the One-Line Diagram. Click on the Ground Grid component located on the AC toolbar, and drop the
GGS symbol anywhere on the One-Line Diagram.
Right-click on any location inside the ground grid box, and select Properties to bring up the Grid Editor. The Grid Editor dialog box is used to specify grid information,
grid styles, equipment information, and to view calculation results. Click on the Grid Presentation button to bring up a GGS presentation.
For details refer to Ground Grid Systems Chapter.
Scott-T Transformer Editor Overview

The properties associated with Scott-T transformers of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The Scott-T Transformer Editor includes the following pages of properties:
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Info Page - Scott-T Transformer Editor

Within the Info page, specify the Scott-T transformer ID, In/Out of Service, Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Buses, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and phase type.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of transformers increase. The default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar
or from the System Manager.
Primary, Secondary and Tertiary

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a Scott-T transformer are designated as Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary buses. Primary is the 3-phase connection of the
transformer. Secondary and Tertiary are the secondary connection of Teaser and Main transformer. If the primary, secondary, or tertiary terminal of a
transformer is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list box.
The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster
or in another composite network.
Connection
Displays the transformer phase connection type. Currently Scott-T Transformers are 3 Phase at input and 2 phase at output only. The output phase types can
be T2W, T2WN, T3WN and T3WB. The ground option is available for T2W, T3WN and T3WB.
Condition
Service
The operating condition can be set by clicking on the radio buttons for either In Service or Out of Service. The engineering properties within the editor of an
Out of Service element can be edited like an In Service element; however, an Out of Service element will not be included in any system studies. When the
continuity check is activated, an Out of Service element is automatically color coded with the deenergized color (theme manager). The default color for a
deenergized element is grey.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is independent of the configuration status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Service in Revision Data.
State
State is used to describe the service status of an element. Certain states have flexible service status like As-Built, New, Future, Moved and Modified can be
both In or Out of Service. Certain states have fixed service status like Removed, Warehouse, Abandoned, Repair Shop and Other are out of service states.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Lock / Unlock
Click to lock / unlock the editor properties of the current element. When the editor properties are locked, all engineering data is displayed as read-only except
Scott-T Transformer
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Rating Page
Within the Rating page, specify the Scott-T transformer ratings.
Rating
Prim - Sec kV Rating
Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the Scott-T transformer in kilovolts.
Note: When connecting a transformer to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal to the bus nominal kV. ETAP uses the voltage at the lowest-
numbered swing system as the base voltage and calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. ETAP gives an error message when it detects
Prim - Sec MVA Rating

Enter primary and secondary MVA or kVA ratings of the Scott-T transformer. The MVA rating of the primary winding is the Teaser transformer rating and secondary
is Main transformer rating. The MVA rating is used as the base MVA for all transformer impedances.
Max MVA Capability

These values, if non-zero, are used to calculate the percent overload of the transformer windings. If the maximum MVA capability of the transformer is greater than
zero, the branch will be listed on the overload summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero and this branch will not
be included in the overload summary report.
FLA
This displays the FLA of the primary and secondary windings in amperes.
Connected Bus
This displays the nominal kVs of the connected buses to the primary and secondary windings.
Alert/Sizing
Based on the duty class selection MVAb a, b, c, duration and interval values will be updated. The MVAa, b, c, duration and interval values for each duty class can be
modified in Transformer Duty Classes for ANSI and IEC.xlsx in Tables folder of the ETAP installation folder.
MVAb a, b, c
Critical limit in percent of rated MVA.
Duration
The time duration for which RMS MVA needs to be calculated. Alert and sizing are based on average RMS values for this duration.
Interval
The maximum allowed time between two alerts.
Type/Class
Type
Transformer type is not considered in calculation in the current version.
Duty Class
Select the duty class of the transformer to get MVAb a, b, c, duration and interval values.
Scott-T Transformer
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Impedance Page - Scott-T Transformer Editor

Within the Impedance page, specify the Scott-T transformer impedance and its variation, the tolerance and tap data.
Impedance
Positive Sequence Impedances
These are the positive sequence impedances of Teaser transformer and Main transformer at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the Teaser transformer
MVA and kV ratings as the base values. These values correspond to the nominal positive impedance, which are subject to manufacturer tolerance limits and
tap position.
X/R and R/X Ratios

Enter the transformer X/R ratio. These values are used in ETAP to calculate the transformer winding resistances and reactances from the given percent
impedances.
Z Variation
Enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then the final transformer impedance will be calculated
based on the nominal tap impedance values (entered for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary, secondary, and tertiary
winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at –5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to
calculate the final transformer impedance.
Enter transformer impedance variation at –5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the
transformer impedance due the primary winding tap changes.

Enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position in percent of the transformer impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the
transformer impedance due the primary, winding tap changes.
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value. This value should be zero for an existing transformer with a known
impedance value. For a new transformer with a designated impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer.
The value of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the positive or negative value for all the impedance which will
result in a conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative Positive
Traction Power X
Fixed Tap
Enter the transformer primary tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button for kV tap selection and enter the transformer
tap setting in percent or kV. In either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
ETAP allows modeling a tap off-load (fixed tap) changer on primary side of the transformer. The transformer is treated as a simple circuit impedance for
transformers without voltage taps or where the tap is set at a nominal value (n = 0).
Per Unit Turn Ratio

Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 - %Tap/100
Winding Tap
The Main and Teaser taps are fixed at 50% and 86.6% due to the design of Scott-T transformer.
Scott-T Transformer
Info Page
Rating Page
Impedance Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page

Guide to One-Line Diagram Element Editors in ETAP

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Guide to One-Line Diagram Element Editors in ETAP

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

AC Elements Editor Overview

One-Line Diagram Element Editors

Pointers Manual Connection Pointer Auto Connection

Instrumentation Toolbar Ground Grid Systems

Element Editor Overview

Bus Editor Overview

AC Elements Editor Overview

Info Page - Bus Editor

Recommendations for assigning buses are as follows:

250 feet for high voltage cables

250 feet for high voltage cables

Operating Voltage %V / kV / Angle

Load Diversity Factor

AC Elements Editor Overview

Phase V Page - Bus Editor

Line-to-Line %V, kV, Angle

Operating Voltage (Line-to-Neutral and Line-to-Line)

AC Elements Editor Overview

Load Page - Bus Editor

AC Elements Editor Overview

Motor/Gen Page - Bus Editor

AC Elements Editor Overview

Rating Page - Bus Editor

AC Elements Editor Overview

Arc Flash Page - Bus Editor

Bus Fault Current

Bus Arcing Current(Ia)

Source PD Arcing Current

Fault Clearing Time (FCT)

Grounding (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

Note 3: This field has no effect on the IEEE 1584-2018 method.

Arc Flash Boundary

Bus Fault Current

Bus Arcing Current

Source PD Arcing Current

Fault Clearing Time

Grounding (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

Incident Energy (does not work for IEEE 1584-2018)

Arc Flash Boundary (does not work for IEEE 1584-2018)

PPE Level (does not work for IEEE 1584-2018)

TCC Plot Energy

User-Defined (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

TCC Plot-Calculated or User-Defined Energy (IEEE 1584-2002 only)

TCC Plot-Allowable Energy

TCC Plot-All Energy Categories

TCC Plot Arcing Current

Table 11: Required Parameters for Bus Arc Flash Calculation

AC Elements Editor Overview

Protection Page - Bus Editor

Bus Ampacity / Loading

Connected Transformer Inrush Current

Plot Transformer Inrush Current

Calculated Transformer Inrush Current

User-Defined Transformer Inrush Current

Inrush Curve Table

AC Elements Editor Overview

Global Compliance Rules (Study Case)

Local Compliance Rules

IEEE 519-1992 (VTHD/Max VIHD)

AC Elements Editor Overview

Element Editor Overview

UD Field 1 (Eq. Ref.)